US20030145323A1 - Targeted advertisement using television viewer information - Google Patents
Targeted advertisement using television viewer information Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20030145323A1 US20030145323A1 US10/263,806 US26380602A US2003145323A1 US 20030145323 A1 US20030145323 A1 US 20030145323A1 US 26380602 A US26380602 A US 26380602A US 2003145323 A1 US2003145323 A1 US 2003145323A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- program
- television
- information
- set top
- data
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Granted
Links
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 69
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 69
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims description 175
- 230000008685 targeting Effects 0.000 claims description 77
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 claims description 33
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 claims description 28
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 claims description 22
- 230000002596 correlated effect Effects 0.000 claims description 10
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 claims description 3
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 claims description 3
- 238000011144 upstream manufacturing Methods 0.000 abstract description 8
- 238000012384 transportation and delivery Methods 0.000 description 55
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 47
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 44
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 40
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 description 39
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 38
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 35
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 34
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 25
- 238000004806 packaging method and process Methods 0.000 description 21
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 20
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 19
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 18
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 17
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 16
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 13
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 10
- 230000006837 decompression Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000005236 sound signal Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000013479 data entry Methods 0.000 description 7
- 239000000284 extract Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000007792 addition Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000001737 promoting effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- PWPJGUXAGUPAHP-UHFFFAOYSA-N lufenuron Chemical compound C1=C(Cl)C(OC(F)(F)C(C(F)(F)F)F)=CC(Cl)=C1NC(=O)NC(=O)C1=C(F)C=CC=C1F PWPJGUXAGUPAHP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000003825 pressing Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000004913 activation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000013475 authorization Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 4
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 238000013480 data collection Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000003442 weekly effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 241000207961 Sesamum Species 0.000 description 3
- 235000003434 Sesamum indicum Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 239000002131 composite material Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000000873 masking effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000007619 statistical method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 101710167296 Arginine deiminase 2 Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 206010011878 Deafness Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 101100172132 Mus musculus Eif3a gene Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 2
- 235000013361 beverage Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001351 cycling effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007405 data analysis Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000018109 developmental process Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000008672 reprogramming Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000008054 signal transmission Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000032258 transport Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000013024 troubleshooting Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 241000282575 Gorilla Species 0.000 description 1
- 238000000342 Monte Carlo simulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 101100348848 Mus musculus Notch4 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101100317378 Mus musculus Wnt3 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000767160 Saccharomyces cerevisiae (strain ATCC 204508 / S288c) Intracellular protein transport protein USO1 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000003321 amplification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- ZPUCINDJVBIVPJ-LJISPDSOSA-N cocaine Chemical compound O([C@H]1C[C@@H]2CC[C@@H](N2C)[C@H]1C(=O)OC)C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 ZPUCINDJVBIVPJ-LJISPDSOSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013523 data management Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012217 deletion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037430 deletion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011156 evaluation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010348 incorporation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000010365 information processing Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000010354 integration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 1
- QCAWEPFNJXQPAN-UHFFFAOYSA-N methoxyfenozide Chemical compound COC1=CC=CC(C(=O)NN(C(=O)C=2C=C(C)C=C(C)C=2)C(C)(C)C)=C1C QCAWEPFNJXQPAN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000003595 mist Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001537 neural effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003199 nucleic acid amplification method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008520 organization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012858 packaging process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001105 regulatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011160 research Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005096 rolling process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007665 sagging Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001932 seasonal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012163 sequencing technique Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000638 solvent extraction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000019640 taste Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013519 translation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005303 weighing Methods 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/41—Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
- H04N21/426—Internal components of the client ; Characteristics thereof
- H04N21/42684—Client identification by a unique number or address, e.g. serial number, MAC address, socket ID
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/25—Management operations performed by the server for facilitating the content distribution or administrating data related to end-users or client devices, e.g. end-user or client device authentication, learning user preferences for recommending movies
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04H—BROADCAST COMMUNICATION
- H04H20/00—Arrangements for broadcast or for distribution combined with broadcast
- H04H20/10—Arrangements for replacing or switching information during the broadcast or the distribution
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04H—BROADCAST COMMUNICATION
- H04H60/00—Arrangements for broadcast applications with a direct linking to broadcast information or broadcast space-time; Broadcast-related systems
- H04H60/35—Arrangements for identifying or recognising characteristics with a direct linkage to broadcast information or to broadcast space-time, e.g. for identifying broadcast stations or for identifying users
- H04H60/38—Arrangements for identifying or recognising characteristics with a direct linkage to broadcast information or to broadcast space-time, e.g. for identifying broadcast stations or for identifying users for identifying broadcast time or space
- H04H60/41—Arrangements for identifying or recognising characteristics with a direct linkage to broadcast information or to broadcast space-time, e.g. for identifying broadcast stations or for identifying users for identifying broadcast time or space for identifying broadcast space, i.e. broadcast channels, broadcast stations or broadcast areas
- H04H60/43—Arrangements for identifying or recognising characteristics with a direct linkage to broadcast information or to broadcast space-time, e.g. for identifying broadcast stations or for identifying users for identifying broadcast time or space for identifying broadcast space, i.e. broadcast channels, broadcast stations or broadcast areas for identifying broadcast channels
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04H—BROADCAST COMMUNICATION
- H04H60/00—Arrangements for broadcast applications with a direct linking to broadcast information or broadcast space-time; Broadcast-related systems
- H04H60/61—Arrangements for services using the result of monitoring, identification or recognition covered by groups H04H60/29-H04H60/54
- H04H60/64—Arrangements for services using the result of monitoring, identification or recognition covered by groups H04H60/29-H04H60/54 for providing detail information
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/21—Server components or server architectures
- H04N21/222—Secondary servers, e.g. proxy server, cable television Head-end
- H04N21/2221—Secondary servers, e.g. proxy server, cable television Head-end being a cable television head-end
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/23—Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
- H04N21/235—Processing of additional data, e.g. scrambling of additional data or processing content descriptors
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/23—Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
- H04N21/236—Assembling of a multiplex stream, e.g. transport stream, by combining a video stream with other content or additional data, e.g. inserting a URL [Uniform Resource Locator] into a video stream, multiplexing software data into a video stream; Remultiplexing of multiplex streams; Insertion of stuffing bits into the multiplex stream, e.g. to obtain a constant bit-rate; Assembling of a packetised elementary stream
- H04N21/23608—Remultiplexing multiplex streams, e.g. involving modifying time stamps or remapping the packet identifiers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/23—Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
- H04N21/236—Assembling of a multiplex stream, e.g. transport stream, by combining a video stream with other content or additional data, e.g. inserting a URL [Uniform Resource Locator] into a video stream, multiplexing software data into a video stream; Remultiplexing of multiplex streams; Insertion of stuffing bits into the multiplex stream, e.g. to obtain a constant bit-rate; Assembling of a packetised elementary stream
- H04N21/2362—Generation or processing of Service Information [SI]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/23—Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
- H04N21/238—Interfacing the downstream path of the transmission network, e.g. adapting the transmission rate of a video stream to network bandwidth; Processing of multiplex streams
- H04N21/2381—Adapting the multiplex stream to a specific network, e.g. an Internet Protocol [IP] network
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/23—Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
- H04N21/238—Interfacing the downstream path of the transmission network, e.g. adapting the transmission rate of a video stream to network bandwidth; Processing of multiplex streams
- H04N21/2389—Multiplex stream processing, e.g. multiplex stream encrypting
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/25—Management operations performed by the server for facilitating the content distribution or administrating data related to end-users or client devices, e.g. end-user or client device authentication, learning user preferences for recommending movies
- H04N21/254—Management at additional data server, e.g. shopping server, rights management server
- H04N21/2543—Billing, e.g. for subscription services
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/25—Management operations performed by the server for facilitating the content distribution or administrating data related to end-users or client devices, e.g. end-user or client device authentication, learning user preferences for recommending movies
- H04N21/258—Client or end-user data management, e.g. managing client capabilities, user preferences or demographics, processing of multiple end-users preferences to derive collaborative data
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/25—Management operations performed by the server for facilitating the content distribution or administrating data related to end-users or client devices, e.g. end-user or client device authentication, learning user preferences for recommending movies
- H04N21/258—Client or end-user data management, e.g. managing client capabilities, user preferences or demographics, processing of multiple end-users preferences to derive collaborative data
- H04N21/25866—Management of end-user data
- H04N21/25883—Management of end-user data being end-user demographical data, e.g. age, family status or address
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/25—Management operations performed by the server for facilitating the content distribution or administrating data related to end-users or client devices, e.g. end-user or client device authentication, learning user preferences for recommending movies
- H04N21/258—Client or end-user data management, e.g. managing client capabilities, user preferences or demographics, processing of multiple end-users preferences to derive collaborative data
- H04N21/25866—Management of end-user data
- H04N21/25891—Management of end-user data being end-user preferences
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/25—Management operations performed by the server for facilitating the content distribution or administrating data related to end-users or client devices, e.g. end-user or client device authentication, learning user preferences for recommending movies
- H04N21/262—Content or additional data distribution scheduling, e.g. sending additional data at off-peak times, updating software modules, calculating the carousel transmission frequency, delaying a video stream transmission, generating play-lists
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/25—Management operations performed by the server for facilitating the content distribution or administrating data related to end-users or client devices, e.g. end-user or client device authentication, learning user preferences for recommending movies
- H04N21/262—Content or additional data distribution scheduling, e.g. sending additional data at off-peak times, updating software modules, calculating the carousel transmission frequency, delaying a video stream transmission, generating play-lists
- H04N21/26208—Content or additional data distribution scheduling, e.g. sending additional data at off-peak times, updating software modules, calculating the carousel transmission frequency, delaying a video stream transmission, generating play-lists the scheduling operation being performed under constraints
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/25—Management operations performed by the server for facilitating the content distribution or administrating data related to end-users or client devices, e.g. end-user or client device authentication, learning user preferences for recommending movies
- H04N21/266—Channel or content management, e.g. generation and management of keys and entitlement messages in a conditional access system, merging a VOD unicast channel into a multicast channel
- H04N21/2668—Creating a channel for a dedicated end-user group, e.g. insertion of targeted commercials based on end-user profiles
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/41—Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
- H04N21/422—Input-only peripherals, i.e. input devices connected to specially adapted client devices, e.g. global positioning system [GPS]
- H04N21/42204—User interfaces specially adapted for controlling a client device through a remote control device; Remote control devices therefor
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/41—Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
- H04N21/426—Internal components of the client ; Characteristics thereof
- H04N21/42653—Internal components of the client ; Characteristics thereof for processing graphics
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
- H04N21/431—Generation of visual interfaces for content selection or interaction; Content or additional data rendering
- H04N21/4312—Generation of visual interfaces for content selection or interaction; Content or additional data rendering involving specific graphical features, e.g. screen layout, special fonts or colors, blinking icons, highlights or animations
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
- H04N21/431—Generation of visual interfaces for content selection or interaction; Content or additional data rendering
- H04N21/4312—Generation of visual interfaces for content selection or interaction; Content or additional data rendering involving specific graphical features, e.g. screen layout, special fonts or colors, blinking icons, highlights or animations
- H04N21/4314—Generation of visual interfaces for content selection or interaction; Content or additional data rendering involving specific graphical features, e.g. screen layout, special fonts or colors, blinking icons, highlights or animations for fitting data in a restricted space on the screen, e.g. EPG data in a rectangular grid
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
- H04N21/431—Generation of visual interfaces for content selection or interaction; Content or additional data rendering
- H04N21/4312—Generation of visual interfaces for content selection or interaction; Content or additional data rendering involving specific graphical features, e.g. screen layout, special fonts or colors, blinking icons, highlights or animations
- H04N21/4316—Generation of visual interfaces for content selection or interaction; Content or additional data rendering involving specific graphical features, e.g. screen layout, special fonts or colors, blinking icons, highlights or animations for displaying supplemental content in a region of the screen, e.g. an advertisement in a separate window
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
- H04N21/433—Content storage operation, e.g. storage operation in response to a pause request, caching operations
- H04N21/4331—Caching operations, e.g. of an advertisement for later insertion during playback
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
- H04N21/434—Disassembling of a multiplex stream, e.g. demultiplexing audio and video streams, extraction of additional data from a video stream; Remultiplexing of multiplex streams; Extraction or processing of SI; Disassembling of packetised elementary stream
- H04N21/4344—Remultiplexing of multiplex streams, e.g. by modifying time stamps or remapping the packet identifiers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
- H04N21/434—Disassembling of a multiplex stream, e.g. demultiplexing audio and video streams, extraction of additional data from a video stream; Remultiplexing of multiplex streams; Extraction or processing of SI; Disassembling of packetised elementary stream
- H04N21/4345—Extraction or processing of SI, e.g. extracting service information from an MPEG stream
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
- H04N21/435—Processing of additional data, e.g. decrypting of additional data, reconstructing software from modules extracted from the transport stream
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
- H04N21/438—Interfacing the downstream path of the transmission network originating from a server, e.g. retrieving encoded video stream packets from an IP network
- H04N21/4383—Accessing a communication channel
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
- H04N21/438—Interfacing the downstream path of the transmission network originating from a server, e.g. retrieving encoded video stream packets from an IP network
- H04N21/4385—Multiplex stream processing, e.g. multiplex stream decrypting
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
- H04N21/442—Monitoring of processes or resources, e.g. detecting the failure of a recording device, monitoring the downstream bandwidth, the number of times a movie has been viewed, the storage space available from the internal hard disk
- H04N21/44213—Monitoring of end-user related data
- H04N21/44222—Analytics of user selections, e.g. selection of programs or purchase activity
- H04N21/44224—Monitoring of user activity on external systems, e.g. Internet browsing
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
- H04N21/443—OS processes, e.g. booting an STB, implementing a Java virtual machine in an STB or power management in an STB
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/45—Management operations performed by the client for facilitating the reception of or the interaction with the content or administrating data related to the end-user or to the client device itself, e.g. learning user preferences for recommending movies, resolving scheduling conflicts
- H04N21/4508—Management of client data or end-user data
- H04N21/4532—Management of client data or end-user data involving end-user characteristics, e.g. viewer profile, preferences
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/45—Management operations performed by the client for facilitating the reception of or the interaction with the content or administrating data related to the end-user or to the client device itself, e.g. learning user preferences for recommending movies, resolving scheduling conflicts
- H04N21/454—Content or additional data filtering, e.g. blocking advertisements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/45—Management operations performed by the client for facilitating the reception of or the interaction with the content or administrating data related to the end-user or to the client device itself, e.g. learning user preferences for recommending movies, resolving scheduling conflicts
- H04N21/458—Scheduling content for creating a personalised stream, e.g. by combining a locally stored advertisement with an incoming stream; Updating operations, e.g. for OS modules ; time-related management operations
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/45—Management operations performed by the client for facilitating the reception of or the interaction with the content or administrating data related to the end-user or to the client device itself, e.g. learning user preferences for recommending movies, resolving scheduling conflicts
- H04N21/462—Content or additional data management, e.g. creating a master electronic program guide from data received from the Internet and a Head-end, controlling the complexity of a video stream by scaling the resolution or bit-rate based on the client capabilities
- H04N21/4622—Retrieving content or additional data from different sources, e.g. from a broadcast channel and the Internet
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/47—End-user applications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/47—End-user applications
- H04N21/472—End-user interface for requesting content, additional data or services; End-user interface for interacting with content, e.g. for content reservation or setting reminders, for requesting event notification, for manipulating displayed content
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/47—End-user applications
- H04N21/472—End-user interface for requesting content, additional data or services; End-user interface for interacting with content, e.g. for content reservation or setting reminders, for requesting event notification, for manipulating displayed content
- H04N21/47214—End-user interface for requesting content, additional data or services; End-user interface for interacting with content, e.g. for content reservation or setting reminders, for requesting event notification, for manipulating displayed content for content reservation or setting reminders; for requesting event notification, e.g. of sport results or stock market
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/47—End-user applications
- H04N21/475—End-user interface for inputting end-user data, e.g. personal identification number [PIN], preference data
- H04N21/4755—End-user interface for inputting end-user data, e.g. personal identification number [PIN], preference data for defining user preferences, e.g. favourite actors or genre
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/47—End-user applications
- H04N21/478—Supplemental services, e.g. displaying phone caller identification, shopping application
- H04N21/4786—Supplemental services, e.g. displaying phone caller identification, shopping application e-mailing
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/47—End-user applications
- H04N21/478—Supplemental services, e.g. displaying phone caller identification, shopping application
- H04N21/4788—Supplemental services, e.g. displaying phone caller identification, shopping application communicating with other users, e.g. chatting
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/47—End-user applications
- H04N21/482—End-user interface for program selection
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/60—Network structure or processes for video distribution between server and client or between remote clients; Control signalling between clients, server and network components; Transmission of management data between server and client, e.g. sending from server to client commands for recording incoming content stream; Communication details between server and client
- H04N21/63—Control signaling related to video distribution between client, server and network components; Network processes for video distribution between server and clients or between remote clients, e.g. transmitting basic layer and enhancement layers over different transmission paths, setting up a peer-to-peer communication via Internet between remote STB's; Communication protocols; Addressing
- H04N21/64—Addressing
- H04N21/6405—Multicasting
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/60—Network structure or processes for video distribution between server and client or between remote clients; Control signalling between clients, server and network components; Transmission of management data between server and client, e.g. sending from server to client commands for recording incoming content stream; Communication details between server and client
- H04N21/63—Control signaling related to video distribution between client, server and network components; Network processes for video distribution between server and clients or between remote clients, e.g. transmitting basic layer and enhancement layers over different transmission paths, setting up a peer-to-peer communication via Internet between remote STB's; Communication protocols; Addressing
- H04N21/643—Communication protocols
- H04N21/64307—ATM
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/60—Network structure or processes for video distribution between server and client or between remote clients; Control signalling between clients, server and network components; Transmission of management data between server and client, e.g. sending from server to client commands for recording incoming content stream; Communication details between server and client
- H04N21/65—Transmission of management data between client and server
- H04N21/654—Transmission by server directed to the client
- H04N21/6543—Transmission by server directed to the client for forcing some client operations, e.g. recording
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/60—Network structure or processes for video distribution between server and client or between remote clients; Control signalling between clients, server and network components; Transmission of management data between server and client, e.g. sending from server to client commands for recording incoming content stream; Communication details between server and client
- H04N21/65—Transmission of management data between client and server
- H04N21/654—Transmission by server directed to the client
- H04N21/6547—Transmission by server directed to the client comprising parameters, e.g. for client setup
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/80—Generation or processing of content or additional data by content creator independently of the distribution process; Content per se
- H04N21/81—Monomedia components thereof
- H04N21/812—Monomedia components thereof involving advertisement data
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/80—Generation or processing of content or additional data by content creator independently of the distribution process; Content per se
- H04N21/81—Monomedia components thereof
- H04N21/8146—Monomedia components thereof involving graphical data, e.g. 3D object, 2D graphics
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/80—Generation or processing of content or additional data by content creator independently of the distribution process; Content per se
- H04N21/85—Assembly of content; Generation of multimedia applications
- H04N21/858—Linking data to content, e.g. by linking an URL to a video object, by creating a hotspot
- H04N21/8586—Linking data to content, e.g. by linking an URL to a video object, by creating a hotspot by using a URL
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N5/00—Details of television systems
- H04N5/44—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards
- H04N5/445—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards for displaying additional information
- H04N5/44504—Circuit details of the additional information generator, e.g. details of the character or graphics signal generator, overlay mixing circuits
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N5/00—Details of television systems
- H04N5/44—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards
- H04N5/60—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards for the sound signals
- H04N5/602—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards for the sound signals for digital sound signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/08—Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division
- H04N7/087—Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only
- H04N7/088—Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only the inserted signal being digital
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/08—Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division
- H04N7/087—Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only
- H04N7/088—Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only the inserted signal being digital
- H04N7/0884—Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only the inserted signal being digital for the transmission of additional display-information, e.g. menu for programme or channel selection
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/08—Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division
- H04N7/087—Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only
- H04N7/088—Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only the inserted signal being digital
- H04N7/0887—Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only the inserted signal being digital for the transmission of programme or channel identifying signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/10—Adaptations for transmission by electrical cable
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/10—Adaptations for transmission by electrical cable
- H04N7/102—Circuits therefor, e.g. noise reducers, equalisers, amplifiers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/16—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems
- H04N7/162—Authorising the user terminal, e.g. by paying; Registering the use of a subscription channel, e.g. billing
- H04N7/163—Authorising the user terminal, e.g. by paying; Registering the use of a subscription channel, e.g. billing by receiver means only
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/16—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems
- H04N7/162—Authorising the user terminal, e.g. by paying; Registering the use of a subscription channel, e.g. billing
- H04N7/165—Centralised control of user terminal ; Registering at central
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/16—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems
- H04N7/173—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems with two-way working, e.g. subscriber sending a programme selection signal
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/16—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems
- H04N7/173—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems with two-way working, e.g. subscriber sending a programme selection signal
- H04N7/17309—Transmission or handling of upstream communications
- H04N7/17318—Direct or substantially direct transmission and handling of requests
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/16—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems
- H04N7/173—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems with two-way working, e.g. subscriber sending a programme selection signal
- H04N7/17309—Transmission or handling of upstream communications
- H04N7/17336—Handling of requests in head-ends
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/16—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems
- H04N7/173—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems with two-way working, e.g. subscriber sending a programme selection signal
- H04N7/17345—Control of the passage of the selected programme
- H04N7/17354—Control of the passage of the selected programme in an intermediate station common to a plurality of user terminals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
- H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
- H04M1/57—Arrangements for indicating or recording the number of the calling subscriber at the called subscriber's set
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/41—Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
- H04N21/426—Internal components of the client ; Characteristics thereof
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/47—End-user applications
- H04N21/478—Supplemental services, e.g. displaying phone caller identification, shopping application
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N5/00—Details of television systems
- H04N5/44—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards
- H04N5/445—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards for displaying additional information
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N5/00—Details of television systems
- H04N5/44—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards
- H04N5/445—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards for displaying additional information
- H04N5/45—Picture in picture, e.g. displaying simultaneously another television channel in a region of the screen
Definitions
- the technical field relates to television program delivery systems for providing television programming to consumer homes. More particularly, the technical field relates to a method and apparatus for targeting advertisements to television viewers based on information related to the viewers.
- the TV industry has traditionally marketed and sold its programs to consumers in bulk, such as continuous feed broadcast and long-term subscriptions to movie channels.
- the TV industry is unable to sell its programming in large quantities on a unit per unit basis, such as the ordering of one program. Consumers prefer a unit sales approach because it keeps costs down and allows the consumer to be more selective in their viewing.
- networks manage the program lineup for individual channels. Each network analyzes ratings for television shows and determines the appropriate schedule or program lineup to gain market share and revenue from advertising. Program ratings are determined using a test group of viewers and statistical analysis methods. Since each channel is in competition with every other channel, there is no coordinated effort to organize television programming in a manner that primarily suits the viewers.
- a program controller monitors and controls television terminals in a television delivery system.
- the program controller performs network monitoring and control of television terminals at a central operations center.
- the operations center receives analog and digital program signals and processes the signals to produce digitally compressed program signals that are then relayed to intermediate sites such as cable headend sites or are transmitted directly to the television terminals.
- Each cable headend site is equipped with multiple satellite receiver dishes and a signal processor.
- the program controller manages the configuration of television terminals, controls the broadcast of program signals to the television terminals and processes signals received from the television terminals.
- the program controller monitors, among other things, automatic poll-back responses from the television terminals remotely located at each subscribers' home. The polling and automatic report-back cycle occurs frequently enough to allow the program controller to maintain accurate account and billing information, retrieve programs watched data and monitor authorized channel access.
- information sent from the program controller is stored in RAM within each subscriber's television terminal and may be retrieved upon polling by the program controller. Retrieval may, for example, occur on a daily, weekly or monthly basis.
- the program controller allows the television delivery system to maintain complete information on all programs watched using a particular television terminal.
- the program controller may also send program data to the television terminal for temporary storage.
- the television terminals may store targeted advertisements that are to be played during program breaks for programs airing in the next 24 hours, or in the next week, for example.
- a television terminal data gathering routine allows the program controller to schedule and perform polling of all television terminals operating in the system.
- the software also provides the program controller with a means of processing status reports received from television terminals in response to polling requests.
- a video targeting routine makes use of a viewer's demographic information and viewing habits to determine those advertisements that may be most effective when displayed to that particular viewer. In so doing, the routine generates packages of advertisements targeted towards each viewer, or to groups of viewers.
- an additional routine correlates the programs accessed with pricing information to generate billing reports that can be sent to a given television terminal over the cable distribution network.
- the program controller accommodates other methods of billing and account maintenance, such as through the use of remote billing sites.
- the operations center may employ a multiple channel architecture that includes a program channel and a number of feeder channels to carry alternate programming, such as alternate targeted advertisements.
- the program channel carries a main program, such as a broadcast television show, and accompanying advertisements.
- the feeder channels are ancillary video/audio channels, which are delivered to the television terminal, and which provide primarily alternate commercial and promotional interstitial material during breaks in the main program.
- targeted advertising makes use of the feeder channels to allow the television terminals to remain at the program channel or to be switched to the most appropriate feeder channel at the program break, with appropriateness being based on information known about the demographics and viewing habits of users of the television terminals, for example.
- Careful management of the feeder channels, including their dynamic switching, and control of the advertising airing on the feeder channels at any given time can greatly increase both the advertisers' likelihood of reaching an interested viewer, as well as the likelihood a viewer is interested in a specific advertisement.
- the feeder channels are assigned a series of advertisements, and a switching plan is developed that directs individual television terminals to remain at the program channel or to switch from the program channel to a specific feeder channel upon the occurrence of the program break.
- the process of managing the program and the feeder channels begins with a number of configuration and set-up steps.
- individual television terminal address information is collected at an operations center, which may be a cable headend site or other central control station. This information is required to uniquely identify each television terminal and to associate with that identifier necessary information to aid in the targeting process.
- the television terminal address information may be provided to the operations center upon installation or activation of the television terminal in the viewer's home. Other information may be collected from various sources, including viewer surveys, marketing databases correlated by address or zip code+4, for example.
- television terminal groups are determined. This is needed if the management of information and targeting to individual television terminals is not practical initially, either due to non-availability of information to the appropriate level of detail, or technology to control and deliver messages and advertisements to an individual television terminal.
- target criteria include demographic targeting (age/sex/income) and location, such as Area of Dominant Influence (ADI).
- ADI Area of Dominant Influence
- Each target criteria is then segmented into appropriate groups.
- the ADI may include Los Angles, Calif. and Washington D.C. New target criteria can be added and the groups redefined after their initial establishment.
- each television terminal is assigned to a group based on the information collected about the television terminal's environment. Once the television terminals are assigned to groups, their group assignments are conveyed to the television terminal and stored therein.
- the group assignment information that is stored at the television terminal is able to survive power cycling of the television terminal, and other normal service interruptions. Finally, as groups are modified or group assignments change, the television terminals are notified of the changes. Additionally, the group assignment information is periodically resent to the television terminals to ensure that newly added television terminals and those that have accidentally lost their information are up-to-date.
- a break management engine determines how many feeder channels are available for each program break.
- each program break may contain one or more pods during which a commercial spot or targeted advertisement may be aired. At a minimum, one commercial spot will be available for each pod in a program break (i.e., the spot airing on the same channel as the program).
- the maximum number of spots available for a given program break will depend on the total number of feeder channels available and the alignment of program breaks across all program channels.
- the occurrence of program breaks cannot be predicted in advance of programming airing (e.g., live sports broadcasts). However, for replayed programming, the occurrence of program breaks will be known.
- some programming may be manually edited to insert program breaks at appropriate intervals. The manual placement of program breaks during the program edit process can be used to force program breaks to line up or be staggered across program channels, permitting more predictable program break placements, as necessary.
- a spot placement engine determines the optimum types of spots to be placed based on program break timing and feeder channel availability.
- the output of the spot placement engine includes an ad playbill that is used at the operations center to schedule the commercial spots.
- the spot placement engine takes into account likely viewers of a program, the desirability of available spots to those viewers, targeting criteria, and the number of feeder channels available for each program break.
- the spot being placed on the program channel during the program break serves as the default targeted advertisement (most appropriate to the overall audience) in case the feeder channels are not available for alternate targeted advertising.
- the default targeted advertisement also supports cable systems that either are not configured to provide targeted advertising, or those cable systems that are receiving other programming.
- the television terminal groups that should remain with the program channel, and those that should tune to a particular feeder channel at each program break are determined, based on target criteria of interest. Switching of television terminals to the appropriate feeder channels may be conducted using a detailed switching plan, for example.
- the switching plan is distributed to control points in the system, such as cable headend sites, which are then responsible for the periodic transmission of the switching plans to television terminals. Alternately, the switching plans are distributed directly to the television terminals from the operations center.
- the television terminal After the television terminal receives and stores the switching plan, the television terminal will remain with the program channel or will tune to the appropriate feeder channel during the corresponding program break, if the television terminal is tuned to a program channel that carries programming that cooperates with the multiple channel architecture. The viewer may, at any time, override feeder channel switching by selecting a non-cooperating program channel.
- the television terminal will store information indicating that the switch was made.
- the accumulated switching history information will be collected from the television terminal at a later time for review purposes. For example, upon command from the control points, the television terminal will provide the switching history data to a local (e.g., cable headend) or to a national site.
- the unique television terminal identification information may also be provided with the collected data. As mechanisms become available to identify specific viewers in a household, the system will allow for individual identification information to also be provided with collected data.
- the television delivery system upon collection of the television terminal switching history data, the television delivery system will allow for the return of used television terminal memory space to the television terminals.
- the program controller interacts directly with television terminals or with network controllers located at cable headends.
- the cable headend relies on a network controller to perform key cable system operations.
- the network controller accommodates regional programming needs by working with other cable headend components.
- the network controller also performs the system control functions for the cable system.
- the network controller performs many functions similar to the program controller.
- the network controller is also able to respond to the immediate needs of a television terminal, or a group of television terminals.
- the network controller can modify a program signal received from the operations center before the program signal is transmitted to the television terminal. Therefore, the network controller enables the delivery system to adapt to the specific requirements of individual television terminals when information on these requirements cannot be provided to the operations center in advance. In other words, the network controller is able to perform on the fly programming changes. With this capability, the network controller can handle sophisticated local programming needs such as interactive television services, split screen video, and selection of different foreign languages for the same video.
- the network controller makes use of a number of software routines to perform its major functions.
- the network controller modifies the program control information so that changes and additions in programming and advertisements can be accommodated.
- changes and additions include television terminal access authorizations and de-authorizations, and placement of local targeted advertisements in program breaks.
- all the functions of the program controller are performed locally at the cable headend sites. That is, all functions of the program controller are carried out by the network controller installed at the cable headend.
- program signals are relayed to and information is extracted from the television terminals.
- the television terminals may be digital set top boxes that connect between a cable television delivery system and a television. Alternately, the television terminals may be components of digital television satellite receivers. Finally, the television terminals may be incorporated into the circuitry of the television, thereby eliminating the need for a separate control device attached to the television.
- FIG. 1 is a diagram of the primary components of the television delivery system.
- FIG. 2 is an overview of the television delivery system operations.
- FIG. 2 a is a block diagram of the marketing information routine.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic of the operation of the primary components of the system.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic of the primary components of the Computer Assisted Packaging System (CAP).
- CAP Computer Assisted Packaging System
- FIG. 4 a is a diagram of a multiple channel architecture module.
- FIG. 4 b is a diagram of a configuration set-up system.
- FIG. 4 c is a diagram of an advertisement assignment module.
- FIG. 4 d is a diagram of a feeder channel architecture at a cable headend.
- FIG. 4 e is a diagram of a set top terminal adapted for use with the multiple channel architecture module of FIG. 4 a.
- FIG. 5 is a more detailed schematic of the hardware of the operations center and CAP.
- FIG. 6 a is a chart of the program control information carried by the program control information signal.
- FIG. 6 b shows a bit-wise data format for program control information.
- FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a Delivery Control Processor Unit and a Computer Assisted Packaging Apparatus.
- FIG. 8 is a schematic of the subroutines for the CAP software.
- FIG. 9 is a software flowchart representing CAP operations.
- FIG. 10 is a diagram of the database structure for the databases supporting the operations of the CAP.
- FIG. 11 is a block diagram of the operations center and Master Control Site.
- FIG. 12 is a block diagram of the computer assisted packaging shown in FIG. 11.
- FIG. 13 is a flow chart of the processing occurring at the operations center.
- FIG. 14 is a diagram of the bandwidth allocation for a 750 MHZ system.
- FIG. 15 is a diagram/chart of the compressed channel allocation for the system.
- FIG. 16 is a diagram showing how three cable television systems each with a different bandwidth may use the program delivery system and operations center of the present invention simultaneously.
- FIG. 17 is a diagram showing three different cable headend systems, each system receiving the entire satellite signal and stripping those parts of the signal which cannot be handled by the local cable system.
- FIG. 18 is a diagram showing dynamic change in bandwidth allocation from a typical week day prime time program signal to a Saturday afternoon program signal.
- FIG. 19 is a diagram of the primary components of the cable headend.
- FIG. 20 is a diagram of the cable headend showing the primary components of the network controller.
- FIG. 21 a is a schematic of a basic cable headend having network controller components.
- FIG. 21 b is a schematic of an alternative embodiment of FIG. 6 a.
- FIG. 22 is a detailed diagram of the components of the cable headend.
- FIG. 23 is a diagram of the network controller CPU and its relational components.
- FIG. 24 is diagram of the network control database structure.
- FIG. 25 is a diagram of the relationship between the major software routines.
- FIG. 26 is a block diagram of the software flow chart for the Polling Cycle routine.
- FIG. 27 is a diagram of a sample programs watched matrix.
- FIG. 28 is the software flow chart for the Alternate Advertisement Targeting routine.
- FIG. 29 is the subroutine flow chart for processing programs watched matrices through correlation algorithms.
- FIG. 30 is the subroutine flow chart for determining final groupings of set top terminals.
- FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a sample assignment of advertising channels to set top terminal groups watching particular categories of programs.
- FIG. 32 is a diagram assigning available bandwidth for multiple advertising channels.
- FIG. 33 is a diagram of channel switching hardware.
- FIG. 34 is a diagram of an alternate channel switching hardware.
- FIG. 35 is a diagram of a television terminal incorporating two tuners.
- FIG. 36 is the software flow chart for an alternative to the Alternate Advertisement Targeting routine.
- FIG. 1 shows an expanded television program delivery system 200 that dramatically increases programming capacity using compressed transmission of television program and targeted advertisement signals. Developments in digital bandwidth compression technology now allow much greater throughput of television program signals over existing or slightly modified transmission media.
- the program delivery system 200 shown provides subscribers with a user friendly interface to operate and exploit a six-fold or more increase in current program delivery capability.
- Subscribers are able to access an expanded television program package and view selected programs through a menu-driven access scheme that allows each subscriber to select individual programs by sequencing a series of menus.
- the menus are sequenced by the subscriber using simple alpha-numeric and iconic character access or moving a cursor or highlight bar on the TV screen to access desired programs by simply pressing a single button, rather than recalling from memory and pressing the actual two or more digit numeric number assigned to a selection.
- the subscriber can advance from one menu to the next. In this fashion, the subscriber can sequence the menus and select a program from any given menu.
- the programs are grouped by category so that similar program offerings are found on the same menu.
- a program delivery system 200 in conjunction with a conventional concatenated cable television system 210 , provides television program and control signals to subscribers.
- the program delivery system 200 generally includes (i) at least one operations center 202 , where program packaging and control information are created and then assembled in the form of digital data, (ii) a digital compression system, where the digital data is compressed, combined/multiplexed, encoded, and mapped into digital signals for satellite transmission to the cable headend 208 , and (iii) a set of in-home decompressors that are components of a television terminal.
- the program delivery system 200 transports the digital signals to a cable headend 208 where the signals are transmitted through a concatenated cable television system 210 .
- the received signals may be decoded, demultiplexed, managed by a local central distribution and switching mechanism, combined and then transmitted to the television terminal located in each subscriber's home over the cable system 210 .
- concatenated cable systems 210 are the most prevalent transmission media to the home, telephone lines, cellular networks, fiber optics, Personal Communication Networks and similar technology for transmitting to the home can be used interchangeably with this program delivery system 200 .
- the program delivery system 200 can also communicate with subscribers using a telecommunications system 100 and an Internet 120 .
- the telecommunications system 100 communicates using modems located at the operations center 202 , the cable headend 208 and at the subscribers' homes, for example. Alternately, the telecommunications system may connect directly to the television terminal.
- the Internet 120 may also be directly connected to the television terminal, or may be connected to a separate processor (such as a personal computer, not shown), which in turn connects to the television terminal.
- the functions of the operations center 202 and the cable headend 208 may be combined.
- the operations center 202 may provide program signals directly to the television terminal using either the cable delivery system 210 or a digital satellite delivery system.
- the delivery system 200 has a reception region 207 with an in-home decompression capability. This capability is performed by a decompressor housed within the television terminal.
- the television terminal is a set top terminal 220 that is installed in each subscriber's home.
- the television terminal may be a component of a satellite receiver, or may be incorporated into the circuitry of the television itself. The discussion that follows will refer to the set top terminal 220 . However, it should be understood that any of the television terminals listed above could perform the same functions as the set top terminal 220 .
- the decompressor remains transparent from the subscriber's point of view and allows any of the compressed signals to be demultiplexed and individually extracted from the composite data stream and then individually decompressed upon selection by the subscriber.
- the decompressed video signals are converted into analog signals for television display. Such analog signals include NTSC formatted signals for use by a standard television. Alternately, the digital program signals may be stored in a random access memory (RAM) in the television terminal for later conversion and display. Control signals are likewise extracted and decompressed and then either executed immediately or placed in local storage such as the RAM. Multiple sets of decompression hardware may be used to decompress video and control signals.
- the set top terminal 220 may then overlay or combine different signals to form the desired display on the subscriber's television. Graphics on video or picture-on-picture are examples of such a display.
- a single digital compression standard (e.g., MPEG) may be used for both the program delivery system 200 and the concatenated cable system 210
- the compression technique used may differ between the two systems.
- the signals received by the cable headend 208 must be decompressed before transmission from the headend 208 to the set top terminals 220 .
- the cable headend 208 must recompress and transmit the signals to the set top terminal 220 , which would then decompress the signals using a specific decompression algorithm.
- the video signals and program control signals received by the set top terminal 220 correspond to specific television programs and menu selections that each subscriber may access through a subscriber interface.
- the subscriber interface is a device with buttons located on the set top terminal 220 or on a portable remote control 900 .
- the subscriber interface is a combined alpha-character, numeric and iconic remote control device 900 , which provides direct or menu-driven program access.
- the preferred subscriber interface also contains cursor movement and go buttons as well as alpha, numeric and iconic buttons. This subscriber interface and menu arrangement enables the subscriber to sequence through menus by choosing from among several menu options that are displayed on the television screen.
- the set top terminal 220 generates the menus that are displayed on the television by creating arrays of particular menu templates, and the set top terminal 220 displays a specific menu or submenu option for each available video signal.
- the operations center 202 performs two primary services, packaging television programs, and advertisements, and generating the program control information signal.
- television programs and advertisements are received from external program sources in both analog and digital form.
- FIG. 2 shows an embodiment of the operations center receiving signals from various external sources 212 .
- Examples of the external program sources are sporting events, children's programs, specialty channels, news or any other program source that can provide audio or visual signals. Advertisements are provided by individual advertisers and include commercials, infomercials and promotions that may air during or between airings of television programs.
- the operations center 202 digitizes (and preferably compresses) any program signals received in analog form.
- the operations center 202 may also maintain an internal storage of programs.
- the internally stored programs may be in analog or digital form and stored on permanent or volatile memory sources, including magnetic tape or RAM.
- the operations center 202 packages the programs into the groups and categories, which provide the optimal marketing of the programs to subscribers. For example, the operations center 202 may package the same programs into different categories and menus for weekday, prime-time viewing and Saturday afternoon viewing. Also, the operations center 202 packages the television programs in a manner that enables both the various menus to easily represent the programs and the subscribers to easily access the programs through the menus.
- the packaging of the digital signals is typically performed at the operations center 202 by computer assisted packaging equipment (CAP).
- the CAP system normally includes at least one computer monitor, keyboard, mouse, and standard video editing equipment.
- a programmer packages the signals by entering certain information into the CAP. This information includes the date, time slot, and program category of the various programs.
- the programmer and the CAP utilize demographic data and ratings in performing the packaging tasks. Extracts of customer purchases will be provided to the Operations Center 202 . These extracts of information will be formatted and correlated with customer demographics for marketing purposes by the Marketing Information Interface (MII) 702 .
- the MII 702 is shown in FIG. 2 a.
- the Marketing Information Interface (MII) 702 subroutine interfaces the processing and editing subroutines with marketing data.
- This interface regularly receives programs watched information from billing sites 720 , cable headends 208 , or set top terminals 220 .
- other marketing information 722 such as the demographics of viewers during certain time periods may be received by the MII 702 .
- the MII 702 also uses algorithms 724 to analyze the program watched information and marketing data 720 , 722 , and provides the analyzed information to the processing and editing subroutines.
- the process program line-up subroutine 730 uses information from the MII 704 and Packager Data Entry Interface (PDEI) 700 to develop a program line-up. Algorithms are used to assign programs in time slots.
- PDEI Packager Data Entry Interface
- the operations center 202 may also insert directions for filling local available program time in the packaged signal to enable local cable and television companies to fill the program time with local advertising and/or local programming. Consequently, the local cable headends are not constrained to show only programs transmitted from the operations center 202 .
- the programmer selects the various programs from a pool of available programs and inputs the requisite information
- the programmer with assistance from the CAP, can select the price and allocate transponder space for the various programs.
- the CAP displays draft menus or program schedules that correspond to the entries of the programmer.
- the CAP may also graphically display allocation of transponder space.
- the programmer may edit the menus and transponder allocation several times until satisfied with the programming schedule. During the editing, the programmer may direct the exact location of any program name on a menu with simple commands to the CAP.
- the CAP may be used to package advertisements, although the process, which will be described later, may differ from that used for television programs.
- the packaging process also accounts for any groupings by satellite transponder, which are necessary.
- the operations center 202 may send different groups of programs to different cable headends 208 and/or set top terminals 220 .
- One way the operations center 202 may accomplish this task is to send different program packages to each transponder.
- Each transponder, or set of transponders, then relays a specific program package to specific cable headends 208 and/or set top terminals 220 .
- the allocation of transponder space is an important task performed by the operations center 202 .
- the operations center 202 may also insert directions for filling local available program time in the packaged signal to enable local cable and television companies to fill the program time with local advertising and/or local programming. Consequently, the local cable headends 208 are not constrained to show only programs transmitted from the operations center 202 . New set top converters will incorporate both digital and analog channels. Therefore, the cable headend 208 may combine analog signals with the digital signals prior to transmitting the program signals to the set top terminals 220 .
- the CAP After the CAP packages the programs, it creates a program control information signal to be delivered with the program package to the cable headend 208 and/or set top terminal 220 .
- the program control information signal contains a description of the contents of the program package, commands to be sent to the cable headend 208 and/or set top terminal 220 , and other information relevant to the signal transmission.
- the operations center 202 employs digital compression techniques to increase existing satellite transponder capacity by at least a 4:1 ratio, resulting in a four-fold increase in program delivery capability.
- the algorithms generally use one or more of three basic digital compression techniques: (1) within-frame (intraframe) compression, (2) frame-to-frame (interframe) compression, and (3) within carrier compression.
- the MPEG 2 compression method is used. After digital compression, the signals are combined (multiplexed) and encoded. The combined signal is subsequently transmitted to various uplink sites 204 .
- the uplink sites 204 may either be located in the same geographical place or may be located remotely from the operations center 202 .
- the signal may be multiplexed with other signals, modulated, up converted and amplified for transmission over satellite.
- Multiple cable headends 208 may receive such transmissions.
- the delivery system 200 may also contain multiple operations centers.
- the preferred method for using multiple operations centers is to designate one of the operations centers as a master operations center and to designate the remaining operations centers as slave operations centers.
- the master operations center coordinates various functions among the slave operations centers such as synchronization of simultaneous transmissions and distributes the operations workload efficiently.
- the cable headend 208 receives and further processes the signals before they are relayed to each set top terminal 220 .
- Each cable headend site is generally equipped with multiple satellite receiver dishes. Each dish is capable of handling multiple transponder signals from a single satellite and sometimes from multiple satellites.
- the cable headend 208 performs two primary functions. First, the cable headend 208 acts as a distribution center, or signal processor, by relaying the program signal to the set top terminal 220 in each subscriber's home. In addition, the cable headend 208 acts as a network controller 214 by receiving information from each set top terminal 220 and passing such information on to an information gathering site such as the operations center 202 .
- FIG. 3 shows an embodiment where the cable headend 208 and the subscriber's home are linked by certain communications media 216 .
- analog signals, digitally compressed signals, other digital signals and up-stream/interactivity signals are sent and received over the media 216 .
- the cable headend 208 provides such signaling capabilities in its dual roles as a signal processor 209 and network controller 214 .
- the cable headend 208 prepares the program signals that are received by the cable headend 208 for transmission to each set top terminal 220 .
- the signal processor 209 re-routes or demultiplexes and recombines the signals and digital information received from the operations center 202 and allocates different portions of the signal to different frequency ranges. Cable headends 208 that provide different subscribers different program offerings may allocate the program signals from the operations center 202 in various manners to accommodate different viewers.
- the signal processor 209 may also incorporate local programming and/or local advertisements into the program signal and forward the revised signal to the set top terminals 220 . To accommodate this local programming availability, the signal processor 209 must combine the local signal in digital or analog form with the operations center program signals.
- the signal processor 209 must also decompress and recompress incoming signals so they may be properly formatted for transmission to the set top terminals 220 . This process becomes less important as standards develop (i.e., MPEG 2). In addition, the signal processor 209 performs any necessary signal decryption and/or encryption.
- the cable headend 208 performs the system control functions for the system.
- the primary function of the network controller 214 is to manage the configuration of the set top terminals 220 and process signals received from the set top terminals 220 .
- the network controller 214 monitors, among other things, automatic poll-back responses from the set top terminals 220 remotely located at each subscriber's home. The polling and automatic report-back cycle occurs frequently enough to allow the network controller 214 to maintain accurate account and billing information as well as monitor authorized channel access.
- information to be sent to the network controller 214 will be stored in RAM within each subscriber's set top terminal 220 and will be retrieved only upon polling by the network controller 214 . Retrieval may, for example, occur on a daily, weekly or monthly basis.
- the network controller 214 allows the system to maintain complete information on all programs watched using a particular set top terminal 220 .
- the network controller 214 is also able to respond to the immediate needs of a set top terminal 220 by modifying a program control information signal received from the operations center 202 . Therefore, the network controller 214 enables the delivery system to adapt to the specific requirements of individual set top terminals 220 when the requirements cannot be provided to the operations center 202 in advance. In other words, the network controller 214 is able to perform on the fly programming changes. With this capability, the network controller 214 can handle sophisticated local programming needs such as, for example, interactive television services, split screen video, and selection of different foreign languages for the same video. In addition, the network controller 214 controls and monitors all compressors and decompressors in the system.
- the delivery system 200 and digital compression of the preferred embodiment provides a one-way path from the operations center 202 to the cable headend 208 .
- Status and billing information is sent from the set top terminal 220 to the network controller 214 at the cable headend 208 and not directly to the operations center 202 .
- program monitoring and selection control will take place only at the cable headend 208 by the local cable company and its decentralized network controllers 214 (i.e., decentralized relative to the operations center 202 , which is central to the program delivery system 200 ).
- the local cable company will in turn be in communication with the operations center 202 or a regional control center (not shown) that accumulates return data from the set top terminal 220 for statistical or billing purposes.
- the operations center 202 and the statistical and billing sites are collocated. Further, telephone lines with modems are used to transfer information from the set top terminal 220 to the statistical and billing sites.
- the set top terminal 220 is the portion of the delivery system 200 that resides in the home of a subscriber. As noted above, the functions of the set top terminal 220 may be incorporated into the television, so that a separate component is not required to interact with the program delivery system 200 . Alternately, the functions of the set top terminal may be incorporated into a satellite television receiver. When the set top terminal 220 is used, it is usually located above or below the subscriber's television, but it maybe placed anywhere in or near the subscriber's home as long as it is within the range of the subscriber's remote control device 900 . In some aspects, the set top terminal 220 may resemble converter boxes already used by many cable systems.
- each set top terminal 220 may include a variety of error detection, decryption, and coding techniques such as anti-taping encoding.
- error detection, decryption, and coding techniques such as anti-taping encoding.
- coding techniques such as anti-taping encoding.
- the set top terminal 220 has a plurality of input and output ports to enable it to communicate with other local and remote devices.
- the set top terminal 220 has an input port that receives information from the cable headend 208 .
- the unit has at least two output ports that provide communications from the set top terminal 220 to a television and a VCR. Certain menu selections may cause the set top terminal 220 to send control signals directly to the VCR to automatically program or operate the VCR.
- the set top terminal 220 contains a phone jack that can be used for maintenance, troubleshooting, reprogramming and additional customer features.
- the set top terminal 220 may also contain stereo/audio output terminals and a satellite dish input port.
- the set top terminal 220 is the last component in the delivery system chain.
- the set top terminal 220 receives compressed program and control signals from the cable headend 208 (or, in some cases, directly from the operations center 202 ). After the set top terminal 220 receives the individually compressed program and control signals, the signals are demultiplexed, decompressed, converted to analog signals (if necessary) and either placed in local storage (from which the menu template may be created), executed immediately, or sent directly to the television screen.
- the set top terminal 220 After processing certain signals received from the cable headend 208 , the set top terminal 220 is able to store menu templates for creating menus that are displayed on a subscriber's television by using an array of menu templates. Before a menu can be constructed, menu templates must be created and sent to the set top terminal 220 for storage. A microprocessor uses the control signals received from the operations center 202 or cable headend 208 to generate the menu templates for storage. Each menu template may be stored in volatile memory in the set top terminal 220 . When the set top terminal receives template information it demultiplexes the program control signals received from the cable headend 208 into four primary parts: video, graphics, program logic and text.
- Each menu template represents a different portion of a whole menu, such as a menu background, television logo, cursor highlight overlay, or other miscellaneous components needed to build a menu.
- the menu templates may be deleted or altered using control signals received from the operations center 202 or cable headend 208 .
- the set top terminal 220 can generate the appropriate menus.
- the basic menu format information is stored in memory located within the set top terminal 220 so that the microprocessor may locally access the information from the set top terminal instead of from an incoming signal.
- the microprocessor next generates the appropriate menus from the menu templates and the other menu information stored in memory.
- the set top terminal 220 displays specific menus on the subscriber's television screen that correspond to the inputs the subscriber selects.
- the set top terminal 220 determines on which channel the program is being shown, demultiplexes and extracts the single channel transmitted from the cable headend 208 . The set top terminal 220 then decompresses the channel and, if necessary, converts the program signal to an analog NTSC signal to enable the subscriber to view the selected program.
- the set top terminal 220 can be equipped to decompress more than one program signal, but this would unnecessarily add to the cost of the unit since a subscriber will generally only view one program at a time. However, two or three decompressors may be desirable to provide picture-on-picture capability, control signal decompression, enhanced channel switching or like features.
- the set top terminal 220 may also store text transmitted from the cable headend 208 or the operations center 202 .
- the text may inform the subscriber about upcoming events, billing and account status, new subscriptions, or other relevant information.
- the text will be stored in an appropriate memory location depending on the frequency and the duration of the use of the textual message.
- the set top terminal 220 may store program signals, such as targeted advertisements, for later conversion and display.
- upgrades are available to enhance the performance of a subscriber's set top terminal 220 .
- These upgrades may consist of a cartridge or computer card (not shown) that is inserted into an expansion slot in the set top terminal 220 or may consist of a feature offered by the cable headend 208 or operations center 202 to which the user may subscribe.
- Available upgrades may include on line data base services, interactive multi-media services, access to digital radio channels, and other services.
- available converter boxes such as those manufactured by General Instruments or Scientific Atlanta, may be modified and upgraded to perform the functions of a set top terminal 220 .
- the preferred upgrade is a circuit card with a microprocessor that is electronically connected to or inserted into the converter box.
- the primary conduit for communication between the subscriber and the set top terminal 220 is through the subscriber interface, preferably a remote control device 900 .
- the subscriber may select desired programming through the system's menu-driven scheme or by directly accessing a specific channel by entering the actual channel number.
- the subscriber can navigate through a series of informative program selection menus.
- menu-driven, iconic or alpha-character access the subscriber can access desired programs by simply pressing a single button rather than recalling from memory and pressing the actual channel number to make a selection.
- the subscriber can access regular broadcast and basic cable television stations by using either the numeric keys on the remote control 900 (pressing the corresponding channel number), or one of the menu icon selection options.
- the physical characteristics of the subscriber interface 900 should also add to the user friendliness of the system.
- the remote control 900 should easily fit in the palm of the user's hand.
- the buttons of the preferred remote control 900 contain pictorial symbols that are easily identifiable by the subscriber. Also, buttons that perform similar functions may be color coordinated and consist of distinguishing textures to increase the user friendliness of the system.
- the menu-driven scheme provides the subscriber with one-step access to all major menus, ranging from hit movies to sport specials to specialty programs. From any of the major menus, the subscriber can in turn access submenus and minor menus by cursor or alpha-character access.
- Program Selection menus There are two different types of menus utilized by the preferred embodiment, the Program Selection menus and the During Program menus.
- the first series of menus, Program Selection menus consists of an Introductory, a Home, Major menus, and Submenus.
- the second series of menus, During Program menus consists of two primary types, Hidden menus and the Program Overlay menus.
- the Introductory menu welcomes the subscriber to the system.
- the Introductory menu may display important announcements from the local cable franchise, advertisements from the cable provider, or other types of messages.
- the Introductory menu can inform the subscriber if the cable headend 208 has sent a personal message to the subscriber's particular set top terminal 220 .
- the subscriber may advance to the next level of menus, namely the Home menu.
- the cable system will advance the subscriber by default to the Home menu.
- the subscriber is able to access all of the programming options.
- the subscriber may either select a program directly by entering the appropriate channel number from the remote control 900 , or the subscriber may sequence through incremental levels of menu options starting from the Home menu.
- the Home menu lists categories that correspond to the first level of menus called Major menus.
- the subscriber will be forwarded to the Major menu that corresponds to the chosen category from the Home menu.
- the Major menus further refine a subscriber's search and help guide the subscriber to the selection of his choice.
- the subscriber may access several submenus. From each submenu, the subscriber may access other submenus until the subscriber finds a desired television program. Similar to the Major menu, each successive level of Submenus further refines the subscriber's search. The system also enables the subscriber to skip certain menus or submenus and directly access a specific menu or television program by entering the appropriate commands on the remote control 900 .
- the During program menus are displayed by the set top terminal 220 only after the subscriber has selected a television program. In order to avoid disturbing the subscriber, the set top terminal 220 does not display the Hidden Menus until the subscriber selects the appropriate option to display a Hidden Menu.
- the Hidden Menus contain options that are relevant to the program selected by the viewer. For example, a Hidden Menu may contain options that enable a subscriber to enter an interactive mode or escape from the selected program.
- Program Overlay Menus are similar to Hidden Menus because they occur during a program and are related to the program being viewed. However, the Program Overlay Menus are displayed concurrently with the program selected by the subscriber. Most Program Overlay Menus are small enough on the screen to allow the subscriber to continue viewing the selected program comfortably.
- FIG. 4 broadly shows the configuration for the computer assisted packaging system (CAP) 260 of the operations center 202 .
- the primary components of the CAP 260 consist of multiple packager workstations 262 , a central processing unit 264 , a multiple channel architecture module 265 , video/audio editing equipment 266 , and one or more databases 268 and 269 .
- Additional remotely located databases, such as local video storage database 267 , and buffers 271 and controllers 272 for external program feeds make up the peripherals of the CAP system 260 .
- the heart of the CAP 260 is a central processing unit 264 that communicates with all the component parts of the CAP 260 .
- the central processing unit 264 can be a powerful PC, a mini-computer, a mainframe or a combination of computing equipment running in parallel.
- the central processing unit 264 includes all the necessary interconnections to control peripheral equipment such as the external video controls 272 .
- the central processing unit 264 has sufficient memory 274 to store the program instructions of the subroutines that operate the CAP 260 .
- the CAP 260 receives data from one or more databases, such as the operations center Database 268 and the Cable Franchise Information Database 269 shown in FIG. 4. In addition, separate databases are maintained of viewer information, such as demographics and programs viewed.
- the CAP 260 can control the reception of external sources by enabling and disenabling the external video controls 272 .
- the external video controls 272 include buffers to delay as necessary external programs received by the operations center 202 .
- the multiple channel architecture module 265 allows the operations center 202 or the cable headends 208 to broadcast multiple program signals to each of the set top terminals 220 , with the set top terminals 220 then determining which of the multiple channels to switch to, based on a switching plan generated by the multiple channel architecture module 265 , and a set top terminal assignment matrix generated by the multiple channel architecture module 265 and stored in the set top terminal 220 .
- the use of multiple channels is particularly advantageous when targeting advertisements to different viewers.
- the construction and operation of the multiple channel architecture module 265 will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 4 a - 4 e.
- the functions of the video/audio equipment 266 include digitizing analog programs, digitizing and compressing analog programs (in a single step, e.g., MPEG), and compressing digital program signals as requested by the central processing unit 264 .
- the CAP 260 receives video and audio from two sources: internally from a local video storage 267 and externally from external sources through external video controls 272 . When necessary, video is manipulated, formatted and/or digitized using video/audio equipment 266 that is controlled by CAP 264 .
- FIG. 2 an overview of an operating cable television menu driven program delivery system 200 highlighting various external programming signal sources 212 is depicted.
- the operations center 202 is shown receiving external programming signals that correspond to particular programming categories that are available for a subscriber's viewing. These external signals may be in analog or digital form and may be received via landline, microwave transmission, or satellite. Some of these external signals may be transmitted from the program source 212 to the operations center 202 in compressed digital format or other nonstandard digital formats. These external signals are received and packaged with programming that is stored at the operations center 202 .
- Examples of external program sources 212 shown in FIG. 2 are: Sporting events, children's programs, documentaries, high definition TV sources, specialty channels, interactive services, weather, news, and other nonfiction or entertainment. Any source that can provide either audio or video or both may be utilized to provide programming to the operations center 202 .
- a television signal is first digitized.
- the object of digitization is two-fold: First, in the case of an analog signal, like a television picture, digitization allows the signal to be converted from a waveform into a digital binary format.
- standard digital formats are designed to have the resulting pictures or video stills take up less space on their respective storage mediums. Essentially, as described below, a standard digital format will define the method of compression used.
- Intraframe within-frame
- interframe frame-to-frame
- within-carrier Within-carrier compression allows the compression ratio to dynamically vary depending upon the amount of changes between frames. If a large number of changes occur between frames, the compression ratio drops from, for example, sixteen-to-one to eight-to-one. If action is intense, the compression ratio may dip to four to one.
- JPEG Joint photographic experts group
- MPEG2 motion picture engineering group specifications
- Other proprietary standards have been developed in addition to these.
- the preferred embodiment uses the MPEG-2 standard of coding and those of ordinary skill in the art are presumed to be familiar with the MPEG-2 standard.
- the MPEG-2 Systems Working Draft Proposal from the Systems Committee of the International Organization For Standardization, document ISO/IE JT1/SC29/WG11 N0531 MPEG93 dated Sep. 10, 1993, is hereby incorporated by reference.
- MPEG and MPEG2 for motion pictures are preferred in the present invention, any reliable digital format with compression may be used with the present invention.
- the human intervention in this system is conducted by a programmer or program packager operating from the one or more work stations 262 connected to the system.
- work stations 262 are preferably intelligent work stations with large CRT screens.
- a suitable keyboard, mouse and color monitor are used with the workstation.
- the packager can create program lineups, prioritize programs, initiate dynamic menu allocation, initiate dynamic bandwidth allocation, design menus, place program names and descriptions onto menus, create menus with still and live video, move text on menus, change the colors of objects on menus and perform various other tasks for the program delivery system 200 .
- any operations center 202 function that normally requires human intervention can be conducted at the packager workstation 262 .
- data entry for the databases can be performed manually at the workstations 262 , it is preferred that the data entry be completed through electronic transfers of information.
- the data can be loaded from customary portable storage media such as magnetic disks or tape.
- An integral part of the Computer Assisting Packaging system is the retrieval of viewer data, and the assimilation of that data into the program packaging method (especially the menu configuration) as discussed in reference to FIG. 8 MII 402 .
- Each headend 208 compiles the viewer data, and then sends it verbatim to the operations center 202 .
- the operations center 202 can collect the viewer data directly from the set top terminals 220 .
- the raw data is necessary because different responsibilities of the operations center 202 require different parts of the raw information. Also a record must be kept of overall data. Once the raw data is assembled at the operations center 202 , the data is filtered for each application.
- the raw data gathered includes but is not limited to:
- Menu creation is one of the major CAP functions that involve the incorporation of the raw data.
- An automated software procedure (such as the EIS) analyzes the data and, using certain heuristics, creates the menus.
- One heuristic for example, is that when a show is not ordered frequently, it is moved closer to the top of the menu for greater visibility.
- the filtering of the data allows it to be sorted and indexed for display to the user.
- the program data can be filtered into a new database containing program names and indexed by the number of times each program was purchased.
- the data can also be indexed by buy times and program categories.
- Certain metrics are established to help in evaluating the data.
- sales by menu placement, cost, category and lifespan can be pulled up for viewing in graphic presentation.
- the graphic presentation in the form of line or bar graphs, help the packager recognize any trends in the data. For example, the first movie on a movie menu might not have sold as well as a second movie listed.
- a chart can be pulled up to reveal that the first movie has been at the top of the menu for two weeks and buy rates are naturally falling off. Steps can then be taken to move items in the menus to correct this, though many of these steps are automated in the menu creation system. Suggested changes can be displayed to help the user in this task.
- the automated procedures create menus that are distinct between headends 208 because of demographic differences in the viewing audience. To help with this, a separate database of viewer demographics exists and is frequently updated. The headends 208 are able to alter the menu positions in order to further tailor the presentation, or to add local shows and local targeted advertisements. Any changes to the menus are sent back to the operations center 202 at the same time as the viewer data, in order to prevent erroneous data analysis. Menu changes at the cable headend are described in detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,600,350, entitled NETWORK CONTROLLER FOR A CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM, incorporated herein by reference
- an Executive Information System is used to give high level access to both buy (what the customer purchases) and access (when the product was viewed, how often and duration) data.
- the EIS represents information in both a graphical and summary report format. Drill down functions in the EIS help the packager derive the appropriate product (product refers to programs, events or services) mix.
- the purpose of the EIS is to provide an on-line software tool that will allow for real-time evaluation of current product positioning.
- the design of the system consists of user friendly icons to guide the user through available functions.
- the functionality in the system provides general information on current programming sales status. By working through the tiers in the system, the user has access to more specific information.
- the system is designed to shield the user from a long learning curve and information overload.
- the graphical tools allow for analysis of current data through the use of multiple graph types such as line graphs, bar and pie charts. These tools will allow the user to manipulate independent variables such as time (hour, day of the week, week, month), demographic information, program category information (genre, property, events), headend information and pricing information for determining the appropriate programming mix within the allotted time slots.
- the system also allows the packager to derive expected monetary returns through program line-ups by integrating outside industry databases. For instance, the system could be used to determine expected returns from a particular program by correlating buy information from the existing programs in the line up with a viewer ratings service database to determine the outcome of programs within a particular genre not in the current line up.
- Report tools within the EIS aggregate buy access at the highest level. Due to the volume of available information statistical analysis methods are used for deriving marketing intelligence within the EIS.
- a yield management tool is incorporated within the EIS.
- the yield management tool encompasses operations research techniques, statistical methods and neural net technology to decide program mix as it pertains to program substitutes, program complements, time slice positioning, repetitions and menu positioning.
- This system is automated to the extent of providing viable alternative as to the proposed product mix.
- the system encompasses a Monte Carlo simulation for developing alternative product mix scenarios.
- the system feeds from both internal data and external industry data sources to provide expected revenue projections for the different scenarios.
- Other software subroutines of the CAP will automatically call upon the EIS to assist the program in important decision making, such as menu configuration and transponder allocation. Human interaction is required to change marketing parameters for fine tuning the desired product scheduling.
- This second processing unit 270 is the Delivery Control Processing Unit 270 , and can perform the tasks of incorporating the program control information signal from the CAP 260 , coordinating the receipt and combining of external program video/audio and internal video/audio and combining the signals as necessary for transmission. This distribution of functions between the CAP 260 and Delivery Control Processing Unit 270 allows for greater speed and ease of use.
- FIG. 5 shows a more detailed diagram of the CAP 260 and the Delivery Control Processor Unit 270 .
- the Delivery Control Processor Unit 270 is also responsible for the generation of the Program Control Information Signal 276 based on information received from the CPU 264 .
- the Delivery Control Processor Unit 270 allows for the off-loading of real-time and near real-time tasks from the CPU 264 .
- the CPU 264 processes information within its database and provides user access to the CAP 260 via multiple user workstations 262 .
- the high-speed digital output 278 from the digital multiplex equipment 273 is then sent on to the compression (if necessary), multiplexing, modulation and amplification hardware, represented at 279 .
- Table A is an example of some information that can be sent in the program control information signal to the set top terminals 220 .
- the program control information signal generated by the operations center 202 provides data on the scheduling and description of programs via the network controller 214 or, in an alternate configuration, directly to the set top terminal 220 for display to the subscriber.
- the program control information signal 276 is stored and modified by the network controller 214 and sent to the set top terminal 220 in the form of a set top terminal control information stream (STTCIS).
- STTCIS set top terminal control information stream
- the set top terminal 220 of the present invention integrates either the program control signal 276 or the STTCIS, together with data stored in the memory of the set top terminal 220 , to generate on-screen menu displays for assisting the subscriber in choosing programs for viewing.
- program control information is being used to indicate control information coming from the cable headend 208 to the set top terminal 220 , whether it is sent directly from the operations center 202 , processed by the network controller 214 , and then forwarded to the set top terminal as STTCIS, or transmitted over telephone lines.
- the types of information that can be sent via the program control signal include: number of program categories, names of program categories, what channels are assigned to a specific category (such as specialty channels), names of channels, names of programs on each channel, program start times, length of programs, description of programs, menu assignment for each program, pricing, whether there is a sample video clip for advertisement for the program, and any other program, menu or product information.
- the goal of the menu driven program selection system of the present invention is to allow the subscriber to choose a program by touring through a series of menus utilizing a remote control 900 for cursor movement.
- the final choice in the series of menus will identify one particular channel and one time for activation of that channel.
- the set top terminal 220 can display the selected program on the television for the viewer.
- an intelligent alpha-numeric code is assigned to each program.
- This alpha-numeric code identifies the category of the program, the menu in which the program should be displayed, its transmission time(s), and the position on the menu that the program should be displayed.
- the program control information is sent continuously from the operations center 202 to the network controller 214 , and ultimately to the set top terminal 220 .
- four hours worth of programming information can be sent via the program control information signal continuously in the format shown in Table A.
- TABLE A shows the basic information that is needed by the set top terminal 220 .
- the program descriptions shown are coded abbreviations. For example, C stands for comedy, N for news, S for sports, A for cartoons, and TX for text. If there is a textual description for a program, such as a movie, the description may be given following that program's coded description or may be communicated following the four hours of programming information. As is shown in the coded listing, program descriptions for programs greater than a half hour in length need not be repeated (each half hour).
- the video description code informs the set top terminal 220 whether there is still or live video available to advertise the program.
- a sporting program may be assigned a code of B35-010194-1600-3.25-Michigan St. vs. USC.
- the letter B would assign the program to category B, sports.
- the second alpha-numeric character number 3 would assign the program to the third menu of the sports category.
- the third character of the code, number 5 assigns the program to the fifth program slot on the third menu.
- the next six characters, Jan. 01, 1994, represent the date.
- the following four characters, 1600 represent the start time, which is followed by the length of the program and the program name. This entry represents a sports show, a college football game, which will be aired at 4:00PM on New Years day 1994.
- Table B shows an example Events Table that may be downloaded to a set top terminal 220 using the Event Data file that contains information about events and pricing.
- the three columns of the Events Table identify the field number, the field itself and the type of information downloaded in the Event Data file.
- the first column contains the field numbers 1 through 11.
- the middle column contains the corresponding field parameters, including the event type, event ID, global channel ID, price, start time, end time, start date, end date, P-icon, name and description.
- the third column contains corresponding field type information. As shown in this field type information typically consists of an unsigned integer; hours, minutes and seconds; months, day and year; and ASCII character identifier.
- Table C shows an example Event data file.
- Table C shows two data streams corresponding to two event types.
- the first data stream identifies a YCTV event in the first field.
- the second field designates the event ID, which is 1234 in this example.
- the third field includes the global channel ID number two.
- the fourth field indicates the cost of 50 cents for this event.
- the fifth and sixth fields indicate the respective start and end times of 3:00 a.m. to 3:00 p.m., respectively.
- the seventh and eighth fields show the corresponding start and end date, designated as Aug. 25, 1993 and Aug. 27, 1993, respectively.
- Field nine indicates the P icon set to a graphics file.
- fields ten and eleven indicate the name and description of the event selected, which in this case is Sesame Street and Barney.
- the second data stream in the Event.Dat example shown in Table C includes analogous information for Terminator IV, which is designated in field one as a pay-per-view event.
- TABLE C Event Data Example 1 ⁇ grave over ( ) ⁇ 1234 ⁇ grave over ( ) ⁇ 2 ⁇ grave over ( ) ⁇ 50 ⁇ grave over ( ) ⁇ 03:00:00 ⁇ grave over ( ) ⁇ 15:00:00 ⁇ grave over ( ) ⁇ Aug. 25, 1993 ⁇ grave over ( ) ⁇ Aug.
- the program control information signal 276 and STTCIS can be formatted in a variety of ways and the on-screen menus can be produced in many different ways. For instance, if the program control information signal 276 carries no menu format information, the menu format for creating the menus can be fixed in ROM at the set top terminal 220 . This method allows the program control signal 276 to carry less information but has the least flexibility since the menu formats cannot be changed without physically swapping the ROM holding the menu format information. In the preferred embodiment, the menu format information is stored at the set top terminal 220 in temporary memory either in a RAM or EPROM. This configuration provides the desired flexibility in the menu format while still limiting the amount of information needed to be communicated via the program control information signal 276 . New menu format information would be sent via the program control information signal 276 or the STTCIS to the set top terminals 220 each time there was a change to a menu.
- the menus remain fixed and only the text changes.
- the program control information signal 276 can be limited to primarily text and a text generator can be employed in the set top terminal 220 .
- This simple embodiment keeps the cost of the set top terminal 220 low and limits the bandwidth necessary for the program control information.
- Another simple embodiment uses a separate channel full-time (large bandwidth) just for the menu information.
- FIGS. 6 a and 6 b show a data format 920 at the bit-level for one embodiment of a program information signal 276 .
- This frame format consists of six fields, namely: (1) a leading flag 922 at the beginning of the message, (2) an address field 924 , (3) a subscriber region designation 926 , (4) a set top terminal identifier 928 that includes a polling command/response (or P/F) bit 930 , (5) an information field 932 , and (6) a trailing flag 934 at the end of the message.
- the eight-bit flag sequence that appears at the beginning 922 and end 927 of a frame is used to establish and maintain synchronization. Such a sequence typically consists of a 01111110 bit-stream.
- the address field 924 designates a 4-bit address for a given set top terminal 220 .
- the subscriber region designation 926 is a 4-bit field that indicates the geographical region in which the subscriber's set top terminal 220 is housed.
- the set top terminal identifier 928 is a 16-bit field that uniquely identifies each set top terminal 220 with a 15-bit designation followed by an appended P/F bit 930 .
- field size is provided by this example, a variety of sizes can be used with the present invention.
- the P/F bit 930 is used to command a polling response 920 ′ (FIG. 6 b ) from the set top terminal 220 addressed.
- the polling response 920 ′ is substantially similar to the from format 920 , and is commonly numbered, but with a prime ( ⁇ ) designation appended for clarity.
- the frame format 920 also provides a variable-length information field 932 for other data transmissions, such as information on system updates.
- the frame format ends with an 8-bit flag 934 (or trailing flag) that is identical in format to the leading flag 922 , as set forth above.
- Other frame formats, such as MPEG, for example, will be apparent to one skilled in the art and can be easily adapted for use with the system.
- the operations center 202 may employ a multiple channel architecture that includes program channels and a number of feeder channels to carry alternate programming, such as alternate targeted advertising.
- the program channel carries a main program, such as a broadcast television show, and accompanying advertisements.
- the feeder channels are ancillary video/audio channels, which are delivered to the set top terminal 220 , and which provide primarily alternate commercial and promotional interstitial material for use during program breaks.
- the concept of targeted advertising makes use of feeder channels to allow for the set top terminals 220 to be switched to the most appropriate feeder channel at a program break, with appropriateness being based on information known about the demographics and viewing habits of users of the set top terminals 220 , for example.
- Careful management of the feeder channels, including their dynamic switching and control of the advertising airing on the feeder channels at any given time can greatly increase both the advertisers' likelihood to reach an interested viewer, as well as the likelihood a viewer is interested in a specific advertisement.
- the feeder channels are assigned a series of advertisements and a switching plan is developed at the operations center 202 that directs individual set top terminals 220 to remain at the program channel or to switch from the program channel to a specific feeder channel upon the occurrence of the program break.
- the process of managing the feeder channels begins with a number of configuration and set-up steps.
- individual set top terminal address information is collected at the operations center 202 . This information is required to uniquely identify each set top terminal 220 and to associate with that identifier necessary information to aid in the targeting process.
- the set top terminal address information may be provided to the operations center 202 upon installation or activation of the set top terminal 220 in a viewer's home. Other information may be collected from various sources, including viewer surveys, marketing databases correlated by address or zip code+4, for example.
- set top terminal groups may be determined. This is needed if the management of information and targeting to individual set top terminals 220 is not practical initially, either due to non-availability of information to the appropriate level of detail, or technology to control and deliver messages and advertisements to individual set top terminals 220 .
- target criteria include demographic targeting (age/sex/income) and Area of Dominant Influence (ADI).
- ADI Area of Dominant Influence
- Each target criteria is then segmented into appropriate groups.
- the ADI may include Los Angles, Calif. and Washington D.C. New targeting criteria can be added and the groups redefined after their initial establishment.
- each set top terminal 220 is assigned to its appropriate group based on the information collected about the set-top terminal's environment. Once the set top terminals 220 are assigned to groups, their group assignments are conveyed to the set top terminal 220 and stored there.
- the group assignment information that is stored at the set top terminal 220 is able to survive power cycling of the set top terminal 220 , and other normal service interruptions. Finally, as groups are modified or group assignments change, the set top terminals 220 are notified of the changes. Additionally, the group assignment information is periodically resent to the set top terminals 220 to ensure that newly added set top terminals 220 and those that have accidentally lost their information are up-to-date.
- a break management engine determines how many feeder channels are available for each program break.
- Each program break may contain one or more pods during which a commercial spot or targeted advertisement may be aired. At a minimum, one commercial spot will be available for each pod in a program break (i.e., the spot airing on the same channel as the program).
- the maximum number of spots to be available for a given program break will depend on the total number of feeder channels available and the alignment of program breaks across all program channels.
- the occurrence of program breaks cannot be predicted in advance of programming airing (e.g., live sports broadcasts). For replayed programming, the occurrence of program breaks will be known.
- some programming may be manually edited to insert program breaks at appropriate intervals. The manual placement of program breaks during the program edit process can be used to force program breaks to line up or be totally staggered across program channels, permitting more predictable program break placements, as necessary.
- targeted advertisements can be assigned to program breaks based on program breaks that occur in a particular program (e.g., All My Children). Alternately, targeted advertisements may be assigned to program breaks based on program categories (e.g., sports). In the discussion that follows, the targeted advertisements are assigned based on a specific program. Algorithms for assigning targeted advertisements based on program categories will be described later with respect to FIGS. 28 - 36 .
- a spot placement engine determines the optimum types of spots to be placed based on break timing and feeder channel availability.
- the output of the spot placement engine includes an ad playbill that can be used for billing, analysis and commercial trafficking purposes.
- the spot placement engine takes into account likely viewers of a program, the desirability of available spots to those viewers, targeting criteria, and the number of feeder channels available for each program break.
- the spot being placed in the program break serves as the default targeted advertisement (most appropriate to the overall audience) in case feeder channels are not available for alternate targeted advertising.
- the default targeted advertising also supports cable system that either are not configured to provide targeted advertising, or are receiving other programming.
- the set top groups that should remain with the program channel, and those that should tune to a particular feeder channel at each program break are determined, based on target criteria of interest.
- To accomplish the switching of set top terminals 220 to the appropriate feeder channels requires a detailed switching plan.
- the switching plan is distributed to the necessary control points in the system, such as the cable headends 208 , which are then responsible for the periodic transmission of the switching plans to the set top terminals 220 .
- the switching plans are distributed directly to the set top terminals 220 from the operations center 202 .
- the set top terminal 220 After the set top terminal 220 receives and stores the switching plan, the set top terminal 220 will tune to the appropriate feeder channel during the corresponding program break, if the set top terminal 220 is tuned to a program channel that carries programming that cooperates with the feeder channel architecture. The viewer may, at any time, override feeder channel switching by selecting a non-cooperating program channel.
- the set top terminal 220 will store information indicating that the switch was made.
- the accumulated switching history information will be collected from the set top terminal 220 at a later time for review purposes. For example, upon command from the control points, the set top terminal 220 will provide for the transparent collection of switching history data to a local (head-end) or national site.
- the unique set top terminal identification information will be provided with the collected data. As mechanisms become available to identify specific viewers in a household, the system will allow for individual identification information to also be provided with collected data.
- the television delivery system 200 upon collection of the set top terminal switching history data, the television delivery system 200 will allow for the return of used set-top memory space to available pools for future use.
- FIG. 4 a shows the multiple channel architecture module 265 , according to an embodiment of the invention, which resides at the operations center 202 .
- the multiple channel architecture module 265 includes an advertisement assignment module 275 , which will be described later in more detail.
- the advertisement assignment module 275 receives program schedule and clock information regarding broadcast programs from a program schedule module 289 ; advertisement/promotional information from an advertisement/promotional information module 287 ; and set top terminal subscriber information from a subscriber information module 287 .
- the advertisement assignment module 275 provides outputs to a commercial operations module 277 and a switching plan generator 291 .
- the set top subscriber information module 285 receives inputs from a configuration set-up system 293 and a set top data collection engine 295 .
- the set top subscriber information module 285 provides outputs to the configuration set-up system 293 , the switching plan generator 291 and the advertisement assignment module 275 .
- FIG. 4 b shows the configuration set-up system 293 in more detail.
- An interface 297 receives individual addressing information unique to individual set top terminals 220 .
- the interface 297 can include a workstation, such as the work station 262 , for example, from which an operator at the operations center 202 manually enters set top terminal information.
- set top terminal information can be automatically entered at the interface 297 by downloading from an off-site database, the Internet, a storage medium, such as a CD-ROM or a floppy disk, or by collecting the information directly from the individual set top terminals 220 .
- a processor 299 process the received set top information and creates a Category/Group Definition matrix and a Group Assignment matrix that can be used to target advertisements to groups of set top terminals 220 or to an individual set top terminal 220 .
- the Category/Group Definition and Group Assignment matrices will be described later.
- the Category/Group Definition and Group Assignment matrices are then stored in a database 301 , and are periodically updated as subscriber information, for example, changes.
- the information used by the processor 299 to create the Category/Group Definition and Group Assignment matrices includes, for example, the set top terminal identifier, zip code+4 data, household income, and age and sex of the subscribers, for example.
- the information gathered by the configuration set-up system 293 can come from a variety of sources including MSOs and marketing databases, direct inputs from the subscribers, and other means.
- the processor 299 will assign category numbers to certain types of the data. For example, the ADI would be assigned category 1 and household (HH) income would be assigned category 2.
- the configuration set-up system 293 creates a number of non-overlapping groups for each category.
- ADI can be broken down into Seattle, Wash., Washington D.C., Denver Colo., Los Angles Calif., etc.
- HH income can be broken down into a number of income groups such as no income, 20-40K, 60-120K, etc.
- the configuration set-up system 293 assigns a group mask representation for each group within every category.
- the group mask representation is simply a binary number that can be used by other components of the multiple channel architecture module 265 to identify a particular group.
- Table D shows a completed Category/Group Definition matrix that is used by the advertisement assignment module 275 to assign targeted advertising to groups of set top terminals 220 or to individual set top terminals 220 .
- the processor 299 also creates the Group Assignment matrix.
- the Group Assignment matrix shown in Table E, assigns to each set top terminal 220 , for each category, its corresponding group number. Associated with each group number is the group definition and the group mask representation. For example, the set top terminal 220 identified by the set top unit address 12311 is assigned group number 2 (i.e., Washington D.C.) for ADI, and group number 3 (i.e., 40-60 k) for household income.
- the Group Assignment matrix is updated periodically as categories and group definitions change, and as data related to individual set top terminals 220 or groups of set top terminals 220 change.
- the configuration set-up system 293 also delivers the group configuration (i.e., information specific to an individual set top terminal 220 , from the Group Assignment matrix) to each set top terminal 220 .
- the set top terminal 220 assigned the set top unit address 12311 is sent category 1, group 2 and group mask representation 01000000000.
- the group configuration can be transmitted directly to each set top terminal 220 from the operations center 202 . Alternately, the group configuration can first be transmitted to the cable headend 208 . The cable headend 208 then transmits the group configuration to the appropriate set top terminals 220 .
- the set-up system 293 can periodically transmit updated group configurations to the set top terminals 220 , either directly or through the cable headend 208 .
- FIG. 4 c shows the advertisement assignment module 275 in more detail.
- a break management engine 305 uses program schedule/clock information from the program schedule module 289 to assign feeder channels to program breaks.
- a spot placement engine 307 decides which advertisement spots to place in open spots, or pods, during each program.
- a group assignment engine 309 determines which set top terminals 220 will view which simultaneously aired advertisement spots.
- the spot placement engine 307 receives information related to program breaks and available feeder channels from the break management engine 305 .
- the break management engine 305 , the spot placement engine 307 , and the group assignment engine 309 will be described later in more detail.
- the break management engine 305 functions to divide available feeder channels and assign the available feeder channels optimally to those program channels that have concurrent program breaks. Because each program shown on a programming channel will normally carry associated advertisements for each program break, or pod within the program break, the break management engine 305 need only assign feeder channels if alternate advertisements are identified to be broadcast during the program breaks. Thus, during the program break, the program-channel advertisements or advertisements carried on one or more feeder channels can be broadcast to a particular set top terminal 220 or group of set top terminals 220 .
- the break management engine 305 must, at every point in time, divide up the available feeder channels and assign them optimally to the program channels. This requires taking into account the alignment of program breaks across all the program channels. For example, if two program channels have overlapping program breaks, separate feeder channels will likely need to be assigned to each of the program channels. If more than one category of targeting (e.g., ADI, household income) is assigned to the program channels, then several separate feeder channels may be needed to carry all the assigned targeted advertisements. For example, if two program channels, each of which is assigned two categories of targeted advertisements are being broadcast, and the program breaks for the two program channels overlap, then the break management engine 305 will assign one separate feeder channel to each program channel.
- ADI household income
- the program channel will carry one category of targeted advertisement and the feeder channel will carry the second category of targeted advertisement.
- the set top terminal 220 decides, based on a priority algorithm, which targeting category to switch to in case of ambiguous commands to switch to two separate feeder channels.
- the break management engine 305 can assign feeder channels based on the group assignment numbers. Referring to Table D, four group numbers (i.e., 1-4) are shown for the category of targeted advertisement, ADI. For the broadcast of a particular program, the four groups can be divided into two, with groups 1 and 2 receiving the targeted advertising carried on the program channel and groups 3 and 4 receiving the targeted advertising carried on feeder channel 1 . This later example is shown in Table F.
- the break management engine 305 After determining how many feeder channels will be needed for each program break of all programs airing at the same time, the break management engine 305 must allocate feeder channels to the program breaks. Because the program channel will always carry targeted advertisements along with the regular program, every pod in the program will always air at least one spot (i.e., the default targeted advertisement). Thus, if the break management engine 305 is unable to assign a feeder channel to a specific program break, at least one set of commercials will still be available for airing.
- the break management engine 305 In addition to accounting for the occurrence and alignment of program breaks within the programs, and the number of feeder channels available, the break management engine 305 must also account for the number and type of available targeted advertisements for display and the variety of subscribers (according to group assignment numbers) who will potentially view the programs. An advertiser will provide this information when forwarding advertisements to the operation center 202 for airing.
- the break management engine 305 assigned one or more feeder channels to carry targeted advertisements, under the assumption that the entire program break (which consists of one or more pods) would receive all the spots assigned to the specific feeder channel.
- individual pods within each program break may be separately assigned targeted advertisements.
- the break management engine 305 tracks not only programs and program breaks, but within each program break, also tracks breaks between pods.
- the break management engine 305 in cooperation with the group assignment engine 309 , will then allocate feeder channels to air targeted advertisements on a pod-by-pod basis. If a sufficient number of feeder channels are available, the break management engine 305 can assign a separate feeder channel to each pod. Alternately, through the switching plan, the break management engine 305 can require individual set top terminals 220 to switch between the program channels and one or more feeder channels during the program break. The construction and operation of the group switching plan will be described later in detail.
- the spot placement engine 307 determines which specific advertisements are to be placed in each available open pod of the program break.
- the spot placement engine 307 first receives the list of available advertisements/promotional material from the advertisement/promotion module 287 .
- the spot placement engine 307 determines which of the available advertisements/promotions should air in each pod during the broadcast of a program. This may include assigning the advertisement/promotion to the program channel to serve as the default targeted advertisement in case a feeder channel is not available to provide alternate targeted advertising, or in case a set top terminal 220 is unable to switch to the feeder channel.
- the spot placement engine 307 will select one or more targeted advertisements from the list of available advertisements/promotions to air during program breaks in the broadcast. If the demographic or other data assembled by the configuration set-up system 293 indicates that more than one targeted advertisement should be played, depending on the ADI, then the spot placement engine 307 will select the appropriate number of targeted advertisements from the available advertisement/promotional module 287 and will assign each targeted advertisement to a specific feeder channel and the program channel. The operation of the spot placement engine 307 to assign the targeted advertisements will be described later in more detail. TABLE D Category/Group Definition Matrix Category Category Group Group Mask Number Name Number Group Definition Representation 1 ADI 2 HH income 3 Category x
- the group assignment engine 309 receives inputs from the break management engine 305 and the spot placement engine 307 and then determines which set top terminal 220 will view which simultaneously-aired targeted advertisements. Thus, for each program break, the group assignment engine 309 assigns the set top terminals 220 to either the program channel or one of the feeder channels, if available.
- the set top terminals 220 can be assigned based on their placement within a group (i.e., based on their group assignment number) or based on their individual set-top unit address. In tables E and F, the assignments are shown based on the group assignment numbers. As also shown in Table F, the group addressing for a program break is based on a single category of targeted advertising.
- the group assignment engine 309 provides an output to the switching plan generator 291 .
- the output indicates which group assignment numbers (i.e., which groups of set top terminals 220 ) are assigned to each of the program channel and the feeder channels for each program break in each program.
- the switching plan generator 291 then generates the bit word, or group mask assignment that is used to assign the groups to the program channels and the feeder channels.
- the switching plan is distributed to control points that are then responsible for final delivery to the set top terminals 220 .
- the control points can include the local cable headends 208 . Alternately, the switching plans can be distributed directly to the set top boxes 220 from the operations center 202 .
- the operations center 202 can distribute the switching plans by satellite to a satellite receiver that is co-located with the set top terminal 220 .
- the switching plan can also be distributed to the set top terminals 220 over the telecommunications network 100 and the Internet 101 .
- the switching plans can be distributed separately from the television programs or can be distributed with the television programs. By distributing the switching plan with the program, the need for control point relays could be eliminated, thereby allowing for more efficient use of available bandwidth and centralized control functions.
- the switching plan may be distributed well in advance of airing of a program and can be updated as conditions warrant.
- the switching plan provided by the switching plan generator 291 is a national switching plan.
- local cable headends 208 can override certain targeted advertisements and insert local targeted advertising on one or more of the feeder channels. Alternately, certain feeder channels may be reserved for local use, or open pods may be reserved in the program breaks on other feeder channels. After the local cable headend 208 has inserted the local targeted advertisement on a feeder channel, the local cable headend 208 may amend the national switching plan to create a local system switching plan. The details of these operations at the local cable headend 208 are described later in more detail.
- the set-top data collection module 295 receives programs watched data and targeted advertisement watched data from the set top terminals 220 . This information is used at the operations center 202 for billing commercial advertisers and may also be used as an input for future ad campaigns. The targeted advertisement watched data is collected in this fashion because there may be no way of knowing, a priori, which targeted advertisements will be displayed on a particular set top terminal 220 .
- the advertisement assignment module 275 provides an ad playbill input to the commercial operations module 277 .
- the ad playbill input specifies which particular advertisement is to be aired at a particular time slot, the run-time for the advertisement, and the location of the advertisement in storage in the operations center 202 , for example.
- the ad playbill is then used to retrieve the appropriate analog or digital tape or file containing the selected advertisement.
- FIG. 4 d shows the configuration of the feeder channel architecture 317 at the cable headend 208 .
- a set top delivery system 319 receives the national switching plan from the operations center 202 .
- the national switching plan is digitally compressed and multiplexed and can be provided to the cable headend 208 as part of the digital RF program signal 205 , for example.
- the digital program signal 205 is received at the cable headend receiver 203 and may be passed to the signal processor 209 or passed through the cable distribution network 236 directly to the set top terminals 220 .
- the digital program signal 205 is processed at the cable headend 208 .
- the control receiver 228 receives status reports and other data from the set top terminals 220 .
- a set top data collection engine 321 receives targeted advertisement watched data and other information from the control receiver 228 , which may then be temporarily stored in the database 226 , and passes the data to the operations center 202 .
- a configuration set-up system 323 receives initial and updated set top configuration data from the operations center 202 and passes the configuration data to the set top terminals 220 .
- the configuration set up system 323 is also used to locally reconfigure the Group Assignment matrix.
- the signal processor 209 under control of the network controller 214 passes the national switching plan to the set top delivery system 319 .
- the set top delivery system 319 then either modifies the national switching plan and passes it on to the set top terminals 220 or passes the unmodified national delivery plan on to the set top terminals 220 as the local system-specific switching plan.
- the local system-specific switching plan is passed from the set top delivery system 319 to the signal processor 209 , and from the signal processor 209 to the cable distribution system 236 and the set top terminals 220 .
- the set top delivery system 319 demultiplexes the national switching plan from the digital program signal 205 .
- the set top delivery system 319 may then modify the assignments of groups of set top terminals 220 , or individual set top terminals 220 , to specific feeder channels or the program channel. If the group assignments are modified, the group mask assignment is also modified.
- the local system-specific switching plan is then sent to the set top terminals 220 .
- the local system-specific switching plan can be sent as part of the program signal or as part of the STTCIS.
- the local system-specific switching plan can also be sent to the set top terminals 220 in advance of the program signal. In this event, the local system-specific switching plan may need to be updated to account for program changes and reassignment of targeted advertisements, for example.
- the local system-specific switching plan may also be transmitted periodically to the set top terminals 220 to ensure that any set top terminal 220 that was in a power-off condition when the switching plan was originally sent receives the latest version of the local system-specific switching plan.
- the signal processor 209 and the network controller 214 provide the capability to insert local programming, including local targeted advertisements into the signal sent to the set top terminals 220 .
- the signal processor 209 under control of the network controller 214 , will add local targeted advertisements to the appropriate feeder channels. If the addition of local targeted advertising requires a change in the nation-wide switching plan, the network controller 214 will instruct the set top delivery system 319 to make the appropriate changes. In order to make the appropriate changes, the set top delivery system 319 must maintain the same Category/Group Definition and Group Assignment matrices as are maintained at the operations center 202 . Alternately, the set top delivery system 319 may create new matrices that do not conflict with the existing nationally-defined Category/Group Definition matrices.
- FIG. 4 e shows the set top terminal 220 adapted for use with the feeder channel architecture of FIG. 4 a.
- a set top switching engine 325 receives the set top configuration from the configuration set-up system 293 , and stores the configuration in erasable permanent memory 329 .
- the set top switching engine 325 also receives and stores the local system-specific or nation-wide switching plan from the switching plan generator 291 via the set top delivery system 319 .
- the set top switching engine 325 provides control information and advertisements watched data to a set top data collection engine 327 .
- the data are stored in the memory 329 and are available for transmission to the local cable headend 208 or directly to the operations center 202 .
- the data may be transmitted over the installed cable delivery system 236 , using various polling techniques and transmission protocols, such as those describe previously with respect to gathering programs watched data.
- the advertisements watched data includes the set top unit address, the program identifier (program name) and the channel to which the set top was tuned during the program breaks.
- the data may also include click stream data such as operation of the volume mute button, for example.
- the set top switching engine 325 compares the current local system-specific switching plan to the set top configuration plan to determine whether to stay with the program channel during the program breaks or to switch to one of the feeder channels. If the switching plan calls for the set top terminal 220 to be switched to a feeder channel, the set top switching engine 325 sends a control signal to seamlessly, or transparently, switch the program channel to the appropriate feeder channel.
- the multiple channel architecture module 265 is described that provides for real time broadcast of targeted advertising to individual set top terminals 220 .
- the multiple channel architecture module 265 need not broadcast the targeted advertisements in real time.
- the targeted advertisements can be broadcast to individual set top terminals 220 , and stored within the memory 327 of the set top terminal 220 .
- the need for feeder channels is eliminated.
- the national and local system-specific switching plans are still provided to the set top terminals 220 , either directly from the operations center 202 , or from the cable headends 208 .
- targeted advertising uses targeting categories and independent groups within each target category to tie three entities together: 1) set top terminals 220 ; 2) advertisements; and 3) programs.
- the set top terminals 220 (or viewers) are assigned to groups for each targeting category based on numerous factors.
- One method to assign the set top terminals 220 to groups is to use the zip code+4 as an index into one of the available demographic marketing databases. From the zip code+4 data, a distinct demographic cluster can be determined. The demographic cluster can then be mapped directly to the specific group within each targeting category.
- programs are tied to groups as well.
- the percentage of viewers (or set top terminals 220 ) for each group can be identified 1) initially using estimates, and 2) becoming more accurate over time using actual programs watched data.
- Table G shows a sample breakdown of viewership for 5 example programs for 3 example targeting categories.
- the viewership data may be provided from a number of sources including surveys, Nielsen ratings and programs watched data collected by the set top terminals 220 , for example.
- the three targeting categories are the same as those presented in Table E, and the group assignment numbers are the same as those presented in Table D.
- targeting categories 1 and 2 each have 4 groups associated with them, and targeting category 3 has six groups associated with it.
- the targeting category 1 refers to ADI and under group 1, 25% of the viewers of program 1 from the targeting category ADI reside in the Seattle, Wash. ADI.
- the viewership percentages for each targeting category for each program sum up to 100%.
- TABLE G Tar- get Pro- Cate- gram gory Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Pro- 1 25 25 25 25 N/A N/A gram 1 2 30 10 20 40 N/A N/A 3 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 Pro- 1 10 20 30 40 N/A N/A gram 2 2 25 25 25 25 N/A N/A 3 10 15 25 25 15 10 Pro- 1 40 30 20 10 N/A N/A gram 3 2 80 10 5 5 N/A N/A 3 25 25 10 10 15 15 Pro- 1 50 0 50 0 N/A N/A gram 4 2 0 40 40 20 N/A N/A 3 10 10 25 25 15 15 Pro- 1 20 40 40 20 N/A N/A gram 5 2 30 30 10 30 N/A N/A 3 10 30
- Advertisements can also be broken down as to how well an advertisement ranks with each group within one and up to all possible targeting categories, again using percentages. This information may be provided by an advertiser responsible for the advertisement. Table H shows a sample assignment of group rankings for 8 sample advertisements using the same targeting categories and group numbers as in Table G. Not all advertisements may be assigned to groups for a targeting category if an advertiser does not wish its advertisement to be targeted in the manner required by that targeting category.
- the data indicates that for ad 1, and targeting category 1 (ADI) the advertiser believes that ad 1 is appropriate for the viewers in groups 1 and 2 and is not appropriate for the viewers in groups 3 and 4. The advertiser also believes that ad 1 is equally appropriate for both the group 1 and the group 2 viewers. However, if the group 1 viewers been determined to be more likely to respond to ad 1 than the group 2 viewers, then group 1 could be given a higher percentage than group 2. Table H also shows that ad 1 is not applicable to groups 5 and 6 because only four groups are defined for the targeting category ADI. Thus, all the set top terminals 220 will be grouped into one of groups 1 through 4.
- ADI targeting category 1
- advertisements can be targeted using at least two methods.
- the first is a designated multi-ad campaign where specific unique sets of groups are assigned for each ad of the campaign.
- each advertisement provided by an advertiser is independently associated with groups. Advertisements from several different advertisers are then used together to optimize use of the feeder channels.
- the spot placement engine 307 determines: 1) how many feeder channels are assigned to which program; 2) which targeting category is used for which program; 3) which advertisements air on which feeder channels/program channels; and 4) which groups are assigned to which feeder channels/program channels.
- the algorithm in the spot placement engine 307 that assigns targeted advertisements to the program and feeder channels assumes that of the total number of feeders channels available [TOTAL_FEEDERS], no more than some maximum number of the feeder channels can be or are desired to be assigned to a given program at any given time. This amount is denoted as [MAX_FEEDERS].
- the algorithm spreads the available feeder channels among several programs.
- the algorithm can also be modified to support different rates charged to different advertisers and can take into account the following:
- Step 1 For each program, determine the advertisement with the highest overall ranking if that advertisement were the only advertisement to be placed in the program. In essence, this step compares the data in Tables G and H. To do this, for each advertisement, multiply the ranking (or program viewership percentage) for each group for each targeting category from Table G by the breakdown percentage of advertising appropriateness shown in Table H for that same group for that targeting category. The process is repeated for each program and the results are summed.
- target category 1 50 * 25 + 50 * 25 + 0 * 25 + 0 * 25 + 0 * 25 ‘25%
- target category 2 30 * 30 + 10 * 10 + 20 * 20 + 40 * 40 ‘ 30% target category 3: 0 * 10 + 0 * 10 + 0 * 20 + 0 * 20 + 0 * 20 + 0 * 20 ‘ 0%
- the cross-multiplied result then shows a measure of effectiveness for each advertisement if displayed in the corresponding program.
- Step 2 For each program, determine the advertisement/targeting category combination that results in the highest overall ranking. List the program, the overall ranking, the corresponding advertisement, and the corresponding targeting category. Note that only one advertisement will give the overall highest ranking. Table I shows the results. Thus from Table I, ad 5, displayed during a program break in program 2 yields a measure of effectiveness of 50 (highest) and ad 6 along with program 5 yields a measure of effectiveness of 20. TABLE I Highest Overall Corresponding Corresponding Program Ranking Ad Targeting Category Program 1 30 Ad 2 1 Program 2 50 Ad 5 2 Program 3 25 Ad 3 3 Program 4 40 Ad 1 1 Program 5 20 Ad 6 2
- Step 3 Order the resulting list of programs from lowest overall ranking to highest overall ranking. Table J shows the results.
- Step 4 Determine the number of programs that may be assigned feeder channels. For example, consider the first [TOTAL_FEEDERS]+1 programs for feeder channel assignment. Thus, if two feeder channels are available, three programs will be examined to determine which program will yield the best use of the available feeder channels. In this case, the three lowest-ranking programs (i.e., programs 5, 3 and 1) are considered for feeder channel assignment. For the remaining programs (i.e., programs 4 and 2), assign the advertisement that yields that highest rating for placement in the program break for that program. For the programs selected for possible feeder channel assignment, perform steps 5-18 of the algorithm, starting with the program in Step 3 with the lowest overall ranking (i.e., in the example, program 5). TABLE J Corresponding Corresponding Program Overall Ranking Ad Targeting Category Program 5 20 Ad 6 2 Program 3 25 Ad 3 3 Program 1 30 Ad 2 1 Program 4 40 Ad 1 1 Program 2 50 Ad 5 2
- Step 5 Separately for each targeting category, multiply the ranking for each group for each advertisement (Table H) by the breakdown percentage for that same group for that program (Table G). Find the highest value possible. In case of a tie, select any of the advertisements with the highest values. Alternately, steps 5-14 could be repeated for every tie.
- Table K shows an example case for targeting category 1, where ad 1, group 2 is initially selected (with a high value of 20%). Note that Table K shows a three-way tie.
- Step 6 Select from the iterations performed in Step 5, the targeting category that yields the largest value. If there is a tie, select any one of the targeting categories.
- Step 7 For the target category selected, find the next highest value of the (rank)*(breakdown percentage) product for a group not yet selected. If there is a tie, select the advertisement for which a group with a higher value has already been selected. Continue until all groups have been selected and assigned to an advertisement. Table L shows the results. In Table L, for group 1, either ad 1 or ad 4 could be selected (i.e., the product: (rank)*(breakdown percentage) is 10 for ad 1 and for ad 4). However, for group 2, ad 1 has already been selected. Therefore, because there is a tie for group 1 between ad 1 and ad 4, and because group 2 has ad 1 selected, the algorithm selects ad 1 for group 1.
- Step 7 the algorithm limits the number of advertisements that will be run, but maximizes the ranking percentage of the breakdown.
- the results show that, considering targeting category 1 (ADI) only, ad 1 should be displayed for groups 1 and 2 and ad 2 should be displayed for groups 3 and 4.
- Step 8 Sum the (rank)*(breakdown percentage) products for selected groups for each advertisement.
- Step 9 Order those advertisements that have selected groups by decreasing value of the (rank)*(breakdown percentage) product.
- Step 10 Select the [MAX_FEEDERs]+1 advertisements with the highest (rank)*(breakdown percentage) products. For example, if it is desired to assign at most one feeder channel to a program, the algorithm selects the two advertisements with the highest (rank)*(breakdown percentage) products.
- Step 11 For the advertisements selected (Step 10), examine each group not yet included in the selected advertisements. Assign each non-included group to the advertisement where the (rank)*(breakdown percentage) product is the highest for the selected advertisements.
- Step 12 For each advertisement selected, sum the product, (rank)*(breakdown percentage), for the groups assigned to each advertisement.
- Step 13 Reorder the advertisements by highest summed amount to the lowest.
- the advertisement with the highest summed amount will air in the program channel as the default advertisement.
- Step 14 Compute the total (rank)*(breakdown percentage) amount of all advertisements combined. In this case, the total is 60% (from step 10).
- Step 15 Repeat steps 5-14 above for the same selected program of Step 4 using the remaining target categories.
- Step 16 Select the target category that yields the largest total amount. Assign as the Maximum Rank for that program.
- Step 17 Repeat Steps 5-16 for the next program selected in Step 4, computing the Maximum Rank for each program.
- Step 18 Use the available feeder channels for the programs that yield the largest Maximum Rank. Make use of the relevant targeting category determined in Step 16, with advertisements as determined in Step 10, with group assignments as determined in Step 11.
- Step 19 For all other programs, assign the single advertisement that yielded the highest Overall Ranking as determined in Step 3.
- the above algorithm is meant to be illustrative and not limiting. Other algorithms are possible for assigning targeted advertising to groups of set top terminals 220 or to individual set top terminals 220 . For example, the above algorithm could incorporate a weighting scheme for certain factors. Other targeted advertising routines, such as those described with respect to FIGS. 28 - 33 can also be incorporated into the above algorithm.
- the program control information signal 276 is produced substantially by the CAP CPU 264 and the Delivery Control Processor Unit (DCPU) 270 .
- DCPU Delivery Control Processor Unit
- the software modules for the CAP CPU 264 and DCPU 270 include dispatcher 484 , processing 486 and communications 488 , each of which performs like-named functions, as well as supporting database 490 access.
- Processing within the CAP CPU 264 is controlled by the dispatcher 484 software module which may generate processing commands based on user command (e.g., do something now), schedule events (e.g., do something at noon) or based on the occurrence of other events (e.g., do something when the database is updated).
- the dispatcher 484 sends messages to the processing software module 486 instructing it to process information within the database 490 and generate control information for the DCPU 270 . For example, based on the updating of information associated with a particular headend 208 , the dispatcher 484 may command the CAP CPU 264 to regenerate headend 208 parameters, perform any required database integrity checking and send them to the DCPU 270 .
- a filtering function (not shown) is performed which eliminates any information that does not either directly or indirectly relate to a given headend 208 .
- Information transfer between the CAP CPU 264 and the DCPU 270 is controlled by the DCPU communications software module 488 .
- imbedded date/time information within the information records of interest can be used for filtering.
- External pass-through control information 495 may also be incorporated into the program control information signal 261 to provide external input to this digital data stream.
- the DCPU multiplexer 498 is responsible for multiplexing external pass-through control information.
- a transmission software module 499 in conjunction with appropriate communications hardware (not shown), controls the output of both the program control information signal 261 and the miscellaneous control signals 494 .
- FIG. 8 is a high level diagram of CAP software subroutines and their interrelations.
- a Main Program (not shown) orchestrates the use of the various subroutines as needed to perform the CAP's tasks.
- the Packager Data Entry Interface (PDEI) 400 , Marketing Information Interface (MII) 402 , and Cable Franchise Information Access (CFIA) 404 subroutines perform the interface functions between the CAP Main Program and outside data or information.
- the remaining subroutines shown in the center column of FIG. 8 perform the processing and manipulations necessary to the functioning of the CAP 260 .
- the Packager Data Entry Interface (PDEI) 400 subroutine includes routines that enable the Packager to interactively enter program selections 410 , start times of programs 412 , price setting 414 , transponder allocation 416 , and menu editing 418 .
- the PDEI subroutine 400 controls the keyboard and mouse data entry by the packager and runs in concert with the processing and editing subroutines described later.
- the Marketing Information Interface (MII) 402 subroutine interfaces the processing and editing subroutines with marketing data. This interface regularly receives programs watched information from billing sites 420 , cable headends 208 , or set top terminals 220 . In addition, the MII 402 may receive other marketing information 422 such as the demographics of viewers during certain time periods. The MII 402 also uses algorithms 424 to analyze the program watched information and marketing data 420 , 422 , and provides the analyzed information to the processing and editing subroutines. In the preferred embodiment, an Executive Information System (EIS) with a yield management subsystem is included in the MII subroutine as described above.
- EIS Executive Information System
- the Cable Franchise Information Access (CFIA) 404 subroutine receives information on cable franchises, as represented at block 426 , such as the particular equipment used in a cable headend 208 , the number of set top terminals 220 within a cable franchise, groupings of set top terminals 220 on concatenated cable systems 210 , distribution of “high-end” cable subscribers, etc.
- the CFIA 404 generates a cable franchise control signal 428 , which is integrated with the program control information 276 output to generate cable headend 208 specific information to be transmitted.
- the integration algorithm for accomplishing this resides within the Generator subroutine described herein below.
- the process program line-up subroutine 430 uses information from the MII 404 and PDEI 400 to develop a program line-up. Importance weighting algorithms and best-fit time algorithms are used to assign programs in time slots.
- the process menu configurations subroutine 432 determines appropriate menu formats to be used and positions programs on menu screens. Information from the MII 404 and PDEI 400 are used to determine program positions on menus.
- the menu display algorithms 434 displays menus as the menus would be seen by the viewer on a large CRT or color monitor.
- menus subroutine 436 works with the menu display algorithm and PDEI 400 to allow the packager to edit menus on-the-fly during viewing of the menus.
- the graphical transponder allocation display 438 sends information obtained from the CFIA 404 and PDEI 400 to create graphical displays enabling the packager to comprehend the allocation of transponder space across the entire television delivery system 200 .
- the packager may utilize the editing transponder allocation subroutine 440 to interactively reallocate assignment of transponder space.
- the EIS with yield management may be used by the packager to assist in decisions on allocating transponder space.
- the generator subroutine 442 creates the program control information signal for output.
- the Generator subroutine receives the cable franchise control signal and uses this signal to help create a custom signal for each cable headend 208 .
- the Packaging Routine 448 obtains and packages the programs, along with the program control information signal 216 , for transmission to the transponders.
- the general software flow of the operations center 202 is depicted.
- the flow can be broken up into modules that apply to parts of the database to allow viewing, editing, and adding records to the database.
- the software also accomplishes database integrity checking by restricting the user to enter only valid data, and by checking for conflicts.
- FIG. 9 shows some of the software involved in the creation of programs, events and services. This creation occurs prior to or during the processing of the program line-up 430 shown in FIG. 8.
- a first step is indicated generally at 461 and includes acquiring source materials for program production at the operations center 202 (e.g., tape production). Once the source materials are collected 460 , and entered into the database D, they can be used to create programs 462 . These programs are made up of source ⁇ cuts′ from various video/audio source materials. Once the programs have been generated and entered into the database D, events, collections of one or more programs, are created 464 . Each event is then schedule onto a service 466 , with the software checking for conflicts.
- Each service is given run times, and days, and checked for conflicts.
- the event names can be added to the menus 468 .
- the programs for the events and services may be stored at the operations center (as shown in FIG. 11 at 286 ). Processing and manipulation of the events or records is depicted generally at 463 .
- the packager user interface (a portion of 463 ) for each of the creation modules works substantially identically to each of the other modules to make the interface easy to use and learn.
- the packager user interfaces forms a portion of the PDEI 400 shown on FIG. 8.
- the browse system 470 is entered first and allows viewing of records, and selection of specific records.
- the database can be ⁇ populated′ by selection of a button, which activates a populate screen. As represented at block 471 , this allows details to be deleted, added or changed for events, programs, and sources.
- the browse screen also allows access to the edit screen 472 , where fields in a selected record can be modified, with conflicts or errors, in scheduling for example, being checked continuously, as at 473 and 474 .
- the operations center 202 of the present invention performs a variety of management functions which can be broken out into five primary areas: (1) cable headend 208 management, (2) program source management, (3) broadcast program management, (4) internal program storage and management, and (5) marketing, management and customer information.
- a relational database such as that represented by FIG. 10, can be used to maintain the data associated with these areas.
- Customer billing is not included in any of the above five areas for the operations center 202 . Although billing can be handled by the operations center 202 (as shown in the database structure 508 , 511 ), it is preferred that billing is handled at a remote location through traditional channels and methods (such as Cable TV billing provided by Telecorp corporation). Extracts of customer purchases will be provided to the operations center 202 . These extracts of information will be formatted and correlated with customer demographics for marketing purposes by the Marketing Information Interface (MII) 402 .
- MII Marketing Information Interface
- Management of the cable headend 208 includes the following activities: defining the cable headend site; profiling the viewers; determining available set top equipment; defining the concatenated cable systems connected to the cable headend site.
- This information may be stored as cable franchise information within the operations center 202 databases by the Cable Franchise Information Access routine 404 . Such information can be compiled and maintained in a relational database (described below and shown as 328 in FIG. 11).
- Source programs will be provided by a variety of networks. Information from the contractual records to the actual program tapes should be maintained and includes: tracking of property rights; tracking and profiling source tapes; profiling source providers.
- a relational database (such as D shown in FIG. 9) can be used, for example, that identifies and correlates programs sources. Programs may be received from various rights holders, and such a database would track the person or entity that owns the rights to each program at issue. Other data could be maintained relating to program cuts (a program cut is a portion of a program) that specify, for example, the program from which the cut is taken. Information relating to time slot allocations, menu entries, and categories, and channel assignments is also maintained in the relational database.
- Program services represent a purchasable time slice, which is occupied by a type of programming. Each time slice has multiple time constraints. Using the purchasing of through time slices allows for great flexibility. An infinite number of program and time slice combinations are possible.
- services are created using the software shown in FIG. 9, particularly the service creation routine 466 . For a service to become available at a cable headend 208 site, it is mapped to the site. At the time of mapping the program service is assigned a program channel.
- Service ID System generated unique ID Description Describes the service. The description will allow the packager to easily assign a service to a broadcast program.
- Type Defines the type of service. Current service types include YCTV, Grid, Network and Other. Network ID Relevant for network services. (examples: ABC, NBC, DISC) Broadcast Event Relevant for a YCTV service. Identifies the current YCTV broadcast event assigned to the service.
- Day Start Each service is a series of days within a week. This represents the starting day. (Example: Monday) Day Stop Represents the last day in the interval. Time Start Within a day, the service has a time period. This field represents the start of the period. Time Stop Represents the end of the time period. Required Tape If stored tapes are required, the number of tapes required by the service.
- Broadcast program management is one focal point of the data management system. The issues of product, price, promotion and packaging are addressed at this level. Decisions in these areas will affect the actual programming that will be shown to the viewers. Information on description of the content of each program event, program scheduling, broadcast program pricing, TV/set top information flow and information on how broadcast programs will be mapped to viewer channels should be included in the database. Preferably, the EIS system described below will access this data and assist in the Broadcast Program Management.
- the Marketing Information Interface 402 gathers the marketing information and indexes the information for inclusion in the Marketing and Customer Information database.
- An example of the type of information that is needed in this database is a viewer profile.
- the viewer profile data fields are an example of typical fields required in the databases. Definitions of various fields are listed below.
- the primary purpose of profiling the viewer is to acquire marketing information on the viewer's response to available selections. Ancillary information will be available including the actual program and channel selections of the viewer.
- Information tracked within the viewer's profile includes: Viewer ID A unique identifier generated by the system. Set-Top Types Boolean field that identifies the type of set top used. Headend ID Links the viewer to a particular cable site. Site Assigned ID Viewer ID assigned by the cable site. Set-Top ID ID of the viewer's set top. Hookup Date Date physical hardware is connected. Survey Date A demographic profile will be conducted on each user. The following fields represent this demographic information.
- the data represents when the interview survey was completed.
- Viewers Age 2-5 Boolean field if the household has viewers between 2 and 5 years of age.
- Viewers Age 6-11 Boolean field if the household has viewers between 6 and 11 years of age.
- Viewers Age 12-17 Boolean field if the household has viewers between 12 and 17 years of age.
- Tape Rental $ Approximate amount spent on tape rentals on a monthly basis.
- Zip Code Self-explanatory Cable Tier Level of cable service purchased. Number of TV's Self-Explanatory. Years with Cable Self-Explanatory. Occupancy Number of people in household. Highest Education Highest level of education of any member of the household.
- a database server To maintain the database at the operations center 202 , a database server, communications server, user workstation or stations 262 , or the suitable equivalent thereof, are needed.
- the database server performs the following functions: it is the repository for data base files, event logging, event scheduling (example, automated download of files to headends 208 ), multi-user services, data base server services, and data base security access.
- the communications server performs the following functions on data base data: integrity check, filtering, processing, downloading to headends 208 , uploading from headends 208 , and uploading from remote location.
- User workstations 262 perform the following tasks: creation, deletion and access of all database data, system administration and report generation. Database manipulations are performed through the user workstations or remotely.
- the database structure is designed to support multiple users performing multiple tasks simultaneously.
- the preferred embodiment includes a network of user workstations 262 .
- the workstations 262 through user interface software, access data within database files on the database server.
- the communications server is instructed to perform the download. Although this may be done manually at the communications server, it is preferred that the communications server automatically sends information to the cable headends 208 .
- the communications server retrieves required data from the database server, filters out any data not associated with the specified headend 208 , and performs data integrity checks, creates data files to be downloaded and then downloads the data file via modem (or other means such as the DCPU 270 ).
- modem or other means such as the DCPU 270
- the communication server is connected with the headend 208 , it also requests any data that the headend might be holding for the operations center 202 . This may consist of cable headend 208 event log information, set top billing and viewer log data on programs watched, etc.
- the communications server may also assist in retrieving information from other remote sites such as remote billing and statistic sites. For example, if a location is being used for billing purposes, the communications server may retrieve viewer log data. Also, the communications server may retrieve billing and viewer log data from actual set top converters in the field. Once the data is retrieved it is sent to the database server. Thus, in the preferred embodiment the communications server will support incoming information via modem or otherwise.
- the basic database structure at the operations center 202 consists of multiple tables.
- Database data tables contain one or more data records, each with multiple fields. Each field contains a piece of data about the particular record. This data may be general information, such as a numeric value, date or text string, or it may be a reference to another database record relating one piece of data to another.
- Database index files contain information about associated data files to allow for improved data retrieval. The database index file makes retrieval of information much quicker.
- each tape or CD may have a database record associated with it, source tape data file.
- Each tape may contain multiple cuts of which each cut has an associated record in a source tape detailed data file.
- a company data file may contain individual records for the rights of the holders of the source tapes as well as company information about cable headends 208 .
- programs may be created from multiple tapes using multiple tape source cuts. The programs created by these source cuts may be stored and the individual cuts that make up the programs may be stored in a database record called program tape detail. Events may be created that consist of more than one program and details on individual programs that make up these events may be stored in a database file called event detail. Using this embodiment, events may be sold to subscribers.
- FIG. 10 and the description below is a more complete example of a database structure that can be used with the present invention.
- Each database file is listed below along with a description, record field details and explanation of relationships.
- the software data structures are defined after the description of the database structure.
- the SCHEDULE Database file 501 contains scheduling data for a single day. There are many schedule files, one for each day of schedule information. The actual filename for a given days schedule is assigned under computer control. Schedules are broken up into single days so they may be easily created, dispatched and archived. A cross-reference of days to computer-generated filenames is kept. Each scheduled event (either a program or a preview) has its own record entry and unique schedule ID This record references the corresponding scheduled program or preview and program type (either program or preview). The service to carry the scheduled program is also referenced. The starting date and time is also specified. Program duration is stored as a program attribute and is not included here. Note that program, preview and service records must be provisioned before they may be referenced in a schedule record.
- Another SCHEDULE Database file 500 contains a cross-reference of starting dates data to computer generated filenames.
- the PROGRAM Database file 502 contains Program records are contained in another database file 502 , with each record representing a source program. Each program has a unique program ID. If the program has a corresponding preview, it is also referenced. Program category and price are also referenced. The structure of the program category database may be modified if multiple categories per program are desired. Program name, description and duration are also given. Note that preview, program category and price category records must be provisioned before they may be referenced in a program record.
- the SERVICE Database file 503 contains service records with each record representing an available service.
- a service may be thought of as a virtual video channel.
- Virtual channels are non-existent channels which are mapped or created by hardware and software and is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,990,927, entitled ADVANCED SET TOP TERMINAL FOR A CABLE TELEVISION DELIVERY SYSTEM, incorporated herein by reference. Services are then mapped into local headend channels. Since initial distribution of video source material may be by Federal Express instead of a video channel, a service ID is used to identify the virtual channel being used for the desired service. 60 Minutes could be distributed and then be mapped into any desired local headend channel.
- the service database exists at both the national site and at each local headend 208 .
- Every service has a name, call letters and a description of the service. Every service also has an assigned local channel, A tape (or CD) machine ID and B tape (or CD) machine ID. Note that these last three parameters only apply to the service databases at the local headends 208 .
- the local headend service database performs an equivalent function of a channel map. For a further description of the cable headend function, see U.S. Pat. No. 5,600,364, entitled NETWORK CONTROLLER FOR A CABLE TELEVISION DELIVERY SYSTEM, incorporated by reference.
- the PREVIEW Database file 504 contains preview records with each record representing a source preview.
- a preview is like a program that is scheduled and distributed over a service. It differs from a program in that multiple previews may be distributed over the same service at the same time. Also, previews are free. Each preview specifies its location on the TV screen. This is generally done by selecting from a menu of valid screen positions. Unlike programs, previews do not reference program and price categories or other previews.
- the PROGRAM CATEGORY Database file 505 contains program category records with each record representing a valid program category. Examples of program categories are movies, sports, educational and news. Multiple program categories per program may be accommodated if desired with simple changes to the database structure.
- the PRICE CATEGORY Database file 506 contains price category records with each record representing a valid price category.
- Price categories are used to provide pricing consistency throughout the system. It also provides flexibility at the headend 208 to price various categories differently should this be desired. For example, distributed movies maybe assigned the price category movie at the national site. Each headend 208 could then charge differing amounts for their movies by manipulating their local price category database. If a current price structure needed to be changed, the change would be made once in the price category database instead of in each program record.
- the EVENT LOG Database file 510 contains event data for a single day. There are many event files, one for each day of event information. The actual filename for a given days events is assigned under computer control. Events are broken up into single days so they may be easily archived. A cross-reference of days to computer-generated filenames is kept.
- Each event record contains a unique ID, an event code, ID of the process that generated the event and date/time stamp of the event.
- the EVENT LOG FILENAME Database file 507 contains a cross-reference of start date to computer-generated filenames.
- the VIEWER LOG Database file 512 contains viewer log data for a single day. There are many viewer log files, one for each day of viewer log information. The actual filename for a given days viewer log data is assigned under computer control. Viewer log data is broken up into single days so it may be easily archived. A cross-reference of days to computer-generated filenames is kept.
- Each event record contains a unique ID, an event code, ID of the process that generated the event and date/time stamp of the event.
- the Marketing Information Interface 402 accesses the VIEWER LOG Database file as necessary to retrieve programs watched information 420 .
- the VIEWER LOG FILENAME Database file 509 contains a cross-reference of date to computer-generated filenames.
- the BILLING Database file 511 contains billing data for a single day. There are many billing files, one for each day of billing information. The actual filename for a given days billing data is assigned under computer control. Billing data is broken up into single days so it may be easily archived. A cross-reference of days to computer-generated filenames is kept.
- Each event record contains a unique ID, an event code, ID of the process that generated the event and date/time stamp of the event.
- the BILLING FILENAME Database file 508 contains a cross-reference of start date to computer-generated filenames.
- the NEWS FILENAME Database file 509 contains a cross-reference of date to computer-generated filenames.
- the SET TOP Database file 517 contains set top converter records with each record representing a unique set top converter. Each set top is assigned to a headend 208 . Set-top type, software version and serial number are also stored. Note that headend records must be provisioned before they may be referenced in a set top record.
- the HEAD END Database file 518 contains headend records with each record containing headend 208 data specific to a single headend 208 .
- Each headend 208 has a name, contact name, address, phone number, modem information, time zone (relative to GMT) and daylight savings time flag. This information may be stored in a separate database file called Cable Franchise Configuration (shown as 328 in FIG. 11).
- the NATIONAL Database file 515 contains a single record containing national site information. This includes site name, contact, modem information, time zone and daylight savings time flag.
- the CUSTOMER Database file 516 contains customer records with each record containing customer data specific to a single customer. This includes personal information (name, address, phone number, . . . ) and assigned set top converter.
- the TAPE MACHINE Database file 519 contains video tape or CD machine information. Each machine is assigned a unique ID, its control port address, its A/B switch address (if present), its assigned service and an A/B assignment. This database is only located at the headends 208 .
- the MESSAGE Database file 514 contains available system messages. They are detailed in nature and are pre-programmed. Each message has an associated function. To schedule a desired function, the appropriate message is referenced in the scheduler task list.
- the TASK Database file 513 contains scheduled tasks to be performed periodically. It is used in conjunction with a scheduler process to control computer system functions such as data dispatch and retrieval, archival and database maintenance. Each task is assigned a unique ID, start time, stop time, period in minutes) and task type (single, periodic, round-robin). Functions are actually scheduled by scheduling the appropriate message to be sent to the appropriate process. Available messages are kept in a separate database. Note that these messages must be provisioned before they may be referenced in a task record.
- FIG. 11 shows the basic operations that must occur in order for the packaged signal to be sent to the satellite 206 .
- External digital 280 and analog signals 282 must be received from television programming sources and converted to a standard digital format by a converter 284 , as described above.
- stored programs 286 must be accessed using banks of looping tape machines or other video storage/retrieval devices, either analog or digital, and converted to a standard digital format by the converter 284 prior to use by the CAP 260 .
- the programmer or program packager utilizing the CAP 260 must input a variety of information, including program information, in order to allow the CAP 260 to perform its function of generating program control information and packaging programs. Some of the information required by the CAP 260 is the date, time slots and program categories desired by the television programmer.
- the CAP 260 system includes one or more CPUs and one or more programmer/packager consoles, together identified in FIG. 4 as workstations 262 .
- each packager console includes one or more CRT screens, a keyboard, a mouse (or cursor movement), and standard video editing equipment.
- multiple packager consoles 262 may be needed for the CAP 260 .
- the first step in the operation of the CAP 260 is selecting the type of programming 300 , which will be packaged. Basically there are six broad categories in which most television programming can be classified: static programming 302 , interactive services 304 , pay per view 306 , live sports specials 308 , mini pays 310 , and data services 312 .
- Static programs are programs, which will show repetitively over a period of time such as a day or week. Static programs include movies showing repetitively on movie channels, children's programs, documentaries, news, and entertainment. Program services, with defined start and end time periods, behave like static programs and may be handled in a similar manner.
- Interactive services 304 typically include interactive programs using the Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) or other data streams synchronized with the programming to communicate interactive features (such as those used in education), and games. Using this feature, interactive home shopping programs are possible.
- Pay per view 306 is a program that is individually ordered by the subscriber. After ordering, the subscriber is authorized to access the program for a limited time, (e.g. three hours, two days, etc.). Live sports specials are live events usually related to sports which subscribers are unlikely to watch on taped delay.
- Mini pays 310 are channels to which existing set top converter boxes (not shown) and the set top terminals 220 of the present invention may subscribe.
- the subscriptions for mini pays 310 may be daily, weekly, or monthly.
- An example would be the Science Fiction channel.
- Data services 312 are services in which information is interactively presented to the subscriber using a modem or other high rate of speed data transfer. Some examples are Prodigy, services for airline reservations, and TV guide services (e.g. TV Guide X*PRESS, InSight, etc.). Data could also include classified or other forms of advertising.
- the packager begins the CAP processing using the Packager Data Entry Interface Software 400 and a workstation 262 . After selecting the type of programming, the packager must identify a pool of programs (within a category) to be packaged.
- the next CAP step varies for different program categories. For the category of live sports 308 , additional program interstitial elements 314 such as promos and other sports news maybe added before further processing.
- the next CAP 260 step is for one television program to be selected 316 . This is followed by each program individually being assigned dates to be played, a start date (for continuous play) and start times 318 .
- programs may be purchased by viewers in time slices (e.g., one week).
- the program information for these categories may then be processed for allocation of transponder space and setting of prices, as indicated at blocks 320 , 322 , respectively.
- Mini pays 310 and data services 312 require less processing by the CAP 260 .
- the CAP 260 may proceed to allocation of transponder space and pricing, block 320 , for the mini pays 310 .
- Data services in the preferred embodiment generally do not require allocation of transponder space and generally do not require price setting.
- the information for data services 312 may be directly processed for menu configuration, block 324 . In alternate embodiments, the data services 312 maybe processed through these portions of the CAP 260 program.
- the CAP 260 uses an interactive algorithm 416 to allocate transponder space 320 and set prices 322 .
- the factors weighed by the algorithm are: 1. buy rates of the program, 2. margin of profit on the program, 3. length of the program, 4. any contractual requirement that overrides other factors (such as requirement to run a specific football game live in its entirety).
- the information on buy rates of the program may be obtained by the Marketing Information Interface 400 from a Central Statistical and Billing Site, a Regional Statistical and Billing Site, the cable headend 208 or directly from the set top terminals 220 as will be described later.
- the CAP 260 must consider the priority levels of programming (e.g., FIG. 16 ) when allocating transponder space. Particularly, as in the preferred embodiment, transponders are assigned to three specific priority levels.
- the CAP may automatically (without packager intervention) access the MII 400 and the EIS to obtain necessary decision making information on transponder allocation.
- the CAP 260 proceeds to menu configuration 324 .
- the positioning of programs within the menu configuration 324 can have an effect on subscriber buy rates for the program.
- the processing of menu configurations 432 is also described in reference to FIG. 8.
- an algorithm accounting for either a manually assigned program importance or a calculated weight of the program importance is used to determine each programs position within the menu scheme. For instance, a popular program with a high profit margin may be assigned a high weight of importance and shown in a prominent place in the menu scheme. Alternatively, a high profit program with sagging sales may be manually assigned a prominent place in the program schedule to increase sales.
- the CAP 260 displays draft menus 434 or schedules (including priority levels) for programming.
- the packager may now manipulate the menus and schedules and make changes as necessary 436 .
- the packager may again display the menus or schedules and determine if any more changes are necessary 436 .
- the packager may use the Executive Information System with yield management as described below to assist in editing the menus and schedules.
- the packager may then instruct the CAP 260 to complete the process.
- the CAP 260 may begin the process of generating a program control information signal 326 (see also FIG. 8 software description at 442 and 404 ).
- the CAP 260 incorporates cable franchise configuration information 328 .
- unique cable franchise configuration information 328 is stored at the operations center 202 .
- the cable franchises upload changes to their specific franchise information 426 from time to time to the operations center 202 for storage 328 .
- a separate CPU (not shown) handles the management of the cable franchise information 328 .
- the CAP 260 From the stored cable franchise information 328 , the CAP 260 generates a cable franchise control information signal 330 unique to each franchise.
- the CAP 260 uses the unique cable franchise control information signals 328 and the menu configuration 324 information to generate the program control information signal 276 , as shown at function block 326 .
- the program control information that is unique to a particular cable franchise may be identified in various ways such as with a header. With the header identification, the cable headend 208 may extract the portions of the program control information signal 276 it needs. Now, the CAP 260 may complete its process by electronically packaging the programs into groupings 280 for the signal transmission and adding the program control information 276 to the packaged programs 334 to form a single signal for transmission. Through manual entries by the packager (PDEI 400 ) or by comparing against a list of programs, the CAP 260 will determine whether the programs are arriving from external sources 280 or sources internal 286 to the operations center 202 .
- the operations center 202 upon completion of the CAP's functions, the operations center 202 , or the uplink site 204 (FIG. 1), compresses 288 (if necessary), multiplexes 290 , modulates 292 and amplifies 294 the signal for satellite transmission 296 .
- the CAP 260 will also allow entry of time slots for local avails where no national programming will occur.
- FIG. 13 is a more detailed flow chart 340 of some of the functions performed by the CAP 260 after an initial program schedule has been entered and menu configurations generated. This flow chart highlights that some of the functions described earlier in reference to FIGS. 8, 9, 11 and 12 can be performed in parallel.
- the flow chart 340 shows six basic functions that are performed by the CAP 260 : (1) editing program schedule for local availability 342 (only for non-standard services, i.e., those services that are not national cable services); (2) generating program control information signals 344 ; (3) processing external programs 346 ; (4) processing internal programs 348 ; (5) processing live feeds 350 ; and, (6) packaging of program information 352 .
- the CAP 260 is capable of incorporating local programs and accommodating local availability for local television stations.
- the CAP 260 may perform three tasks simultaneously, generating program information signals 344 , processing external programs 346 and processing internal programs 348 .
- the CAP 260 automatically identifies external programs feeds 356 and identifies which external feed to request the external program 358 .
- the CAP 260 gathers and receives the external programming information 280 , 282 (FIG. 11) and converts it to a standard digital format 360 for use.
- the CAP 260 also identifies internal programs 362 (and defined program services), accesses the internal programs 364 (and program services), and converts them to a standard digital format 366 , if necessary.
- the CAP 260 identifies live signal feeds 368 that will be necessary to complete the packaged programming signal 370 . In its last task depicted in FIG. 13 the CAP 260 completes the packaging of the programs and combines the packaged program signal with the program control information signal 352 , amplifies the signal 354 and sends it out for further processing prior to uplink.
- FIG. 14 shows effective allocation of 750 MHZ of bandwidth (I MHZ to 750 MHZ) for television programming.
- bandwidth is allocated for both analog 226 and digitally compressed 227 signals.
- the bandwidth is divided so that each category of programs receives a portion of the bandwidth.
- These categories correspond with major menus of the set top terminal software.
- the representative categories shown in FIG. 14 include: (1) high definition TV (HDTV) made possible through the use of compression technology, (2) A La Carte Channel category which provides specialty channels for subscription periods such as monthly, and (3) pay-per-view.
- FIG. 15 shows a chart 228 of compressed channel allocation for a variety of programming categories 229 that have been found to be desirable to subscribers.
- the system 200 is able to more conveniently display similar programming with on-screen television menus. For example, in the movie category, which has the greatest allocation of channels, the same movie may be shown continuously and simultaneously on different channels. Each channel starts the movie at a different time allowing the subscriber to choose a more suitable movie starting time (e.g., every 15 minutes).
- the television programming and television program control information may be divided into parts such as priority one, two and three.
- the large bandwidth cable TV systems can accommodate all the parts of the television programming and all parts of the television programming control information.
- Those cable TV systems with a more limited bandwidth are able to use the program delivery system 200 by only accepting the number of parts that the cable system can handle within its bandwidth.
- Priority one television programming and menus 240 are accepted by all three systems.
- Priority two television programming and menus 242 are not accepted by the cable television system whose capacity is the smallest or in this case 330 MHZ (40 channels) system.
- Priority two television programming and menus 242 are accepted and used by the two larger capacity cable television systems shown.
- Priority three television programming and menus 244 are only used by the largest capacity television system which is capable of handling all three parts—Priority one, two and three programming and menu information.
- the program delivery system 200 may be utilized simultaneously by a variety of concatenated cable systems 210 (depicted in FIG. 1) with varying system capacities.
- the priority one division 240 By placing the heavily watched or more profitable programming and menus in the priority one division 240 , both users and owners of the cable TV systems will be accommodated as best as possible within the limited bandwidth.
- FIG. 17 shows three different cable headend 208 systems, each system receiving the entire satellite signal from the operations center 202 and stripping those parts of the signal that cannot be handled by the local cable system due to bandwidth limitations.
- the three local cable television systems shown have bandwidth limitations that correspond with the bandwidth limitations depicted in the previous FIG. 16.
- the programming options available to the viewer in the exemplary on-screen menu decreases.
- the operations center 202 is able to send one identical signal to the satellite 206 that is sent to all the cable headends 208 .
- Each cable headend 208 accepts the entire signal and customizes the signal for the local cable system by stripping those portions of the operations center signal that are unable to be handled by the local cable system.
- An alternate embodiment (not shown) requires the operations center 202 (and uplink sites 204 ) to send different signals for reception by different capacity cable headends 208 .
- a cable headend 208 may strip the unnecessary signal from the operations center 202 .
- the first method is for the signal originating from the operations center 202 (and uplink site 204 ) to be sent in portions with each portion having a separate header.
- the respective cable headend 208 would then recognize the headers and transmit to the concatenated cable system 210 only those signals in which the proper headers are identified. For example, using three concatenated cable systems shown in FIG. 17, the headers may be 001, 002, and 003.
- a wide bandwidth concatenated cable system can accept program signals with all three headers, while the narrowest bandwidth concatenated cable system may only be able to accept signals with a 001 header.
- a central operations center 202 must divide the program signal into three parts and send a separate leading header before each signal for each part. This method requires has the additional signal overhead of a header on the program signal. The header would be transmitted from time to time as necessary.
- a second method requires a set of transponders to be assigned to each priority level and the cable headend 208 to route signals from the transponders corresponding to the proper priority level for the concatenated cable system 210 .
- transponders one through nine may be assigned to priority level one, transponders ten through fourteen priorities level two, and transponders fifteen through eighteen assigned to priority level three.
- a concatenated cable system 210 capable of operating only at priority level two, would only receive signals from transponders one through nine, and ten through fourteen from the respective cable headend 208 .
- the program signal from transponders fifteen through eighteen would not be transmitted to the priority level two concatenated cable system.
- This method requires the operations center 202 to properly assign programs to transponders by priority level. This can be accomplished by the CAP using the software described earlier (e.g., FIG. 8 at 438 and 440 ).
- the third and the preferred method is for the cable headend 208 to pick and choose programming from each transponder and create a customized priority one, two, and three signal with chosen television programming.
- the cable headend 208 would then route the appropriate customized signal to each part of the concatenated cable system 210 that the cable headend 208 serves.
- This third method requires that the cable headend 208 have a component, such as the combiner (described in greater detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,682,195, entitled DIGITAL CABLE HEADEND FOR A CABLE TELEVISION DELIVERY SYSTEM, incorporated by reference), which can select among programs prior to combining the signal for further transmission on a concatenated cable system 210 .
- the third method requires the least coordination between operations center 202 and the cable headend 208 .
- the operations center 202 of the preferred embodiment is also capable of dynamically changing the bandwidth allocation for a particular category of programming.
- FIG. 18 depicts this dynamic change in bandwidth allocation from a typical weekday prime time signal 250 to a Saturday afternoon in October signal 252 (during the college football season).
- FIG. 18 highlights the fact that the bandwidth allocated to sports is limited to eight selections 251 during week day prime time 250 but is increased to sixteen selections 253 during a Saturday afternoon in October 252 .
- This dynamic increase in bandwidth allocation allows the system to accommodate changes in programming occurring on an hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, seasonal and annual basis.
- the operations center 202 can also dynamically change the menu capacities in order to accommodate the change in programming and bandwidth. For example, on a Saturday afternoon in October 252 , the major menu for sports may include a separate subcategory for college football. This subcategory would, in turn, have a separate submenu with a listing of four, six, eight, or more college football games available for viewing. In order to accommodate this dynamic menu change, the operations center 202 must add a submenu listing to the major sports menu, create a new or temporary submenu for college football, and allocate the necessary menu space on the college football submenu.
- the packaged television program signal is prepared for satellite transmission and sent from the operations center 202 to the cable headend 208 via satellite 206 .
- the television program signal may need to be compressed, combined/multiplexed, encoded, mapped, and modulated, up converted and amplified.
- This system which is intended to be compatible with existing C and Ku Band satellite transmission technologies, accepts video, audio and data signals ranging in signal quality, and input from a number of sources.
- the packaged program signal will be treated at a master control uplink site 211 prior to being transmitted to the satellite 206 .
- the channels must be multiplexed for each transponder carrier and sent to the satellite 206 dish that will provide the uplink.
- a variety of multiplexing schemes may be used in the system. In some situations, it may be advantageous to use different multiplexing schemes in different parts of the overall system. In other words, one multiplexing scheme may be used for satellite transmission 206 and a second remultiplexing scheme for the land transmission.
- Satellite multi-accessing schemes and architectures can be used with the system, including both single channel per carrier (SCPC) frequency division multiplex (FDM) and multiple channel per carrier (MCPC) time division multiplexing (TDM).
- SCPC single channel per carrier
- FDM frequency division multiplex
- MCPC multiple channel per carrier
- TDM time division multiplexing
- transponder is used for each satellite delivered channel.
- the preferred embodiment uses satellite transponders and compression ratios of 4:1 to 8:1 to achieve a capacity of 136 satellite delivered channels. More transponders or higher compression ratios can be used to deliver up to the channel capacity of any existing cable system.
- An example of a satellite that may be used is the AT&T Telstar 303 .
- the signal is transmitted from the satellite 206 to the cable headend 208 where a computer system including a digital switch treats the signal and delivers it through cables to a subscriber's home.
- a computer system including a digital switch treats the signal and delivers it through cables to a subscriber's home.
- multiple operations center 202 and multiple uplink sites 211 can be simultaneously utilized.
- the program control information signal may be divided into text and graphics, or video, text and graphics and then recombined at the set top terminal 220 using a text generator, graphics decompression, and video decompression as necessary.
- an analog cable TV system 205 can continue to exist alongside and within the digitally compressed system of the present invention.
- the digital transmissions do not effect the analog system.
- the analog cable signal may be transmitted simultaneously on the same cable as the digital signal.
- Cable headends 208 may continue to supply subscribers with local channels in an analog signal format.
- the operations center 202 and uplink 204 (FIG. 1) or master control site 211 (FIG. 3) are collocated.
- the operations center 202 and uplink site 204 may be located in different geographical places.
- functions and equipment within the operations center 202 may be remotely located.
- the program storage may be at a different site and the programs may be sent to the CAP 260 via landline.
- Alternate embodiments of the system 200 of the present invention may use multiple operations centers described above.
- the Master Operations Center performs the functions of managing and coordinating the Slave Operations Centers.
- the Master Operations Center coordination function may involve synchronization of simultaneous transmissions from multiple Slave Operations Centers.
- the Master Operations Center may include a system clock for synchronization.
- An efficient method of dividing tasks among multiple operations centers is to assign specific satellite transponders to each operations center 202 and to assign external program sources to the nearest operations center 202 .
- this division of resources may not always be possible.
- programming will be grouped into priority levels with each priority level likely to be assigned specific satellite transponders, it is also possible to assign each operations center 202 to a priority level.
- the Master Operations Center may be assigned priority level 1 and assigned 9 transponders.
- Slave Operations Center A may be assigned priority level 2 and 5 transponders, while Slave Operations Center B is assigned priority level 3 and 4 transponders.
- dynamic bandwidth allocation and dynamic menu capacity allocation becomes more complex and will be coordinated by the Master Operations Center.
- a delivery system may have multiple satellite uplinks.
- each operations center 202 has one or more uplink sites.
- Each operations center 202 controls the functions of its assigned uplink sites and may assign one site as a master uplink site.
- the set top terminal 220 will include the appropriate hardware to allow connection to the backyard satellite reception equipment, i.e., a typical communication port.
- the backyard satellite system will receive programming signals originating from the operations center 202 directly from the satellite transponders.
- No cable headend 208 is utilized with a backyard satellite system.
- the menu system within the set top terminal 220 will be programmed directly from the operations center 202 .
- the operations center program signals and control signals arrive at the set top terminal 220 essentially unchanged.
- an upstream communication mechanism must be in place at the subscriber's home (e.g., modem) to communicate information to the operations center 202 such as program ordering information.
- the set top terminals 220 can be equipped with a modem port for this upstream communication to the operations center 202 .
- the targeted advertising process an be executed at a regional or national operations center such as the operations center 202 .
- the process can also be executed at a local cable headend, such as the cable headend 208 , for example.
- FIG. 19 shows the network controller 214 of the present invention as part of the cable headend 208 operating in the expanded cable television program delivery system 200 .
- the network controller 214 monitors program selections at subscribers' homes, maintains accurate account and billing information and authorizes both subscriber channel access and particular set top terminals 220 to operate in the system.
- the network controller 214 performs its monitoring and control capability by working with other system components housed, in part, within the cable headend 208 .
- These cable headend components include a cable headend receiver 203 and a signal processor 209 .
- digital RF program signals 205 are received and processed for further distribution to a subscriber's home through a set top terminal 220 .
- the program signals 205 are digitally compressed and multiplexed signals that may be processed at the cable headend 208 or simply passed through to the cable distribution network. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, the program signals 205 are received by the cable headend receiver 203 and transmitted to the signal processor 209 .
- the signal processor 209 prepares the program signals 205 that are received by the cable headend 208 for transmission to each set top terminal 220 .
- the network controller 214 supervises and, in some cases, instructs the signal processor 209 in routing the signals to subscribers. In this way, the network controller 214 and signal processor 209 work with one another to perform basic control functions in the cable television system 200 . Typically, this work is accomplished by the transfer of control information, represented at 211 , between the network controller 214 and the signal processor 209 .
- the network controller 214 may be remotely located from the cable headend 208 , as long as it remains in communication with the signal processor 209 in order to exchange control information 211 .
- the program signals 205 received from the operations center 202 must be modified prior to being sent to the set top terminals 220 .
- These modifications to the program control information 211 are made by the network controller 214 working in conjunction with the signal processor 209 to send the STTCIS.
- the network controller 214 receives the program signals 205 , which include cable franchise specific information added by the operations center 202 .
- the network controller 214 modifies the program signals 205 , if necessary, and communicates the new information back to the signal processor 209 .
- the signal processor 209 then forwards the information to the set top terminal 220 in the form of the STTCIS, arrow 215 .
- the network controller 214 will modify the program signals 205 by adding additional information; however, the program signals 205 can be passed through the cable headend 208 to the set top terminal 220 without any modification.
- the signal processor 209 and network controller 214 are both capable of handling the addition of simple local availabilities (e.g., local advertisements) into the signal sent to the set top terminal 220 .
- the network controller 214 is also capable of handling more sophisticated local programming needs such as targeting video commercials, informercials, interactive programming and certain data services.
- the network controller 214 receives all electronic signals sent by the set top terminal 220 , including those sent in response to interactive service requests and some data service requests.
- the network controller 214 coordinates the necessary switching and access to allow the subscriber to enjoy these services.
- the network controller 214 has the capability of performing on the fly programming changes, assisting in (i) partitioning portions of subscriber's television screens (split screen video), (ii) selecting different audio signals for the same video (foreign languages), and (iii) interactive features.
- the network controller can create programming changes. For last minute changes to programming (such as for a local emergency or important regional events), an operator using the network controller 214 can modify the program signals 209 on the fly and change menus available to the subscriber. This accommodates short notice changes to program packaging that cannot be handled by the operations center 202 in advance.
- the network controller 214 can send the necessary control information to inform the set top terminal 220 to mask portions of a specific channel's video. For example, a video channel with a split screen showing four separate videos would require a three-fourths mask to focus the viewer on the featured video clip.
- Tiered programming allows different users to view different video even though they are tuned to the same channel.
- the network controller 214 may know the demographics of its subscribers through a database generated, in part, from prior subscriber choices, an interactive selection, or other means. Using the demographics information, the network controller 214 may target commercials to the correct audience by showing different commercials to subscribers with different demographics. Information on programs watched may also be used to target commercials. Even though subscribers will believe they are tuned to one channel, they will be switched to a different channel for the tiered video and targeted commercial. Alternatively, individual subscribers may be offered a menu with the option of several commercials from which to choose.
- multiple audio channels for television programming may be provided.
- the subscriber may be shown menus of programs available in the subscriber's native language.
- the function of choosing the correct audio to correspond to the selected language may be handled by either the set top terminal 220 or the network controller 214 depending upon the configuration.
- Local programming in several languages or additional audio channels for a foreign language translation of a popular television program may be provided by the network controller 214 .
- sign language may be similarly made available to certain set top terminals 220 for the deaf.
- the sign language video may be transmitted to the set top terminal 220 on a separate channel.
- a text overlay for the deaf may be easily produced on the lower part of the screen.
- the control signals for producing the text overlay may be handled by the network controller 214 .
- the network controller 214 can act as a central computer and provide intra-set top terminal interactive games, inter-set top terminal interactive games, computer bulletin board type services, message services (Electronic mail), etc. For example, a subscriber may play war games with six of his (anonymous) fellow subscribers each in their own home each operating a separate tank.
- the network controller 214 gathers the players using set top terminal 220 communications and acts as the referee.
- the network controller software plays the game and generates the video control signals to be transmitted to the set top terminals 220 . From the video control signals, the set top terminal generates a view of the playing field and shows movement of the tanks.
- a bulletin board or message system can be set up to discuss a particular program such as Twin Peaks Whodunit for enthusiasts with set top terminals 220 .
- FIG. 20 shows the network controller's major components and how these components relate with other components of the cable system 200 .
- the network controller's internal components include a network controller CPU 224 , databases 226 , control receiver 228 , local memory 230 and telephone modem 232 .
- the network controller's CPU 224 and databases 226 may be accessed through an operator control station, which may include peripherals such as a computer workstation, CRT display, and printer, represented by the workstation 234 .
- Information required to operate the network controller 214 will be stored in databases 226 and local memory 230 (e.g., either in RAM, ROM, or magnetic or optical Read/Write devices) at the cable headend 208 as well as in memory (RAM and/or ROM) within each subscriber's set top terminal 220 .
- two-way communications between the network controller 214 and set top terminal 220 will occur over cable lines.
- the network controller 214 and the set top terminals 220 also communicate using telecommunications systems such as plain old telephone service (POTS) and the Internet. Many other methods of communication, including those that do not require cables or wires, may be used with the present invention.
- POTS plain old telephone service
- Many other methods of communication including those that do not require cables or wires, may be used with the present invention.
- Using two-way communication interactive television programming can be accommodated through the network controller 214 .
- the preferred network controller 214 will be able to access set top terminals 220 via phone lines for trouble shooting, special features or sophisticated reprogramm
- the network controller CPU 224 controls the interface, depicted at 211 , between the network controller 214 and the signal processor 209 .
- This interface 211 allows control information to flow or transfer between the two cable headend 208 components.
- Standard RS-232 or RS-422 links, an IEEE-488 bus or other interface media may be used.
- program control information is passed through this interface 211 to the network controller CPU 224 from the signal processor 209 (i.e., the program control information having been sent to the signal processor 209 over satellite from the operations center 202 with the RF program signals 205 , not shown in FIG. 5).
- the network controller CPU 224 processes the program control information based on data stored in the network control databases. This processing includes modifying the program control information to accommodate regional programming needs.
- the network controller CPU 224 passes the program control information, including any modifications, back to the signal processor 209 for distribution over the cable system 200 , via the cable distribution network 236 .
- the network controller 214 provides programming and network control instructions to the set top terminals 220 through the signal processor 209 .
- the processing of program control information by the network controller CPU 224 can also make use of any data received by the network controller's control receiver 228 .
- the control receiver 228 is a microprocessor-based device that receives status reports directly from the set top terminals 220 .
- the status reports received by the control receiver 228 generally include information that allows the network controller 214 to track, among other things, a subscriber's program access history, as described below.
- the control receiver 228 can store the status reports internally in a local storage or memory device and transfer them to the network controller CPU 224 .
- the control receiver 228 is interfaced with the network controller CPU 224 using standard RS-232 or RS-422 links, an EEE-488 bus or the like.
- the network controller CPU 224 scans the control receiver 228 at a predetermined rate (e.g., once every few seconds) to initiate the status report transfer. Upon transfer, the network controller CPU 224 adds the data and control information in the status reports to the network control databases 226 by: checking for changes in previously received status information, processing the new information and updating the corresponding parameters in the network control databases 226 .
- the network controller 214 processes the information stored in its databases with any program control information relayed through the signal processor 209 from the delivery system's operations center 202 . This processing capability allows the network controller 214 to modify prior control signals and create new ones.
- the network controller 214 transfers both modified and unmodified control signals, along with any local combined program signals 205 , to the signal processor 209 to be combined with others program signals 205 for distribution over the cable system 200 .
- Tables A-C provide an example of some information that can be sent in the program control information signal to the set top terminals 220 .
- the program control information signal generated by the operations center 202 provides data on the scheduling and description of programs.
- the program control information signal may be sent through the network controller 214 or, in an alternate configuration, directly to the set top terminal 220 for display to the subscriber.
- the program control information signal is stored and modified by the network controller 214 and sent to the set top terminal 220 in the form of the STTCIS. This configuration can accommodate, among other things, differences in individual cable systems and possible differences in set top terminal 220 devices.
- the set top terminal 220 integrates either the program control signal or the set top terminal control information stream together with data stored in the memory of the set top terminal 220 , to generate on-screen menu displays for assisting the subscriber in choosing programs for viewing.
- program control information is being used to indicate control information coming from the cable headend 208 to the set top terminal 220 , whether it is sent directly from the operations center 202 , processed by the network controller 214 and then forwarded to the set top box (STTCIS), or transmitted over telephone lines.
- the types of information that can be sent using the program control signal includes: number of program categories, names of program categories, what channels are assigned to a specific category (such as specialty channels), names of channels, names of programs on each channel, program start times, length of programs, description of programs, menu assignment for each program, pricing, whether there is a sample video clip for advertisement for the program, and any other program, menu or product information.
- the program control information signal may be used periodically to reprogram or reconfigure a set top terminal 220 or group of set top terminals 220 (described in detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,798,785 entitled, REPROGRAMMABLE TERMINAL FOR SUGGESTING PROGRAMS OFFERED ON A TELEVISION PROGRAM DELIVERY SYSTEM, incorporated herein by reference).
- FIGS. 21 a and 21 b show a more detailed schematic of the components of the cable headend 208 , focusing on the interplay between the network controller 214 and the signal processor's 209 major hardware components.
- the network controller 214 uses, among other components, the signal processor 209 to implement its monitoring and control capabilities.
- the network controller 214 of the present invention will work with nearly any cable headend signal processing equipment, it is preferred that the signal processing equipment be modem equipment capable of handling digitally compressed video.
- FIG. 21 a depicts an embodiment of the basic signal processing capabilities of the cable headend 208 and shows connections to components of the network controller 214 .
- RF cable signals 205 are received at the headend 208 through a bank of integrated receiver demodulators (IRDs) 240 .
- IRDs integrated receiver demodulators
- Each IRD 240 includes customary RF processing equipment, including a low noise amplifier, a demodulator and other filtering devices (not shown).
- the demultiplexer 242 splits each cable TV signal into its respective video and audio signal components.
- the demultiplexer 242 extracts data from the cable television signals and inputs such data to the control CPU 244 .
- the control CPU 244 exchanges control information with the network controller 214 , as shown at 211 .
- This control information is exchanged between the signal processor's control CPU 244 and the network controller CPU 224 .
- the network controller 214 and signal processor 209 pass control information through the interface linking the two CPUs in order to perform any modifications to the program control information signal.
- the network controller CPU 224 oversees such modifications, accessing various network control databases 226 for guidance in instructing the signal processor's control CPU 244 .
- the instructions provided by the network controller 214 in turn guide the signal processor 209 in combining and/or adding programming signals and advertisements for transmission to the set top terminals 220 .
- the local insertion component 246 of the signal processor 209 allows the control CPU 244 to execute the instructions received from the network controller 214 and insert any local programming and advertisements. Once such regional programming and advertisements have been inserted, the local insertion component 246 passes the various signals to a multiplexer 248 that combines the various programming and advertising signals. The output of the multiplexer 248 is transferred to RF modulator 250 that disseminates the composite video and audio signals to the set top terminals 220 . The data extracted from the cable television signals by the demultiplexer 242 , which is also sent to the control CPU 244 , is transmitted to the set top terminal 220 using a separate RF modulator 250 .
- the network controller 214 accommodates two-way RF data communications with the set top terminals 220 .
- the network controller's control receiver 228 receives upstream data transmissions from the set top terminals 220 . These upstream data transmission capabilities are described in detail below.
- FIG. 21 b diagrams another embodiment of a basic cable headend 208 having a network controller 214 and more sophisticated signal processing equipment.
- RF cable television signals 205 are fed into a bank of IRDs 240 as described above. These signals 205 are demultiplexed into individual video and audio signal components, with data being extracted and sent to the control CPU 244 . The individual video and audio signal components are fed into a digital logic circuit 256 that is flexible enough to select individual video and audio signals for repackaging.
- the network controller 214 oversees such repackaging by: (i) receiving the program control information from the control CPU 244 , (ii) modifying or manipulating the signal as necessary, and (iii) transferring the modified program control information signal back to the control CPU 244 .
- the control CPU 244 may insert local avails into the digital logic system 256 and execute the various selections of individual video and audio signals for subsequent transmission to the set top terminals 220 .
- the outputs of the digital logic circuitry 256 are transferred to a serializer 258 that recombines all the signals into a serialized format.
- the serially formatted signals are in turn transferred to RF modulators 250 for distribution over the cable network 200 .
- the selection and recombining components of the signal processing equipment are described in greater detail in U.S. Pat. No.
- the signal processor 209 may, acting alone or in conjunction with control instructions from the network controller 214 , incorporate local programming and/or local advertisements into the program signals and forward the revised signal to the set top terminals 220 .
- the signal processor 209 must combine the local signal in digital or analog form with the program signals 205 received from operations center 202 . If a local cable system 200 uses a compression algorithm or standard that is different than the one used by the operations center 202 , the signal processor 209 must also decompress and recompress incoming signals so they may be properly formatted for transmission to the set top terminals 220 .
- the signal processor 209 performs any necessary signal decryption and/or encryption.
- FIG. 22 diagrams an alternative embodiment of a digital/analog cable headend 208 .
- this embodiment includes decompression and recompression capabilities, showing the types of signal processing components that the network controller 214 may control.
- the cable headend 208 receiver front-end indicated at 260 , demodulates the received transponder signals 205 , which may contain four, six, eight or more audio/video channels of information, into a digital bit stream of multiplexed digitized MPEG or MPEG 2 format video.
- the signal processor 209 receives the multiplexed signals and initially performs any demultiplexing required to process the received signals.
- the demultiplexers 242 separate the multiplexed signals into separate individual MPEG or MPEG 2 format digital channels.
- the demultiplexer 242 may have four, six, eight or more cross connects to the combiner 264 .
- the outputs of the demultiplexers 242 are selectively enabled by the control CPU 244 . Those outputs of the multiplexer 248 that are enabled are then input to the combiner.
- Decrypting may be necessary and can be conducted by a separate decrypting device 262 included as part of the signal processor's internal components.
- the signal processor's control CPU 244 may be controlled by a remote site (such as a national site) via a modem or similar connection 266 . Therefore, the remote site is able to control the output of the demultiplexers 242 .
- the inputs of the combiner 264 may be selected by the control CPU 244 .
- the control CPU 244 is able to control which television programs are combined and transmitted to the viewers.
- the combiner 264 combines the enabled or selected outputs of the demultiplexers 242 into the proper format and outputs the signals through a compressor 268 , and an encryptor 270 (if desired), to a digital modulator 272 .
- the modulator 272 outputs a modulated RF carrier combined with other carriers onto the cable distribution network 236 .
- the set top converter terminals 220 in subscribers' homes select and demodulate a particular channel selected by the user. As selections are made, the set top terminal 220 stores the programs accessed in its local storage for later transmission to the network controller 214 at the cable headend 208 .
- the network controller 214 is equipped to receive information from the set top terminals 220 on a regular or random basis. Upstream information received from the set top terminals 220 typically includes, for example, program access data gathered at each set top terminal 220 . Such information maybe communicated to the network controller 214 through a variety of methods including any of the following methods: (1) cyclic polling, (2) random access, and (3) telephone modems and the Internet. Cyclic polling and random access methods make use of two-way RF.
- the preferred embodiment employs a cyclic polling method.
- a roll-call polling scheme is preferred over other schemes such as hub polling or token-passing since roll-call polling provides the greatest degree of centralized control.
- program access information is stored at each set top terminal 220 until it is polled by the network controller 214 for information retrieval using a polling request message format 920 as shown previously in FIG. 6 a.
- the network controller 214 interrogates each set top terminal 220 sequentially, one by one.
- the network controller 214 is designated as the central controller of the cable distribution network 200 and is responsible for control of the communications links between itself and the set top terminals 220 . This control includes issuing commands to the set top terminals 220 and receiving responses back from the set top terminals 220 .
- the network controller 214 instructs the signal processor 209 to transmit to each set top terminal 220 a polling request, which asks whether a set top terminal 220 has any information to transmit.
- the set top terminals 220 are identified by the unique address and set top terminal identifier 928 . It is preferred that the set top terminal 220 transmit information and messages to the network controller 214 only when given permission by the network controller 214 to do so.
- the set top terminal 220 is given permission to transmit a polling response in the form of a status report that includes any such access information.
- the network controller's control receiver 228 is tasked with the receipt of set top terminal 220 polling responses or status reports.
- These status reports generally include information that allows the network controller 214 to track a subscriber's program access history.
- the control receiver can store the status reports locally and/or transfer them to the network controller CPU 224 .
- the network controller CPU 224 immediately processes each polling response as it is received from each set top terminal 220 .
- the network controller CPU 224 updates pertinent databases 226 with the received information, and then sends another polling request to the next set top terminal 220 on its list.
- a set top terminal 220 with no information to transmit so indicates in a reply to the network controller 214 .
- the network controller 214 acquires the information needed to operate the system 200 .
- the network controller 214 sends signals to the set top terminals 220 to authorize both their operation and access to specific channels. If, for example, a subscriber has failed to pay a recent bill, the network controller 214 can deauthorize the subscriber's set top terminal 220 .
- the network controller 214 checks the subscriber's account for good standing by reading the proper database file. After the check, the network controller 214 then either authorizes or deauthorizes access by the set top terminal 220 using the data transmitted in a modified program control information signal. As a result, the cycle requires a series of requests and responses to operate.
- FIG. 6 b shows an example frame format 920 ′ for the status reports received from the set top terminals 220 during the polling cycle.
- This frame format is substantially identical to the polling request message format 920 (FIG. 6 a ), and includes: (1) a leading flag at the beginning of the message, (2) an address field, (3) a subscriber region designation, (4) a set top terminal identifier that includes a polling command/response (or P/F) bit, (5) an information field, and (6) a trailing flag at the end of the message, each designated by a common number with respect to FIG. 6 a, but with the prime indicator (′) added.
- P/F polling command/response
- the second method for the network controller 214 to receive information from the set top terminals 220 is through the use of a random access scheme.
- individual set top terminals 220 can send control-related messages to the network controller 214 without being polled.
- This scheme is particularly useful in networks where subscriber regions include potentially large numbers of subscribers. High concentrations of subscribers may be found, for example, in large metropolitan areas. In such cases, the polling cycle can be replaced with a more sophisticated random access strategy such as carrier-sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD).
- CSMA/CD carrier-sense multiple access with collision detection
- each set top terminal 220 must listen before it transmits and then does so only if it senses an idle medium.
- a given set top terminal 220 can transmit its messages. Any messages sent from a set top terminal 220 to the network controller 214 would set the P/F bit 930 ′ to aA0 position to indicate that the message is not in response to any command or polling request.
- CSMA/CD other random access schemes can be used with the system, such as CDSL.
- the third method for the network controller 214 to receive information from the set top terminals 220 is through the use of telephone modems or the Internet.
- the set top terminals 220 communicate program access information and orders to the network controller 214 using telephone modems.
- the set top terminals 220 are equipped with a modem port to facilitate such operation.
- communications between a given set top terminal 220 and the network controller 214 can be established over telephone lines when cable traffic or other primary traffic is congested.
- the preferred method of using telephone modems is in combination with a control or hit signal from the network controller 214 .
- a group (or region) of set top terminals 220 is hit simultaneously by the network controller 214 via the cable. Only those set top terminals 220 within the group that have data for the network controller 214 call the network controller 214 by modem.
- the network controller 214 is equipped with a bank of modems (organized to roll-over telephone calls) to answer the incoming calls.
- the set top terminals 220 connect directly to the Internet, using for example, standard telephone lines.
- the set top terminals 220 then provide access to web sites and databases on the Internet, and also provide communications with the cable headends 208 and the operations center 202 .
- the set top terminals 220 may also connect to the Internet via a separate processor, such as a stand-alone personal computer.
- the use of the cyclic polling scheme depicted in FIGS. 6 a and 6 b, is preferred. Polling is preferred because it allows the network controller 214 to conduct and control communications with set top terminals 220 over the cable network in an orderly fashion. In particular, the network controller 214 can schedule data retrieval by polling the set top terminals 220 one by one. A random access method, on the other hand, does not allow the network controller 214 to maintain such orderly communications. Instead, the network controller 214 receives data from the set top terminals 220 at random, depending on when the cable medium is idle.
- the third method which uses telephone modems and/or the Internet, is less desirable than the polling method since the use of modems does not allow for upstream interactivity over the cable medium.
- any polling responses and upstream interactivity is received by the network controller's control receiver 228 as shown in FIG. 23, depicting the components of the control receiver 228 , which includes a demodulator 310 and demultiplexer 313 to demodulate and demultiplex transmissions received from any set top terminal 220 in the cable distribution network 200 .
- the control receiver 228 transfers, through a control buffer 315 , the received information to the network controller CPU 224 for processing.
- Processing is accomplished by the network controller CPU 224 .
- Operator instructions are input to the network controller CPU 224 through the operator control station 234 that includes, for example, a computer/workstation with a CRT display, printer and other peripherals. Multiple operator control stations 234 can be used to assist in control operations.
- Regional operator control stations may be used and may include multiple operator control stations each assigned to a particular subscriber region corresponding to a geographic region where set top terminals 220 are located. Thus, each regional operator control station is assigned to a subscriber region, providing monitoring and control capabilities over such regions. All regional program control information is transferred to the network controller CPU 224 for processing, as in the case where a single control station 234 is used. Likewise, during this processing, portions of the network control databases 226 may also be updated.
- No set number of databases 226 is required for the network controller 214 to perform its operations, and a single temporary database may be used. In the preferred embodiment, however, the network controller 214 uses several databases (indicated at 226 ) that are accessed during network control operations. These databases 226 are identified in FIG. 23 and include: (1) the Viewer Profile database 314 , (2) the Account/Billing database 316 , (3) the Program Library database 318 , (4) the Program Scheduling database 320 , (5) the Advertisement Library database 322 , and (6) the Advertisement Scheduling database 324 .
- FIG. 24 shows one example of a network controller's basic database structure including the databases identified in the preceding paragraph.
- the data stored in these databases is not simply raw data. Rather data may be processed, correlated and appropriately indexed to create a true relational database 226 .
- the Viewer Profile database 314 includes: (i) a Set top ID File, (ii) a Subscriber Region File, (iii) a Customer ID File and (iv) a Viewer Log File, the latter three files being indicated generally as a file group 332 .
- the Set top ID File 330 common to each of the databases comprising the network controller's database 226 , contains set top converter records with each record representing a unique set top terminal 220 . Examples of information stored in this file includes set top terminal type, software version and set top terminal identification/serial number.
- the Set top ID File 330 contains the key data that links each relational database with one another, as described below.
- the Subscriber Region File includes information such as headend 208 assignment, regional operator control workstation assignment and a designation for the subscriber's geographical area.
- the Customer ID and Viewer Log Files, part of file group 332 include the subscriber's personal information, such as name, address and telephone number, and information on the subscriptions to cable services for each customer as well as a personal profile for each viewer, respectively.
- the personal profile consists of demographic information that may be gathered in a number of ways.
- the set top terminal 220 builds the personal profile for each viewer and stores the information in a memory file by viewer name.
- the viewer answers a series of questions presented on a series of menu screens.
- These personal profile screens request the viewer to input information such as name, sex, age, place of birth, place of lower school education, employment type, level of education, amount of television program viewing per week, and the number of shows in particular categories that the viewer watches in a given week such as, sports, movies, documentaries, sitcoms, etc. Any demographic information that will assist the set top terminal 220 in targeting advertisements to the viewer may be used.
- the personal profile can be compiled using other methods. For instance, the information can be gathered using questionnaires sent by mail and subsequently entered in the Viewer Profile Database 314 by the network controller's control station operator.
- a simulated profile can be generated using an algorithm similar to that described below that analyzes access history and viewing habits. Using test information generated from a statistically significant number of viewers, the simulated profile algorithm estimates the viewer's age, education, sex and other relevant information. The analysis requires reviewing the viewer's programs watched and statistically comparing the viewer's programs watched with the test group. Also, the algorithm can place the subscriber or viewer in a viewer category. This analysis is transparent from the subscriber's point of view and attempts to accurately profile the viewer. Various viewers or viewer categories can later be targeted with different advertisements.
- the Account/Billing database 316 includes (i) the Set top ID File 330 , and (ii) an Account History File, and (iii) a Billing File, the latter two files indicated at 338 .
- the Set top ID File contains information unique to each subscriber, including set top terminal type, software version and set top terminal identification/serial number.
- the Account History and Billing Files contain information concerning each subscriber's past bills and account record and information on the most recent bill, including data from which the next billing report can be generated, respectively.
- the Program Library database 318 include (i) the Set top ID File 330 , and (ii) a Programs File, (iii) a Preview File, (iv) a Program Category File, (v) a Price Category File and (vi) Service File, the latter five files identified at 344 .
- the Set top ID File identifies each set top terminal 220 by identification number.
- the Programs File contains information on every program offering in the system, including name, length and type of program.
- the Preview File contains information on previews for specialty programs stored in the Programs File.
- the Program Category File contains a set of categories into which each program may be placed, such as movies, sports, science fiction and news.
- the Price Category File contains information on pricing for various categories of programs, grouping programs and services into categories by price.
- the Service File maintains information on the various cable services available in the system 200 .
- the Program Scheduling database 320 includes (i) the Set top ID File 330 , and (ii) an Access History File, (iii) a Programs Watched Matrices File and (iv) a Program Scheduling Library, the latter three files indicated at 350 .
- the Access History File contains information on the programs that the set top terminal 220 has accessed and the Programs Watched Matrices contains information on the number of programs watched in a given program category during different times of day. Relative to the Programs Watched Matrices file, a programs watched matrix is shown in FIG. 27 and further described below.
- the Program Scheduling File contains information on the times of day and the corresponding programs that are being offered for viewing at each subscriber location.
- the Advertisement Library database 322 includes (i) the Set top ID File 330 , and (ii) an Advertisements File, and (iii) an Advertisement Category File, the latter two files being indicated at 354 .
- the Advertisements File contains information on every advertisement in the system, including name, length and type of advertisement, and the Advertisement Category File contains a set of categories into which each advertisement can be placed.
- the Advertisement Scheduling database 324 includes (i) the Set top ID File 330 , and (ii) an Advertisement Selection File, and (iii) an Advertisement Targeting File, the latter two files identified at 358 .
- the Advertisement Selection File contains information on the advertisements that have been offered to each subscriber and keeps track of the ones that have been selected.
- the Advertisement Targeting File contains information on the advertisements and advertisement categories that have been chosen by the system as being of the most interest to a specific subscriber.
- the network control databases 314 , 316 , 318 , 320 , 322 , 324 comprising the database 226 are relational databases generally keyed to information in a single file.
- the relational key is a set top terminal 220 identification number stored in Set top Terminal ID File 330 , as shown in FIG. 11.
- This set top terminal identification number allows the database files that correspond to a particular subscriber to be linked together by a common reference.
- the databases are structured such that subscribers are referenced in each database file by a unique set top terminal identification number. In this way, each database may be accessed based on set top terminal identification number alone.
- the network controller CPU 224 can access and process information pertaining to that subscriber from any of the above described database files.
- a unique subscriber identification number may be added to the database 226 to group the set top terminals 220 by customer.
- the set top terminal identification as a relational key, many additional databases may be created that correlate and store pieces of subscriber-specific information from the six databases and underlying files.
- FIG. 25 shows the major software routines initiated and executed by the network controller CPU 224 . These routines are: (1) the Modifying PCI routine 370 , (2) the Polling Cycle routine 372 , (3) the Advertisement Targeting routine, and (4) the Account/Billing routine 376 . Together, these routines, along with the operator entry and update functions 380 , 382 , respectively, enable the network controller 214 to perform its major functions.
- the Modifying PCI routine 370 is the software that enables the network controller 214 to modify the program control information (PCI) signal received from the signal processor 209 .
- This software routine generally allows the network controller CPU 224 to modify the PCI signal content so that changes and additions in programming and advertisements can be accommodated. Such changes and additions include access authorizations and deauthorizations in the form of authorization and deauthorization messages, respectively.
- the Polling Cycle routine 372 is the software sequence that interactively executes the network controller's polling cycle allowing the network controller 214 to schedule and perform polling of all set top terminals 220 operating in the system 200 .
- the software also provides the network controller 214 with a means of processing status reports received from set top terminals 220 in response to polling requests. For a random access system (not depicted), the software of this routine 372 would be changed.
- the Alternate Advertisement Targeting routine 374 is the software that generates packages of television commercials and advertisements geared towards particular viewers and makes use of a viewer's demographic information and viewing habits to determine those advertisements that are of most interest to that particular viewer. In so doing, the routine 374 outputs packages of advertisements targeted towards each viewer or groups of viewers.
- the Account/Billing routine 376 is the software that the network controller CPU 224 runs to generate billing reports for each set top terminal 220 . In general, the routine 376 correlates the programs accessed with pricing information to generate each report.
- FIG. 26 shows a software flow diagram for the network controller's Polling Cycle routine 372 , which interactively executes the network controller's polling cycle.
- the number of iterations corresponds to the number of set top terminals 220 being polled.
- the network controller CPU 224 initiates the Polling Cycle sequence periodically on a predetermined basis, block 400 . Typically, this period is set by the operator at the network controller's operator control station 234 at once per day, although other periods (e.g., multiple times per day or once per week) can be used.
- the network controller CPU 224 Upon initiation of the sequence 400 , as depicted at function block 402 , the network controller CPU 224 reads the Set top Terminal ID File 330 and begins generating, block 404 , a polling request frame (shown in FIG. 6 a and described above) for the first set top terminal 220 identified in the file 330 . Once the necessary polling request information is complete, the frame is transferred to the signal processor CPU 244 through the interface between the signal processor 209 and network controller 214 . After transfer to the signal processor 209 , the frames may be transmitted to the set top terminals 220 , block 406 . Meanwhile, the network controller's control receiver 228 awaits the corresponding response.
- the network controller CPU 224 Upon receipt of a polling response, as depicted at block 408 , the network controller CPU 224 reads the received information from the control buffer 315 .
- the network controller 214 reads the information field of the polling response frame format, as described above.
- the network controller CPU 224 processes, indexes and stores the data in an appropriate format, updating the corresponding database files with the information received, block 410 .
- the processing and indexing of the raw data into a relational database 226 is important to the ability of the network controller 214 to quickly take actions such as targeting commercials without lengthy processing time.
- the polling routine subsequently returns to the Set Top Terminal ID File 330 , as shown at decision block 412 , to continue the polling cycle for the next set top terminal 220 identified in the file 330 .
- the routine 372 sequences through the last set top terminal 220 , the cycle is complete and the routine 372 ceases until the next polling period.
- FIG. 27 shows an example of a 30-day programs watched matrix, denoted 351 , for one set top terminal 220 .
- the matrix 351 is divided into six rows, corresponding to six four-hour time slots.
- the columns of the matrix 351 are divided, as necessary, by the program categories available for viewing.
- Each entry in the matrix 351 denotes the number of programs watched in a particular program category and time period.
- the polling response routine determines which time slot and category of program numbers in the matrix 351 need to be increased.
- entries in the matrix 351 are updated upon receipt of each set top terminal's polling status report, thereby maintaining a running total of the programs watched.
- the matrix 351 shows that this set top terminal 220 has been used to watch ten movies during the past month.
- the program watched identifying information is stored in addition to the running totals in the Programs Watched Matrices file. Use of programs watched matrices is further described in the following section describing the Advertisement Targeting routine.
- FIG. 28 shows the seven primary functions of an alternate advertisement targeting routine 374 .
- the function of this routine is to target video for set top terminals 220 based on historical viewing data and other data that is available at the network controller 214 . Advertisements that may be targeted include video, commercials and infomercials, with infomercials being time varying video segments (e.g., thirty seconds, fifteen minutes).
- the alternate advertisement targeting routine 374 is described as executed at the cable headend 208 . However, as previously noted, the same routine could be executed at a regional or national operations center such as the operations center 202 .
- block 420 the first subroutine, identified at function block 422 , accesses the programs watched matrices (exemplified by matrix 351 ) stored in the Programs Watched Matrices file in the Program Scheduling database 320 .
- the subroutine uses a unique set top terminal ID to access a specific matrix for one set top terminal 220 . These matrices are maintained and updated by the polling response routine.
- the second subroutine, function block 424 which develops other matrices based on other available information, is an optional subroutine not required for the functioning of the system. For groups of set top terminals 220 or for each individual set top terminal 220 , matrices may be developed based on the demographic information, billing information, pricing information, age information and other information which may be stored in the network controller 214 databases.
- the third subroutine, block 426 processes all matrices through a set of correlation algorithms.
- this subroutine 426 takes matrices developed in the first two subroutines and processes the matrices until reaching a final matrix.
- FIG. 29 diagrams an embodiment of this matrices processing subroutine 426 that is called by the advertisement targeting sequence shown in FIG. 28.
- the subroutine 426 is initiated 427 and then accesses or queries, block 428 , the programs watched file and gathers information regarding either an individual subscriber or a group of subscribers.
- the software can gather the programs watched information in this way for individual subscribers or a set of subscribers.
- the routine 426 selects and groups, function block 430 , programs watched based on program categories and time slots.
- the software initially takes each program category (e.g., sports, news, movies, etc.) and establishes the number of programs watched for a given time slot.
- the time slots may be set to any length of time, including, for example, one, two, three or four hour time frames.
- the software will loop through such a counting process for each group and timeslot and then proceed to build a programs watched matrix, block 432 , based on the program categories and time slots. Essentially, all programs watched in a particular category and time slot will be entered into the programs watched matrix.
- the subroutine 426 will process the matrix for a given subscriber or node of subscribers through the correlation algorithms.
- a number of correlation algorithms may be used to weight each selected program category group. For example, as shown at block 434 , a sum of squares algorithm may be used to determine the weighting. Once the groups have been weighted, the weighted groups will be correlated, as at block 436 , with various advertisements stored in the network control databases. The software can then select a set of the most heavily weighted advertisements for transmission to individual subscribers or sets of subscribers in a cable distribution network node. Having determined the weightings of each group and prioritizing the groups accordingly, the subroutine returns 438 to the advertisement targeting sequence 374 of FIG. 28.
- the fourth subroutine uses the final matrix developed by the correlation and weighing algorithm described above, to select a grouping (or selective filter) for each set top terminal 220 .
- the final groupings of advertisement that may be sent to the set top terminals 220 or group of set top terminals 220 may use a subroutine as diagramed in FIG. 30.
- the subroutine 428 depicted in FIG. 30 is called or initiated by the advertisement targeting sequence 374 of FIG. 28 in order to determine the final groupings. Basically, this subroutine selects a set of commercials that will be used in the chosen groupings, function block 444 . This selection process typically involves advertisements from various advertisement categories (from a number of advertisers which have purchased air time). Each advertisement will subsequently be assigned a number of times that it will be shown in a given time frame, block 446 . This frequency of display may be based on various factors, including the number of requests and cost paid by the respective advertisers to have the commercial displayed.
- Such factors are used in the next step of the subroutine, block 448 , which assigns a weighting to specific commercials or advertisements in each advertisement category or group. These weightings are used to prioritize the advertisements that will be sent to individual set top terminals 220 or group of set top terminals 220 .
- the software executes its correlation algorithm, 450 , using selected criteria (i.e., the various factors used to weight the advertisements) as well as the output of each programs watched matrix. Any number of correlation algorithms and weighting algorithms may be used with the software, including the sum of squares weighting algorithm described above.
- the results from the correlation algorithm subsequently determine the advertisements and programming material that is sent to the signal processor 209 for distribution over the cable network, as represented at block 452 .
- the network controller CPU 224 updates the account and billing database based on the ads that are sent to the signal processor 209 for subscriber viewing, as shown at block 454 .
- These billing database updates allow the advertisers to track the costs and frequency of the advertisements targeted to specific set top terminals 220 or nodes of set top terminals 220 .
- the subroutine returns to the advertisement targeting sequence shown in FIG. 28, block 456 .
- set top groupings (1 through 5) 460 are shown.
- the number of set top groupings available may be determined by the bandwidth available to transmit commercials.
- the bandwidth of the system will limit the number of commercials that are available at the set top terminal 220 at any given time.
- the fifth subroutine prepareds set top group information for transmission to the set top terminals 220 .
- This subroutine 466 modifies the PCI signal and includes set top group information in the information field of the frame format given earlier. The various methods for transmitting the group information to the set top terminals 220 are described below.
- the sixth subroutine, block 468 selects the target video and is the last decision-making process in targeting a commercial for a viewer and, can be performed by either the set top terminal 220 or the network controller 214 .
- targeted advertising can be based on watching a specific program or a category of programs.
- the set top terminal 220 performs this last step by correlating (or matching) the program being watched by the viewer with the set top group information that has been previously transmitted by the network controller 214 . For example, using the multiple channel architecture, and referring back to Tables E and F, the set top terminal 220 compares the Group Assignment matrix to the switching plan, switches program channels as appropriate, and the targeted advertisement is then displayed, as shown at block 470 .
- FIG. 31 shows an exemplary table matching set top terminal groups 460 and program category being watched 470 with a specific channel (continuously) showing commercials.
- the commercial channels are shown in FIG. 32 at 474 and are assigned Roman numerals I through X, for example. The number of set top groupings and channels showing commercials can vary.
- FIG. 32 shows a division of available bandwidth to carry ten videos, ten commercial channels. In this example, the channels 474 are numbered 101 - 110 .
- the network controller 214 will transmit group information to a set top terminal shown as row names 460 on FIG. 31.
- the network controller 214 will also transmit data which informs the set top terminal 220 which of the multiple commercial channels 474 is assigned to a television program category shown as Columns 470 on FIG. 31.
- Each set top terminal 220 only requires the data related to that set top terminal's assigned group (or row). For example, in FIG. 31, the set top terminal in group 1 (row 1 ) is provided with data on the commercial channel which are assigned for sports programs as I, children's programs as IV and movie category as III. In this manner, each set top terminal 220 is only required to store information related to its own grouping.
- a set top terminal 220 which is in group 1, only needs to store the information related to group 1, which is found in row 1 of FIG. 31.
- This information includes one commercial channel assignment for each of the eight program categories. Using this information, the set top terminal 220 first determines the specific program or the category of the television program currently being watched and then is able to quickly determine which channel to switch the viewer when an advertisement availability occurs during the program.
- the network controller 214 can also perform the step of correlating program category watched 470 and set top terminal grouping 460 to select the target video.
- the network controller 214 performs this function by gathering information on the program currently being watched by the viewer. To obtain this information in a polling system, set top polling must occur on a real-time basis (i.e., 10 minutes).
- the set top terminal programming will default to the existing commercial during a program if it is missing any of the information needed to determine which of the continuously playing commercial channels to show.
- the default that is shown on the regular programming channel will correlate with one of the assigned set top groupings and program categories.
- FIG. 31 shows, at 478 , that the default has been assigned to set top terminal grouping 3 for program categories children and entertainment.
- the methods to transmit targeted commercials to a set top terminal 220 are: (1) the Multiple Channel method; (2) the Storage method (i.e., storing advertisements in the set top terminal); (3) the Additional Bandwidth method (or individual video access); and (4) the Split Screen method.
- Each method has certain advantages and disadvantages.
- the Multiple Channel method requires a set top terminal 220 transparently to change channels during a scheduled advertisement from the channel of the currently viewed program to the channel which is carrying the targeted commercial. Although this channel changing method may be transparent to the viewer, it creates difficulty in terms of timing and synchronizing the commercials to begin and end during an advertisement availability occurring in the normally scheduled program.
- the channel changing is done within the set top terminal 220 using the existing tuner(s).
- FIG. 33 shows the set top terminal hardware components that accommodate channel switching within a single 6 MHZ channel bandwidth. These components include a tuner 603 , a demodulator 606 , a demultiplexer 609 , a multiplexer 604 , a decompressor 622 , a microprocessor 602 , and local memory M.
- the tuner 603 operates by tuning to a specific 6 MHZ bandwidth that includes the displayed video and a number of channels carrying advertisements.
- the demodulator 606 processes these signals and sends them to the demultiplexor 609 , which converts the received signal into separate program and advertisement signals.
- the microprocessor 602 coordinates the demultiplexing of the programming signals. Once the video signal pauses for a commercial break, the microprocessor 602 instructs the multiplexer 604 to select the advertisement or advertisements for decompression and subsequent display on the subscriber's television.
- This hardware configuration allows the set top terminal 220 to switch between channels within the 6 MHZ bandwidth and display various advertisements for viewing, regardless of the video currently being watched by the subscriber.
- the hardware configuration shown in FIG. 34 is used.
- the microprocessor 602 instructs the tuner 603 to return to another 6 MHZ channel bandwidth, as represented by bi-directional arrow A.
- the microprocessor 602 and tuner 603 allow targeted advertisements, which have been transmitted in another 6 MHZ bandwidth, to be tuned with minimal acquisition time and delay.
- this configuration allows the set top terminal 220 to tune outside a given 6 MHZ bandwidth (to another 6 MHZ bandwidth) in order to select a targeted advertisement for display.
- This alternative embodiment may require the use of a full screen mask in order to minimize any annoying screen rolling during the tuning process. The masking is intended to cover any glitches that would otherwise be displayed during the acquisition time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) for returning to another 6 MHZ channel bandwidth.
- an alternative embodiment can include the use of two tuners similar to the configuration shown in FIG. 35.
- This alternative configuration using two tuners trades an increased cost for lower acquisition times.
- the terminal can use the second tuner to tune the channel showing the commercial.
- Set top terminals with two tuners are described in detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,990,927, entitled, ADVANCED SET TOP TERMINAL FOR CABLE TELEVISION DELIVERY SYSTEMS, incorporated herein by reference. Again, the channel changing is transparent to the viewer who believes the same channel is continuously being shown.
- Those skilled in the art will recognize a number of other configurations of set top terminal hardware that will accommodate a transparent channel-switching feature.
- the Storage method (described above with reference to the Multiple Channel method, requires the set top terminal to store a certain number of targeted advertisements in memory.
- the group assignment and switching plan development described for use with the Multiple Channel method is then used to direct the set top terminal to retrieve the appropriate advertisement from memory during program breaks.
- the stored targeted advertisements are retrieved, based on a file name, for example, that is identified by comparing the Group Assignment matrix and the switching plan.
- the Storage method has the advantage of not requiring additional feeder channel to continuously broadcast targeted advertisements.
- the Additional Bandwidth method allows flexibility by more specifically targeting commercials before the commercials are transmitted to a set top terminal 220 .
- it requires a great deal of available bandwidth in the delivery system. This is difficult with a cable system 200 but possible when a telephone or personal communications system is used to transmit the commercials to the set top terminal 220 .
- the Additional Bandwidth method allows the network controller 214 to run through a set top terminal's specific correlation algorithms and target specific commercials from hundreds for each set top terminal 220 . This method allows for the greatest customizing of targeting and allows for a greater selection of commercials to be shown. Only after a commercial advertisement is selected by the network controller 214 for the specific set top terminal 220 does transmission of the commercial occur.
- the Split Screen method transmits multiple commercials on a single channel using a split screen technique; commercials being pre-recorded and prepared prior to transmitting to the set top terminal 220 . Although many commercials can be transmitted on a single channel, in the preferred form of the split screen method, only four commercials are shown. As the number of commercials increases the size and the amount of video information transmitted for each commercial decreases proportionately (i.e., 6, 8, 12, etc.). Using split screen methodology, either a masking technique or a scaling and repositioning of video technique must be used at the set top terminal 220 to show the ad. The masking and repositioning-scaling techniques are further defined in U.S. Pat. No.
- FIG. 36 shows a software program flow 490 that is an alternative to the network controller's Alternate Advertisement Targeting routine 374 , depicted in FIG. 28.
- the alternative program 490 allows each set top terminal 220 to be individually targeted with specific advertisements and is initiated automatically, block 492 , by the network controller CPU 224 upon receipt of each polling response from a set top terminal 220 .
- the network controller CPU 224 begins the process of selecting a package of advertisements that is based on, among other things, that subscriber's demographic information and viewing history.
- the network controller CPU 224 Upon receipt of a polling response from a set top terminal 220 , the network controller CPU 224 reads the set top terminal identifier, 494 , and the programs accessed, 496 , from the polling response (or status report) (depicted in FIG. 6 b ). The network controller 214 writes information on the programs accessed to the Program Scheduling database 320 , updating the Access History File that contains listings of all programs accessed within the past week, month or year.
- the network controller CPU 224 then calls a subroutine that sorts the programs accessed by program category, block 498 .
- the program categories are sorted, 500 , based on the number of times that programs appearing in each particular category are accessed. In so doing, this sorting subroutine determines and ranks those programs and program categories that are most frequently viewed by that set top terminal 220 .
- the subroutine can interactively produce rankings for different time slots in a given day. In this way, different rankings can accommodate different viewing preferences during those time slots for a single set top terminal 220 . For example, where rankings for eight three-hour time slots are desired, the subroutine determines a ranking of programs and program categories for each three-hour viewing period. Thus, a different ranking may be produced, for instance, for a morning time slot and an evening time slot. All rankings of programs and program categories for that set top terminal 220 are written to the Viewer Profile database 314 , updating the Viewer Log File, as at function block 502 .
- the network controller CPU 224 calls a subroutine that correlates the updated Viewer Log File with the Advertisement Categories File in the Advertisement Library database 322 , block 504 .
- the subroutine assigns or correlates various categories of television commercials to each ranking of programs and program categories in the Viewer Log File.
- the categories of television commercials and advertisements that may be so assigned are found in the Advertisement Categories File indicated generally at 354 as part of the library 322 and may include: (1) Household Goods/Products, (2) Home Improvement and Maintenance, (3) Personal Hygiene, (4) Entertainment Items and Events, (5) Sporting Goods and Events, (6) Motor Vehicles and Related Products, (7) Foodstuffs and Beverages, and (8) Miscellaneous. Where, for example, the viewer has watched a sporting event, the Sporting Goods and Events, Home Improvement and Maintenance, and Foodstuffs and Beverages categories may be assigned to that particular sporting event/program and Sports program category.
- the routine calls a sorting subroutine that ranks the groups of advertising categories correlated based on other information in the database files. In the preferred system, this ranking is primarily based on data in the updated Access History File and the updated Viewer Log File, as shown at function block 506 . By using data on the viewer's past program selections and demographic information, the subroutine ranks the correlated categories of advertisements according to those likely to be of most interest to that viewer.
- the routine selects the top three advertisement categories as the targeted categories for a given time slot and viewer, block 508 .
- Individual advertisements are then chosen from the Advertisements File, with all selections made from the targeted categories, 510 .
- the advertisements that are selected are written to the Advertisement Targeting File from where advertising packages can be generated, function 512 , for transmission to the set top terminal 220 .
- Such packages are generated by the network controller CPU 224 , which accesses the Advertisement Targeting File and includes the targeted advertisements in the PCI signal.
- the entire routine is repeated for each set top terminal 220 and, alternatively, each viewer.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Multimedia (AREA)
- Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
- Computer Graphics (AREA)
- Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
- Social Psychology (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
- Marketing (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Software Systems (AREA)
- Finance (AREA)
- Strategic Management (AREA)
- Power Engineering (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Two-Way Televisions, Distribution Of Moving Picture Or The Like (AREA)
- Management, Administration, Business Operations System, And Electronic Commerce (AREA)
- Information Transfer Between Computers (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- PCT/US93/11706 and U.S. Ser. No. 08/160,191, entitled TELEVISION PROGRAM DELIVERY SYSTEM filed Dec. 2, 1993, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,559,549;
- U.S. Ser. No. 08/336, 247, entitled ELECTRONIC BOOK SELECTION AND DELIVERY SYSTEM, filed Nov. 7, 1994, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,986,690;
- PCT/US94/13809 and U.S. Ser. No. 08/352,204, entitled AN OPERATIONS CENTER WITH VIDEO STORAGE FOR A TELEVISION PROGRAM PACKAGING AND DELIVERY SYSTEM, filed Dec. 2, 1994, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,600,573; and
- PCT/US94/13847 and U.S. Ser. No. 08/352,205, entitled NETWORK MANAGER FOR CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM HEADENDS, filed Dec. 2, 1994, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,201,536.
- The technical field relates to television program delivery systems for providing television programming to consumer homes. More particularly, the technical field relates to a method and apparatus for targeting advertisements to television viewers based on information related to the viewers.
- Advances in television entertainment have been primarily driven by breakthroughs in technology. In 1939, advances on Vladmir Zworykin's picture tube provided the stimulus for NBC to begin its first regular broadcasts. In 1975, advances in satellite technology provided consumers with increased programming to homes.
- Many of these technology breakthroughs have produced inconvenient systems for consumers. One example is the ubiquitous three remote control home, having a separate and unique remote control for the TV, cable box and VCR. More recently, technology has provided cable users in certain parts of the country with 100 channels of programming. This increased program capacity is beyond the ability of many consumers to use effectively. No method of managing the program choices has been provided to consumers.
- Consumers are demanding that future advances in television entertainment, particularly programs and program choices, be presented to the consumer in a user friendly manner. Consumer preferences, instead of technological breakthroughs, will drive the television entertainment market for at least the next 20 years. As computer vendors have experienced a switch from marketing new technology in computer hardware to marketing better usability, interfaces and service, the television entertainment industry will also experience a switch from new technology driving the market to consumer usability driving the market.
- Consumers want products incorporating new technology that are useful, and will no longer purchase new technology for the sake of novelty or status. Technological advances in sophisticated hardware are beginning to surpass the capability of the average consumer to use the new technology. Careful engineering must be done to make entertainment products incorporating new technology useful and desired by consumers.
- In order for new television entertainment products to be successful, the products must satisfy consumer demands. TV consumers wish to go from limited viewing choices to a variety of choices, from no control of programming to complete control. Consumers wish to advance from cumbersome and inconvenient television to easy and convenient television and keep costs down. Consumers do not wish to pay for one hundred channels when due to lack of programming information, they seldom, if ever, watch programming on many of these channels. Viewers wish their programming to be customized and targeted to their needs and tastes.
- The concepts of interactive television, high definition television and 300 channel cable systems in consumer homes will not sell if they are not packaged, delivered and presented in a useable fashion to consumers. Consumers are already being bombarded with programming options, numerous free cable channels, subscription cable channels and pay-per-view choices. Any further increase in TV entertainment choices, without a user friendly presentation and approach, will likely bewilder viewers with a mind-numbing array of choices.
- The TV industry has traditionally marketed and sold its programs to consumers in bulk, such as continuous feed broadcast and long-term subscriptions to movie channels. The TV industry is unable to sell its programming in large quantities on a unit per unit basis, such as the ordering of one program. Consumers prefer a unit sales approach because it keeps costs down and allows the consumer to be more selective in their viewing.
- In today's television world, networks manage the program lineup for individual channels. Each network analyzes ratings for television shows and determines the appropriate schedule or program lineup to gain market share and revenue from advertising. Program ratings are determined using a test group of viewers and statistical analysis methods. Since each channel is in competition with every other channel, there is no coordinated effort to organize television programming in a manner that primarily suits the viewers.
- Advertising has become equally annoying, with viewers being forced to watch television commercials for goods and services that are neither needed nor desired. As a result, consumers have become impatient and dissatisfied with todays television delivery systems. Equally problematic, these television delivery systems do not have the capabilities or features necessary to operate in the digital environment. Consequently, advances in digital technology call for a new television program delivery system that is capable of satisfying varying consumer and viewer needs.
- Advertisers want to optimize their advertising expenditures by ensuring that specific advertisements are directed to the appropriate audiences. Specifically, advertisers want specific advertisements to air during television programming that is being viewed by those individuals most likely to be influenced to buy the advertised product, or otherwise respond in a desired fashion to the advertisement.
- Existing cable headends are unequipped for the transition to a digital system. These cable headends have no means for monitoring and controlling the large numbers of program signals and advertisements that will eventually be passed on to both consumers and viewers. These cable headends are unequipped to manage account and billing information for set top terminals without relying on telephone lines. In addition, these cable headends have no means for targeting advertisements to particular consumers and viewers.
- What is disclosed is a system and a method for delivering targeted advertisements in a television network. In an embodiment, a program controller, or central processing unit, monitors and controls television terminals in a television delivery system. The program controller performs network monitoring and control of television terminals at a central operations center. The operations center receives analog and digital program signals and processes the signals to produce digitally compressed program signals that are then relayed to intermediate sites such as cable headend sites or are transmitted directly to the television terminals. Each cable headend site is equipped with multiple satellite receiver dishes and a signal processor.
- The program controller manages the configuration of television terminals, controls the broadcast of program signals to the television terminals and processes signals received from the television terminals. In an embodiment embodiment, the program controller monitors, among other things, automatic poll-back responses from the television terminals remotely located at each subscribers' home. The polling and automatic report-back cycle occurs frequently enough to allow the program controller to maintain accurate account and billing information, retrieve programs watched data and monitor authorized channel access.
- In one embodiment, information sent from the program controller is stored in RAM within each subscriber's television terminal and may be retrieved upon polling by the program controller. Retrieval may, for example, occur on a daily, weekly or monthly basis. The program controller allows the television delivery system to maintain complete information on all programs watched using a particular television terminal. The program controller may also send program data to the television terminal for temporary storage. Thus, the television terminals may store targeted advertisements that are to be played during program breaks for programs airing in the next 24 hours, or in the next week, for example.
- A television terminal data gathering routine allows the program controller to schedule and perform polling of all television terminals operating in the system. The software also provides the program controller with a means of processing status reports received from television terminals in response to polling requests.
- A video targeting routine makes use of a viewer's demographic information and viewing habits to determine those advertisements that may be most effective when displayed to that particular viewer. In so doing, the routine generates packages of advertisements targeted towards each viewer, or to groups of viewers.
- Finally, an additional routine correlates the programs accessed with pricing information to generate billing reports that can be sent to a given television terminal over the cable distribution network. Aside from this routine, the program controller accommodates other methods of billing and account maintenance, such as through the use of remote billing sites.
- To efficiently convey targeted advertisements to a desired audience, the operations center may employ a multiple channel architecture that includes a program channel and a number of feeder channels to carry alternate programming, such as alternate targeted advertisements. The program channel carries a main program, such as a broadcast television show, and accompanying advertisements. The feeder channels are ancillary video/audio channels, which are delivered to the television terminal, and which provide primarily alternate commercial and promotional interstitial material during breaks in the main program. The concept of targeted advertising makes use of the feeder channels to allow the television terminals to remain at the program channel or to be switched to the most appropriate feeder channel at the program break, with appropriateness being based on information known about the demographics and viewing habits of users of the television terminals, for example.
- Careful management of the feeder channels, including their dynamic switching, and control of the advertising airing on the feeder channels at any given time can greatly increase both the advertisers' likelihood of reaching an interested viewer, as well as the likelihood a viewer is interested in a specific advertisement. The feeder channels are assigned a series of advertisements, and a switching plan is developed that directs individual television terminals to remain at the program channel or to switch from the program channel to a specific feeder channel upon the occurrence of the program break.
- The process of managing the program and the feeder channels begins with a number of configuration and set-up steps. First, individual television terminal address information is collected at an operations center, which may be a cable headend site or other central control station. This information is required to uniquely identify each television terminal and to associate with that identifier necessary information to aid in the targeting process. The television terminal address information may be provided to the operations center upon installation or activation of the television terminal in the viewer's home. Other information may be collected from various sources, including viewer surveys, marketing databases correlated by address or zip code+4, for example.
- Next, television terminal groups are determined. This is needed if the management of information and targeting to individual television terminals is not practical initially, either due to non-availability of information to the appropriate level of detail, or technology to control and deliver messages and advertisements to an individual television terminal. For a number of target criteria, individual groups are defined. Examples of target criteria include demographic targeting (age/sex/income) and location, such as Area of Dominant Influence (ADI). Each target criteria is then segmented into appropriate groups. For example, the ADI may include Los Angles, Calif. and Washington D.C. New target criteria can be added and the groups redefined after their initial establishment.
- For each target criteria, each television terminal is assigned to a group based on the information collected about the television terminal's environment. Once the television terminals are assigned to groups, their group assignments are conveyed to the television terminal and stored therein.
- The group assignment information that is stored at the television terminal is able to survive power cycling of the television terminal, and other normal service interruptions. Finally, as groups are modified or group assignments change, the television terminals are notified of the changes. Additionally, the group assignment information is periodically resent to the television terminals to ensure that newly added television terminals and those that have accidentally lost their information are up-to-date.
- Since the available feeder channels may be shared across several program channels, their allocation must be managed and optimized. A break management engine determines how many feeder channels are available for each program break. Furthermore, each program break may contain one or more pods during which a commercial spot or targeted advertisement may be aired. At a minimum, one commercial spot will be available for each pod in a program break (i.e., the spot airing on the same channel as the program). However, the maximum number of spots available for a given program break will depend on the total number of feeder channels available and the alignment of program breaks across all program channels. For some programming, the occurrence of program breaks cannot be predicted in advance of programming airing (e.g., live sports broadcasts). However, for replayed programming, the occurrence of program breaks will be known. Furthermore, some programming may be manually edited to insert program breaks at appropriate intervals. The manual placement of program breaks during the program edit process can be used to force program breaks to line up or be staggered across program channels, permitting more predictable program break placements, as necessary.
- A spot placement engine determines the optimum types of spots to be placed based on program break timing and feeder channel availability. The output of the spot placement engine includes an ad playbill that is used at the operations center to schedule the commercial spots. The spot placement engine takes into account likely viewers of a program, the desirability of available spots to those viewers, targeting criteria, and the number of feeder channels available for each program break. The spot being placed on the program channel during the program break serves as the default targeted advertisement (most appropriate to the overall audience) in case the feeder channels are not available for alternate targeted advertising. The default targeted advertisement also supports cable systems that either are not configured to provide targeted advertising, or those cable systems that are receiving other programming.
- Once specific spots are selected for each program break, the television terminal groups that should remain with the program channel, and those that should tune to a particular feeder channel at each program break are determined, based on target criteria of interest. Switching of television terminals to the appropriate feeder channels may be conducted using a detailed switching plan, for example. The switching plan is distributed to control points in the system, such as cable headend sites, which are then responsible for the periodic transmission of the switching plans to television terminals. Alternately, the switching plans are distributed directly to the television terminals from the operations center.
- After the television terminal receives and stores the switching plan, the television terminal will remain with the program channel or will tune to the appropriate feeder channel during the corresponding program break, if the television terminal is tuned to a program channel that carries programming that cooperates with the multiple channel architecture. The viewer may, at any time, override feeder channel switching by selecting a non-cooperating program channel.
- The television terminal will store information indicating that the switch was made. The accumulated switching history information will be collected from the television terminal at a later time for review purposes. For example, upon command from the control points, the television terminal will provide the switching history data to a local (e.g., cable headend) or to a national site. The unique television terminal identification information may also be provided with the collected data. As mechanisms become available to identify specific viewers in a household, the system will allow for individual identification information to also be provided with collected data. Finally, upon collection of the television terminal switching history data, the television delivery system will allow for the return of used television terminal memory space to the television terminals.
- As noted above, the program controller interacts directly with television terminals or with network controllers located at cable headends. As an intermediary between the television terminals and the operations center (or other remote site), the cable headend relies on a network controller to perform key cable system operations. In particular, the network controller accommodates regional programming needs by working with other cable headend components. The network controller also performs the system control functions for the cable system. Thus, the network controller performs many functions similar to the program controller.
- The network controller is also able to respond to the immediate needs of a television terminal, or a group of television terminals. The network controller can modify a program signal received from the operations center before the program signal is transmitted to the television terminal. Therefore, the network controller enables the delivery system to adapt to the specific requirements of individual television terminals when information on these requirements cannot be provided to the operations center in advance. In other words, the network controller is able to perform on the fly programming changes. With this capability, the network controller can handle sophisticated local programming needs such as interactive television services, split screen video, and selection of different foreign languages for the same video.
- The network controller makes use of a number of software routines to perform its major functions. In one routine, the network controller modifies the program control information so that changes and additions in programming and advertisements can be accommodated. Such changes and additions include television terminal access authorizations and de-authorizations, and placement of local targeted advertisements in program breaks.
- In yet another alternate embodiment, all the functions of the program controller are performed locally at the cable headend sites. That is, all functions of the program controller are carried out by the network controller installed at the cable headend.
- In the above embodiments, program signals are relayed to and information is extracted from the television terminals. The television terminals may be digital set top boxes that connect between a cable television delivery system and a television. Alternately, the television terminals may be components of digital television satellite receivers. Finally, the television terminals may be incorporated into the circuitry of the television, thereby eliminating the need for a separate control device attached to the television.
- FIG. 1 is a diagram of the primary components of the television delivery system.
- FIG. 2 is an overview of the television delivery system operations.
- FIG. 2a is a block diagram of the marketing information routine.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic of the operation of the primary components of the system.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic of the primary components of the Computer Assisted Packaging System (CAP).
- FIG. 4a is a diagram of a multiple channel architecture module.
- FIG. 4b is a diagram of a configuration set-up system.
- FIG. 4c is a diagram of an advertisement assignment module.
- FIG. 4d is a diagram of a feeder channel architecture at a cable headend.
- FIG. 4e is a diagram of a set top terminal adapted for use with the multiple channel architecture module of FIG. 4a.
- FIG. 5 is a more detailed schematic of the hardware of the operations center and CAP.
- FIG. 6a is a chart of the program control information carried by the program control information signal.
- FIG. 6b shows a bit-wise data format for program control information.
- FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a Delivery Control Processor Unit and a Computer Assisted Packaging Apparatus.
- FIG. 8 is a schematic of the subroutines for the CAP software.
- FIG. 9 is a software flowchart representing CAP operations.
- FIG. 10 is a diagram of the database structure for the databases supporting the operations of the CAP.
- FIG. 11 is a block diagram of the operations center and Master Control Site.
- FIG. 12 is a block diagram of the computer assisted packaging shown in FIG. 11.
- FIG. 13 is a flow chart of the processing occurring at the operations center.
- FIG. 14 is a diagram of the bandwidth allocation for a 750 MHZ system.
- FIG. 15 is a diagram/chart of the compressed channel allocation for the system.
- FIG. 16 is a diagram showing how three cable television systems each with a different bandwidth may use the program delivery system and operations center of the present invention simultaneously.
- FIG. 17 is a diagram showing three different cable headend systems, each system receiving the entire satellite signal and stripping those parts of the signal which cannot be handled by the local cable system.
- FIG. 18 is a diagram showing dynamic change in bandwidth allocation from a typical week day prime time program signal to a Saturday afternoon program signal.
- FIG. 19 is a diagram of the primary components of the cable headend.
- FIG. 20 is a diagram of the cable headend showing the primary components of the network controller.
- FIG. 21a is a schematic of a basic cable headend having network controller components.
- FIG. 21b is a schematic of an alternative embodiment of FIG. 6a.
- FIG. 22 is a detailed diagram of the components of the cable headend.
- FIG. 23 is a diagram of the network controller CPU and its relational components.
- FIG. 24 is diagram of the network control database structure.
- FIG. 25 is a diagram of the relationship between the major software routines.
- FIG. 26 is a block diagram of the software flow chart for the Polling Cycle routine.
- FIG. 27 is a diagram of a sample programs watched matrix.
- FIG. 28 is the software flow chart for the Alternate Advertisement Targeting routine.
- FIG. 29 is the subroutine flow chart for processing programs watched matrices through correlation algorithms.
- FIG. 30 is the subroutine flow chart for determining final groupings of set top terminals.
- FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a sample assignment of advertising channels to set top terminal groups watching particular categories of programs.
- FIG. 32 is a diagram assigning available bandwidth for multiple advertising channels.
- FIG. 33 is a diagram of channel switching hardware.
- FIG. 34 is a diagram of an alternate channel switching hardware.
- FIG. 35 is a diagram of a television terminal incorporating two tuners.
- FIG. 36 is the software flow chart for an alternative to the Alternate Advertisement Targeting routine.
- A. Television Program Delivery System Description
- 1. Introduction
- FIG. 1 shows an expanded television
program delivery system 200 that dramatically increases programming capacity using compressed transmission of television program and targeted advertisement signals. Developments in digital bandwidth compression technology now allow much greater throughput of television program signals over existing or slightly modified transmission media. Theprogram delivery system 200 shown provides subscribers with a user friendly interface to operate and exploit a six-fold or more increase in current program delivery capability. - Subscribers are able to access an expanded television program package and view selected programs through a menu-driven access scheme that allows each subscriber to select individual programs by sequencing a series of menus. The menus are sequenced by the subscriber using simple alpha-numeric and iconic character access or moving a cursor or highlight bar on the TV screen to access desired programs by simply pressing a single button, rather than recalling from memory and pressing the actual two or more digit numeric number assigned to a selection. Thus, with the press of a single button, the subscriber can advance from one menu to the next. In this fashion, the subscriber can sequence the menus and select a program from any given menu. The programs are grouped by category so that similar program offerings are found on the same menu.
- 2. Major System Components
- In an embodiment, a
program delivery system 200, in conjunction with a conventional concatenatedcable television system 210, provides television program and control signals to subscribers. Theprogram delivery system 200 generally includes (i) at least oneoperations center 202, where program packaging and control information are created and then assembled in the form of digital data, (ii) a digital compression system, where the digital data is compressed, combined/multiplexed, encoded, and mapped into digital signals for satellite transmission to thecable headend 208, and (iii) a set of in-home decompressors that are components of a television terminal. Theprogram delivery system 200 transports the digital signals to acable headend 208 where the signals are transmitted through a concatenatedcable television system 210. Within thecable headend 208, the received signals may be decoded, demultiplexed, managed by a local central distribution and switching mechanism, combined and then transmitted to the television terminal located in each subscriber's home over thecable system 210. Although concatenatedcable systems 210 are the most prevalent transmission media to the home, telephone lines, cellular networks, fiber optics, Personal Communication Networks and similar technology for transmitting to the home can be used interchangeably with thisprogram delivery system 200. - The
program delivery system 200 can also communicate with subscribers using atelecommunications system 100 and anInternet 120. Thetelecommunications system 100 communicates using modems located at theoperations center 202, thecable headend 208 and at the subscribers' homes, for example. Alternately, the telecommunications system may connect directly to the television terminal. TheInternet 120 may also be directly connected to the television terminal, or may be connected to a separate processor (such as a personal computer, not shown), which in turn connects to the television terminal. - In another embodiment, the functions of the
operations center 202 and thecable headend 208 may be combined. In this embodiment, theoperations center 202 may provide program signals directly to the television terminal using either thecable delivery system 210 or a digital satellite delivery system. - The
delivery system 200 has areception region 207 with an in-home decompression capability. This capability is performed by a decompressor housed within the television terminal. In an embodiment, the television terminal is a settop terminal 220 that is installed in each subscriber's home. Alternately, the television terminal may be a component of a satellite receiver, or may be incorporated into the circuitry of the television itself. The discussion that follows will refer to the settop terminal 220. However, it should be understood that any of the television terminals listed above could perform the same functions as theset top terminal 220. The decompressor remains transparent from the subscriber's point of view and allows any of the compressed signals to be demultiplexed and individually extracted from the composite data stream and then individually decompressed upon selection by the subscriber. The decompressed video signals are converted into analog signals for television display. Such analog signals include NTSC formatted signals for use by a standard television. Alternately, the digital program signals may be stored in a random access memory (RAM) in the television terminal for later conversion and display. Control signals are likewise extracted and decompressed and then either executed immediately or placed in local storage such as the RAM. Multiple sets of decompression hardware may be used to decompress video and control signals. The settop terminal 220 may then overlay or combine different signals to form the desired display on the subscriber's television. Graphics on video or picture-on-picture are examples of such a display. - Although a single digital compression standard (e.g., MPEG) may be used for both the
program delivery system 200 and the concatenatedcable system 210, the compression technique used may differ between the two systems. When the compression standards differ between the two media, the signals received by thecable headend 208 must be decompressed before transmission from theheadend 208 to the settop terminals 220. Subsequently, thecable headend 208 must recompress and transmit the signals to the settop terminal 220, which would then decompress the signals using a specific decompression algorithm. - The video signals and program control signals received by the set
top terminal 220 correspond to specific television programs and menu selections that each subscriber may access through a subscriber interface. The subscriber interface is a device with buttons located on the settop terminal 220 or on a portableremote control 900. In the preferred system embodiment, the subscriber interface is a combined alpha-character, numeric and iconicremote control device 900, which provides direct or menu-driven program access. The preferred subscriber interface also contains cursor movement and go buttons as well as alpha, numeric and iconic buttons. This subscriber interface and menu arrangement enables the subscriber to sequence through menus by choosing from among several menu options that are displayed on the television screen. In addition, a user may bypass several menu screens and immediately choose a program by selecting the appropriate alpha-character, numeric or iconic combinations on the subscriber interface. In the preferred embodiment, theset top terminal 220 generates the menus that are displayed on the television by creating arrays of particular menu templates, and the settop terminal 220 displays a specific menu or submenu option for each available video signal. - 3. Operations Center and Digital Compression System
- The
operations center 202 performs two primary services, packaging television programs, and advertisements, and generating the program control information signal. At theoperations center 202, television programs and advertisements are received from external program sources in both analog and digital form. FIG. 2 shows an embodiment of the operations center receiving signals from variousexternal sources 212. Examples of the external program sources are sporting events, children's programs, specialty channels, news or any other program source that can provide audio or visual signals. Advertisements are provided by individual advertisers and include commercials, infomercials and promotions that may air during or between airings of television programs. Once the television programs and advertisements are received from the external program sources and from the advertisers, theoperations center 202 digitizes (and preferably compresses) any program signals received in analog form. Theoperations center 202 may also maintain an internal storage of programs. The internally stored programs may be in analog or digital form and stored on permanent or volatile memory sources, including magnetic tape or RAM. Subsequent to receiving programming, theoperations center 202 packages the programs into the groups and categories, which provide the optimal marketing of the programs to subscribers. For example, theoperations center 202 may package the same programs into different categories and menus for weekday, prime-time viewing and Saturday afternoon viewing. Also, theoperations center 202 packages the television programs in a manner that enables both the various menus to easily represent the programs and the subscribers to easily access the programs through the menus. - The packaging of the digital signals is typically performed at the
operations center 202 by computer assisted packaging equipment (CAP). The CAP system normally includes at least one computer monitor, keyboard, mouse, and standard video editing equipment. A programmer packages the signals by entering certain information into the CAP. This information includes the date, time slot, and program category of the various programs. The programmer and the CAP utilize demographic data and ratings in performing the packaging tasks. Extracts of customer purchases will be provided to theOperations Center 202. These extracts of information will be formatted and correlated with customer demographics for marketing purposes by the Marketing Information Interface (MII) 702. TheMII 702 is shown in FIG. 2a. The Marketing Information Interface (MII) 702 subroutine interfaces the processing and editing subroutines with marketing data. This interface regularly receives programs watched information frombilling sites 720,cable headends 208, or settop terminals 220. In addition,other marketing information 722 such as the demographics of viewers during certain time periods may be received by theMII 702. TheMII 702 also usesalgorithms 724 to analyze the program watched information andmarketing data - The process program line-up
subroutine 730 uses information from theMII 704 and Packager Data Entry Interface (PDEI) 700 to develop a program line-up. Algorithms are used to assign programs in time slots. - The
operations center 202 may also insert directions for filling local available program time in the packaged signal to enable local cable and television companies to fill the program time with local advertising and/or local programming. Consequently, the local cable headends are not constrained to show only programs transmitted from theoperations center 202. After the programmer selects the various programs from a pool of available programs and inputs the requisite information, the programmer, with assistance from the CAP, can select the price and allocate transponder space for the various programs. After the process is complete, the CAP displays draft menus or program schedules that correspond to the entries of the programmer. The CAP may also graphically display allocation of transponder space. The programmer may edit the menus and transponder allocation several times until satisfied with the programming schedule. During the editing, the programmer may direct the exact location of any program name on a menu with simple commands to the CAP. The CAP may be used to package advertisements, although the process, which will be described later, may differ from that used for television programs. - The packaging process also accounts for any groupings by satellite transponder, which are necessary. The
operations center 202 may send different groups of programs todifferent cable headends 208 and/or settop terminals 220. One way theoperations center 202 may accomplish this task is to send different program packages to each transponder. Each transponder, or set of transponders, then relays a specific program package tospecific cable headends 208 and/or settop terminals 220. The allocation of transponder space is an important task performed by theoperations center 202. - The
operations center 202 may also insert directions for filling local available program time in the packaged signal to enable local cable and television companies to fill the program time with local advertising and/or local programming. Consequently, thelocal cable headends 208 are not constrained to show only programs transmitted from theoperations center 202. New set top converters will incorporate both digital and analog channels. Therefore, thecable headend 208 may combine analog signals with the digital signals prior to transmitting the program signals to the settop terminals 220. - After the CAP packages the programs, it creates a program control information signal to be delivered with the program package to the
cable headend 208 and/or settop terminal 220. The program control information signal contains a description of the contents of the program package, commands to be sent to thecable headend 208 and/or settop terminal 220, and other information relevant to the signal transmission. - In addition to packaging the signal, the
operations center 202 employs digital compression techniques to increase existing satellite transponder capacity by at least a 4:1 ratio, resulting in a four-fold increase in program delivery capability. A number of digital compression algorithms currently exist which can achieve the resultant increase in capacity and improved signal quality desired for the system. The algorithms generally use one or more of three basic digital compression techniques: (1) within-frame (intraframe) compression, (2) frame-to-frame (interframe) compression, and (3) within carrier compression. Specifically, in the preferred embodiment, theMPEG 2 compression method is used. After digital compression, the signals are combined (multiplexed) and encoded. The combined signal is subsequently transmitted tovarious uplink sites 204. - There may be a
single uplink site 204 or multiple uplink sites (represented by 204′, shown in phantom in FIG. 1) for eachoperation center 202. Theuplink sites 204 may either be located in the same geographical place or may be located remotely from theoperations center 202. Once the composite signal is transmitted to theuplink sites 204, the signal may be multiplexed with other signals, modulated, up converted and amplified for transmission over satellite.Multiple cable headends 208 may receive such transmissions. - In addition to multiple uplinks, the
delivery system 200 may also contain multiple operations centers. The preferred method for using multiple operations centers is to designate one of the operations centers as a master operations center and to designate the remaining operations centers as slave operations centers. In this configuration, the master operations center coordinates various functions among the slave operations centers such as synchronization of simultaneous transmissions and distributes the operations workload efficiently. - 4. Cable Headend
- After the
operations center 202 has compressed and encoded the program signals and transmitted the signals to the satellite, thecable headend 208 receives and further processes the signals before they are relayed to each settop terminal 220. Each cable headend site is generally equipped with multiple satellite receiver dishes. Each dish is capable of handling multiple transponder signals from a single satellite and sometimes from multiple satellites. - With reference to FIG. 3, as an intermediary between the set
top terminals 220 and theoperations center 202 and master control uplink site 211 (or other remote site), thecable headend 208 performs two primary functions. First, thecable headend 208 acts as a distribution center, or signal processor, by relaying the program signal to the settop terminal 220 in each subscriber's home. In addition, thecable headend 208 acts as anetwork controller 214 by receiving information from each settop terminal 220 and passing such information on to an information gathering site such as theoperations center 202. - FIG. 3 shows an embodiment where the
cable headend 208 and the subscriber's home are linked bycertain communications media 216. In this particular embodiment, analog signals, digitally compressed signals, other digital signals and up-stream/interactivity signals are sent and received over themedia 216. Thecable headend 208 provides such signaling capabilities in its dual roles as asignal processor 209 andnetwork controller 214. - As a
signal processor 209, thecable headend 208 prepares the program signals that are received by thecable headend 208 for transmission to each settop terminal 220. In the preferred system, thesignal processor 209 re-routes or demultiplexes and recombines the signals and digital information received from theoperations center 202 and allocates different portions of the signal to different frequency ranges.Cable headends 208 that provide different subscribers different program offerings may allocate the program signals from theoperations center 202 in various manners to accommodate different viewers. Thesignal processor 209 may also incorporate local programming and/or local advertisements into the program signal and forward the revised signal to the settop terminals 220. To accommodate this local programming availability, thesignal processor 209 must combine the local signal in digital or analog form with the operations center program signals. If the local cable system uses a compression standard that is different than the one used by theoperations center 202, thesignal processor 209 must also decompress and recompress incoming signals so they may be properly formatted for transmission to the settop terminals 220. This process becomes less important as standards develop (i.e., MPEG 2). In addition, thesignal processor 209 performs any necessary signal decryption and/or encryption. - As a
network controller 214, thecable headend 208 performs the system control functions for the system. The primary function of thenetwork controller 214 is to manage the configuration of the settop terminals 220 and process signals received from the settop terminals 220. In the preferred embodiment, thenetwork controller 214 monitors, among other things, automatic poll-back responses from the settop terminals 220 remotely located at each subscriber's home. The polling and automatic report-back cycle occurs frequently enough to allow thenetwork controller 214 to maintain accurate account and billing information as well as monitor authorized channel access. In the simplest embodiment, information to be sent to thenetwork controller 214 will be stored in RAM within each subscriber's settop terminal 220 and will be retrieved only upon polling by thenetwork controller 214. Retrieval may, for example, occur on a daily, weekly or monthly basis. Thenetwork controller 214 allows the system to maintain complete information on all programs watched using a particularset top terminal 220. - The
network controller 214 is also able to respond to the immediate needs of a settop terminal 220 by modifying a program control information signal received from theoperations center 202. Therefore, thenetwork controller 214 enables the delivery system to adapt to the specific requirements of individual settop terminals 220 when the requirements cannot be provided to theoperations center 202 in advance. In other words, thenetwork controller 214 is able to perform on the fly programming changes. With this capability, thenetwork controller 214 can handle sophisticated local programming needs such as, for example, interactive television services, split screen video, and selection of different foreign languages for the same video. In addition, thenetwork controller 214 controls and monitors all compressors and decompressors in the system. - The
delivery system 200 and digital compression of the preferred embodiment provides a one-way path from theoperations center 202 to thecable headend 208. Status and billing information is sent from the settop terminal 220 to thenetwork controller 214 at thecable headend 208 and not directly to theoperations center 202. Thus, program monitoring and selection control will take place only at thecable headend 208 by the local cable company and its decentralized network controllers 214 (i.e., decentralized relative to theoperations center 202, which is central to the program delivery system 200). The local cable company will in turn be in communication with theoperations center 202 or a regional control center (not shown) that accumulates return data from the settop terminal 220 for statistical or billing purposes. In alternative system embodiments, theoperations center 202 and the statistical and billing sites are collocated. Further, telephone lines with modems are used to transfer information from the settop terminal 220 to the statistical and billing sites. - 5. Set Top Terminal
- The set
top terminal 220 is the portion of thedelivery system 200 that resides in the home of a subscriber. As noted above, the functions of the settop terminal 220 may be incorporated into the television, so that a separate component is not required to interact with theprogram delivery system 200. Alternately, the functions of the set top terminal may be incorporated into a satellite television receiver. When the settop terminal 220 is used, it is usually located above or below the subscriber's television, but it maybe placed anywhere in or near the subscriber's home as long as it is within the range of the subscriber'sremote control device 900. In some aspects, theset top terminal 220 may resemble converter boxes already used by many cable systems. For instance, each settop terminal 220 may include a variety of error detection, decryption, and coding techniques such as anti-taping encoding. However, it will become apparent from the discussion below that the settop terminal 220 is able to perform many functions that an ordinary converter box cannot perform. - The set
top terminal 220 has a plurality of input and output ports to enable it to communicate with other local and remote devices. The settop terminal 220 has an input port that receives information from thecable headend 208. In addition, the unit has at least two output ports that provide communications from the settop terminal 220 to a television and a VCR. Certain menu selections may cause the settop terminal 220 to send control signals directly to the VCR to automatically program or operate the VCR. Also, theset top terminal 220 contains a phone jack that can be used for maintenance, troubleshooting, reprogramming and additional customer features. The settop terminal 220 may also contain stereo/audio output terminals and a satellite dish input port. - Functionally, the
set top terminal 220 is the last component in the delivery system chain. The settop terminal 220 receives compressed program and control signals from the cable headend 208 (or, in some cases, directly from the operations center 202). After the settop terminal 220 receives the individually compressed program and control signals, the signals are demultiplexed, decompressed, converted to analog signals (if necessary) and either placed in local storage (from which the menu template may be created), executed immediately, or sent directly to the television screen. - After processing certain signals received from the
cable headend 208, theset top terminal 220 is able to store menu templates for creating menus that are displayed on a subscriber's television by using an array of menu templates. Before a menu can be constructed, menu templates must be created and sent to the settop terminal 220 for storage. A microprocessor uses the control signals received from theoperations center 202 orcable headend 208 to generate the menu templates for storage. Each menu template may be stored in volatile memory in the settop terminal 220. When the set top terminal receives template information it demultiplexes the program control signals received from thecable headend 208 into four primary parts: video, graphics, program logic and text. Each menu template represents a different portion of a whole menu, such as a menu background, television logo, cursor highlight overlay, or other miscellaneous components needed to build a menu. The menu templates may be deleted or altered using control signals received from theoperations center 202 orcable headend 208. - Once the menu templates have been stored in memory, the
set top terminal 220 can generate the appropriate menus. In the preferred embodiment, the basic menu format information is stored in memory located within the settop terminal 220 so that the microprocessor may locally access the information from the set top terminal instead of from an incoming signal. The microprocessor next generates the appropriate menus from the menu templates and the other menu information stored in memory. The settop terminal 220 then displays specific menus on the subscriber's television screen that correspond to the inputs the subscriber selects. - If the subscriber selects a specific program from a menu, the
set top terminal 220 determines on which channel the program is being shown, demultiplexes and extracts the single channel transmitted from thecable headend 208. The settop terminal 220 then decompresses the channel and, if necessary, converts the program signal to an analog NTSC signal to enable the subscriber to view the selected program. The settop terminal 220 can be equipped to decompress more than one program signal, but this would unnecessarily add to the cost of the unit since a subscriber will generally only view one program at a time. However, two or three decompressors may be desirable to provide picture-on-picture capability, control signal decompression, enhanced channel switching or like features. - In addition to menu information, the
set top terminal 220 may also store text transmitted from thecable headend 208 or theoperations center 202. The text may inform the subscriber about upcoming events, billing and account status, new subscriptions, or other relevant information. The text will be stored in an appropriate memory location depending on the frequency and the duration of the use of the textual message. Finally, theset top terminal 220 may store program signals, such as targeted advertisements, for later conversion and display. - Also, optional upgrades are available to enhance the performance of a subscriber's set
top terminal 220. These upgrades may consist of a cartridge or computer card (not shown) that is inserted into an expansion slot in the settop terminal 220 or may consist of a feature offered by thecable headend 208 oroperations center 202 to which the user may subscribe. Available upgrades may include on line data base services, interactive multi-media services, access to digital radio channels, and other services. - In an embodiment, available converter boxes such as those manufactured by General Instruments or Scientific Atlanta, may be modified and upgraded to perform the functions of a set
top terminal 220. The preferred upgrade is a circuit card with a microprocessor that is electronically connected to or inserted into the converter box. - 6. Remote Control Device
- The primary conduit for communication between the subscriber and the set
top terminal 220 is through the subscriber interface, preferably aremote control device 900. Through this interface, the subscriber may select desired programming through the system's menu-driven scheme or by directly accessing a specific channel by entering the actual channel number. Using the interface, the subscriber can navigate through a series of informative program selection menus. By using menu-driven, iconic or alpha-character access, the subscriber can access desired programs by simply pressing a single button rather than recalling from memory and pressing the actual channel number to make a selection. The subscriber can access regular broadcast and basic cable television stations by using either the numeric keys on the remote control 900 (pressing the corresponding channel number), or one of the menu icon selection options. - In addition to enabling the subscriber to easily interact with the
cable system 200, the physical characteristics of thesubscriber interface 900 should also add to the user friendliness of the system. Theremote control 900 should easily fit in the palm of the user's hand. The buttons of the preferredremote control 900 contain pictorial symbols that are easily identifiable by the subscriber. Also, buttons that perform similar functions may be color coordinated and consist of distinguishing textures to increase the user friendliness of the system. - 7. Menu-Driven Program Selection
- The menu-driven scheme provides the subscriber with one-step access to all major menus, ranging from hit movies to sport specials to specialty programs. From any of the major menus, the subscriber can in turn access submenus and minor menus by cursor or alpha-character access.
- There are two different types of menus utilized by the preferred embodiment, the Program Selection menus and the During Program menus. The first series of menus, Program Selection menus, consists of an Introductory, a Home, Major menus, and Submenus. The second series of menus, During Program menus, consists of two primary types, Hidden menus and the Program Overlay menus.
- Immediately after the subscriber turns on the set
top terminal 220, the Introductory menu welcomes the subscriber to the system. The Introductory menu may display important announcements from the local cable franchise, advertisements from the cable provider, or other types of messages. In addition, the Introductory menu can inform the subscriber if thecable headend 208 has sent a personal message to the subscriber's particularset top terminal 220. - After the Introductory menu has been displayed the subscriber may advance to the next level of menus, namely the Home menu. In the preferred embodiment, after a certain period of time, the cable system will advance the subscriber by default to the Home menu. From the Home menu, the subscriber is able to access all of the programming options. The subscriber may either select a program directly by entering the appropriate channel number from the
remote control 900, or the subscriber may sequence through incremental levels of menu options starting from the Home menu. The Home menu lists categories that correspond to the first level of menus called Major menus. - If the subscriber chooses to sequence through subsequent menus, the subscriber will be forwarded to the Major menu that corresponds to the chosen category from the Home menu. The Major menus further refine a subscriber's search and help guide the subscriber to the selection of his choice.
- From the Major menus, the subscriber may access several submenus. From each submenu, the subscriber may access other submenus until the subscriber finds a desired television program. Similar to the Major menu, each successive level of Submenus further refines the subscriber's search. The system also enables the subscriber to skip certain menus or submenus and directly access a specific menu or television program by entering the appropriate commands on the
remote control 900. - The During program menus (including Hidden Menus and Program Overlay Menus) are displayed by the set
top terminal 220 only after the subscriber has selected a television program. In order to avoid disturbing the subscriber, theset top terminal 220 does not display the Hidden Menus until the subscriber selects the appropriate option to display a Hidden Menu. The Hidden Menus contain options that are relevant to the program selected by the viewer. For example, a Hidden Menu may contain options that enable a subscriber to enter an interactive mode or escape from the selected program. - Program Overlay Menus are similar to Hidden Menus because they occur during a program and are related to the program being viewed. However, the Program Overlay Menus are displayed concurrently with the program selected by the subscriber. Most Program Overlay Menus are small enough on the screen to allow the subscriber to continue viewing the selected program comfortably.
- B. Operations Center with Computer Assisted Packaging System
- FIG. 4 broadly shows the configuration for the computer assisted packaging system (CAP)260 of the
operations center 202. The primary components of theCAP 260 consist of multiplepackager workstations 262, acentral processing unit 264, a multiplechannel architecture module 265, video/audio editing equipment 266, and one ormore databases video storage database 267, and buffers 271 andcontrollers 272 for external program feeds make up the peripherals of theCAP system 260. - The heart of the
CAP 260 is acentral processing unit 264 that communicates with all the component parts of theCAP 260. Thecentral processing unit 264 can be a powerful PC, a mini-computer, a mainframe or a combination of computing equipment running in parallel. Thecentral processing unit 264 includes all the necessary interconnections to control peripheral equipment such as the external video controls 272. Thecentral processing unit 264 hassufficient memory 274 to store the program instructions of the subroutines that operate theCAP 260. - The
CAP 260 receives data from one or more databases, such as theoperations center Database 268 and the CableFranchise Information Database 269 shown in FIG. 4. In addition, separate databases are maintained of viewer information, such as demographics and programs viewed. TheCAP 260 can control the reception of external sources by enabling and disenabling the external video controls 272. The external video controls 272 include buffers to delay as necessary external programs received by theoperations center 202. - The multiple
channel architecture module 265 allows theoperations center 202 or thecable headends 208 to broadcast multiple program signals to each of the settop terminals 220, with the settop terminals 220 then determining which of the multiple channels to switch to, based on a switching plan generated by the multiplechannel architecture module 265, and a set top terminal assignment matrix generated by the multiplechannel architecture module 265 and stored in the settop terminal 220. The use of multiple channels is particularly advantageous when targeting advertisements to different viewers. The construction and operation of the multiplechannel architecture module 265 will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 4a-4 e. - The functions of the video/
audio equipment 266 include digitizing analog programs, digitizing and compressing analog programs (in a single step, e.g., MPEG), and compressing digital program signals as requested by thecentral processing unit 264. - The
CAP 260 receives video and audio from two sources: internally from alocal video storage 267 and externally from external sources through external video controls 272. When necessary, video is manipulated, formatted and/or digitized using video/audio equipment 266 that is controlled byCAP 264. - Referring back to FIG. 2, an overview of an operating cable television menu driven
program delivery system 200 highlighting various externalprogramming signal sources 212 is depicted. Theoperations center 202 is shown receiving external programming signals that correspond to particular programming categories that are available for a subscriber's viewing. These external signals may be in analog or digital form and may be received via landline, microwave transmission, or satellite. Some of these external signals may be transmitted from theprogram source 212 to theoperations center 202 in compressed digital format or other nonstandard digital formats. These external signals are received and packaged with programming that is stored at theoperations center 202. - Examples of
external program sources 212 shown in FIG. 2 are: Sporting events, children's programs, documentaries, high definition TV sources, specialty channels, interactive services, weather, news, and other nonfiction or entertainment. Any source that can provide either audio or video or both may be utilized to provide programming to theoperations center 202. - In order to achieve the required throughput of video and audio information for the system, digital compression techniques are employed. A television signal is first digitized. The object of digitization is two-fold: First, in the case of an analog signal, like a television picture, digitization allows the signal to be converted from a waveform into a digital binary format. Secondly, through the use of digital compression techniques, standard digital formats are designed to have the resulting pictures or video stills take up less space on their respective storage mediums. Essentially, as described below, a standard digital format will define the method of compression used.
- There are three basic digital compression techniques: within-frame (intraframe), frame-to-frame (interframe), and within-carrier. Intraframe compression processes each frame in a television picture to contain fewer visual details and, therefore, the picture contains fewer digital bits. Interframe compression transmits only changes between frames, thus omitting elements repeated in successive frames. Within-carrier compression allows the compression ratio to dynamically vary depending upon the amount of changes between frames. If a large number of changes occur between frames, the compression ratio drops from, for example, sixteen-to-one to eight-to-one. If action is intense, the compression ratio may dip to four to one.
- Several standard digital formats representing both digitizing standards and compression standards have been developed. For example, JPEG (joint photographic experts group) is a standard for single picture digitization. Motion picture digitization may be represented by standards such as MPEG or MPEG2 (motion picture engineering group specifications). Other proprietary standards have been developed in addition to these. The preferred embodiment uses the MPEG-2 standard of coding and those of ordinary skill in the art are presumed to be familiar with the MPEG-2 standard. The MPEG-2 Systems Working Draft Proposal from the Systems Committee of the International Organization For Standardization, document ISO/IE JT1/SC29/WG11 N0531 MPEG93 dated Sep. 10, 1993, is hereby incorporated by reference. Although MPEG and MPEG2 for motion pictures are preferred in the present invention, any reliable digital format with compression may be used with the present invention.
- Various hybrids of the above compression techniques have been developed by several companies including AT&T, Compression Labs, Inc., General Instrument, Scientific-Atlanta, Phillips, and Zenith. As is known by those skilled in the art, any of the compression techniques developed by these companies, and other known techniques, may be used in the
system 200. - With reference to FIG. 4, the human intervention in this system is conducted by a programmer or program packager operating from the one or
more work stations 262 connected to the system. These workstations 262 are preferably intelligent work stations with large CRT screens. In the preferred embodiment, a suitable keyboard, mouse and color monitor are used with the workstation. From these work stations, the packager can create program lineups, prioritize programs, initiate dynamic menu allocation, initiate dynamic bandwidth allocation, design menus, place program names and descriptions onto menus, create menus with still and live video, move text on menus, change the colors of objects on menus and perform various other tasks for theprogram delivery system 200. - Almost any
operations center 202 function that normally requires human intervention can be conducted at thepackager workstation 262. Although data entry for the databases can be performed manually at theworkstations 262, it is preferred that the data entry be completed through electronic transfers of information. Alternatively, the data can be loaded from customary portable storage media such as magnetic disks or tape. - An integral part of the Computer Assisting Packaging system is the retrieval of viewer data, and the assimilation of that data into the program packaging method (especially the menu configuration) as discussed in reference to FIG. 8
MII 402. This involves two main steps, first, retrieval of raw data from the set top terminals, and then filtering and presenting that data. Eachheadend 208 compiles the viewer data, and then sends it verbatim to theoperations center 202. Alternately, theoperations center 202 can collect the viewer data directly from the settop terminals 220. The raw data is necessary because different responsibilities of theoperations center 202 require different parts of the raw information. Also a record must be kept of overall data. Once the raw data is assembled at theoperations center 202, the data is filtered for each application. - The raw data gathered includes but is not limited to:
- What programs a viewer purchased and when it was purchased
- What channel a specific viewer watched and for how long.
- Which of the multiple channels the set
top terminal 220 tuned to during a program break. - Click stream data recorded during operation of the set
top terminal 220. - This information can then be used to calculate the following:
- How many viewers watched a particular program.
- Which targeting group a viewer belongs to.
- Peak viewing times for different categories of shows.
- Buy rates for particular menu positions.
- Rates charged to advertisers for their commercials.
- Menu creation, both automatically and manually, is one of the major CAP functions that involve the incorporation of the raw data. An automated software procedure (such as the EIS) analyzes the data and, using certain heuristics, creates the menus.
- One heuristic, for example, is that when a show is not ordered frequently, it is moved closer to the top of the menu for greater visibility. The filtering of the data allows it to be sorted and indexed for display to the user. The program data can be filtered into a new database containing program names and indexed by the number of times each program was purchased. The data can also be indexed by buy times and program categories.
- Certain metrics are established to help in evaluating the data. Using the EIS or similar software, sales by menu placement, cost, category and lifespan can be pulled up for viewing in graphic presentation. The graphic presentation, in the form of line or bar graphs, help the packager recognize any trends in the data. For example, the first movie on a movie menu might not have sold as well as a second movie listed. A chart can be pulled up to reveal that the first movie has been at the top of the menu for two weeks and buy rates are naturally falling off. Steps can then be taken to move items in the menus to correct this, though many of these steps are automated in the menu creation system. Suggested changes can be displayed to help the user in this task.
- The automated procedures create menus that are distinct between
headends 208 because of demographic differences in the viewing audience. To help with this, a separate database of viewer demographics exists and is frequently updated. Theheadends 208 are able to alter the menu positions in order to further tailor the presentation, or to add local shows and local targeted advertisements. Any changes to the menus are sent back to theoperations center 202 at the same time as the viewer data, in order to prevent erroneous data analysis. Menu changes at the cable headend are described in detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,600,350, entitled NETWORK CONTROLLER FOR A CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM, incorporated herein by reference - Another use for the indexed data is creation of marketing reports. Programming changes are helped by accurate information on viewer preference. Also viewer purchasing trends, and regional interests can be tracked.
- In an embodiment, an Executive Information System (EIS) is used to give high level access to both buy (what the customer purchases) and access (when the product was viewed, how often and duration) data. The EIS represents information in both a graphical and summary report format. Drill down functions in the EIS help the packager derive the appropriate product (product refers to programs, events or services) mix.
- The purpose of the EIS is to provide an on-line software tool that will allow for real-time evaluation of current product positioning. The design of the system consists of user friendly icons to guide the user through available functions. The functionality in the system provides general information on current programming sales status. By working through the tiers in the system, the user has access to more specific information. The system is designed to shield the user from a long learning curve and information overload.
- The graphical tools allow for analysis of current data through the use of multiple graph types such as line graphs, bar and pie charts. These tools will allow the user to manipulate independent variables such as time (hour, day of the week, week, month), demographic information, program category information (genre, property, events), headend information and pricing information for determining the appropriate programming mix within the allotted time slots.
- The system also allows the packager to derive expected monetary returns through program line-ups by integrating outside industry databases. For instance, the system could be used to determine expected returns from a particular program by correlating buy information from the existing programs in the line up with a viewer ratings service database to determine the outcome of programs within a particular genre not in the current line up.
- Report tools within the EIS aggregate buy access at the highest level. Due to the volume of available information statistical analysis methods are used for deriving marketing intelligence within the EIS.
- A yield management tool is incorporated within the EIS. The yield management tool encompasses operations research techniques, statistical methods and neural net technology to decide program mix as it pertains to program substitutes, program complements, time slice positioning, repetitions and menu positioning.
- This system is automated to the extent of providing viable alternative as to the proposed product mix. The system encompasses a Monte Carlo simulation for developing alternative product mix scenarios. The system feeds from both internal data and external industry data sources to provide expected revenue projections for the different scenarios. Other software subroutines of the CAP will automatically call upon the EIS to assist the program in important decision making, such as menu configuration and transponder allocation. Human interaction is required to change marketing parameters for fine tuning the desired product scheduling.
- Although the packaging of the program information and programs, including the creation of program control information, program lineup and menu designing configuration, is conducted at the
CAP 260, all other functions of theoperations center 202 can be controlled by a second separate processing unit (shown in FIG. 5 at 270). Thissecond processing unit 270 is the DeliveryControl Processing Unit 270, and can perform the tasks of incorporating the program control information signal from theCAP 260, coordinating the receipt and combining of external program video/audio and internal video/audio and combining the signals as necessary for transmission. This distribution of functions between theCAP 260 and DeliveryControl Processing Unit 270 allows for greater speed and ease of use. - FIG. 5 shows a more detailed diagram of the
CAP 260 and the DeliveryControl Processor Unit 270. Once external and stored digital and analog sources have been converted into a standarddigital format 274, they are input into standard digital multiplex equipment 273 (of the type manufactured by Scientific Atlanta, General Instruments, and others). Additionally, the ProgramControl Information Signal 276 is input into thedigital multiplex equipment 273. Theseinputs Control Processor Unit 270 as commanded by theCPU 264. The DeliveryControl Processor Unit 270 is also responsible for the generation of the ProgramControl Information Signal 276 based on information received from theCPU 264. The DeliveryControl Processor Unit 270 allows for the off-loading of real-time and near real-time tasks from theCPU 264. TheCPU 264, as described earlier, processes information within its database and provides user access to theCAP 260 viamultiple user workstations 262. The high-speeddigital output 278 from thedigital multiplex equipment 273 is then sent on to the compression (if necessary), multiplexing, modulation and amplification hardware, represented at 279. - C. The Program Control Information Signal
- Table A is an example of some information that can be sent in the program control information signal to the set
top terminals 220. The program control information signal generated by theoperations center 202 provides data on the scheduling and description of programs via thenetwork controller 214 or, in an alternate configuration, directly to the settop terminal 220 for display to the subscriber. - In an embodiment, the program control information signal276 is stored and modified by the
network controller 214 and sent to the settop terminal 220 in the form of a set top terminal control information stream (STTCIS). This configuration accommodates differences in individual cable systems and possible differences in set top converter or terminal devices. The settop terminal 220 of the present invention integrates either theprogram control signal 276 or the STTCIS, together with data stored in the memory of the settop terminal 220, to generate on-screen menu displays for assisting the subscriber in choosing programs for viewing. (Throughout the description the term program control information is being used to indicate control information coming from thecable headend 208 to the settop terminal 220, whether it is sent directly from theoperations center 202, processed by thenetwork controller 214, and then forwarded to the set top terminal as STTCIS, or transmitted over telephone lines.) - With further reference to Table A below, the types of information that can be sent via the program control signal include: number of program categories, names of program categories, what channels are assigned to a specific category (such as specialty channels), names of channels, names of programs on each channel, program start times, length of programs, description of programs, menu assignment for each program, pricing, whether there is a sample video clip for advertisement for the program, and any other program, menu or product information.
- The goal of the menu driven program selection system of the present invention, described in greater detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,743,853, entitled SET TOP TERMINAL FOR CABLE TELEVISION DELIVERY SYSTEM, incorporated herein by reference, is to allow the subscriber to choose a program by touring through a series of menus utilizing a
remote control 900 for cursor movement. The final choice in the series of menus will identify one particular channel and one time for activation of that channel. Armed with a channel and activation time theset top terminal 220 can display the selected program on the television for the viewer. To achieve this goal, an intelligent alpha-numeric code is assigned to each program. This alpha-numeric code identifies the category of the program, the menu in which the program should be displayed, its transmission time(s), and the position on the menu that the program should be displayed. In a preferred embodiment, the program control information, including menu codes, is sent continuously from theoperations center 202 to thenetwork controller 214, and ultimately to the settop terminal 220. For example, four hours worth of programming information can be sent via the program control information signal continuously in the format shown in Table A. - TABLE A shows the basic information that is needed by the set
top terminal 220. The program descriptions shown are coded abbreviations. For example, C stands for comedy, N for news, S for sports, A for cartoons, and TX for text. If there is a textual description for a program, such as a movie, the description may be given following that program's coded description or may be communicated following the four hours of programming information. As is shown in the coded listing, program descriptions for programs greater than a half hour in length need not be repeated (each half hour). The video description code informs the settop terminal 220 whether there is still or live video available to advertise the program.TABLE A *Program *Program name length *Menu code Description Video 12 PM 1 Cheers .5 E24 C N 2 Terminator 2.0 A33 Tx S 3 Prime 1.0 D14 N N Time 4 Football .5 B24 S N Special □ □ □ □ 12:30 PM 1 Simpsons .5 E14 & C13 C S 2 Football 3.0 B13 S N Game □ □ □ - For example, a sporting program may be assigned a code of B35-010194-1600-3.25-Michigan St. vs. USC. The letter B would assign the program to category B, sports. The second alpha-
numeric character number 3 would assign the program to the third menu of the sports category. The third character of the code,number 5, assigns the program to the fifth program slot on the third menu. The next six characters, Jan. 01, 1994, represent the date. The following four characters, 1600 represent the start time, which is followed by the length of the program and the program name. This entry represents a sports show, a college football game, which will be aired at 4:00PM on New Years day 1994. - In the 12:30
Channel 1 entry of Table A, two menu codes are shown. By allowing two menu codes, programs that may fit under two different category descriptions may be shown in both menus to the subscriber. With this minimal amount of information being communicated to the settop terminal 220 on a regular basis, the terminal is able to determine the proper menu location for each program and the proper time and channel to activate for the subscriber after his menu selection. In the preferred embodiment, the menu codes are generated at theoperations center 202. - Table B shows an example Events Table that may be downloaded to a
set top terminal 220 using the Event Data file that contains information about events and pricing. As shown in the table, the three columns of the Events Table identify the field number, the field itself and the type of information downloaded in the Event Data file. The first column contains thefield numbers 1 through 11. The middle column contains the corresponding field parameters, including the event type, event ID, global channel ID, price, start time, end time, start date, end date, P-icon, name and description. The third column contains corresponding field type information. As shown in this field type information typically consists of an unsigned integer; hours, minutes and seconds; months, day and year; and ASCII character identifier.TABLE B Field # Type Field 1 Event Type Unsigned Int 1 ‘ YCTV 2 ‘ Pay-Per-View 3 ‘ Reg. TV 2 Event ID Unsigned Int 3 Global Channel ID Unsigned Int 4 Price (in Cents) Unsigned Int 5 Start Time HH:MM: SS 6 End Time HH:MM: SS 7 Start Date MM/DD/ YY 8 End Date MM/DD/YY 9 P- Icon ASCIIZ 10 Name ASCIIZ 11 Description ASCIIZ - Table C shows an example Event data file. In particular, Table C shows two data streams corresponding to two event types. The first data stream identifies a YCTV event in the first field. The second field designates the event ID, which is 1234 in this example. The third field includes the global channel ID number two. The fourth field indicates the cost of 50 cents for this event. The fifth and sixth fields indicate the respective start and end times of 3:00 a.m. to 3:00 p.m., respectively. The seventh and eighth fields show the corresponding start and end date, designated as Aug. 25, 1993 and Aug. 27, 1993, respectively. Field nine indicates the P icon set to a graphics file. Finally, fields ten and eleven indicate the name and description of the event selected, which in this case is Sesame Street and Barney. The second data stream in the Event.Dat example shown in Table C includes analogous information for Terminator IV, which is designated in field one as a pay-per-view event.
TABLE C Event Data Example 1{grave over ( )}1234{grave over ( )}2{grave over ( )}50{grave over ( )}03:00:00{grave over ( )}15:00:00{grave over ( )}Aug. 25, 1993{grave over ( )}Aug. 27, 1993{grave over ( )}pbs.pcx {grave over ( )}Sesame Street & Barney's Sesame Street and Barney Abstract 2{grave over ( )}1234{grave over ( )}2{grave over ( )}50{grave over ( )}20:00:00{grave over ( )}22:00:00{grave over ( )}Aug. 25, 1993{grave over ( )}Aug. 25, 1993{grave over ( )}t4.pcx {grave over ( )}Terminator 4{grave over ( )} Terminator 4Abstract - The program control information signal276 and STTCIS can be formatted in a variety of ways and the on-screen menus can be produced in many different ways. For instance, if the program control information signal 276 carries no menu format information, the menu format for creating the menus can be fixed in ROM at the set
top terminal 220. This method allows theprogram control signal 276 to carry less information but has the least flexibility since the menu formats cannot be changed without physically swapping the ROM holding the menu format information. In the preferred embodiment, the menu format information is stored at the settop terminal 220 in temporary memory either in a RAM or EPROM. This configuration provides the desired flexibility in the menu format while still limiting the amount of information needed to be communicated via the programcontrol information signal 276. New menu format information would be sent via the program control information signal 276 or the STTCIS to the settop terminals 220 each time there was a change to a menu. - In an embodiment, the menus remain fixed and only the text changes. Thus, the program control information signal276 can be limited to primarily text and a text generator can be employed in the set
top terminal 220. This simple embodiment keeps the cost of the settop terminal 220 low and limits the bandwidth necessary for the program control information. Another simple embodiment uses a separate channel full-time (large bandwidth) just for the menu information. - FIGS. 6a and 6 b, particularly FIG. 6a, show a
data format 920 at the bit-level for one embodiment of aprogram information signal 276. This frame format consists of six fields, namely: (1) a leadingflag 922 at the beginning of the message, (2) anaddress field 924, (3) asubscriber region designation 926, (4) a set topterminal identifier 928 that includes a polling command/response (or P/F)bit 930, (5) aninformation field 932, and (6) a trailingflag 934 at the end of the message. - The eight-bit flag sequence that appears at the beginning922 and end 927 of a frame is used to establish and maintain synchronization. Such a sequence typically consists of a 01111110 bit-stream. The
address field 924 designates a 4-bit address for a givenset top terminal 220. Thesubscriber region designation 926 is a 4-bit field that indicates the geographical region in which the subscriber's settop terminal 220 is housed. The set topterminal identifier 928 is a 16-bit field that uniquely identifies each settop terminal 220 with a 15-bit designation followed by an appended P/F bit 930. Although field size is provided by this example, a variety of sizes can be used with the present invention. - The P/
F bit 930 is used to command apolling response 920′ (FIG. 6b) from the settop terminal 220 addressed. Thepolling response 920′ is substantially similar to the fromformat 920, and is commonly numbered, but with a prime (<) designation appended for clarity. Theframe format 920 also provides a variable-length information field 932 for other data transmissions, such as information on system updates. The frame format ends with an 8-bit flag 934 (or trailing flag) that is identical in format to theleading flag 922, as set forth above. Other frame formats, such as MPEG, for example, will be apparent to one skilled in the art and can be easily adapted for use with the system. - D. Multiple Channel Architecture
- To efficiently convey targeted advertisements to a desired audience, the
operations center 202 may employ a multiple channel architecture that includes program channels and a number of feeder channels to carry alternate programming, such as alternate targeted advertising. The program channel carries a main program, such as a broadcast television show, and accompanying advertisements. The feeder channels are ancillary video/audio channels, which are delivered to the settop terminal 220, and which provide primarily alternate commercial and promotional interstitial material for use during program breaks. The concept of targeted advertising makes use of feeder channels to allow for the settop terminals 220 to be switched to the most appropriate feeder channel at a program break, with appropriateness being based on information known about the demographics and viewing habits of users of the settop terminals 220, for example. - Careful management of the feeder channels, including their dynamic switching and control of the advertising airing on the feeder channels at any given time can greatly increase both the advertisers' likelihood to reach an interested viewer, as well as the likelihood a viewer is interested in a specific advertisement. The feeder channels are assigned a series of advertisements and a switching plan is developed at the
operations center 202 that directs individual settop terminals 220 to remain at the program channel or to switch from the program channel to a specific feeder channel upon the occurrence of the program break. - The process of managing the feeder channels begins with a number of configuration and set-up steps. First, individual set top terminal address information is collected at the
operations center 202. This information is required to uniquely identify each settop terminal 220 and to associate with that identifier necessary information to aid in the targeting process. The set top terminal address information may be provided to theoperations center 202 upon installation or activation of the settop terminal 220 in a viewer's home. Other information may be collected from various sources, including viewer surveys, marketing databases correlated by address or zip code+4, for example. - Next, set top terminal groups may be determined. This is needed if the management of information and targeting to individual set
top terminals 220 is not practical initially, either due to non-availability of information to the appropriate level of detail, or technology to control and deliver messages and advertisements to individual settop terminals 220. For a number of target criteria, individual groups are defined. Examples of target criteria include demographic targeting (age/sex/income) and Area of Dominant Influence (ADI). Each target criteria is then segmented into appropriate groups. For example, the ADI may include Los Angles, Calif. and Washington D.C. New targeting criteria can be added and the groups redefined after their initial establishment. - For each targeting criterion, each set
top terminal 220 is assigned to its appropriate group based on the information collected about the set-top terminal's environment. Once the settop terminals 220 are assigned to groups, their group assignments are conveyed to the settop terminal 220 and stored there. - The group assignment information that is stored at the set
top terminal 220 is able to survive power cycling of the settop terminal 220, and other normal service interruptions. Finally, as groups are modified or group assignments change, the settop terminals 220 are notified of the changes. Additionally, the group assignment information is periodically resent to the settop terminals 220 to ensure that newly added settop terminals 220 and those that have accidentally lost their information are up-to-date. - Since the available feeder channels may be shared across several program channels, their allocation must be managed and optimized. A break management engine determines how many feeder channels are available for each program break. Each program break may contain one or more pods during which a commercial spot or targeted advertisement may be aired. At a minimum, one commercial spot will be available for each pod in a program break (i.e., the spot airing on the same channel as the program). However, the maximum number of spots to be available for a given program break will depend on the total number of feeder channels available and the alignment of program breaks across all program channels. For some programming, the occurrence of program breaks cannot be predicted in advance of programming airing (e.g., live sports broadcasts). For replayed programming, the occurrence of program breaks will be known. Furthermore, some programming may be manually edited to insert program breaks at appropriate intervals. The manual placement of program breaks during the program edit process can be used to force program breaks to line up or be totally staggered across program channels, permitting more predictable program break placements, as necessary.
- Finally, targeted advertisements can be assigned to program breaks based on program breaks that occur in a particular program (e.g., All My Children). Alternately, targeted advertisements may be assigned to program breaks based on program categories (e.g., sports). In the discussion that follows, the targeted advertisements are assigned based on a specific program. Algorithms for assigning targeted advertisements based on program categories will be described later with respect to FIGS.28-36.
- A spot placement engine determines the optimum types of spots to be placed based on break timing and feeder channel availability. The output of the spot placement engine includes an ad playbill that can be used for billing, analysis and commercial trafficking purposes. The spot placement engine takes into account likely viewers of a program, the desirability of available spots to those viewers, targeting criteria, and the number of feeder channels available for each program break. The spot being placed in the program break serves as the default targeted advertisement (most appropriate to the overall audience) in case feeder channels are not available for alternate targeted advertising. The default targeted advertising also supports cable system that either are not configured to provide targeted advertising, or are receiving other programming.
- Once specific spots are selected for each program break, the set top groups that should remain with the program channel, and those that should tune to a particular feeder channel at each program break are determined, based on target criteria of interest. To accomplish the switching of set
top terminals 220 to the appropriate feeder channels requires a detailed switching plan. The switching plan is distributed to the necessary control points in the system, such as thecable headends 208, which are then responsible for the periodic transmission of the switching plans to the settop terminals 220. Alternately, the switching plans are distributed directly to the settop terminals 220 from theoperations center 202. - After the set
top terminal 220 receives and stores the switching plan, theset top terminal 220 will tune to the appropriate feeder channel during the corresponding program break, if the settop terminal 220 is tuned to a program channel that carries programming that cooperates with the feeder channel architecture. The viewer may, at any time, override feeder channel switching by selecting a non-cooperating program channel. - The set
top terminal 220 will store information indicating that the switch was made. The accumulated switching history information will be collected from the settop terminal 220 at a later time for review purposes. For example, upon command from the control points, theset top terminal 220 will provide for the transparent collection of switching history data to a local (head-end) or national site. The unique set top terminal identification information will be provided with the collected data. As mechanisms become available to identify specific viewers in a household, the system will allow for individual identification information to also be provided with collected data. Finally, upon collection of the set top terminal switching history data, thetelevision delivery system 200 will allow for the return of used set-top memory space to available pools for future use. - FIG. 4a shows the multiple
channel architecture module 265, according to an embodiment of the invention, which resides at theoperations center 202. In FIG. 4a, the multiplechannel architecture module 265 includes anadvertisement assignment module 275, which will be described later in more detail. Theadvertisement assignment module 275 receives program schedule and clock information regarding broadcast programs from aprogram schedule module 289; advertisement/promotional information from an advertisement/promotional information module 287; and set top terminal subscriber information from asubscriber information module 287. Theadvertisement assignment module 275 provides outputs to acommercial operations module 277 and aswitching plan generator 291. - The set top
subscriber information module 285 receives inputs from a configuration set-upsystem 293 and a set topdata collection engine 295. The set topsubscriber information module 285 provides outputs to the configuration set-upsystem 293, theswitching plan generator 291 and theadvertisement assignment module 275. - FIG. 4b shows the configuration set-up
system 293 in more detail. Aninterface 297 receives individual addressing information unique to individual settop terminals 220. Theinterface 297 can include a workstation, such as thework station 262, for example, from which an operator at theoperations center 202 manually enters set top terminal information. Alternately, set top terminal information can be automatically entered at theinterface 297 by downloading from an off-site database, the Internet, a storage medium, such as a CD-ROM or a floppy disk, or by collecting the information directly from the individual settop terminals 220. Aprocessor 299 process the received set top information and creates a Category/Group Definition matrix and a Group Assignment matrix that can be used to target advertisements to groups of settop terminals 220 or to an individualset top terminal 220. The Category/Group Definition and Group Assignment matrices will be described later. The Category/Group Definition and Group Assignment matrices are then stored in adatabase 301, and are periodically updated as subscriber information, for example, changes. - The information used by the
processor 299 to create the Category/Group Definition and Group Assignment matrices includes, for example, the set top terminal identifier, zip code+4 data, household income, and age and sex of the subscribers, for example. The information gathered by the configuration set-upsystem 293 can come from a variety of sources including MSOs and marketing databases, direct inputs from the subscribers, and other means. Once the data are collected, theprocessor 299 will assign category numbers to certain types of the data. For example, the ADI would be assignedcategory 1 and household (HH) income would be assignedcategory 2. Next, the configuration set-upsystem 293 creates a number of non-overlapping groups for each category. For example, ADI can be broken down into Seattle, Wash., Washington D.C., Denver Colo., Los Angles Calif., etc. Similarly, HH income can be broken down into a number of income groups such as no income, 20-40K, 60-120K, etc. Finally, the configuration set-upsystem 293 assigns a group mask representation for each group within every category. The group mask representation is simply a binary number that can be used by other components of the multiplechannel architecture module 265 to identify a particular group. Table D shows a completed Category/Group Definition matrix that is used by theadvertisement assignment module 275 to assign targeted advertising to groups of settop terminals 220 or to individual settop terminals 220. - The
processor 299 also creates the Group Assignment matrix. The Group Assignment matrix, shown in Table E, assigns to each settop terminal 220, for each category, its corresponding group number. Associated with each group number is the group definition and the group mask representation. For example, theset top terminal 220 identified by the set top unit address 12311 is assigned group number 2 (i.e., Washington D.C.) for ADI, and group number 3 (i.e., 40-60 k) for household income. The Group Assignment matrix is updated periodically as categories and group definitions change, and as data related to individual settop terminals 220 or groups of settop terminals 220 change. - The configuration set-up
system 293 also delivers the group configuration (i.e., information specific to an individualset top terminal 220, from the Group Assignment matrix) to each settop terminal 220. For example, theset top terminal 220 assigned the set top unit address 12311 is sentcategory 1,group 2 and group mask representation 01000000000. The group configuration can be transmitted directly to each set top terminal 220 from theoperations center 202. Alternately, the group configuration can first be transmitted to thecable headend 208. Thecable headend 208 then transmits the group configuration to the appropriate settop terminals 220. In addition to an initial delivery of the group configuration to the settop terminals 220, the set-upsystem 293 can periodically transmit updated group configurations to the settop terminals 220, either directly or through thecable headend 208. - FIG. 4c shows the
advertisement assignment module 275 in more detail. Abreak management engine 305 uses program schedule/clock information from theprogram schedule module 289 to assign feeder channels to program breaks. Aspot placement engine 307 decides which advertisement spots to place in open spots, or pods, during each program. Agroup assignment engine 309 determines which settop terminals 220 will view which simultaneously aired advertisement spots. Thespot placement engine 307 receives information related to program breaks and available feeder channels from thebreak management engine 305. Thebreak management engine 305, thespot placement engine 307, and thegroup assignment engine 309 will be described later in more detail. - The
break management engine 305 functions to divide available feeder channels and assign the available feeder channels optimally to those program channels that have concurrent program breaks. Because each program shown on a programming channel will normally carry associated advertisements for each program break, or pod within the program break, thebreak management engine 305 need only assign feeder channels if alternate advertisements are identified to be broadcast during the program breaks. Thus, during the program break, the program-channel advertisements or advertisements carried on one or more feeder channels can be broadcast to a particularset top terminal 220 or group of settop terminals 220. - Because there may be a number of program channels that use targeted advertising, the
break management engine 305 must, at every point in time, divide up the available feeder channels and assign them optimally to the program channels. This requires taking into account the alignment of program breaks across all the program channels. For example, if two program channels have overlapping program breaks, separate feeder channels will likely need to be assigned to each of the program channels. If more than one category of targeting (e.g., ADI, household income) is assigned to the program channels, then several separate feeder channels may be needed to carry all the assigned targeted advertisements. For example, if two program channels, each of which is assigned two categories of targeted advertisements are being broadcast, and the program breaks for the two program channels overlap, then thebreak management engine 305 will assign one separate feeder channel to each program channel. In this example, the program channel will carry one category of targeted advertisement and the feeder channel will carry the second category of targeted advertisement. In this alternative, theset top terminal 220 decides, based on a priority algorithm, which targeting category to switch to in case of ambiguous commands to switch to two separate feeder channels. Alternately, thebreak management engine 305 can assign feeder channels based on the group assignment numbers. Referring to Table D, four group numbers (i.e., 1-4) are shown for the category of targeted advertisement, ADI. For the broadcast of a particular program, the four groups can be divided into two, withgroups groups feeder channel 1. This later example is shown in Table F. - After determining how many feeder channels will be needed for each program break of all programs airing at the same time, the
break management engine 305 must allocate feeder channels to the program breaks. Because the program channel will always carry targeted advertisements along with the regular program, every pod in the program will always air at least one spot (i.e., the default targeted advertisement). Thus, if thebreak management engine 305 is unable to assign a feeder channel to a specific program break, at least one set of commercials will still be available for airing. - In addition to accounting for the occurrence and alignment of program breaks within the programs, and the number of feeder channels available, the
break management engine 305 must also account for the number and type of available targeted advertisements for display and the variety of subscribers (according to group assignment numbers) who will potentially view the programs. An advertiser will provide this information when forwarding advertisements to theoperation center 202 for airing. - In the embodiments described above, the
break management engine 305 assigned one or more feeder channels to carry targeted advertisements, under the assumption that the entire program break (which consists of one or more pods) would receive all the spots assigned to the specific feeder channel. In another embodiment, individual pods within each program break may be separately assigned targeted advertisements. In this embodiment, thebreak management engine 305 tracks not only programs and program breaks, but within each program break, also tracks breaks between pods. Thebreak management engine 305, in cooperation with thegroup assignment engine 309, will then allocate feeder channels to air targeted advertisements on a pod-by-pod basis. If a sufficient number of feeder channels are available, thebreak management engine 305 can assign a separate feeder channel to each pod. Alternately, through the switching plan, thebreak management engine 305 can require individual settop terminals 220 to switch between the program channels and one or more feeder channels during the program break. The construction and operation of the group switching plan will be described later in detail. - The
spot placement engine 307 determines which specific advertisements are to be placed in each available open pod of the program break. Thespot placement engine 307 first receives the list of available advertisements/promotional material from the advertisement/promotion module 287. In cooperation with thebreak management engine 305, thespot placement engine 307 then determines which of the available advertisements/promotions should air in each pod during the broadcast of a program. This may include assigning the advertisement/promotion to the program channel to serve as the default targeted advertisement in case a feeder channel is not available to provide alternate targeted advertising, or in case aset top terminal 220 is unable to switch to the feeder channel. For example, if the preferred category of targeted advertisement for the program All My Children is ADI, thespot placement engine 307 will select one or more targeted advertisements from the list of available advertisements/promotions to air during program breaks in the broadcast. If the demographic or other data assembled by the configuration set-upsystem 293 indicates that more than one targeted advertisement should be played, depending on the ADI, then thespot placement engine 307 will select the appropriate number of targeted advertisements from the available advertisement/promotional module 287 and will assign each targeted advertisement to a specific feeder channel and the program channel. The operation of thespot placement engine 307 to assign the targeted advertisements will be described later in more detail.TABLE D Category/Group Definition Matrix Category Category Group Group Mask Number Name Number Group Definition Representation 1 ADI 2 HH income 3 Category x - The
group assignment engine 309 receives inputs from thebreak management engine 305 and thespot placement engine 307 and then determines which settop terminal 220 will view which simultaneously-aired targeted advertisements. Thus, for each program break, thegroup assignment engine 309 assigns the settop terminals 220 to either the program channel or one of the feeder channels, if available. The settop terminals 220 can be assigned based on their placement within a group (i.e., based on their group assignment number) or based on their individual set-top unit address. In tables E and F, the assignments are shown based on the group assignment numbers. As also shown in Table F, the group addressing for a program break is based on a single category of targeted advertising. This may be necessary to avoid a potential conflict regarding which feeder channel aset top terminal 220 must switch to.TABLE E Group Assignment Matrix Set-top Unit Category Group Group Mask Address Name Number Group Definition Representation 12311 ADI 2 Washington, D.C. 01000000000 HH income 3 40-60K 00100000000 Category x 5 Group d 00100000000 12312 ADI 4 LA 00100000000 HH income 3 40-60K 00100000000 Category x 2 Group a 10000000000 12313 ADI 3 Denver 00100000000 HH income 4 60-80K 00010000000 Category x 3 Group b 01000000000 - The
group assignment engine 309 provides an output to theswitching plan generator 291. The output indicates which group assignment numbers (i.e., which groups of set top terminals 220) are assigned to each of the program channel and the feeder channels for each program break in each program. Theswitching plan generator 291 then generates the bit word, or group mask assignment that is used to assign the groups to the program channels and the feeder channels. Once generated, the switching plan is distributed to control points that are then responsible for final delivery to the settop terminals 220. The control points can include thelocal cable headends 208. Alternately, the switching plans can be distributed directly to the settop boxes 220 from theoperations center 202. For example, theoperations center 202 can distribute the switching plans by satellite to a satellite receiver that is co-located with the settop terminal 220. The switching plan can also be distributed to the settop terminals 220 over thetelecommunications network 100 and theInternet 101.TABLE F Set Top Switching Plan Category Channel to Groups Assigned of which to to Group Mask Program Targeting Tune Specific Channel Assignment All My ADI Program 1,2 11000000000 Children Channel Channel 1, Feeder 3,4 00110000000 Break 1Channel 1Gorillas in HH Program 1,2,3 11100000000 Mist Income Channel Channel 2, Feeder 4 00010000000 Break 1Channel ESPN Category Program 1,2 11000000000 Basketball, x Channel Channel 3, Feeder 3 00100000000 Break 1Channel 3Feeder 4 00010000000 Channel 4Feeder 5 00001000000 Channel 5Feeder 6 00000100000 Channel 6In Concert, All (no Program All 11111111111 Channel tuning) Channel 4, Break 1 - The switching plans can be distributed separately from the television programs or can be distributed with the television programs. By distributing the switching plan with the program, the need for control point relays could be eliminated, thereby allowing for more efficient use of available bandwidth and centralized control functions. The switching plan may be distributed well in advance of airing of a program and can be updated as conditions warrant.
- The switching plan provided by the
switching plan generator 291 is a national switching plan. To account for local insertion of targeted advertising,local cable headends 208 can override certain targeted advertisements and insert local targeted advertising on one or more of the feeder channels. Alternately, certain feeder channels may be reserved for local use, or open pods may be reserved in the program breaks on other feeder channels. After thelocal cable headend 208 has inserted the local targeted advertisement on a feeder channel, thelocal cable headend 208 may amend the national switching plan to create a local system switching plan. The details of these operations at thelocal cable headend 208 are described later in more detail. - The set-top
data collection module 295 receives programs watched data and targeted advertisement watched data from the settop terminals 220. This information is used at theoperations center 202 for billing commercial advertisers and may also be used as an input for future ad campaigns. The targeted advertisement watched data is collected in this fashion because there may be no way of knowing, a priori, which targeted advertisements will be displayed on a particularset top terminal 220. - The
advertisement assignment module 275 provides an ad playbill input to thecommercial operations module 277. The ad playbill input specifies which particular advertisement is to be aired at a particular time slot, the run-time for the advertisement, and the location of the advertisement in storage in theoperations center 202, for example. The ad playbill is then used to retrieve the appropriate analog or digital tape or file containing the selected advertisement. - FIG. 4d shows the configuration of the
feeder channel architecture 317 at thecable headend 208. A settop delivery system 319 receives the national switching plan from theoperations center 202. The national switching plan is digitally compressed and multiplexed and can be provided to thecable headend 208 as part of the digitalRF program signal 205, for example. Thedigital program signal 205 is received at thecable headend receiver 203 and may be passed to thesignal processor 209 or passed through thecable distribution network 236 directly to the settop terminals 220. In the embodiment, thedigital program signal 205 is processed at thecable headend 208. Thecontrol receiver 228 receives status reports and other data from the settop terminals 220. A set top data collection engine 321 receives targeted advertisement watched data and other information from thecontrol receiver 228, which may then be temporarily stored in thedatabase 226, and passes the data to theoperations center 202. A configuration set-up system 323 receives initial and updated set top configuration data from theoperations center 202 and passes the configuration data to the settop terminals 220. The configuration set up system 323 is also used to locally reconfigure the Group Assignment matrix. - The
signal processor 209, under control of thenetwork controller 214 passes the national switching plan to the settop delivery system 319. The settop delivery system 319 then either modifies the national switching plan and passes it on to the settop terminals 220 or passes the unmodified national delivery plan on to the settop terminals 220 as the local system-specific switching plan. The local system-specific switching plan is passed from the settop delivery system 319 to thesignal processor 209, and from thesignal processor 209 to thecable distribution system 236 and the settop terminals 220. - To modify the component of the
digital program signal 205 that is the national switching plan, the settop delivery system 319 demultiplexes the national switching plan from thedigital program signal 205. The settop delivery system 319 may then modify the assignments of groups of settop terminals 220, or individual settop terminals 220, to specific feeder channels or the program channel. If the group assignments are modified, the group mask assignment is also modified. The local system-specific switching plan is then sent to the settop terminals 220. - The local system-specific switching plan can be sent as part of the program signal or as part of the STTCIS. The local system-specific switching plan can also be sent to the set
top terminals 220 in advance of the program signal. In this event, the local system-specific switching plan may need to be updated to account for program changes and reassignment of targeted advertisements, for example. The local system-specific switching plan may also be transmitted periodically to the settop terminals 220 to ensure that any settop terminal 220 that was in a power-off condition when the switching plan was originally sent receives the latest version of the local system-specific switching plan. - As noted above, the
signal processor 209 and thenetwork controller 214 provide the capability to insert local programming, including local targeted advertisements into the signal sent to the settop terminals 220. When open pods exist in the feeder channels, or when a local cable system is authorized to override national advertising, thesignal processor 209, under control of thenetwork controller 214, will add local targeted advertisements to the appropriate feeder channels. If the addition of local targeted advertising requires a change in the nation-wide switching plan, thenetwork controller 214 will instruct the settop delivery system 319 to make the appropriate changes. In order to make the appropriate changes, the settop delivery system 319 must maintain the same Category/Group Definition and Group Assignment matrices as are maintained at theoperations center 202. Alternately, the settop delivery system 319 may create new matrices that do not conflict with the existing nationally-defined Category/Group Definition matrices. - FIG. 4e shows the set
top terminal 220 adapted for use with the feeder channel architecture of FIG. 4a. A set top switchingengine 325 receives the set top configuration from the configuration set-upsystem 293, and stores the configuration in erasablepermanent memory 329. The set top switchingengine 325 also receives and stores the local system-specific or nation-wide switching plan from theswitching plan generator 291 via the settop delivery system 319. - The set top switching
engine 325 provides control information and advertisements watched data to a set topdata collection engine 327. The data are stored in thememory 329 and are available for transmission to thelocal cable headend 208 or directly to theoperations center 202. In a cable television system, the data may be transmitted over the installedcable delivery system 236, using various polling techniques and transmission protocols, such as those describe previously with respect to gathering programs watched data. The advertisements watched data includes the set top unit address, the program identifier (program name) and the channel to which the set top was tuned during the program breaks. The data may also include click stream data such as operation of the volume mute button, for example. - When the viewer selects a program channel that incorporates the feeder channel features, the set top switching
engine 325 compares the current local system-specific switching plan to the set top configuration plan to determine whether to stay with the program channel during the program breaks or to switch to one of the feeder channels. If the switching plan calls for the settop terminal 220 to be switched to a feeder channel, the set top switchingengine 325 sends a control signal to seamlessly, or transparently, switch the program channel to the appropriate feeder channel. - In the above embodiments, the multiple
channel architecture module 265 is described that provides for real time broadcast of targeted advertising to individual settop terminals 220. However, the multiplechannel architecture module 265 need not broadcast the targeted advertisements in real time. In another embodiment, the targeted advertisements can be broadcast to individual settop terminals 220, and stored within thememory 327 of the settop terminal 220. In this embodiment, the need for feeder channels is eliminated. However, the national and local system-specific switching plans are still provided to the settop terminals 220, either directly from theoperations center 202, or from thecable headends 208. - An example of the process for assigning targeted advertisements to program channels and to feeder channels using the
spot placement engine 307 will now be described. As discussed above, targeted advertising uses targeting categories and independent groups within each target category to tie three entities together: 1) settop terminals 220; 2) advertisements; and 3) programs. The set top terminals 220 (or viewers) are assigned to groups for each targeting category based on numerous factors. One method to assign the settop terminals 220 to groups is to use the zip code+4 as an index into one of the available demographic marketing databases. From the zip code+4 data, a distinct demographic cluster can be determined. The demographic cluster can then be mapped directly to the specific group within each targeting category. Manual assignment of groups to settop terminals 220 would be a daunting task, for a large population of set top terminals (approaching several million). Therefore, theprocessor 299 performs this function automatically, using its installed software routines. Alternative methods can also be devised to automatically map individualset top terminals 220 to groups within targeting categories. Once each settop terminal 220 is mapped to one group for each targeting category, the group assignments are delivered to the settop terminals 220 for storage (see Table E). - Next, programs are tied to groups as well. For each program, the percentage of viewers (or set top terminals220) for each group can be identified 1) initially using estimates, and 2) becoming more accurate over time using actual programs watched data. Table G shows a sample breakdown of viewership for 5 example programs for 3 example targeting categories. The viewership data may be provided from a number of sources including surveys, Nielsen ratings and programs watched data collected by the set
top terminals 220, for example. In this example, the three targeting categories are the same as those presented in Table E, and the group assignment numbers are the same as those presented in Table D. Thus, targetingcategories category 3 has six groups associated with it. Thus, forprogram 1, the targetingcategory 1 refers to ADI and undergroup 1, 25% of the viewers ofprogram 1 from the targeting category ADI reside in the Seattle, Wash. ADI. The viewership percentages for each targeting category for each program sum up to 100%.TABLE G Tar- get Pro- Cate- gram gory Group 1 Group 2Group 3Group 4Group 5Group 6Pro- 1 25 25 25 25 N/A N/A gram 12 30 10 20 40 N/A N/ A 3 10 10 20 20 20 20 Pro- 1 10 20 30 40 N/A N/A gram 22 25 25 25 25 N/A N/ A 3 10 15 25 25 15 10 Pro- 1 40 30 20 10 N/A N/A gram 32 80 10 5 5 N/A N/ A 3 25 25 10 10 15 15 Pro- 1 50 0 50 0 N/A N/A gram 42 0 40 40 20 N/A N/ A 3 10 10 25 25 15 15 Pro- 1 20 40 40 20 N/A N/A gram 52 30 30 10 30 N/A N/ A 3 10 30 10 30 10 10 - Alternatively, if the viewership breakdown by group for a program differs depending on the time of day or day of week a program airs, multiple breakdowns may exist and need to be developed for each day part in which a program may air.
- Advertisements can also be broken down as to how well an advertisement ranks with each group within one and up to all possible targeting categories, again using percentages. This information may be provided by an advertiser responsible for the advertisement. Table H shows a sample assignment of group rankings for 8 sample advertisements using the same targeting categories and group numbers as in Table G. Not all advertisements may be assigned to groups for a targeting category if an advertiser does not wish its advertisement to be targeted in the manner required by that targeting category.
- Referring to Table H, the data indicates that for
ad 1, and targeting category 1 (ADI) the advertiser believes thatad 1 is appropriate for the viewers ingroups groups ad 1 is equally appropriate for both thegroup 1 and thegroup 2 viewers. However, if thegroup 1 viewers been determined to be more likely to respond toad 1 than thegroup 2 viewers, thengroup 1 could be given a higher percentage thangroup 2. Table H also shows thatad 1 is not applicable togroups top terminals 220 will be grouped into one ofgroups 1 through 4. - Using this paradigm, advertisements can be targeted using at least two methods. The first is a designated multi-ad campaign where specific unique sets of groups are assigned for each ad of the campaign. In the second method, each advertisement provided by an advertiser is independently associated with groups. Advertisements from several different advertisers are then used together to optimize use of the feeder channels.
TABLE H Target Cate- Ad gory Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Ad 1 1 50 50 0 0 N/A N/A 2 30 10 20 40 N/A N/A 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ad 2 1 0 0 50 50 N/A N/A 2 0 0 0 0 N/A N/A 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ad 3 1 0 0 0 0 N/A N/A 2 25 25 25 25 N/A N/A 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ad 4 1 50 0 50 0 N/A N/A 2 0 40 40 20 N/A N/A 3 10 30 10 30 10 10 Ad 5 1 40 20 20 40 N/A N/A 2 10 30 30 30 N/A N/A 3 30 30 30 5 5 0 Ad 6 1 0 0 0 0 N/A N/A 2 0 0 0 0 N/A N/A 3 10 10 10 10 30 30 Ad 7 1 20 40 40 20 N/A N/A 2 25 25 25 25 N/A N/A 3 0 30 20 30 0 20 Ad 8 1 30 40 0 30 N/A N/A 2 30 30 10 30 N/A N/A 3 20 0 20 20 20 20 - Using the information above, the
spot placement engine 307 determines: 1) how many feeder channels are assigned to which program; 2) which targeting category is used for which program; 3) which advertisements air on which feeder channels/program channels; and 4) which groups are assigned to which feeder channels/program channels. The algorithm in thespot placement engine 307 that assigns targeted advertisements to the program and feeder channels assumes that of the total number of feeders channels available [TOTAL_FEEDERS], no more than some maximum number of the feeder channels can be or are desired to be assigned to a given program at any given time. This amount is denoted as [MAX_FEEDERS]. The algorithm spreads the available feeder channels among several programs. The algorithm can also be modified to support different rates charged to different advertisers and can take into account the following: - ensuring advertiser's budget is not exceeded
- defining unique target categories and groups for an advertiser (presumes the advertiser can apply the population of set
top terminals 220 to their group definitions) - accounting for multiple program breaks during a program, multiple commercial pods within each program break and multiple length ads for placement in the program breaks
- ensuring enough margin for timing of actual program breaks to be offset from expected program break start-times
- The operation of the algorithm will be described with reference to the example values shown in Tables D-H.
- Step 1: For each program, determine the advertisement with the highest overall ranking if that advertisement were the only advertisement to be placed in the program. In essence, this step compares the data in Tables G and H. To do this, for each advertisement, multiply the ranking (or program viewership percentage) for each group for each targeting category from Table G by the breakdown percentage of advertising appropriateness shown in Table H for that same group for that targeting category. The process is repeated for each program and the results are summed.
- For example, using
program 1, ad 1:target category 1: 50 * 25 + 50 * 25 + 0 * 25 + 0 * 25 ‘25% target category 2: 30 * 30 + 10 * 10 + 20 * 20 + 40 * 40 ‘ 30% target category 3: 0 * 10 + 0 * 10 + 0 * 20 + 0 * 20 0 * 20 + 0 * 20 ‘ 0% - The cross-multiplied result then shows a measure of effectiveness for each advertisement if displayed in the corresponding program.
- Step 2: For each program, determine the advertisement/targeting category combination that results in the highest overall ranking. List the program, the overall ranking, the corresponding advertisement, and the corresponding targeting category. Note that only one advertisement will give the overall highest ranking. Table I shows the results. Thus from Table I,
ad 5, displayed during a program break inprogram 2 yields a measure of effectiveness of 50 (highest) andad 6 along withprogram 5 yields a measure of effectiveness of 20.TABLE I Highest Overall Corresponding Corresponding Program Ranking Ad Targeting Category Program 1 30 Ad 21 Program 250 Ad 52 Program 325 Ad 33 Program 440 Ad 11 Program 520 Ad 62 - Step 3: Order the resulting list of programs from lowest overall ranking to highest overall ranking. Table J shows the results.
- Step 4: Determine the number of programs that may be assigned feeder channels. For example, consider the first [TOTAL_FEEDERS]+1 programs for feeder channel assignment. Thus, if two feeder channels are available, three programs will be examined to determine which program will yield the best use of the available feeder channels. In this case, the three lowest-ranking programs (i.e.,
programs programs 4 and 2), assign the advertisement that yields that highest rating for placement in the program break for that program. For the programs selected for possible feeder channel assignment, perform steps 5-18 of the algorithm, starting with the program inStep 3 with the lowest overall ranking (i.e., in the example, program 5).TABLE J Corresponding Corresponding Program Overall Ranking Ad Targeting Category Program 5 20 Ad 62 Program 325 Ad 33 Program 130 Ad 21 Program 440 Ad 11 Program 250 Ad 52 - Step 5: Separately for each targeting category, multiply the ranking for each group for each advertisement (Table H) by the breakdown percentage for that same group for that program (Table G). Find the highest value possible. In case of a tie, select any of the advertisements with the highest values. Alternately, steps 5-14 could be repeated for every tie. Table K below shows an example case for targeting
category 1, wheread 1,group 2 is initially selected (with a high value of 20%). Note that Table K shows a three-way tie.TABLE K Target Cate- Ad gory Group 1 Group 2Group 3Group 4Group 5Group 6Ad 11 50 * 20 50 * 40 0 * 40 0 * 20 N/A N/ A Ad 2 1 0 * 20 0 * 40 50 * 40 50 * 20 N/A N/ A Ad 3 1 0 * 20 0 * 40 0 * 40 0 * 20 N/A N/ A Ad 4 1 50 * 20 0 * 40 50 * 40 0 * 20 N/A N/ A Ad 5 1 40 * 20 20 * 40 20 * 40 40 * 20 N/A N/ A Ad 6 1 0 * 20 0 * 40 0 * 40 0 * 20 N/A N/ A Ad 7 1 20 * 20 40 * 40 40 * 40 20 * 20 N/A N/ A Ad 8 1 30 * 20 40 * 40 0 * 40 30 * 20 N/A N/A - Step 6: Select from the iterations performed in
Step 5, the targeting category that yields the largest value. If there is a tie, select any one of the targeting categories. - Step 7: For the target category selected, find the next highest value of the (rank)*(breakdown percentage) product for a group not yet selected. If there is a tie, select the advertisement for which a group with a higher value has already been selected. Continue until all groups have been selected and assigned to an advertisement. Table L shows the results. In Table L, for
group 1, eitherad 1 orad 4 could be selected (i.e., the product: (rank)*(breakdown percentage) is 10 forad 1 and for ad 4). However, forgroup 2,ad 1 has already been selected. Therefore, because there is a tie forgroup 1 betweenad 1 andad 4, and becausegroup 2 hasad 1 selected, the algorithm selectsad 1 forgroup 1. As a result ofStep 7, the algorithm limits the number of advertisements that will be run, but maximizes the ranking percentage of the breakdown. The results show that, considering targeting category 1 (ADI) only,ad 1 should be displayed forgroups ad 2 should be displayed forgroups TABLE L Target Cate- Ad gory Group 1 Group 2Group 3Group 4Group 5Group 6Ad 11 50 * 20 50 * 40 0 * 40 0 * 20 N/A N/ A Ad 2 1 0 * 20 0 * 40 50 * 40 50 * 20 N/A N/ A Ad 3 1 0 * 20 0 * 40 0 * 40 0 * 20 N/A N/ A Ad 4 1 50 * 20 0 * 40 50 * 40 0 * 20 N/A N/ A Ad 5 1 40 * 20 20 * 40 20 * 40 40 * 20 N/A N/ A Ad 6 1 0 * 20 0 * 40 0 * 40 0 * 20 N/A N/ A Ad 7 1 20 * 20 40 * 40 40 * 40 20 * 20 N/A N/ A Ad 8 1 30 * 20 40 * 40 0 * 40 30 * 20 N/A N/A - Step 8: Sum the (rank)*(breakdown percentage) products for selected groups for each advertisement.
- Corresponding to the example above:
-
Ad 1−Sum′50*20+50*40′30% -
Ad 2−Sum′50*40+50*20′30% - Step 9: Order those advertisements that have selected groups by decreasing value of the (rank)*(breakdown percentage) product.
- Step 10: Select the [MAX_FEEDERs]+1 advertisements with the highest (rank)*(breakdown percentage) products. For example, if it is desired to assign at most one feeder channel to a program, the algorithm selects the two advertisements with the highest (rank)*(breakdown percentage) products.
- Step 11: For the advertisements selected (Step 10), examine each group not yet included in the selected advertisements. Assign each non-included group to the advertisement where the (rank)*(breakdown percentage) product is the highest for the selected advertisements.
- Step 12: For each advertisement selected, sum the product, (rank)*(breakdown percentage), for the groups assigned to each advertisement.
- Step 13: Reorder the advertisements by highest summed amount to the lowest. The advertisement with the highest summed amount will air in the program channel as the default advertisement.
- Step 14: Compute the total (rank)*(breakdown percentage) amount of all advertisements combined. In this case, the total is 60% (from step 10).
- Step 15: Repeat steps 5-14 above for the same selected program of
Step 4 using the remaining target categories. - Step 16: Select the target category that yields the largest total amount. Assign as the Maximum Rank for that program.
- Step 17: Repeat Steps 5-16 for the next program selected in
Step 4, computing the Maximum Rank for each program. - Step 18: Use the available feeder channels for the programs that yield the largest Maximum Rank. Make use of the relevant targeting category determined in
Step 16, with advertisements as determined inStep 10, with group assignments as determined inStep 11. - Step 19: For all other programs, assign the single advertisement that yielded the highest Overall Ranking as determined in
Step 3. - The above algorithm is meant to be illustrative and not limiting. Other algorithms are possible for assigning targeted advertising to groups of set
top terminals 220 or to individual settop terminals 220. For example, the above algorithm could incorporate a weighting scheme for certain factors. Other targeted advertising routines, such as those described with respect to FIGS. 28-33 can also be incorporated into the above algorithm. - E. Software Subroutines for Television Programming Delivery
- The program control information signal276 is produced substantially by the
CAP CPU 264 and the Delivery Control Processor Unit (DCPU) 270. An overview of the software modules, focusing on the processing of signals and communication betweenCAP CPU 264 andDCPU 270 is shown in FIG. 7. The software modules for theCAP CPU 264 andDCPU 270 includedispatcher 484, processing 486 andcommunications 488, each of which performs like-named functions, as well as supportingdatabase 490 access. Processing within theCAP CPU 264 is controlled by thedispatcher 484 software module which may generate processing commands based on user command (e.g., do something now), schedule events (e.g., do something at noon) or based on the occurrence of other events (e.g., do something when the database is updated). Thedispatcher 484 sends messages to theprocessing software module 486 instructing it to process information within thedatabase 490 and generate control information for theDCPU 270. For example, based on the updating of information associated with aparticular headend 208, thedispatcher 484 may command theCAP CPU 264 to regenerateheadend 208 parameters, perform any required database integrity checking and send them to theDCPU 270. Also, in the case ofheadend 208 information processing, a filtering function (not shown) is performed which eliminates any information that does not either directly or indirectly relate to a givenheadend 208. Information transfer between theCAP CPU 264 and theDCPU 270 is controlled by the DCPUcommunications software module 488. - Information received by the
DCPU 270 from theCAP CPU 264 is processed at theDCPU processing module 496 and put into a form consistent with theDCPU 270. Some of this information is used for DCPU control, while most is data to be integrated into the program control information signal 261. Some of this information is also used formiscellaneous control 494 for such things as external multiplex equipment, source material generation hardware, transmission equipment and so on. Information destined for the program control information signal 261 may be transmitted once or may be scheduled for periodic transmission. This information is integrated by theprocessing module 496 with other information, both internal and external. TheDCPU scheduler module 497 is responsible for scheduling and regulating this data traffic. Also, thescheduler 497 may perform information filtering. For example, imbedded date/time information within the information records of interest can be used for filtering. External pass-throughcontrol information 495 may also be incorporated into the program control information signal 261 to provide external input to this digital data stream. TheDCPU multiplexer 498 is responsible for multiplexing external pass-through control information. Finally, atransmission software module 499 in conjunction with appropriate communications hardware (not shown), controls the output of both the program control information signal 261 and the miscellaneous control signals 494. - FIG. 8 is a high level diagram of CAP software subroutines and their interrelations. A Main Program (not shown) orchestrates the use of the various subroutines as needed to perform the CAP's tasks. The Packager Data Entry Interface (PDEI)400, Marketing Information Interface (MII) 402, and Cable Franchise Information Access (CFIA) 404 subroutines perform the interface functions between the CAP Main Program and outside data or information. The remaining subroutines shown in the center column of FIG. 8 perform the processing and manipulations necessary to the functioning of the
CAP 260. - The Packager Data Entry Interface (PDEI)400 subroutine includes routines that enable the Packager to interactively enter
program selections 410, start times ofprograms 412, price setting 414,transponder allocation 416, andmenu editing 418. ThePDEI subroutine 400 controls the keyboard and mouse data entry by the packager and runs in concert with the processing and editing subroutines described later. - The Marketing Information Interface (MII)402 subroutine interfaces the processing and editing subroutines with marketing data. This interface regularly receives programs watched information from
billing sites 420,cable headends 208, or settop terminals 220. In addition, theMII 402 may receiveother marketing information 422 such as the demographics of viewers during certain time periods. TheMII 402 also usesalgorithms 424 to analyze the program watched information andmarketing data - The Cable Franchise Information Access (CFIA)404 subroutine receives information on cable franchises, as represented at
block 426, such as the particular equipment used in acable headend 208, the number of settop terminals 220 within a cable franchise, groupings of settop terminals 220 on concatenatedcable systems 210, distribution of “high-end” cable subscribers, etc. TheCFIA 404 generates a cablefranchise control signal 428, which is integrated with theprogram control information 276 output to generatecable headend 208 specific information to be transmitted. The integration algorithm for accomplishing this resides within the Generator subroutine described herein below. - The process program line-up
subroutine 430 uses information from theMII 404 andPDEI 400 to develop a program line-up. Importance weighting algorithms and best-fit time algorithms are used to assign programs in time slots. - The process
menu configurations subroutine 432 determines appropriate menu formats to be used and positions programs on menu screens. Information from theMII 404 andPDEI 400 are used to determine program positions on menus. - The
menu display algorithms 434 displays menus as the menus would be seen by the viewer on a large CRT or color monitor. - The editing of
menus subroutine 436 works with the menu display algorithm andPDEI 400 to allow the packager to edit menus on-the-fly during viewing of the menus. - The graphical
transponder allocation display 438 sends information obtained from theCFIA 404 andPDEI 400 to create graphical displays enabling the packager to comprehend the allocation of transponder space across the entiretelevision delivery system 200. - In a manner similar to the display and editing of menus represented at
blocks transponder allocation subroutine 440 to interactively reallocate assignment of transponder space. In the preferred embodiment, the EIS with yield management may be used by the packager to assist in decisions on allocating transponder space. - The
generator subroutine 442 creates the program control information signal for output. The Generator subroutine receives the cable franchise control signal and uses this signal to help create a custom signal for eachcable headend 208. - The
Packaging Routine 448 obtains and packages the programs, along with the programcontrol information signal 216, for transmission to the transponders. - With continued reference to FIGS. 7, 8 and9, the general software flow of the
operations center 202 is depicted. The flow can be broken up into modules that apply to parts of the database to allow viewing, editing, and adding records to the database. The software also accomplishes database integrity checking by restricting the user to enter only valid data, and by checking for conflicts. - FIG. 9 shows some of the software involved in the creation of programs, events and services. This creation occurs prior to or during the processing of the program line-
up 430 shown in FIG. 8. With reference to FIG. 9, a first step is indicated generally at 461 and includes acquiring source materials for program production at the operations center 202 (e.g., tape production). Once the source materials are collected 460, and entered into the database D, they can be used to createprograms 462. These programs are made up of source <cuts′ from various video/audio source materials. Once the programs have been generated and entered into the database D, events, collections of one or more programs, are created 464. Each event is then schedule onto aservice 466, with the software checking for conflicts. Each service is given run times, and days, and checked for conflicts. Once the services and events have been created, the event names can be added to themenus 468. The programs for the events and services may be stored at the operations center (as shown in FIG. 11 at 286). Processing and manipulation of the events or records is depicted generally at 463. - The packager user interface (a portion of463) for each of the creation modules works substantially identically to each of the other modules to make the interface easy to use and learn. The packager user interfaces forms a portion of the
PDEI 400 shown on FIG. 8. Thebrowse system 470 is entered first and allows viewing of records, and selection of specific records. The database can be <populated′ by selection of a button, which activates a populate screen. As represented atblock 471, this allows details to be deleted, added or changed for events, programs, and sources. The browse screen also allows access to theedit screen 472, where fields in a selected record can be modified, with conflicts or errors, in scheduling for example, being checked continuously, as at 473 and 474. - In use, the
operations center 202 of the present invention performs a variety of management functions which can be broken out into five primary areas: (1)cable headend 208 management, (2) program source management, (3) broadcast program management, (4) internal program storage and management, and (5) marketing, management and customer information. A relational database, such as that represented by FIG. 10, can be used to maintain the data associated with these areas. - Customer billing is not included in any of the above five areas for the
operations center 202. Although billing can be handled by the operations center 202 (as shown in thedatabase structure 508, 511), it is preferred that billing is handled at a remote location through traditional channels and methods (such as Cable TV billing provided by Telecorp corporation). Extracts of customer purchases will be provided to theoperations center 202. These extracts of information will be formatted and correlated with customer demographics for marketing purposes by the Marketing Information Interface (MII) 402. - (1) Cable Headend Management
- Management of the
cable headend 208 includes the following activities: defining the cable headend site; profiling the viewers; determining available set top equipment; defining the concatenated cable systems connected to the cable headend site. This information may be stored as cable franchise information within theoperations center 202 databases by the Cable FranchiseInformation Access routine 404. Such information can be compiled and maintained in a relational database (described below and shown as 328 in FIG. 11). - (2) Program Source Management
- Source programs will be provided by a variety of networks. Information from the contractual records to the actual program tapes should be maintained and includes: tracking of property rights; tracking and profiling source tapes; profiling source providers. A relational database (such as D shown in FIG. 9) can be used, for example, that identifies and correlates programs sources. Programs may be received from various rights holders, and such a database would track the person or entity that owns the rights to each program at issue. Other data could be maintained relating to program cuts (a program cut is a portion of a program) that specify, for example, the program from which the cut is taken. Information relating to time slot allocations, menu entries, and categories, and channel assignments is also maintained in the relational database.
- Program services represent a purchasable time slice, which is occupied by a type of programming. Each time slice has multiple time constraints. Using the purchasing of through time slices allows for great flexibility. An infinite number of program and time slice combinations are possible. Preferably, services are created using the software shown in FIG. 9, particularly the
service creation routine 466. For a service to become available at acable headend 208 site, it is mapped to the site. At the time of mapping the program service is assigned a program channel. - The following fields define program services:
Service ID System generated unique ID Description Describes the service. The description will allow the packager to easily assign a service to a broadcast program. Type Defines the type of service. Current service types include YCTV, Grid, Network and Other. Network ID Relevant for network services. (examples: ABC, NBC, DISC) Broadcast Event Relevant for a YCTV service. Identifies the current YCTV broadcast event assigned to the service. PICON File Name of the picture icon (PICON) assigned to the service. This picon is displayed for example on the buy screen for a pay per view event. Expiration Date Expiration date of the service. Removes the service from the service selection list. Day Start Each service is a series of days within a week. This represents the starting day. (Example: Monday) Day Stop Represents the last day in the interval. Time Start Within a day, the service has a time period. This field represents the start of the period. Time Stop Represents the end of the time period. Required Tape If stored tapes are required, the number of tapes required by the service. - (3) Broadcast Program Management
- Broadcast program management is one focal point of the data management system. The issues of product, price, promotion and packaging are addressed at this level. Decisions in these areas will affect the actual programming that will be shown to the viewers. Information on description of the content of each program event, program scheduling, broadcast program pricing, TV/set top information flow and information on how broadcast programs will be mapped to viewer channels should be included in the database. Preferably, the EIS system described below will access this data and assist in the Broadcast Program Management.
- (4) Internal Program Management
- Information on internally stored programs at the
operations center 202 should also be maintained. This will allow theoperations center 202 to assemble electronically stored programs, CD stored programs and program tapes, and ensure the quality of programs and location of programs. - (5) Marketing and Customer Information
- Last, and important, marketing and customer information should be maintained. In order to effectively manage the operations, information is constantly needed on market conditions. Information is needed on the existence of markets for certain programs. The following type of information must be maintained in a Marketing and Customer Information database: demographic profile of viewers; viewer buy information; correlation of demographic information with buy information; and information rapid restructuring of program mix in response to data analysis. As a subscriber uses the system, this viewer information or viewer log data can be stored and maintained in relational database. The
Marketing Information Interface 402 gathers the marketing information and indexes the information for inclusion in the Marketing and Customer Information database. An example of the type of information that is needed in this database is a viewer profile. - The viewer profile data fields are an example of typical fields required in the databases. Definitions of various fields are listed below. The primary purpose of profiling the viewer is to acquire marketing information on the viewer's response to available selections. Ancillary information will be available including the actual program and channel selections of the viewer. Information tracked within the viewer's profile includes:
Viewer ID A unique identifier generated by the system. Set-Top Types Boolean field that identifies the type of set top used. Headend ID Links the viewer to a particular cable site. Site Assigned ID Viewer ID assigned by the cable site. Set-Top ID ID of the viewer's set top. Hookup Date Date physical hardware is connected. Survey Date A demographic profile will be conducted on each user. The following fields represent this demographic information. The data represents when the interview survey was completed. Viewers Age 2-5 Boolean field if the household has viewers between 2 and 5 years of age. Viewers Age 6-11 Boolean field if the household has viewers between 6 and 11 years of age. Viewers Age 12-17 Boolean field if the household has viewers between 12 and 17 years of age. Tape Rental $ Approximate amount spent on tape rentals on a monthly basis. PPV $ Household average pay-pre-view expenditures per month. Income Annual household income. Zip Code Self-explanatory. Cable Tier Level of cable service purchased. Number of TV's Self-Explanatory. Years with Cable Self-Explanatory. Occupancy Number of people in household. Highest Education Highest level of education of any member of the household. - The compilation of viewer demographic information has an impact on decisions based on marketing. The names of the heads of household are not used due to Privacy Act considerations. Completion of demographic data can be accomplished referencing the cable site assigned ID or the system generated ID. There are numerous variations to the field definitions listed above such as different age groupings.
- To maintain the database at the
operations center 202, a database server, communications server, user workstation orstations 262, or the suitable equivalent thereof, are needed. The database server performs the following functions: it is the repository for data base files, event logging, event scheduling (example, automated download of files to headends 208), multi-user services, data base server services, and data base security access. - The communications server performs the following functions on data base data: integrity check, filtering, processing, downloading to
headends 208, uploading fromheadends 208, and uploading from remote location. -
User workstations 262 perform the following tasks: creation, deletion and access of all database data, system administration and report generation. Database manipulations are performed through the user workstations or remotely. The database structure is designed to support multiple users performing multiple tasks simultaneously. The preferred embodiment includes a network ofuser workstations 262. Theworkstations 262, through user interface software, access data within database files on the database server. - For example, once the appropriate database data has been generated for downloading to a
cable headend 208, the communications server is instructed to perform the download. Although this may be done manually at the communications server, it is preferred that the communications server automatically sends information to thecable headends 208. The communications server retrieves required data from the database server, filters out any data not associated with the specifiedheadend 208, and performs data integrity checks, creates data files to be downloaded and then downloads the data file via modem (or other means such as the DCPU 270). While the communication server is connected with theheadend 208, it also requests any data that the headend might be holding for theoperations center 202. This may consist ofcable headend 208 event log information, set top billing and viewer log data on programs watched, etc. - The communications server may also assist in retrieving information from other remote sites such as remote billing and statistic sites. For example, if a location is being used for billing purposes, the communications server may retrieve viewer log data. Also, the communications server may retrieve billing and viewer log data from actual set top converters in the field. Once the data is retrieved it is sent to the database server. Thus, in the preferred embodiment the communications server will support incoming information via modem or otherwise.
- The basic database structure at the
operations center 202 consists of multiple tables. Database data tables contain one or more data records, each with multiple fields. Each field contains a piece of data about the particular record. This data may be general information, such as a numeric value, date or text string, or it may be a reference to another database record relating one piece of data to another. Database index files contain information about associated data files to allow for improved data retrieval. The database index file makes retrieval of information much quicker. - In an alternative embodiment where some television programming begins with the procurement of source material in the form of tapes or CDs, additional data about the tapes or CDs may be stored in the operations center database. Each tape or CD may have a database record associated with it, source tape data file. Each tape may contain multiple cuts of which each cut has an associated record in a source tape detailed data file. Additionally, a company data file may contain individual records for the rights of the holders of the source tapes as well as company information about
cable headends 208. In this alternative embodiment with tapes, programs may be created from multiple tapes using multiple tape source cuts. The programs created by these source cuts may be stored and the individual cuts that make up the programs may be stored in a database record called program tape detail. Events may be created that consist of more than one program and details on individual programs that make up these events may be stored in a database file called event detail. Using this embodiment, events may be sold to subscribers. - FIG. 10 and the description below is a more complete example of a database structure that can be used with the present invention. Each database file is listed below along with a description, record field details and explanation of relationships. The software data structures are defined after the description of the database structure.
- The
SCHEDULE Database file 501 contains scheduling data for a single day. There are many schedule files, one for each day of schedule information. The actual filename for a given days schedule is assigned under computer control. Schedules are broken up into single days so they may be easily created, dispatched and archived. A cross-reference of days to computer-generated filenames is kept. Each scheduled event (either a program or a preview) has its own record entry and unique schedule ID This record references the corresponding scheduled program or preview and program type (either program or preview). The service to carry the scheduled program is also referenced. The starting date and time is also specified. Program duration is stored as a program attribute and is not included here. Note that program, preview and service records must be provisioned before they may be referenced in a schedule record. - Another
SCHEDULE Database file 500 contains a cross-reference of starting dates data to computer generated filenames. - The
PROGRAM Database file 502 contains Program records are contained in anotherdatabase file 502, with each record representing a source program. Each program has a unique program ID. If the program has a corresponding preview, it is also referenced. Program category and price are also referenced. The structure of the program category database may be modified if multiple categories per program are desired. Program name, description and duration are also given. Note that preview, program category and price category records must be provisioned before they may be referenced in a program record. - The
SERVICE Database file 503 contains service records with each record representing an available service. A service may be thought of as a virtual video channel. Virtual channels are non-existent channels which are mapped or created by hardware and software and is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,990,927, entitled ADVANCED SET TOP TERMINAL FOR A CABLE TELEVISION DELIVERY SYSTEM, incorporated herein by reference. Services are then mapped into local headend channels. Since initial distribution of video source material may be by Federal Express instead of a video channel, a service ID is used to identify the virtual channel being used for the desired service. 60 Minutes could be distributed and then be mapped into any desired local headend channel. The service database exists at both the national site and at eachlocal headend 208. Every service has a name, call letters and a description of the service. Every service also has an assigned local channel, A tape (or CD) machine ID and B tape (or CD) machine ID. Note that these last three parameters only apply to the service databases at thelocal headends 208. The local headend service database performs an equivalent function of a channel map. For a further description of the cable headend function, see U.S. Pat. No. 5,600,364, entitled NETWORK CONTROLLER FOR A CABLE TELEVISION DELIVERY SYSTEM, incorporated by reference. - The
PREVIEW Database file 504 contains preview records with each record representing a source preview. A preview is like a program that is scheduled and distributed over a service. It differs from a program in that multiple previews may be distributed over the same service at the same time. Also, previews are free. Each preview specifies its location on the TV screen. This is generally done by selecting from a menu of valid screen positions. Unlike programs, previews do not reference program and price categories or other previews. - The PROGRAM
CATEGORY Database file 505 contains program category records with each record representing a valid program category. Examples of program categories are movies, sports, educational and news. Multiple program categories per program may be accommodated if desired with simple changes to the database structure. - The PRICE
CATEGORY Database file 506 contains price category records with each record representing a valid price category. Price categories are used to provide pricing consistency throughout the system. It also provides flexibility at theheadend 208 to price various categories differently should this be desired. For example, distributed movies maybe assigned the price category movie at the national site. Eachheadend 208 could then charge differing amounts for their movies by manipulating their local price category database. If a current price structure needed to be changed, the change would be made once in the price category database instead of in each program record. - The EVENT LOG Database file510 contains event data for a single day. There are many event files, one for each day of event information. The actual filename for a given days events is assigned under computer control. Events are broken up into single days so they may be easily archived. A cross-reference of days to computer-generated filenames is kept.
- Each event record contains a unique ID, an event code, ID of the process that generated the event and date/time stamp of the event.
- The EVENT LOG FILENAME Database file507 contains a cross-reference of start date to computer-generated filenames.
- The VIEWER LOG Database file512 contains viewer log data for a single day. There are many viewer log files, one for each day of viewer log information. The actual filename for a given days viewer log data is assigned under computer control. Viewer log data is broken up into single days so it may be easily archived. A cross-reference of days to computer-generated filenames is kept.
- Each event record contains a unique ID, an event code, ID of the process that generated the event and date/time stamp of the event. The
Marketing Information Interface 402 accesses the VIEWER LOG Database file as necessary to retrieve programs watchedinformation 420. - The VIEWER LOG FILENAME Database file509 contains a cross-reference of date to computer-generated filenames.
- The
BILLING Database file 511 contains billing data for a single day. There are many billing files, one for each day of billing information. The actual filename for a given days billing data is assigned under computer control. Billing data is broken up into single days so it may be easily archived. A cross-reference of days to computer-generated filenames is kept. - Each event record contains a unique ID, an event code, ID of the process that generated the event and date/time stamp of the event.
- The BILLING FILENAME Database file508 contains a cross-reference of start date to computer-generated filenames.
- The NEWS FILENAME Database file509 contains a cross-reference of date to computer-generated filenames.
- The SET TOP Database file517 contains set top converter records with each record representing a unique set top converter. Each set top is assigned to a
headend 208. Set-top type, software version and serial number are also stored. Note that headend records must be provisioned before they may be referenced in a set top record. - The HEAD
END Database file 518 contains headend records with eachrecord containing headend 208 data specific to asingle headend 208. Eachheadend 208 has a name, contact name, address, phone number, modem information, time zone (relative to GMT) and daylight savings time flag. This information may be stored in a separate database file called Cable Franchise Configuration (shown as 328 in FIG. 11). - The NATIONAL Database file515 contains a single record containing national site information. This includes site name, contact, modem information, time zone and daylight savings time flag.
- The
CUSTOMER Database file 516 contains customer records with each record containing customer data specific to a single customer. This includes personal information (name, address, phone number, . . . ) and assigned set top converter. - The TAPE
MACHINE Database file 519 contains video tape or CD machine information. Each machine is assigned a unique ID, its control port address, its A/B switch address (if present), its assigned service and an A/B assignment. This database is only located at theheadends 208. - The
MESSAGE Database file 514 contains available system messages. They are detailed in nature and are pre-programmed. Each message has an associated function. To schedule a desired function, the appropriate message is referenced in the scheduler task list. - The
TASK Database file 513 contains scheduled tasks to be performed periodically. It is used in conjunction with a scheduler process to control computer system functions such as data dispatch and retrieval, archival and database maintenance. Each task is assigned a unique ID, start time, stop time, period in minutes) and task type (single, periodic, round-robin). Functions are actually scheduled by scheduling the appropriate message to be sent to the appropriate process. Available messages are kept in a separate database. Note that these messages must be provisioned before they may be referenced in a task record. - F. System Operations
- FIG. 11 shows the basic operations that must occur in order for the packaged signal to be sent to the
satellite 206. External digital 280 andanalog signals 282 must be received from television programming sources and converted to a standard digital format by aconverter 284, as described above. Also within theoperations center 202, storedprograms 286 must be accessed using banks of looping tape machines or other video storage/retrieval devices, either analog or digital, and converted to a standard digital format by theconverter 284 prior to use by theCAP 260. - The programmer or program packager utilizing the
CAP 260 must input a variety of information, including program information, in order to allow theCAP 260 to perform its function of generating program control information and packaging programs. Some of the information required by theCAP 260 is the date, time slots and program categories desired by the television programmer. - The
CAP 260 system includes one or more CPUs and one or more programmer/packager consoles, together identified in FIG. 4 asworkstations 262. In the preferred embodiment, each packager console includes one or more CRT screens, a keyboard, a mouse (or cursor movement), and standard video editing equipment. Inlarge operations centers 202, multiple packager consoles 262 may be needed for theCAP 260. - As shown in FIG. 12, the first step in the operation of the
CAP 260 is selecting the type ofprogramming 300, which will be packaged. Basically there are six broad categories in which most television programming can be classified:static programming 302,interactive services 304, pay perview 306,live sports specials 308, mini pays 310, anddata services 312. Static programs are programs, which will show repetitively over a period of time such as a day or week. Static programs include movies showing repetitively on movie channels, children's programs, documentaries, news, and entertainment. Program services, with defined start and end time periods, behave like static programs and may be handled in a similar manner. -
Interactive services 304 typically include interactive programs using the Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) or other data streams synchronized with the programming to communicate interactive features (such as those used in education), and games. Using this feature, interactive home shopping programs are possible. Pay perview 306 is a program that is individually ordered by the subscriber. After ordering, the subscriber is authorized to access the program for a limited time, (e.g. three hours, two days, etc.). Live sports specials are live events usually related to sports which subscribers are unlikely to watch on taped delay. - Mini pays310 are channels to which existing set top converter boxes (not shown) and the set
top terminals 220 of the present invention may subscribe. The subscriptions for mini pays 310 may be daily, weekly, or monthly. An example would be the Science Fiction channel.Data services 312 are services in which information is interactively presented to the subscriber using a modem or other high rate of speed data transfer. Some examples are Prodigy, services for airline reservations, and TV guide services (e.g. TV Guide X*PRESS, InSight, etc.). Data could also include classified or other forms of advertising. - The packager begins the CAP processing using the Packager Data
Entry Interface Software 400 and aworkstation 262. After selecting the type of programming, the packager must identify a pool of programs (within a category) to be packaged. The next CAP step varies for different program categories. For the category oflive sports 308, additional programinterstitial elements 314 such as promos and other sports news maybe added before further processing. For thelive sports 308, static (or program service) 302,interactive services 304 and pay perview 306 categories, thenext CAP 260 step is for one television program to be selected 316. This is followed by each program individually being assigned dates to be played, a start date (for continuous play) and starttimes 318. Many dates and start times may be assigned to any given program. Using this methodology, programs may be purchased by viewers in time slices (e.g., one week). The program information for these categories may then be processed for allocation of transponder space and setting of prices, as indicated atblocks - Mini pays310 and
data services 312 require less processing by theCAP 260. After identifying the mini pays 310, theCAP 260 may proceed to allocation of transponder space and pricing, block 320, for the mini pays 310. Data services in the preferred embodiment generally do not require allocation of transponder space and generally do not require price setting. The information fordata services 312 may be directly processed for menu configuration, block 324. In alternate embodiments, thedata services 312 maybe processed through these portions of theCAP 260 program. - The
CAP 260 uses aninteractive algorithm 416 to allocatetransponder space 320 and setprices 322. The factors weighed by the algorithm are: 1. buy rates of the program, 2. margin of profit on the program, 3. length of the program, 4. any contractual requirement that overrides other factors (such as requirement to run a specific football game live in its entirety). The information on buy rates of the program may be obtained by theMarketing Information Interface 400 from a Central Statistical and Billing Site, a Regional Statistical and Billing Site, thecable headend 208 or directly from the settop terminals 220 as will be described later. TheCAP 260 must consider the priority levels of programming (e.g., FIG. 16) when allocating transponder space. Particularly, as in the preferred embodiment, transponders are assigned to three specific priority levels. The CAP may automatically (without packager intervention) access theMII 400 and the EIS to obtain necessary decision making information on transponder allocation. - Following transponder allocation and price setting320, 322, respectively, the
CAP 260 proceeds tomenu configuration 324. The positioning of programs within themenu configuration 324 can have an effect on subscriber buy rates for the program. (The processing ofmenu configurations 432 is also described in reference to FIG. 8.) Therefore, an algorithm accounting for either a manually assigned program importance or a calculated weight of the program importance is used to determine each programs position within the menu scheme. For instance, a popular program with a high profit margin may be assigned a high weight of importance and shown in a prominent place in the menu scheme. Alternatively, a high profit program with sagging sales may be manually assigned a prominent place in the program schedule to increase sales. - After a series of entries by the programmer/packager at the
operations center 202, theCAP 260 displaysdraft menus 434 or schedules (including priority levels) for programming. The packager may now manipulate the menus and schedules and make changes as necessary 436. After each change, the packager may again display the menus or schedules and determine if any more changes are necessary 436. The packager may use the Executive Information System with yield management as described below to assist in editing the menus and schedules. When the packager is satisfied with themenu configuration 324 and scheduling of television programs, the packager may then instruct theCAP 260 to complete the process. - After
menu configuration 324, theCAP 260 may begin the process of generating a program control information signal 326 (see also FIG. 8 software description at 442 and 404). In order to generate program control information signals 326 which are specific to aparticular cable headend 208 system, theCAP 260 incorporates cablefranchise configuration information 328. In the preferred embodiment, unique cablefranchise configuration information 328 is stored at theoperations center 202. The cable franchises upload changes to theirspecific franchise information 426 from time to time to theoperations center 202 forstorage 328. Preferably, a separate CPU (not shown) handles the management of thecable franchise information 328. From the storedcable franchise information 328, theCAP 260 generates a cable franchise control information signal 330 unique to each franchise. - Using the unique cable franchise control information signals328 and the
menu configuration 324 information, theCAP 260 generates the programcontrol information signal 276, as shown atfunction block 326. The program control information that is unique to a particular cable franchise may be identified in various ways such as with a header. With the header identification, thecable headend 208 may extract the portions of the program control information signal 276 it needs. Now, theCAP 260 may complete its process by electronically packaging the programs intogroupings 280 for the signal transmission and adding theprogram control information 276 to the packagedprograms 334 to form a single signal for transmission. Through manual entries by the packager (PDEI 400) or by comparing against a list of programs, theCAP 260 will determine whether the programs are arriving fromexternal sources 280 or sources internal 286 to theoperations center 202. - Referring back to FIG. 11, upon completion of the CAP's functions, the
operations center 202, or the uplink site 204 (FIG. 1), compresses 288 (if necessary), multiplexes 290, modulates 292 and amplifies 294 the signal forsatellite transmission 296. In a basic embodiment, theCAP 260 will also allow entry of time slots for local avails where no national programming will occur. - FIG. 13 is a more
detailed flow chart 340 of some of the functions performed by theCAP 260 after an initial program schedule has been entered and menu configurations generated. This flow chart highlights that some of the functions described earlier in reference to FIGS. 8, 9, 11 and 12 can be performed in parallel. Theflow chart 340 shows six basic functions that are performed by the CAP 260: (1) editing program schedule for local availability 342 (only for non-standard services, i.e., those services that are not national cable services); (2) generating program control information signals 344; (3) processingexternal programs 346; (4) processinginternal programs 348; (5) processing live feeds 350; and, (6) packaging ofprogram information 352. In an alternate embodiment, theCAP 260 is capable of incorporating local programs and accommodating local availability for local television stations. - Following completion of the programming scheduling (accounting for local availability if necessary) and
menu generation 342, theCAP 260 may perform three tasks simultaneously, generating program information signals 344, processingexternal programs 346 and processinginternal programs 348. - The
CAP 260 automatically identifies external programs feeds 356 and identifies which external feed to request theexternal program 358. TheCAP 260 gathers and receives theexternal programming information 280, 282 (FIG. 11) and converts it to a standarddigital format 360 for use. TheCAP 260 also identifies internal programs 362 (and defined program services), accesses the internal programs 364 (and program services), and converts them to a standarddigital format 366, if necessary. In addition, theCAP 260 identifies live signal feeds 368 that will be necessary to complete the packagedprogramming signal 370. In its last task depicted in FIG. 13 theCAP 260 completes the packaging of the programs and combines the packaged program signal with the programcontrol information signal 352, amplifies thesignal 354 and sends it out for further processing prior to uplink. - G. Allocation of Cable System Bandwidth
- One of the primary tasks of the
operations center 202 is, with assistance from thecable headends 208, effective utilization of available bandwidth from theoperations center 202 to the subscriber homes. FIG. 14 shows effective allocation of 750 MHZ of bandwidth (I MHZ to 750 MHZ) for television programming. In FIG. 14, bandwidth is allocated for bothanalog 226 and digitally compressed 227 signals. In the preferred embodiment, the bandwidth is divided so that each category of programs receives a portion of the bandwidth. These categories correspond with major menus of the set top terminal software. The representative categories shown in FIG. 14 include: (1) high definition TV (HDTV) made possible through the use of compression technology, (2) A La Carte Channel category which provides specialty channels for subscription periods such as monthly, and (3) pay-per-view. - FIG. 15 shows a
chart 228 of compressed channel allocation for a variety ofprogramming categories 229 that have been found to be desirable to subscribers. By grouping similar shows or a series of shows into blocks ofchannels 230, thesystem 200 is able to more conveniently display similar programming with on-screen television menus. For example, in the movie category, which has the greatest allocation of channels, the same movie may be shown continuously and simultaneously on different channels. Each channel starts the movie at a different time allowing the subscriber to choose a more suitable movie starting time (e.g., every 15 minutes). - In order to accommodate cable TV systems that have different bandwidths and channel capacities, the television programming and television program control information may be divided into parts such as priority one, two and three. The large bandwidth cable TV systems can accommodate all the parts of the television programming and all parts of the television programming control information. Those cable TV systems with a more limited bandwidth are able to use the
program delivery system 200 by only accepting the number of parts that the cable system can handle within its bandwidth. - For instance, as is shown in FIG. 16, three cable television systems with different bandwidths may use the
program delivery system 200 simultaneously with each system accepting only those parts of the information sent which it is capable of handling. Priority one television programming andmenus 240 are accepted by all three systems. Priority two television programming andmenus 242 are not accepted by the cable television system whose capacity is the smallest or in thiscase 330 MHZ (40 channels) system. Priority two television programming andmenus 242 are accepted and used by the two larger capacity cable television systems shown. Priority three television programming andmenus 244 are only used by the largest capacity television system which is capable of handling all three parts—Priority one, two and three programming and menu information. - With this division of television programming and menus, the
program delivery system 200 may be utilized simultaneously by a variety of concatenated cable systems 210 (depicted in FIG. 1) with varying system capacities. By placing the heavily watched or more profitable programming and menus in the priority onedivision 240, both users and owners of the cable TV systems will be accommodated as best as possible within the limited bandwidth. - FIG. 17 shows three
different cable headend 208 systems, each system receiving the entire satellite signal from theoperations center 202 and stripping those parts of the signal that cannot be handled by the local cable system due to bandwidth limitations. In this particular embodiment, the three local cable television systems shown have bandwidth limitations that correspond with the bandwidth limitations depicted in the previous FIG. 16. As the bandwidth decreases, the programming options available to the viewer in the exemplary on-screen menu decreases. Using this preferred embodiment, theoperations center 202 is able to send one identical signal to thesatellite 206 that is sent to all thecable headends 208. Eachcable headend 208 accepts the entire signal and customizes the signal for the local cable system by stripping those portions of the operations center signal that are unable to be handled by the local cable system. An alternate embodiment (not shown) requires the operations center 202 (and uplink sites 204) to send different signals for reception by differentcapacity cable headends 208. - There are several ways in which a
cable headend 208 may strip the unnecessary signal from theoperations center 202. A person skilled in the art will derive many methods from the three examples discussed below. The first method is for the signal originating from the operations center 202 (and uplink site 204) to be sent in portions with each portion having a separate header. Therespective cable headend 208 would then recognize the headers and transmit to the concatenatedcable system 210 only those signals in which the proper headers are identified. For example, using three concatenated cable systems shown in FIG. 17, the headers may be 001, 002, and 003. A wide bandwidth concatenated cable system can accept program signals with all three headers, while the narrowest bandwidth concatenated cable system may only be able to accept signals with a 001 header. For this first method, acentral operations center 202 must divide the program signal into three parts and send a separate leading header before each signal for each part. This method requires has the additional signal overhead of a header on the program signal. The header would be transmitted from time to time as necessary. - A second method requires a set of transponders to be assigned to each priority level and the
cable headend 208 to route signals from the transponders corresponding to the proper priority level for the concatenatedcable system 210. For example, if there are three priority levels and eighteen transponders, transponders one through nine may be assigned to priority level one, transponders ten through fourteen priorities level two, and transponders fifteen through eighteen assigned to priority level three. Thus, a concatenatedcable system 210 capable of operating only at priority level two, would only receive signals from transponders one through nine, and ten through fourteen from therespective cable headend 208. The program signal from transponders fifteen through eighteen would not be transmitted to the priority level two concatenated cable system. This method requires theoperations center 202 to properly assign programs to transponders by priority level. This can be accomplished by the CAP using the software described earlier (e.g., FIG. 8 at 438 and 440). - The third and the preferred method is for the
cable headend 208 to pick and choose programming from each transponder and create a customized priority one, two, and three signal with chosen television programming. Thecable headend 208 would then route the appropriate customized signal to each part of the concatenatedcable system 210 that thecable headend 208 serves. This third method requires that thecable headend 208 have a component, such as the combiner (described in greater detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,682,195, entitled DIGITAL CABLE HEADEND FOR A CABLE TELEVISION DELIVERY SYSTEM, incorporated by reference), which can select among programs prior to combining the signal for further transmission on a concatenatedcable system 210. The third method requires the least coordination betweenoperations center 202 and thecable headend 208. - In addition to dividing the television programming and menus into parts, the
operations center 202 of the preferred embodiment is also capable of dynamically changing the bandwidth allocation for a particular category of programming. FIG. 18 depicts this dynamic change in bandwidth allocation from a typical weekdayprime time signal 250 to a Saturday afternoon in October signal 252 (during the college football season). FIG. 18 highlights the fact that the bandwidth allocated to sports is limited to eightselections 251 during week dayprime time 250 but is increased to sixteenselections 253 during a Saturday afternoon in October 252. This dynamic increase in bandwidth allocation allows the system to accommodate changes in programming occurring on an hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, seasonal and annual basis. - In addition to dynamically allocating bandwidth for programming categories, the
operations center 202 can also dynamically change the menu capacities in order to accommodate the change in programming and bandwidth. For example, on a Saturday afternoon in October 252, the major menu for sports may include a separate subcategory for college football. This subcategory would, in turn, have a separate submenu with a listing of four, six, eight, or more college football games available for viewing. In order to accommodate this dynamic menu change, theoperations center 202 must add a submenu listing to the major sports menu, create a new or temporary submenu for college football, and allocate the necessary menu space on the college football submenu. - Once the television programs have been packaged and a program control information signal is generated to describe the various categories and programs available, the packaged programs are then digitized, compressed, and combined with the program control information signal. Upon the signal's departure from the
operations center 202 the breakdown into categories is insignificant and the signal is treated like any other digitally compressed signal - H. Compressing and Transmitting Program Signals
- After packaging, the packaged television program signal is prepared for satellite transmission and sent from the
operations center 202 to thecable headend 208 viasatellite 206. Depending on the specific embodiment, the television program signal may need to be compressed, combined/multiplexed, encoded, mapped, and modulated, up converted and amplified. This system, which is intended to be compatible with existing C and Ku Band satellite transmission technologies, accepts video, audio and data signals ranging in signal quality, and input from a number of sources. - As shown in FIG. 3, in the preferred embodiment, the packaged program signal will be treated at a master
control uplink site 211 prior to being transmitted to thesatellite 206. Following compression the channels must be multiplexed for each transponder carrier and sent to thesatellite 206 dish that will provide the uplink. A variety of multiplexing schemes may be used in the system. In some situations, it may be advantageous to use different multiplexing schemes in different parts of the overall system. In other words, one multiplexing scheme may be used forsatellite transmission 206 and a second remultiplexing scheme for the land transmission. Various satellite multi-accessing schemes and architectures can be used with the system, including both single channel per carrier (SCPC) frequency division multiplex (FDM) and multiple channel per carrier (MCPC) time division multiplexing (TDM). Time division multiplexing is the more desirable scheme. Once the signal has arrived at the uplink ormaster control site 211, it must be modulated, up converted, and amplified. Various types of satellites and transponders capable of handling digital signals may be used in this cable television packaging and delivery system. One of the achievements of the present invention is effective utilization of digital compression technology by packaging television programs into categories that allow easy access to television programs by consumers. With current digital compression techniques for video, the typical 50-channel capacity cable satellite receiving system can be increased to 300 channels. - Presently, one transponder is used for each satellite delivered channel. The preferred embodiment uses satellite transponders and compression ratios of 4:1 to 8:1 to achieve a capacity of 136 satellite delivered channels. More transponders or higher compression ratios can be used to deliver up to the channel capacity of any existing cable system.
- An example of a satellite that may be used is the AT&T Telstar303. The signal is transmitted from the
satellite 206 to thecable headend 208 where a computer system including a digital switch treats the signal and delivers it through cables to a subscriber's home. In alternate embodiments,multiple operations center 202 andmultiple uplink sites 211 can be simultaneously utilized. - In order to limit the amount of bandwidth needed to transmit the program control information signal, various compression techniques employed for non-video may be used such as block coding, contour coding, blob encoding, and run-length encoding. Further, the program control information signal may be divided into text and graphics, or video, text and graphics and then recombined at the set
top terminal 220 using a text generator, graphics decompression, and video decompression as necessary. - As shown in FIG. 2, an analog
cable TV system 205 can continue to exist alongside and within the digitally compressed system of the present invention. The digital transmissions do not effect the analog system. In fact, the analog cable signal may be transmitted simultaneously on the same cable as the digital signal.Cable headends 208 may continue to supply subscribers with local channels in an analog signal format. - In the preferred embodiment, the
operations center 202 and uplink 204 (FIG. 1) or master control site 211 (FIG. 3) are collocated. However, theoperations center 202 anduplink site 204 may be located in different geographical places. Also, functions and equipment within theoperations center 202 may be remotely located. For instance, the program storage may be at a different site and the programs may be sent to theCAP 260 via landline. - Alternate embodiments of the
system 200 of the present invention may use multiple operations centers described above. In such an embodiment, it is preferred that one operations center be designated the Master Operations Center and all other operations centers be Slave Operations Centers. The Master Operations Center performs the functions of managing and coordinating the Slave Operations Centers. Depending on the method in which the Slave Operations Centers share functions, the Master Operations Center coordination function may involve synchronization of simultaneous transmissions from multiple Slave Operations Centers. To perform its functions, the Master Operations Center may include a system clock for synchronization. - An efficient method of dividing tasks among multiple operations centers is to assign specific satellite transponders to each
operations center 202 and to assign external program sources to thenearest operations center 202. Of course, this division of resources may not always be possible. Since programming will be grouped into priority levels with each priority level likely to be assigned specific satellite transponders, it is also possible to assign eachoperations center 202 to a priority level. For example, in a three priority level system with two Slave Operations Centers A and B and 18 transponders, the Master Operations Center may be assignedpriority level 1 and assigned 9 transponders. Slave Operations Center A may be assignedpriority level priority level - Just as in the alternate embodiment wherein
multiple operations centers 202 are used, a delivery system may have multiple satellite uplinks. Preferably, eachoperations center 202 has one or more uplink sites. Eachoperations center 202 controls the functions of its assigned uplink sites and may assign one site as a master uplink site. - In another alternative configuration, in regions or areas without cable services, where subscribers might use backyard satellite systems (TV RO) to receive packaged television services, the
set top terminal 220 will include the appropriate hardware to allow connection to the backyard satellite reception equipment, i.e., a typical communication port. In this configuration, the backyard satellite system will receive programming signals originating from theoperations center 202 directly from the satellite transponders. Nocable headend 208 is utilized with a backyard satellite system. The menu system within the settop terminal 220 will be programmed directly from theoperations center 202. The operations center program signals and control signals arrive at the settop terminal 220 essentially unchanged. Additionally, in this configuration, an upstream communication mechanism must be in place at the subscriber's home (e.g., modem) to communicate information to theoperations center 202 such as program ordering information. The settop terminals 220 can be equipped with a modem port for this upstream communication to theoperations center 202. The two alternative embodiments described in the preceding four paragraphs, and other such embodiments not specifically referred to herein but within the understanding of those skilled in the art, incorporate or combine one or more of the components of thesystem 200 of the present invention. - I. Network Controller Description
- 1. Monitoring and Control of Set Top Terminals
- As noted above, the targeted advertising process an be executed at a regional or national operations center such as the
operations center 202. However, the process can also be executed at a local cable headend, such as thecable headend 208, for example. FIG. 19 shows thenetwork controller 214 of the present invention as part of thecable headend 208 operating in the expanded cable televisionprogram delivery system 200. Thenetwork controller 214 monitors program selections at subscribers' homes, maintains accurate account and billing information and authorizes both subscriber channel access and particular settop terminals 220 to operate in the system. - The
network controller 214 performs its monitoring and control capability by working with other system components housed, in part, within thecable headend 208. These cable headend components include acable headend receiver 203 and asignal processor 209. As shown in the FIG. 19, digital RF program signals 205 are received and processed for further distribution to a subscriber's home through a settop terminal 220. The program signals 205 are digitally compressed and multiplexed signals that may be processed at thecable headend 208 or simply passed through to the cable distribution network. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, the program signals 205 are received by thecable headend receiver 203 and transmitted to thesignal processor 209. - The
signal processor 209 prepares the program signals 205 that are received by thecable headend 208 for transmission to each settop terminal 220. In the preferred system, thenetwork controller 214 supervises and, in some cases, instructs thesignal processor 209 in routing the signals to subscribers. In this way, thenetwork controller 214 andsignal processor 209 work with one another to perform basic control functions in thecable television system 200. Typically, this work is accomplished by the transfer of control information, represented at 211, between thenetwork controller 214 and thesignal processor 209. - Although it is preferred that the
signal processor 209 andnetwork controller 214 be co-located at thecable headend 208, thenetwork controller 214 may be remotely located from thecable headend 208, as long as it remains in communication with thesignal processor 209 in order to exchangecontrol information 211. - In many instances, the program signals205 received from the
operations center 202 must be modified prior to being sent to the settop terminals 220. These modifications to theprogram control information 211 are made by thenetwork controller 214 working in conjunction with thesignal processor 209 to send the STTCIS. From thesignal processor 209, thenetwork controller 214 receives the program signals 205, which include cable franchise specific information added by theoperations center 202. Thenetwork controller 214 modifies the program signals 205, if necessary, and communicates the new information back to thesignal processor 209. Thesignal processor 209 then forwards the information to the settop terminal 220 in the form of the STTCIS,arrow 215. In most instances, thenetwork controller 214 will modify the program signals 205 by adding additional information; however, the program signals 205 can be passed through thecable headend 208 to the settop terminal 220 without any modification. - The
signal processor 209 andnetwork controller 214 are both capable of handling the addition of simple local availabilities (e.g., local advertisements) into the signal sent to the settop terminal 220. Thenetwork controller 214 is also capable of handling more sophisticated local programming needs such as targeting video commercials, informercials, interactive programming and certain data services. Thenetwork controller 214 receives all electronic signals sent by the settop terminal 220, including those sent in response to interactive service requests and some data service requests. Thenetwork controller 214 coordinates the necessary switching and access to allow the subscriber to enjoy these services. - The
network controller 214 has the capability of performing on the fly programming changes, assisting in (i) partitioning portions of subscriber's television screens (split screen video), (ii) selecting different audio signals for the same video (foreign languages), and (iii) interactive features. In addition, the network controller can create programming changes. For last minute changes to programming (such as for a local emergency or important regional events), an operator using thenetwork controller 214 can modify the program signals 209 on the fly and change menus available to the subscriber. This accommodates short notice changes to program packaging that cannot be handled by theoperations center 202 in advance. - In order to accommodate split screen techniques for promo and demo video (which will be described later), undesired video portions of the television or menu screen may be masked. The
network controller 214 can send the necessary control information to inform theset top terminal 220 to mask portions of a specific channel's video. For example, a video channel with a split screen showing four separate videos would require a three-fourths mask to focus the viewer on the featured video clip. - Tiered programming allows different users to view different video even though they are tuned to the same channel. For example, the
network controller 214 may know the demographics of its subscribers through a database generated, in part, from prior subscriber choices, an interactive selection, or other means. Using the demographics information, thenetwork controller 214 may target commercials to the correct audience by showing different commercials to subscribers with different demographics. Information on programs watched may also be used to target commercials. Even though subscribers will believe they are tuned to one channel, they will be switched to a different channel for the tiered video and targeted commercial. Alternatively, individual subscribers may be offered a menu with the option of several commercials from which to choose. - To accommodate foreign speaking subscribers, multiple audio channels for television programming may be provided. The subscriber may be shown menus of programs available in the subscriber's native language. The function of choosing the correct audio to correspond to the selected language may be handled by either the set
top terminal 220 or thenetwork controller 214 depending upon the configuration. Local programming in several languages or additional audio channels for a foreign language translation of a popular television program may be provided by thenetwork controller 214. Using a picture-on-picture feature, sign language may be similarly made available to certain settop terminals 220 for the deaf. The sign language video may be transmitted to the settop terminal 220 on a separate channel. Also, a text overlay for the deaf may be easily produced on the lower part of the screen. The control signals for producing the text overlay may be handled by thenetwork controller 214. - In other embodiments, the
network controller 214 can act as a central computer and provide intra-set top terminal interactive games, inter-set top terminal interactive games, computer bulletin board type services, message services (Electronic mail), etc. For example, a subscriber may play war games with six of his (anonymous) fellow subscribers each in their own home each operating a separate tank. Thenetwork controller 214 gathers the players using settop terminal 220 communications and acts as the referee. The network controller software plays the game and generates the video control signals to be transmitted to the settop terminals 220. From the video control signals, the set top terminal generates a view of the playing field and shows movement of the tanks. Using a similar method, a bulletin board or message system can be set up to discuss a particular program such as Twin Peaks Whodunit for enthusiasts with settop terminals 220. - 2. Monitoring and Control of Cable Headend Signal Processor
- FIG. 20 shows the network controller's major components and how these components relate with other components of the
cable system 200. The network controller's internal components include anetwork controller CPU 224,databases 226,control receiver 228,local memory 230 andtelephone modem 232. The network controller'sCPU 224 anddatabases 226 may be accessed through an operator control station, which may include peripherals such as a computer workstation, CRT display, and printer, represented by theworkstation 234. - Information required to operate the
network controller 214 will be stored indatabases 226 and local memory 230 (e.g., either in RAM, ROM, or magnetic or optical Read/Write devices) at thecable headend 208 as well as in memory (RAM and/or ROM) within each subscriber's settop terminal 220. In the preferred embodiment, two-way communications between thenetwork controller 214 and settop terminal 220 will occur over cable lines. Thenetwork controller 214 and the settop terminals 220 also communicate using telecommunications systems such as plain old telephone service (POTS) and the Internet. Many other methods of communication, including those that do not require cables or wires, may be used with the present invention. Using two-way communication, interactive television programming can be accommodated through thenetwork controller 214. In addition, thepreferred network controller 214 will be able to access settop terminals 220 via phone lines for trouble shooting, special features or sophisticated reprogramming. - The
network controller CPU 224 controls the interface, depicted at 211, between thenetwork controller 214 and thesignal processor 209. Thisinterface 211 allows control information to flow or transfer between the twocable headend 208 components. Standard RS-232 or RS-422 links, an IEEE-488 bus or other interface media may be used. During standard operation, program control information is passed through thisinterface 211 to thenetwork controller CPU 224 from the signal processor 209 (i.e., the program control information having been sent to thesignal processor 209 over satellite from theoperations center 202 with the RF program signals 205, not shown in FIG. 5). Thenetwork controller CPU 224 processes the program control information based on data stored in the network control databases. This processing includes modifying the program control information to accommodate regional programming needs. - After processing, the
network controller CPU 224 passes the program control information, including any modifications, back to thesignal processor 209 for distribution over thecable system 200, via thecable distribution network 236. In this fashion, thenetwork controller 214 provides programming and network control instructions to the settop terminals 220 through thesignal processor 209. - The processing of program control information by the
network controller CPU 224 can also make use of any data received by the network controller'scontrol receiver 228. Thecontrol receiver 228 is a microprocessor-based device that receives status reports directly from the settop terminals 220. The status reports received by thecontrol receiver 228 generally include information that allows thenetwork controller 214 to track, among other things, a subscriber's program access history, as described below. Thecontrol receiver 228 can store the status reports internally in a local storage or memory device and transfer them to thenetwork controller CPU 224. Typically, thecontrol receiver 228 is interfaced with thenetwork controller CPU 224 using standard RS-232 or RS-422 links, an EEE-488 bus or the like. - In the preferred embodiment, the
network controller CPU 224 scans thecontrol receiver 228 at a predetermined rate (e.g., once every few seconds) to initiate the status report transfer. Upon transfer, thenetwork controller CPU 224 adds the data and control information in the status reports to thenetwork control databases 226 by: checking for changes in previously received status information, processing the new information and updating the corresponding parameters in thenetwork control databases 226. Thenetwork controller 214 processes the information stored in its databases with any program control information relayed through thesignal processor 209 from the delivery system'soperations center 202. This processing capability allows thenetwork controller 214 to modify prior control signals and create new ones. Thenetwork controller 214 transfers both modified and unmodified control signals, along with any local combined program signals 205, to thesignal processor 209 to be combined with others program signals 205 for distribution over thecable system 200. - 3. Modifying the Program Control Information Signal
- Tables A-C, described previously, provide an example of some information that can be sent in the program control information signal to the set
top terminals 220. The program control information signal generated by theoperations center 202 provides data on the scheduling and description of programs. The program control information signal may be sent through thenetwork controller 214 or, in an alternate configuration, directly to the settop terminal 220 for display to the subscriber. In the preferred embodiment, the program control information signal is stored and modified by thenetwork controller 214 and sent to the settop terminal 220 in the form of the STTCIS. This configuration can accommodate, among other things, differences in individual cable systems and possible differences in settop terminal 220 devices. - The set
top terminal 220 integrates either the program control signal or the set top terminal control information stream together with data stored in the memory of the settop terminal 220, to generate on-screen menu displays for assisting the subscriber in choosing programs for viewing. (Throughout the description the term program control information is being used to indicate control information coming from thecable headend 208 to the settop terminal 220, whether it is sent directly from theoperations center 202, processed by thenetwork controller 214 and then forwarded to the set top box (STTCIS), or transmitted over telephone lines.) - The types of information that can be sent using the program control signal includes: number of program categories, names of program categories, what channels are assigned to a specific category (such as specialty channels), names of channels, names of programs on each channel, program start times, length of programs, description of programs, menu assignment for each program, pricing, whether there is a sample video clip for advertisement for the program, and any other program, menu or product information. In addition, the program control information signal may be used periodically to reprogram or reconfigure a
set top terminal 220 or group of set top terminals 220 (described in detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,798,785 entitled, REPROGRAMMABLE TERMINAL FOR SUGGESTING PROGRAMS OFFERED ON A TELEVISION PROGRAM DELIVERY SYSTEM, incorporated herein by reference). - 4. Processing the Program Control Information Signal
- FIGS. 21a and 21 b show a more detailed schematic of the components of the
cable headend 208, focusing on the interplay between thenetwork controller 214 and the signal processor's 209 major hardware components. Thenetwork controller 214 uses, among other components, thesignal processor 209 to implement its monitoring and control capabilities. Although thenetwork controller 214 of the present invention will work with nearly any cable headend signal processing equipment, it is preferred that the signal processing equipment be modem equipment capable of handling digitally compressed video. - FIG. 21a depicts an embodiment of the basic signal processing capabilities of the
cable headend 208 and shows connections to components of thenetwork controller 214. As shown in the figure, RF cable signals 205 are received at theheadend 208 through a bank of integrated receiver demodulators (IRDs) 240. EachIRD 240 includes customary RF processing equipment, including a low noise amplifier, a demodulator and other filtering devices (not shown). As each RF feed is fed through theindividual IRDs 240, the signals are manipulated and transferred to the demultiplexer and other signal processing equipment for further processing. Thedemultiplexer 242 splits each cable TV signal into its respective video and audio signal components. In addition, thedemultiplexer 242 extracts data from the cable television signals and inputs such data to thecontrol CPU 244. - The
control CPU 244 exchanges control information with thenetwork controller 214, as shown at 211. This control information is exchanged between the signal processor'scontrol CPU 244 and thenetwork controller CPU 224. In particular, thenetwork controller 214 andsignal processor 209 pass control information through the interface linking the two CPUs in order to perform any modifications to the program control information signal. Thenetwork controller CPU 224 oversees such modifications, accessing variousnetwork control databases 226 for guidance in instructing the signal processor'scontrol CPU 244. The instructions provided by thenetwork controller 214 in turn guide thesignal processor 209 in combining and/or adding programming signals and advertisements for transmission to the settop terminals 220. - The
local insertion component 246 of thesignal processor 209 allows thecontrol CPU 244 to execute the instructions received from thenetwork controller 214 and insert any local programming and advertisements. Once such regional programming and advertisements have been inserted, thelocal insertion component 246 passes the various signals to amultiplexer 248 that combines the various programming and advertising signals. The output of themultiplexer 248 is transferred toRF modulator 250 that disseminates the composite video and audio signals to the settop terminals 220. The data extracted from the cable television signals by thedemultiplexer 242, which is also sent to thecontrol CPU 244, is transmitted to the settop terminal 220 using aseparate RF modulator 250. - The
network controller 214 accommodates two-way RF data communications with the settop terminals 220. The network controller'scontrol receiver 228 receives upstream data transmissions from the settop terminals 220. These upstream data transmission capabilities are described in detail below. - FIG. 21b diagrams another embodiment of a
basic cable headend 208 having anetwork controller 214 and more sophisticated signal processing equipment. Again, RF cable television signals 205 are fed into a bank ofIRDs 240 as described above. Thesesignals 205 are demultiplexed into individual video and audio signal components, with data being extracted and sent to thecontrol CPU 244. The individual video and audio signal components are fed into adigital logic circuit 256 that is flexible enough to select individual video and audio signals for repackaging. Thenetwork controller 214 oversees such repackaging by: (i) receiving the program control information from thecontrol CPU 244, (ii) modifying or manipulating the signal as necessary, and (iii) transferring the modified program control information signal back to thecontrol CPU 244. - With instructions from the
network controller 214, thecontrol CPU 244 may insert local avails into thedigital logic system 256 and execute the various selections of individual video and audio signals for subsequent transmission to the settop terminals 220. Once individual video and audio signals have been selected and all local insertions have been made, the outputs of thedigital logic circuitry 256 are transferred to aserializer 258 that recombines all the signals into a serialized format. The serially formatted signals are in turn transferred toRF modulators 250 for distribution over thecable network 200. The selection and recombining components of the signal processing equipment are described in greater detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,682,195, entitled DIGITAL CABLE HEADEND FOR CABLE TELEVISION DELIVERY SYSTEM, incorporated herein by reference; however, such sophisticated combining circuitry is not necessary for the operation of thenetwork controller 214. Rather, a simpler signal processing system may readily be used. - In the embodiments diagramed in FIGS. 21a and 21 b, the
signal processor 209 may, acting alone or in conjunction with control instructions from thenetwork controller 214, incorporate local programming and/or local advertisements into the program signals and forward the revised signal to the settop terminals 220. To accommodate this local programming availability, thesignal processor 209 must combine the local signal in digital or analog form with the program signals 205 received fromoperations center 202. If alocal cable system 200 uses a compression algorithm or standard that is different than the one used by theoperations center 202, thesignal processor 209 must also decompress and recompress incoming signals so they may be properly formatted for transmission to the settop terminals 220. In addition, thesignal processor 209 performs any necessary signal decryption and/or encryption. - FIG. 22 diagrams an alternative embodiment of a digital/
analog cable headend 208. In particular, this embodiment includes decompression and recompression capabilities, showing the types of signal processing components that thenetwork controller 214 may control. As shown in FIG. 22, thecable headend 208 receiver front-end, indicated at 260, demodulates the receivedtransponder signals 205, which may contain four, six, eight or more audio/video channels of information, into a digital bit stream of multiplexed digitized MPEG orMPEG 2 format video. Thesignal processor 209 receives the multiplexed signals and initially performs any demultiplexing required to process the received signals. Thedemultiplexers 242 separate the multiplexed signals into separate individual MPEG orMPEG 2 format digital channels. Depending on the transponder signal received, thedemultiplexer 242 may have four, six, eight or more cross connects to thecombiner 264. The outputs of thedemultiplexers 242 are selectively enabled by thecontrol CPU 244. Those outputs of themultiplexer 248 that are enabled are then input to the combiner. - Decrypting may be necessary and can be conducted by a
separate decrypting device 262 included as part of the signal processor's internal components. The signal processor'scontrol CPU 244 may be controlled by a remote site (such as a national site) via a modem orsimilar connection 266. Therefore, the remote site is able to control the output of thedemultiplexers 242. Alternatively, instead of enabling the outputs of thedemultiplexers 242, the inputs of thecombiner 264 may be selected by thecontrol CPU 244. By enabling or selectingmultiplexer 248 outputs, thecontrol CPU 244 is able to control which television programs are combined and transmitted to the viewers. - The
combiner 264 combines the enabled or selected outputs of thedemultiplexers 242 into the proper format and outputs the signals through acompressor 268, and an encryptor 270 (if desired), to adigital modulator 272. Themodulator 272 outputs a modulated RF carrier combined with other carriers onto thecable distribution network 236. The settop converter terminals 220 in subscribers' homes select and demodulate a particular channel selected by the user. As selections are made, theset top terminal 220 stores the programs accessed in its local storage for later transmission to thenetwork controller 214 at thecable headend 208. - 5. Receiving Information from Set Top Terminals
- The
network controller 214 is equipped to receive information from the settop terminals 220 on a regular or random basis. Upstream information received from the settop terminals 220 typically includes, for example, program access data gathered at each settop terminal 220. Such information maybe communicated to thenetwork controller 214 through a variety of methods including any of the following methods: (1) cyclic polling, (2) random access, and (3) telephone modems and the Internet. Cyclic polling and random access methods make use of two-way RF. - As described below, the preferred embodiment employs a cyclic polling method. Although various polling schemes will work with the present invention, a roll-call polling scheme is preferred over other schemes such as hub polling or token-passing since roll-call polling provides the greatest degree of centralized control.
- Using this preferred method, program access information is stored at each set
top terminal 220 until it is polled by thenetwork controller 214 for information retrieval using a pollingrequest message format 920 as shown previously in FIG. 6a. Using any such pollingrequest message format 920, thenetwork controller 214 interrogates each set top terminal 220 sequentially, one by one. In this type of access strategy, thenetwork controller 214 is designated as the central controller of thecable distribution network 200 and is responsible for control of the communications links between itself and the settop terminals 220. This control includes issuing commands to the settop terminals 220 and receiving responses back from the settop terminals 220. - Basically, the
network controller 214 instructs thesignal processor 209 to transmit to each set top terminal 220 a polling request, which asks whether a settop terminal 220 has any information to transmit. The settop terminals 220 are identified by the unique address and set topterminal identifier 928. It is preferred that the settop terminal 220 transmit information and messages to thenetwork controller 214 only when given permission by thenetwork controller 214 to do so. - Where, for example, specialty programs have been accessed since the previous poll, the
set top terminal 220 is given permission to transmit a polling response in the form of a status report that includes any such access information. The network controller'scontrol receiver 228 is tasked with the receipt of settop terminal 220 polling responses or status reports. These status reports generally include information that allows thenetwork controller 214 to track a subscriber's program access history. As described above, the control receiver can store the status reports locally and/or transfer them to thenetwork controller CPU 224. - The
network controller CPU 224 immediately processes each polling response as it is received from each settop terminal 220. Thenetwork controller CPU 224 updatespertinent databases 226 with the received information, and then sends another polling request to the nextset top terminal 220 on its list. A settop terminal 220 with no information to transmit so indicates in a reply to thenetwork controller 214. Once all settop terminals 220 have been given permission to transmit status reports, a cycle is complete and a new cycle begins. - Through a polling cycle, the
network controller 214 acquires the information needed to operate thesystem 200. During the cycle, thenetwork controller 214 sends signals to the settop terminals 220 to authorize both their operation and access to specific channels. If, for example, a subscriber has failed to pay a recent bill, thenetwork controller 214 can deauthorize the subscriber's settop terminal 220. Likewise, when a subscriber orders a program or channel, thenetwork controller 214 checks the subscriber's account for good standing by reading the proper database file. After the check, thenetwork controller 214 then either authorizes or deauthorizes access by the settop terminal 220 using the data transmitted in a modified program control information signal. As a result, the cycle requires a series of requests and responses to operate. - FIG. 6b shows an
example frame format 920′ for the status reports received from the settop terminals 220 during the polling cycle. This frame format is substantially identical to the polling request message format 920 (FIG. 6a), and includes: (1) a leading flag at the beginning of the message, (2) an address field, (3) a subscriber region designation, (4) a set top terminal identifier that includes a polling command/response (or P/F) bit, (5) an information field, and (6) a trailing flag at the end of the message, each designated by a common number with respect to FIG. 6a, but with the prime indicator (′) added. - The second method for the
network controller 214 to receive information from the settop terminals 220 is through the use of a random access scheme. In an alternate embodiment that uses this method, individual settop terminals 220 can send control-related messages to thenetwork controller 214 without being polled. This scheme is particularly useful in networks where subscriber regions include potentially large numbers of subscribers. High concentrations of subscribers may be found, for example, in large metropolitan areas. In such cases, the polling cycle can be replaced with a more sophisticated random access strategy such as carrier-sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD). In this scheme, each settop terminal 220 must listen before it transmits and then does so only if it senses an idle medium. When the return link to thenetwork controller 214 is silent, a givenset top terminal 220 can transmit its messages. Any messages sent from a settop terminal 220 to thenetwork controller 214 would set the P/F bit 930′ to aA0 position to indicate that the message is not in response to any command or polling request. In addition to CSMA/CD, other random access schemes can be used with the system, such as CDSL. - The third method for the
network controller 214 to receive information from the settop terminals 220 is through the use of telephone modems or the Internet. In an alternate embodiment, the settop terminals 220 communicate program access information and orders to thenetwork controller 214 using telephone modems. In this embodiment, the settop terminals 220 are equipped with a modem port to facilitate such operation. Thus, communications between a givenset top terminal 220 and thenetwork controller 214 can be established over telephone lines when cable traffic or other primary traffic is congested. The preferred method of using telephone modems is in combination with a control or hit signal from thenetwork controller 214. A group (or region) of settop terminals 220 is hit simultaneously by thenetwork controller 214 via the cable. Only those settop terminals 220 within the group that have data for thenetwork controller 214 call thenetwork controller 214 by modem. Thenetwork controller 214 is equipped with a bank of modems (organized to roll-over telephone calls) to answer the incoming calls. - In yet another embodiment, the set
top terminals 220 connect directly to the Internet, using for example, standard telephone lines. The settop terminals 220 then provide access to web sites and databases on the Internet, and also provide communications with thecable headends 208 and theoperations center 202. The settop terminals 220 may also connect to the Internet via a separate processor, such as a stand-alone personal computer. - Among the three methods discussed for the
network controller 214 to receive information from the settop terminals 220, the use of the cyclic polling scheme depicted in FIGS. 6a and 6 b, is preferred. Polling is preferred because it allows thenetwork controller 214 to conduct and control communications with settop terminals 220 over the cable network in an orderly fashion. In particular, thenetwork controller 214 can schedule data retrieval by polling the settop terminals 220 one by one. A random access method, on the other hand, does not allow thenetwork controller 214 to maintain such orderly communications. Instead, thenetwork controller 214 receives data from the settop terminals 220 at random, depending on when the cable medium is idle. This random reception of data lessens the degree of control that thenetwork controller 214 has over set top terminal transmissions. Likewise, the third method, which uses telephone modems and/or the Internet, is less desirable than the polling method since the use of modems does not allow for upstream interactivity over the cable medium. - 6. Processing Information Received from Set Top Terminals
- Regardless of the scheme used by the set
top terminals 220 to access thenetwork controller 214, any polling responses and upstream interactivity is received by the network controller'scontrol receiver 228 as shown in FIG. 23, depicting the components of thecontrol receiver 228, which includes ademodulator 310 anddemultiplexer 313 to demodulate and demultiplex transmissions received from any settop terminal 220 in thecable distribution network 200. As described above, thecontrol receiver 228 transfers, through acontrol buffer 315, the received information to thenetwork controller CPU 224 for processing. - Processing is accomplished by the
network controller CPU 224. Operator instructions are input to thenetwork controller CPU 224 through theoperator control station 234 that includes, for example, a computer/workstation with a CRT display, printer and other peripherals. Multipleoperator control stations 234 can be used to assist in control operations. - Regional operator control stations (not specifically shown, but substantially identical to stations234) may be used and may include multiple operator control stations each assigned to a particular subscriber region corresponding to a geographic region where set
top terminals 220 are located. Thus, each regional operator control station is assigned to a subscriber region, providing monitoring and control capabilities over such regions. All regional program control information is transferred to thenetwork controller CPU 224 for processing, as in the case where asingle control station 234 is used. Likewise, during this processing, portions of thenetwork control databases 226 may also be updated. - No set number of
databases 226 is required for thenetwork controller 214 to perform its operations, and a single temporary database may be used. In the preferred embodiment, however, thenetwork controller 214 uses several databases (indicated at 226) that are accessed during network control operations. Thesedatabases 226 are identified in FIG. 23 and include: (1) theViewer Profile database 314, (2) the Account/Billing database 316, (3) theProgram Library database 318, (4) theProgram Scheduling database 320, (5) theAdvertisement Library database 322, and (6) theAdvertisement Scheduling database 324. - FIG. 24 shows one example of a network controller's basic database structure including the databases identified in the preceding paragraph. The data stored in these databases is not simply raw data. Rather data may be processed, correlated and appropriately indexed to create a true
relational database 226. - As shown in FIG. 12, the
Viewer Profile database 314 includes: (i) a Set top ID File, (ii) a Subscriber Region File, (iii) a Customer ID File and (iv) a Viewer Log File, the latter three files being indicated generally as afile group 332. The Settop ID File 330, common to each of the databases comprising the network controller'sdatabase 226, contains set top converter records with each record representing a uniqueset top terminal 220. Examples of information stored in this file includes set top terminal type, software version and set top terminal identification/serial number. The Settop ID File 330 contains the key data that links each relational database with one another, as described below. - The Subscriber Region File, part of
file group 332, includes information such asheadend 208 assignment, regional operator control workstation assignment and a designation for the subscriber's geographical area. The Customer ID and Viewer Log Files, part offile group 332, include the subscriber's personal information, such as name, address and telephone number, and information on the subscriptions to cable services for each customer as well as a personal profile for each viewer, respectively. - The personal profile consists of demographic information that may be gathered in a number of ways. The set
top terminal 220 builds the personal profile for each viewer and stores the information in a memory file by viewer name. To build a personal profile in the preferred system, the viewer answers a series of questions presented on a series of menu screens. These personal profile screens request the viewer to input information such as name, sex, age, place of birth, place of lower school education, employment type, level of education, amount of television program viewing per week, and the number of shows in particular categories that the viewer watches in a given week such as, sports, movies, documentaries, sitcoms, etc. Any demographic information that will assist the settop terminal 220 in targeting advertisements to the viewer may be used. - In addition to gathering demographics at the set
top terminal 220, the personal profile can be compiled using other methods. For instance, the information can be gathered using questionnaires sent by mail and subsequently entered in theViewer Profile Database 314 by the network controller's control station operator. - As an alternative to gathering demographic data, a simulated profile can be generated using an algorithm similar to that described below that analyzes access history and viewing habits. Using test information generated from a statistically significant number of viewers, the simulated profile algorithm estimates the viewer's age, education, sex and other relevant information. The analysis requires reviewing the viewer's programs watched and statistically comparing the viewer's programs watched with the test group. Also, the algorithm can place the subscriber or viewer in a viewer category. This analysis is transparent from the subscriber's point of view and attempts to accurately profile the viewer. Various viewers or viewer categories can later be targeted with different advertisements.
- The Account/
Billing database 316 includes (i) the Settop ID File 330, and (ii) an Account History File, and (iii) a Billing File, the latter two files indicated at 338. The Set top ID File, as described above, contains information unique to each subscriber, including set top terminal type, software version and set top terminal identification/serial number. The Account History and Billing Files contain information concerning each subscriber's past bills and account record and information on the most recent bill, including data from which the next billing report can be generated, respectively. - The
Program Library database 318 include (i) the Settop ID File 330, and (ii) a Programs File, (iii) a Preview File, (iv) a Program Category File, (v) a Price Category File and (vi) Service File, the latter five files identified at 344. As usual, the Set top ID File identifies each settop terminal 220 by identification number. The Programs File contains information on every program offering in the system, including name, length and type of program. The Preview File contains information on previews for specialty programs stored in the Programs File. The Program Category File contains a set of categories into which each program may be placed, such as movies, sports, science fiction and news. The Price Category File contains information on pricing for various categories of programs, grouping programs and services into categories by price. The Service File maintains information on the various cable services available in thesystem 200. - The
Program Scheduling database 320 includes (i) the Settop ID File 330, and (ii) an Access History File, (iii) a Programs Watched Matrices File and (iv) a Program Scheduling Library, the latter three files indicated at 350. The Access History File contains information on the programs that the settop terminal 220 has accessed and the Programs Watched Matrices contains information on the number of programs watched in a given program category during different times of day. Relative to the Programs Watched Matrices file, a programs watched matrix is shown in FIG. 27 and further described below. The Program Scheduling File contains information on the times of day and the corresponding programs that are being offered for viewing at each subscriber location. - The
Advertisement Library database 322 includes (i) the Settop ID File 330, and (ii) an Advertisements File, and (iii) an Advertisement Category File, the latter two files being indicated at 354. The Advertisements File contains information on every advertisement in the system, including name, length and type of advertisement, and the Advertisement Category File contains a set of categories into which each advertisement can be placed. - The
Advertisement Scheduling database 324 includes (i) the Settop ID File 330, and (ii) an Advertisement Selection File, and (iii) an Advertisement Targeting File, the latter two files identified at 358. The Advertisement Selection File contains information on the advertisements that have been offered to each subscriber and keeps track of the ones that have been selected. The Advertisement Targeting File contains information on the advertisements and advertisement categories that have been chosen by the system as being of the most interest to a specific subscriber. - The
network control databases database 226 are relational databases generally keyed to information in a single file. Specifically, the relational key is a settop terminal 220 identification number stored in Set topTerminal ID File 330, as shown in FIG. 11. This set top terminal identification number allows the database files that correspond to a particular subscriber to be linked together by a common reference. In other words, the databases are structured such that subscribers are referenced in each database file by a unique set top terminal identification number. In this way, each database may be accessed based on set top terminal identification number alone. Thus, using a subscriber's set top terminal identification number, thenetwork controller CPU 224 can access and process information pertaining to that subscriber from any of the above described database files. In configurations where multiple settop terminals 220 are allocated to a single customer (or household), a unique subscriber identification number may be added to thedatabase 226 to group the settop terminals 220 by customer. With the set top terminal identification as a relational key, many additional databases may be created that correlate and store pieces of subscriber-specific information from the six databases and underlying files. - 7. Overview of Software Routines
- FIG. 25 shows the major software routines initiated and executed by the
network controller CPU 224. These routines are: (1) the Modifying PCI routine 370, (2) thePolling Cycle routine 372, (3) the Advertisement Targeting routine, and (4) the Account/Billing routine 376. Together, these routines, along with the operator entry and update functions 380, 382, respectively, enable thenetwork controller 214 to perform its major functions. - The Modifying PCI routine370 is the software that enables the
network controller 214 to modify the program control information (PCI) signal received from thesignal processor 209. This software routine generally allows thenetwork controller CPU 224 to modify the PCI signal content so that changes and additions in programming and advertisements can be accommodated. Such changes and additions include access authorizations and deauthorizations in the form of authorization and deauthorization messages, respectively. - The
Polling Cycle routine 372 is the software sequence that interactively executes the network controller's polling cycle allowing thenetwork controller 214 to schedule and perform polling of all settop terminals 220 operating in thesystem 200. The software also provides thenetwork controller 214 with a means of processing status reports received from settop terminals 220 in response to polling requests. For a random access system (not depicted), the software of this routine 372 would be changed. - The Alternate
Advertisement Targeting routine 374 is the software that generates packages of television commercials and advertisements geared towards particular viewers and makes use of a viewer's demographic information and viewing habits to determine those advertisements that are of most interest to that particular viewer. In so doing, the routine 374 outputs packages of advertisements targeted towards each viewer or groups of viewers. - The Account/Billing routine376 is the software that the
network controller CPU 224 runs to generate billing reports for each settop terminal 220. In general, the routine 376 correlates the programs accessed with pricing information to generate each report. - 8. Polling Cycle Routine
- FIG. 26 shows a software flow diagram for the network controller's Polling Cycle routine372, which interactively executes the network controller's polling cycle. The number of iterations corresponds to the number of set
top terminals 220 being polled. Thenetwork controller CPU 224 initiates the Polling Cycle sequence periodically on a predetermined basis, block 400. Typically, this period is set by the operator at the network controller'soperator control station 234 at once per day, although other periods (e.g., multiple times per day or once per week) can be used. - Upon initiation of the
sequence 400, as depicted atfunction block 402, thenetwork controller CPU 224 reads the Set topTerminal ID File 330 and begins generating, block 404, a polling request frame (shown in FIG. 6a and described above) for the firstset top terminal 220 identified in thefile 330. Once the necessary polling request information is complete, the frame is transferred to thesignal processor CPU 244 through the interface between thesignal processor 209 andnetwork controller 214. After transfer to thesignal processor 209, the frames may be transmitted to the settop terminals 220, block 406. Meanwhile, the network controller'scontrol receiver 228 awaits the corresponding response. - Upon receipt of a polling response, as depicted at
block 408, thenetwork controller CPU 224 reads the received information from thecontrol buffer 315. Thenetwork controller 214 reads the information field of the polling response frame format, as described above. Thenetwork controller CPU 224 processes, indexes and stores the data in an appropriate format, updating the corresponding database files with the information received, block 410. The processing and indexing of the raw data into arelational database 226 is important to the ability of thenetwork controller 214 to quickly take actions such as targeting commercials without lengthy processing time. The polling routine subsequently returns to the Set TopTerminal ID File 330, as shown atdecision block 412, to continue the polling cycle for the nextset top terminal 220 identified in thefile 330. When the routine 372 sequences through the lastset top terminal 220, the cycle is complete and the routine 372 ceases until the next polling period. - Most often, the files that require updates during the polling cycle are the Access History File, the Programs Watched Matrices File and the
Account History File 338. For example, FIG. 27 shows an example of a 30-day programs watched matrix, denoted 351, for oneset top terminal 220. Thematrix 351 is divided into six rows, corresponding to six four-hour time slots. The columns of thematrix 351 are divided, as necessary, by the program categories available for viewing. Each entry in thematrix 351 denotes the number of programs watched in a particular program category and time period. - After the status report is received on each set
top terminal 220, the polling response routine (see FIGS. 6a and 6 b) determines which time slot and category of program numbers in thematrix 351 need to be increased. Thus, entries in thematrix 351 are updated upon receipt of each set top terminal's polling status report, thereby maintaining a running total of the programs watched. For example, during the 0800-1200 time period, thematrix 351 shows that this settop terminal 220 has been used to watch ten movies during the past month. Preferably the program watched identifying information is stored in addition to the running totals in the Programs Watched Matrices file. Use of programs watched matrices is further described in the following section describing the Advertisement Targeting routine. - 9. Alternate Advertisement Targeting Routine
- Targeted advertising, using a multiple channel architecture has been described previously. FIG. 28 shows the seven primary functions of an alternate advertisement targeting routine374. The function of this routine is to target video for set
top terminals 220 based on historical viewing data and other data that is available at thenetwork controller 214. Advertisements that may be targeted include video, commercials and infomercials, with infomercials being time varying video segments (e.g., thirty seconds, fifteen minutes). In the discussion that follows, the alternate advertisement targeting routine 374 is described as executed at thecable headend 208. However, as previously noted, the same routine could be executed at a regional or national operations center such as theoperations center 202. - When initiated, block420, the first subroutine, identified at
function block 422, accesses the programs watched matrices (exemplified by matrix 351) stored in the Programs Watched Matrices file in theProgram Scheduling database 320. The subroutine uses a unique set top terminal ID to access a specific matrix for oneset top terminal 220. These matrices are maintained and updated by the polling response routine. - The second subroutine,
function block 424, which develops other matrices based on other available information, is an optional subroutine not required for the functioning of the system. For groups of settop terminals 220 or for each individualset top terminal 220, matrices may be developed based on the demographic information, billing information, pricing information, age information and other information which may be stored in thenetwork controller 214 databases. - The third subroutine, block426, processes all matrices through a set of correlation algorithms. In particular, this
subroutine 426 takes matrices developed in the first two subroutines and processes the matrices until reaching a final matrix. - FIG. 29 diagrams an embodiment of this
matrices processing subroutine 426 that is called by the advertisement targeting sequence shown in FIG. 28. As shown in FIG. 29, thesubroutine 426 is initiated 427 and then accesses or queries, block 428, the programs watched file and gathers information regarding either an individual subscriber or a group of subscribers. The software can gather the programs watched information in this way for individual subscribers or a set of subscribers. - Once the programs watched information has been gathered from the databases, the routine426 selects and groups,
function block 430, programs watched based on program categories and time slots. The software initially takes each program category (e.g., sports, news, movies, etc.) and establishes the number of programs watched for a given time slot. The time slots may be set to any length of time, including, for example, one, two, three or four hour time frames. The software will loop through such a counting process for each group and timeslot and then proceed to build a programs watched matrix, block 432, based on the program categories and time slots. Essentially, all programs watched in a particular category and time slot will be entered into the programs watched matrix. Once the matrix has been built, thesubroutine 426 will process the matrix for a given subscriber or node of subscribers through the correlation algorithms. - A number of correlation algorithms may be used to weight each selected program category group. For example, as shown at
block 434, a sum of squares algorithm may be used to determine the weighting. Once the groups have been weighted, the weighted groups will be correlated, as atblock 436, with various advertisements stored in the network control databases. The software can then select a set of the most heavily weighted advertisements for transmission to individual subscribers or sets of subscribers in a cable distribution network node. Having determined the weightings of each group and prioritizing the groups accordingly, the subroutine returns 438 to theadvertisement targeting sequence 374 of FIG. 28. - Referring back to FIG. 28, the fourth subroutine, as represented at
function block 428, uses the final matrix developed by the correlation and weighing algorithm described above, to select a grouping (or selective filter) for each settop terminal 220. The final groupings of advertisement that may be sent to the settop terminals 220 or group of settop terminals 220 may use a subroutine as diagramed in FIG. 30. - The
subroutine 428 depicted in FIG. 30 is called or initiated by theadvertisement targeting sequence 374 of FIG. 28 in order to determine the final groupings. Basically, this subroutine selects a set of commercials that will be used in the chosen groupings, function block 444. This selection process typically involves advertisements from various advertisement categories (from a number of advertisers which have purchased air time). Each advertisement will subsequently be assigned a number of times that it will be shown in a given time frame, block 446. This frequency of display may be based on various factors, including the number of requests and cost paid by the respective advertisers to have the commercial displayed. Such factors are used in the next step of the subroutine, block 448, which assigns a weighting to specific commercials or advertisements in each advertisement category or group. These weightings are used to prioritize the advertisements that will be sent to individual settop terminals 220 or group of settop terminals 220. - Once the advertisements have been weighted, the software executes its correlation algorithm,450, using selected criteria (i.e., the various factors used to weight the advertisements) as well as the output of each programs watched matrix. Any number of correlation algorithms and weighting algorithms may be used with the software, including the sum of squares weighting algorithm described above.
- The results from the correlation algorithm subsequently determine the advertisements and programming material that is sent to the
signal processor 209 for distribution over the cable network, as represented at block 452. Once thesubroutine 428 completes these steps, thenetwork controller CPU 224 updates the account and billing database based on the ads that are sent to thesignal processor 209 for subscriber viewing, as shown at block 454. These billing database updates allow the advertisers to track the costs and frequency of the advertisements targeted to specific settop terminals 220 or nodes of settop terminals 220. Following the updates, the subroutine returns to the advertisement targeting sequence shown in FIG. 28, block 456. - Referring to FIG. 31, set top groupings (1 through 5)460 are shown. The number of set top groupings available may be determined by the bandwidth available to transmit commercials. The bandwidth of the system will limit the number of commercials that are available at the set
top terminal 220 at any given time. - Referring back to FIG. 28, the fifth subroutine, represented at
function block 466, prepares set top group information for transmission to the settop terminals 220. Thissubroutine 466 modifies the PCI signal and includes set top group information in the information field of the frame format given earlier. The various methods for transmitting the group information to the settop terminals 220 are described below. - The sixth subroutine, block468, selects the target video and is the last decision-making process in targeting a commercial for a viewer and, can be performed by either the set
top terminal 220 or thenetwork controller 214. As noted above, targeted advertising can be based on watching a specific program or a category of programs. In an embodiment, theset top terminal 220 performs this last step by correlating (or matching) the program being watched by the viewer with the set top group information that has been previously transmitted by thenetwork controller 214. For example, using the multiple channel architecture, and referring back to Tables E and F, theset top terminal 220 compares the Group Assignment matrix to the switching plan, switches program channels as appropriate, and the targeted advertisement is then displayed, as shown atblock 470. Alternately, the targeting is done by program categories. FIG. 31 shows an exemplary table matching set topterminal groups 460 and program category being watched 470 with a specific channel (continuously) showing commercials. The commercial channels are shown in FIG. 32 at 474 and are assigned Roman numerals I through X, for example. The number of set top groupings and channels showing commercials can vary. FIG. 32 shows a division of available bandwidth to carry ten videos, ten commercial channels. In this example, thechannels 474 are numbered 101-110. - The
network controller 214 will transmit group information to a set top terminal shown asrow names 460 on FIG. 31. Thenetwork controller 214 will also transmit data which informs the settop terminal 220 which of the multiplecommercial channels 474 is assigned to a television program category shown asColumns 470 on FIG. 31. Each settop terminal 220 only requires the data related to that set top terminal's assigned group (or row). For example, in FIG. 31, the set top terminal in group 1 (row 1) is provided with data on the commercial channel which are assigned for sports programs as I, children's programs as IV and movie category as III. In this manner, each settop terminal 220 is only required to store information related to its own grouping. Therefore, aset top terminal 220, which is ingroup 1, only needs to store the information related togroup 1, which is found inrow 1 of FIG. 31. This information includes one commercial channel assignment for each of the eight program categories. Using this information, theset top terminal 220 first determines the specific program or the category of the television program currently being watched and then is able to quickly determine which channel to switch the viewer when an advertisement availability occurs during the program. - The
network controller 214 can also perform the step of correlating program category watched 470 and set top terminal grouping 460 to select the target video. Thenetwork controller 214 performs this function by gathering information on the program currently being watched by the viewer. To obtain this information in a polling system, set top polling must occur on a real-time basis (i.e., 10 minutes). - During the target commercial selection process, the set top terminal programming will default to the existing commercial during a program if it is missing any of the information needed to determine which of the continuously playing commercial channels to show. In alternative embodiments, the default that is shown on the regular programming channel will correlate with one of the assigned set top groupings and program categories. FIG. 31 shows, at478, that the default has been assigned to set top
terminal grouping 3 for program categories children and entertainment. - The methods to transmit targeted commercials to a
set top terminal 220 are: (1) the Multiple Channel method; (2) the Storage method (i.e., storing advertisements in the set top terminal); (3) the Additional Bandwidth method (or individual video access); and (4) the Split Screen method. Each method has certain advantages and disadvantages. The Multiple Channel method requires a settop terminal 220 transparently to change channels during a scheduled advertisement from the channel of the currently viewed program to the channel which is carrying the targeted commercial. Although this channel changing method may be transparent to the viewer, it creates difficulty in terms of timing and synchronizing the commercials to begin and end during an advertisement availability occurring in the normally scheduled program. The channel changing is done within the settop terminal 220 using the existing tuner(s). - The hardware required to accommodate such transparent channel switching capabilities are shown in FIGS.33, and 34. FIG. 33 shows the set top terminal hardware components that accommodate channel switching within a single 6 MHZ channel bandwidth. These components include a
tuner 603, ademodulator 606, ademultiplexer 609, amultiplexer 604, adecompressor 622, amicroprocessor 602, and local memory M. Thetuner 603 operates by tuning to a specific 6 MHZ bandwidth that includes the displayed video and a number of channels carrying advertisements. The demodulator 606 processes these signals and sends them to thedemultiplexor 609, which converts the received signal into separate program and advertisement signals. During this processing, themicroprocessor 602 coordinates the demultiplexing of the programming signals. Once the video signal pauses for a commercial break, themicroprocessor 602 instructs themultiplexer 604 to select the advertisement or advertisements for decompression and subsequent display on the subscriber's television. This hardware configuration allows the settop terminal 220 to switch between channels within the 6 MHZ bandwidth and display various advertisements for viewing, regardless of the video currently being watched by the subscriber. - Where a targeted advertisement falls outside the tuned 6 MHZ bandwidth containing the video that the subscriber is currently watching, the hardware configuration shown in FIG. 34 is used. In this configuration, the
microprocessor 602 instructs thetuner 603 to return to another 6 MHZ channel bandwidth, as represented by bi-directional arrow A. - Working together, the
microprocessor 602 andtuner 603 allow targeted advertisements, which have been transmitted in another 6 MHZ bandwidth, to be tuned with minimal acquisition time and delay. In particular, this configuration allows the settop terminal 220 to tune outside a given 6 MHZ bandwidth (to another 6 MHZ bandwidth) in order to select a targeted advertisement for display. This alternative embodiment may require the use of a full screen mask in order to minimize any annoying screen rolling during the tuning process. The masking is intended to cover any glitches that would otherwise be displayed during the acquisition time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) for returning to another 6 MHZ channel bandwidth. - Where the acquisition time or delay becomes unreasonable, an alternative embodiment can include the use of two tuners similar to the configuration shown in FIG. 35. This alternative configuration using two tuners trades an increased cost for lower acquisition times. In set
top terminals 220 equipped with two tuners, the terminal can use the second tuner to tune the channel showing the commercial. Set top terminals with two tuners are described in detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,990,927, entitled, ADVANCED SET TOP TERMINAL FOR CABLE TELEVISION DELIVERY SYSTEMS, incorporated herein by reference. Again, the channel changing is transparent to the viewer who believes the same channel is continuously being shown. Those skilled in the art will recognize a number of other configurations of set top terminal hardware that will accommodate a transparent channel-switching feature. - The Storage method (described above with reference to the Multiple Channel method, requires the set top terminal to store a certain number of targeted advertisements in memory. The group assignment and switching plan development described for use with the Multiple Channel method is then used to direct the set top terminal to retrieve the appropriate advertisement from memory during program breaks. In this embodiment, the stored targeted advertisements are retrieved, based on a file name, for example, that is identified by comparing the Group Assignment matrix and the switching plan. The Storage method has the advantage of not requiring additional feeder channel to continuously broadcast targeted advertisements.
- The Additional Bandwidth method allows flexibility by more specifically targeting commercials before the commercials are transmitted to a
set top terminal 220. However, it requires a great deal of available bandwidth in the delivery system. This is difficult with acable system 200 but possible when a telephone or personal communications system is used to transmit the commercials to the settop terminal 220. - The Additional Bandwidth method allows the
network controller 214 to run through a set top terminal's specific correlation algorithms and target specific commercials from hundreds for each settop terminal 220. This method allows for the greatest customizing of targeting and allows for a greater selection of commercials to be shown. Only after a commercial advertisement is selected by thenetwork controller 214 for the specificset top terminal 220 does transmission of the commercial occur. - The Split Screen method transmits multiple commercials on a single channel using a split screen technique; commercials being pre-recorded and prepared prior to transmitting to the set
top terminal 220. Although many commercials can be transmitted on a single channel, in the preferred form of the split screen method, only four commercials are shown. As the number of commercials increases the size and the amount of video information transmitted for each commercial decreases proportionately (i.e., 6, 8, 12, etc.). Using split screen methodology, either a masking technique or a scaling and repositioning of video technique must be used at the settop terminal 220 to show the ad. The masking and repositioning-scaling techniques are further defined in U.S. Pat. No. 5,990,927 entitled, ADVANCED SET TOP TERMINAL FOR CABLE TELEVISION DELIVERY SYSTEMS, incorporated herein by reference. The scaling and repositioning technique produces better quality commercials, but requires expensive equipment at the settop terminal 220. The settop terminal 220 will perform audio switching with the split screen method to amplify the correct audio. - FIG. 36 shows a
software program flow 490 that is an alternative to the network controller's AlternateAdvertisement Targeting routine 374, depicted in FIG. 28. Thealternative program 490 allows each settop terminal 220 to be individually targeted with specific advertisements and is initiated automatically, block 492, by thenetwork controller CPU 224 upon receipt of each polling response from a settop terminal 220. Thus, once thenetwork controller 214 receives program access information from a settop terminal 220, thenetwork controller CPU 224 begins the process of selecting a package of advertisements that is based on, among other things, that subscriber's demographic information and viewing history. - Upon receipt of a polling response from a set
top terminal 220, thenetwork controller CPU 224 reads the set top terminal identifier, 494, and the programs accessed, 496, from the polling response (or status report) (depicted in FIG. 6b). Thenetwork controller 214 writes information on the programs accessed to theProgram Scheduling database 320, updating the Access History File that contains listings of all programs accessed within the past week, month or year. - With continued reference to FIG. 36, the
network controller CPU 224 then calls a subroutine that sorts the programs accessed by program category, block 498. In turn, the program categories are sorted, 500, based on the number of times that programs appearing in each particular category are accessed. In so doing, this sorting subroutine determines and ranks those programs and program categories that are most frequently viewed by that settop terminal 220. - The subroutine can interactively produce rankings for different time slots in a given day. In this way, different rankings can accommodate different viewing preferences during those time slots for a single
set top terminal 220. For example, where rankings for eight three-hour time slots are desired, the subroutine determines a ranking of programs and program categories for each three-hour viewing period. Thus, a different ranking may be produced, for instance, for a morning time slot and an evening time slot. All rankings of programs and program categories for that settop terminal 220 are written to theViewer Profile database 314, updating the Viewer Log File, as atfunction block 502. - Next, the
network controller CPU 224 calls a subroutine that correlates the updated Viewer Log File with the Advertisement Categories File in theAdvertisement Library database 322, block 504. By correlating these two files with one another, the subroutine assigns or correlates various categories of television commercials to each ranking of programs and program categories in the Viewer Log File. The categories of television commercials and advertisements that may be so assigned are found in the Advertisement Categories File indicated generally at 354 as part of thelibrary 322 and may include: (1) Household Goods/Products, (2) Home Improvement and Maintenance, (3) Personal Hygiene, (4) Entertainment Items and Events, (5) Sporting Goods and Events, (6) Motor Vehicles and Related Products, (7) Foodstuffs and Beverages, and (8) Miscellaneous. Where, for example, the viewer has watched a sporting event, the Sporting Goods and Events, Home Improvement and Maintenance, and Foodstuffs and Beverages categories may be assigned to that particular sporting event/program and Sports program category. - Once the programs and program categories ranked in the Viewer Log File are correlated with the advertisement categories in the Advertisement Categories File, the routine calls a sorting subroutine that ranks the groups of advertising categories correlated based on other information in the database files. In the preferred system, this ranking is primarily based on data in the updated Access History File and the updated Viewer Log File, as shown at
function block 506. By using data on the viewer's past program selections and demographic information, the subroutine ranks the correlated categories of advertisements according to those likely to be of most interest to that viewer. - After the advertisement categories have been sorted and ranked, the routine selects the top three advertisement categories as the targeted categories for a given time slot and viewer, block508. Individual advertisements are then chosen from the Advertisements File, with all selections made from the targeted categories, 510. The advertisements that are selected are written to the Advertisement Targeting File from where advertising packages can be generated,
function 512, for transmission to the settop terminal 220. Such packages are generated by thenetwork controller CPU 224, which accesses the Advertisement Targeting File and includes the targeted advertisements in the PCI signal. The entire routine is repeated for each settop terminal 220 and, alternatively, each viewer. - The terms and descriptions used herein are set forth by way of illustration only and are not meant as limitations. Those skilled in the art will recognize that numerous variations are possible within the spirit and scope of the invention as defined in the following claims.
Claims (41)
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US10/263,806 US7844985B2 (en) | 1992-12-09 | 2002-10-04 | Targeted advertisement using television viewer information |
Applications Claiming Priority (5)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US99107492A | 1992-12-09 | 1992-12-09 | |
US08/160,280 US5600364A (en) | 1992-12-09 | 1993-12-02 | Network controller for cable television delivery systems |
US08/735,549 US6738978B1 (en) | 1992-12-09 | 1996-10-23 | Method and apparatus for targeted advertising |
US09/054,419 US6463585B1 (en) | 1992-12-09 | 1998-04-03 | Targeted advertisement using television delivery systems |
US10/263,806 US7844985B2 (en) | 1992-12-09 | 2002-10-04 | Targeted advertisement using television viewer information |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US09/054,419 Division US6463585B1 (en) | 1992-12-09 | 1998-04-03 | Targeted advertisement using television delivery systems |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20030145323A1 true US20030145323A1 (en) | 2003-07-31 |
US7844985B2 US7844985B2 (en) | 2010-11-30 |
Family
ID=21990939
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US09/054,419 Expired - Fee Related US6463585B1 (en) | 1992-12-09 | 1998-04-03 | Targeted advertisement using television delivery systems |
US10/263,806 Expired - Fee Related US7844985B2 (en) | 1992-12-09 | 2002-10-04 | Targeted advertisement using television viewer information |
Family Applications Before (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US09/054,419 Expired - Fee Related US6463585B1 (en) | 1992-12-09 | 1998-04-03 | Targeted advertisement using television delivery systems |
Country Status (17)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US6463585B1 (en) |
EP (3) | EP1068729B1 (en) |
JP (1) | JP4849718B2 (en) |
KR (1) | KR100616036B1 (en) |
CN (1) | CN1156161C (en) |
AT (3) | ATE256365T1 (en) |
AU (1) | AU754241B2 (en) |
BR (1) | BR9909391A (en) |
CA (2) | CA2326397C (en) |
DE (3) | DE69913571T2 (en) |
ES (1) | ES2181410T3 (en) |
HK (2) | HK1048037A1 (en) |
IL (1) | IL138805A (en) |
MX (1) | MXPA00009649A (en) |
NZ (1) | NZ507649A (en) |
RU (1) | RU2252494C2 (en) |
WO (1) | WO1999052285A1 (en) |
Cited By (220)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20010032333A1 (en) * | 2000-02-18 | 2001-10-18 | Gregory Flickinger | Scheduling and presenting IPG ads in conjunction with programming ads in a television environment |
US20020023274A1 (en) * | 2000-04-07 | 2002-02-21 | Giacalone, Louis D. | Method and system for electronically distributing, displaying and controlling advertising and other communicative media |
US20020042914A1 (en) * | 2000-10-11 | 2002-04-11 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for providing targeted advertisements based on current activity |
US20020053085A1 (en) * | 2000-06-13 | 2002-05-02 | Yasuhiro Toguri | Apparatus, method, and system for information processing, and recording meduim |
US20020087978A1 (en) * | 2000-12-30 | 2002-07-04 | Nicholson Robert D. | System and method of selective advertising on a TV channel |
US20020186296A1 (en) * | 2000-06-30 | 2002-12-12 | Metabyte Networks, Inc. | Database management system and method for electronic program guide and television channel lineup organization |
US20030067554A1 (en) * | 2000-09-25 | 2003-04-10 | Klarfeld Kenneth A. | System and method for personalized TV |
US20030097657A1 (en) * | 2000-09-14 | 2003-05-22 | Yiming Zhou | Method and system for delivery of targeted programming |
US20030101451A1 (en) * | 2001-01-09 | 2003-05-29 | Isaac Bentolila | System, method, and software application for targeted advertising via behavioral model clustering, and preference programming based on behavioral model clusters |
US20030118323A1 (en) * | 1998-06-12 | 2003-06-26 | Ismail Labeeb K. | Television program recording with user preference determination |
US20030233655A1 (en) * | 2002-06-18 | 2003-12-18 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and apparatus for an adaptive stereotypical profile for recommending items representing a user's interests |
US20030236756A1 (en) * | 2001-06-21 | 2003-12-25 | Metabyte Networks, Inc. | Method and system for electronic purchases using an intelligent data carrier medium, electronic coupon system, and interactive TV infrastructure |
WO2004043063A1 (en) * | 2002-11-02 | 2004-05-21 | Alticast, Corporation | System for surveying information of viewers on digital broadcasting |
US20040114052A1 (en) * | 2002-12-11 | 2004-06-17 | Sin Su Hyun | Digital TV and method for switching channel automatically |
US20040117257A1 (en) * | 2002-09-06 | 2004-06-17 | Seth Haberman | System for authoring and editing personalized message campaigns |
US20040216041A1 (en) * | 2003-04-24 | 2004-10-28 | Amir Ajizadeh | System and methods in interactive television and radio ratings through the internet and the telephone |
US20040268413A1 (en) * | 2003-05-29 | 2004-12-30 | Reid Duane M. | System for presentation of multimedia content |
US20050021396A1 (en) * | 2003-07-24 | 2005-01-27 | Bcmg Limited | Method of assessing the cost effectiveness of advertising |
US20050066361A1 (en) * | 2002-05-15 | 2005-03-24 | Dentsu Inc. | Advertising-marketing system and method |
US20050086113A1 (en) * | 2000-11-28 | 2005-04-21 | Roy Shkedi | Super-saturation method for information-media |
US20050108769A1 (en) * | 2000-03-02 | 2005-05-19 | Tivo Inc. | Method of sharing personal media using a digital recorder |
US20050216942A1 (en) * | 2000-03-02 | 2005-09-29 | Tivo Inc. | Multicasting multimedia content distribution system |
US20060127039A1 (en) * | 2004-11-19 | 2006-06-15 | Tivo Inc. | Method and apparatus for secure transfer of previously broadcasted content |
US20060248555A1 (en) * | 2000-09-08 | 2006-11-02 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Targeted advertising through electronic program guide |
US20070002360A1 (en) * | 2005-07-01 | 2007-01-04 | Searete Llc, A Limited Liability Corporation Of The State Of Delaware | Modifying restricted images |
US20070011702A1 (en) * | 2005-01-27 | 2007-01-11 | Arthur Vaysman | Dynamic mosaic extended electronic programming guide for television program selection and display |
US20070016847A1 (en) * | 2000-03-31 | 2007-01-18 | United Video Properties, Inc. | User speech interfaces for interactive media guidance applications |
US20070076728A1 (en) * | 2005-10-04 | 2007-04-05 | Remi Rieger | Self-monitoring and optimizing network apparatus and methods |
US20070089141A1 (en) * | 2000-11-08 | 2007-04-19 | Sedna Patent Services, Llc | Messaging protocol for interactive delivery system |
US20070089129A1 (en) * | 2003-11-10 | 2007-04-19 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Two-step commercial recommendation |
WO2007064446A1 (en) * | 2005-11-30 | 2007-06-07 | Microsoft Corporation | Selective advertisement display for multimedia content |
WO2007073078A1 (en) * | 2005-12-19 | 2007-06-28 | Alticast Corp. | Interactive advertisement system and method for the provision of interactive advertisement using the same |
US20070157231A1 (en) * | 1999-04-20 | 2007-07-05 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Advertising Management System for Digital Video Streams |
WO2007078168A1 (en) * | 2006-01-05 | 2007-07-12 | Lee, Myoung | An advertisement providing system and an advertisement providing method |
US20070220575A1 (en) * | 2006-03-03 | 2007-09-20 | Verimatrix, Inc. | Movie studio-based network distribution system and method |
US20070261072A1 (en) * | 2001-06-08 | 2007-11-08 | Boulet Daniel A | Asset delivery reporting in a broadcast network |
US20080010584A1 (en) * | 2006-07-05 | 2008-01-10 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and apparatus for presentation of a presentation content stream |
US20080040742A1 (en) * | 2006-08-11 | 2008-02-14 | Sbc Knowledge Ventures L.P. | Method and system for inserting advertisement data into an internet protocol television network |
US20080059308A1 (en) * | 2006-09-02 | 2008-03-06 | David Gerken | Methods and apparatus for using poll results to target and/or select advertisements |
US20080097808A1 (en) * | 2004-03-15 | 2008-04-24 | Godwin John P | Device and method for efficient delivery of redundant national television signals |
US20080097854A1 (en) * | 2006-10-24 | 2008-04-24 | Hello-Hello, Inc. | Method for Creating and Analyzing Advertisements |
US20080107401A1 (en) * | 2006-10-31 | 2008-05-08 | Eric Vannier | Performing Trick Play Functions in a Digital Video Recorder with Efficient Use of Resources |
US20080109298A1 (en) * | 2006-10-31 | 2008-05-08 | Tivo Inc. | Method for enhancing television advertising viewership |
US20080143887A1 (en) * | 2006-12-14 | 2008-06-19 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Broadcast receiving apparatus and method for distinguishing, displaying and automatically tuning to specific broadcast channel |
US20080145034A1 (en) * | 2006-10-31 | 2008-06-19 | Tivo Inc. | Method and apparatus for downloading ancillary program data to a DVR |
US20080155589A1 (en) * | 2006-12-22 | 2008-06-26 | Nortel Networks Limited | Method and system to control advertising |
US7395544B2 (en) | 2001-03-29 | 2008-07-01 | Microsoft Corporation | Regulating the quality of a broadcast based on monitored viewing behavior information |
US20080168502A1 (en) * | 2007-01-09 | 2008-07-10 | At&T Knowledge Ventures, Lp | System and method of providing program recommendations |
US20080181533A1 (en) * | 2007-01-31 | 2008-07-31 | Searete Llc, A Limited Liability Corporation Of The State Of Delaware | Targeted obstrufication of an image |
WO2008116305A1 (en) * | 2007-03-26 | 2008-10-02 | Technologies Ezoom Exponentiel Inc. | Method and system for targeted advertising in a distributed network |
US20080259906A1 (en) * | 2007-04-17 | 2008-10-23 | Almondnet, Inc. | Targeted television advertisements based on online behavior |
US20080273591A1 (en) * | 2007-05-04 | 2008-11-06 | Brooks Paul D | Methods and apparatus for predictive capacity allocation |
US20080307453A1 (en) * | 2007-06-04 | 2008-12-11 | Visible World, Inc. | Systems and methods for dynamic bit/bandwidth allocation |
US20080313256A1 (en) * | 2007-06-13 | 2008-12-18 | Microsoft Corporation | Automatically Sharing a User's Personal Message |
US7478414B1 (en) * | 2000-05-08 | 2009-01-13 | Microsoft Corporation | Method and apparatus for alerting a television viewers to the programs other viewers are watching |
US20090018915A1 (en) * | 2007-07-09 | 2009-01-15 | Jon Fisse | Systems and Methods Related to Delivering Targeted Advertising to Consumers |
US20090024546A1 (en) * | 2007-06-23 | 2009-01-22 | Motivepath, Inc. | System, method and apparatus for predictive modeling of spatially distributed data for location based commercial services |
US20090030778A1 (en) * | 2007-07-23 | 2009-01-29 | Motivepath, Inc. | System, method and apparatus for secure multiparty location based services |
US20090031339A1 (en) * | 2007-07-27 | 2009-01-29 | John Pickens | Architecture for Scaling Just-in-Time Placement of Advertising Content |
US20090044246A1 (en) * | 2007-02-01 | 2009-02-12 | Patrick Sheehan | Targeting content based on location |
US20090055860A1 (en) * | 2007-08-20 | 2009-02-26 | Ads-Vantage, Ltd. | System and method for providing targeted rating of profiles in video audiences |
US20090094113A1 (en) * | 2007-09-07 | 2009-04-09 | Digitalsmiths Corporation | Systems and Methods For Using Video Metadata to Associate Advertisements Therewith |
US20090132368A1 (en) * | 2007-10-19 | 2009-05-21 | Paul Cotter | Systems and Methods for Providing Personalized Advertisement |
US7552460B2 (en) | 2000-05-08 | 2009-06-23 | Microsoft Corporation | Modifying an electronic program guide based on viewer statistics |
US20090172728A1 (en) * | 2007-12-31 | 2009-07-02 | Almondnet, Inc. | Targeted online advertisements based on viewing or interacting with television advertisements |
US20090187939A1 (en) * | 2007-09-26 | 2009-07-23 | Lajoie Michael L | Methods and apparatus for user-based targeted content delivery |
US20090193460A1 (en) * | 2008-01-30 | 2009-07-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Program promotion feedback |
US20090193485A1 (en) * | 2008-01-30 | 2009-07-30 | Remi Rieger | Methods and apparatus for predictive delivery of content over a network |
US20090210902A1 (en) * | 2000-02-25 | 2009-08-20 | Malcolm Slaney | Targeted television content display |
US20090248507A1 (en) * | 2008-03-31 | 2009-10-01 | Go Surfboard Technologies, Inc. | Computer system and method for presenting advertisement based upon time and/or location |
US20090249383A1 (en) * | 2004-12-15 | 2009-10-01 | Packet Vision Limited | Broadcast data network system |
US20090259518A1 (en) * | 2008-04-14 | 2009-10-15 | Tra, Inc. | Analyzing return on investment of advertising campaigns using cross-correlation of multiple data sources |
US20090300675A1 (en) * | 2008-06-02 | 2009-12-03 | Roy Shkedi | Targeted television advertisements associated with online users' preferred television programs or channels |
US20090299843A1 (en) * | 2008-06-02 | 2009-12-03 | Roy Shkedi | Targeted television advertisements selected on the basis of an online user profile and presented with television programs or channels related to that profile |
US20100058400A1 (en) * | 2008-08-29 | 2010-03-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Managing Access to High Definition Content |
US20100057801A1 (en) * | 2005-09-14 | 2010-03-04 | Jorey Ramer | User Characteristic Influenced Search Results |
US20100083305A1 (en) * | 2008-09-30 | 2010-04-01 | Swarup Acharya | Interface Device Having Multiple Software Clients to Facilitate Display of Targeted Information |
US20100122162A1 (en) * | 2007-02-16 | 2010-05-13 | Satoshi Terada | Content display device, television receiver, content display method, content display control program, and recording medium |
US20100138873A1 (en) * | 2005-10-07 | 2010-06-03 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Receiving device, server, television receiver, mobile terminal, system, receiving method, information processing program, and storage medium |
US20100161492A1 (en) * | 2008-04-14 | 2010-06-24 | Tra, Inc. | Analyzing return on investment of advertising campaigns using cross-correlation of multiple data sources |
US20100169179A1 (en) * | 2005-09-14 | 2010-07-01 | Jorey Ramer | Dynamic Bidding and Expected Value |
US20100180013A1 (en) * | 2009-01-15 | 2010-07-15 | Roy Shkedi | Requesting offline profile data for online use in a privacy-sensitive manner |
US20100269134A1 (en) * | 2009-03-13 | 2010-10-21 | Jeffrey Storan | Method and apparatus for television program promotion |
US7930721B1 (en) * | 2003-04-02 | 2011-04-19 | Lodgenet Interactive Corporation | Method and system for offering interactive controls in a lodging entertainment system |
US20110099570A1 (en) * | 2004-02-12 | 2011-04-28 | Aran London Sadja | Cable Diagnostic and Monitoring System |
US20110119278A1 (en) * | 2009-08-28 | 2011-05-19 | Resonate Networks, Inc. | Method and apparatus for delivering targeted content to website visitors to promote products and brands |
US8060904B1 (en) | 2008-02-25 | 2011-11-15 | Qurio Holdings, Inc. | Dynamic load based ad insertion |
US8065710B2 (en) | 2006-03-02 | 2011-11-22 | At& T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatuses and methods for interactive communication concerning multimedia content |
US20110296453A1 (en) * | 2010-05-31 | 2011-12-01 | Thirunarayanan Srinivasan | Pay-Per-Website Visit ad system |
US8126938B2 (en) * | 2005-07-01 | 2012-02-28 | The Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Group content substitution in media works |
US20120089429A1 (en) * | 2010-05-13 | 2012-04-12 | Accenture Global Services Limited. | Systems and methods for gathering and analyzing social media data |
US8161412B2 (en) | 2006-01-13 | 2012-04-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Systems, methods, and computer program products for providing interactive content |
US8203609B2 (en) | 2007-01-31 | 2012-06-19 | The Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Anonymization pursuant to a broadcasted policy |
US8286203B2 (en) | 2003-12-19 | 2012-10-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for enhanced hot key delivery |
US20120284746A1 (en) * | 2011-05-03 | 2012-11-08 | Collective Media, Inc. | System and Method for Targeting Advertisements |
US8312487B1 (en) * | 2008-12-31 | 2012-11-13 | Qurio Holdings, Inc. | Method and system for arranging an advertising schedule |
WO2012158904A1 (en) * | 2011-05-17 | 2012-11-22 | Webtuner Corporation | System and method for scalable, high accuracy, sensor and id based audience measurement system |
US8317618B2 (en) | 2005-12-15 | 2012-11-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | System, method and computer program for enabling an interactive game |
US8352984B2 (en) | 1998-06-12 | 2013-01-08 | Thomson Licensing | System and method for generating and managing user preference information for scheduled and stored television programs |
US8402503B2 (en) | 2006-02-08 | 2013-03-19 | At& T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Interactive program manager and methods for presenting program content |
WO2013039594A1 (en) * | 2011-09-14 | 2013-03-21 | Collective, Inc. | System and method for targeting advertisements |
US8490145B2 (en) | 1995-04-25 | 2013-07-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for providing television services |
US8495679B2 (en) | 2000-06-30 | 2013-07-23 | Thomson Licensing | Method and apparatus for delivery of television programs and targeted de-coupled advertising |
US8533755B1 (en) * | 2012-04-09 | 2013-09-10 | This Technology, Inc. | Method for advertising decision resolution acceleration based on lookahead opportunity triggering |
US8635643B2 (en) | 2003-06-30 | 2014-01-21 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for providing interactive media content over a network |
US8634703B1 (en) | 2008-08-12 | 2014-01-21 | Tivo Inc. | Real-time DVR usage and reporting system |
US8713600B2 (en) | 2013-01-30 | 2014-04-29 | Almondnet, Inc. | User control of replacement television advertisements inserted by a smart television |
US8732087B2 (en) | 2005-07-01 | 2014-05-20 | The Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Authorization for media content alteration |
US20140150003A1 (en) * | 2012-11-28 | 2014-05-29 | Peter Doe | Methods and apparatus to calculate a probability of index consistency |
US8813126B1 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2014-08-19 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Method and system for targeted advertisement filtering and storage |
US8812850B2 (en) | 2000-03-02 | 2014-08-19 | Tivo Inc. | Secure multimedia transfer system |
US8818179B1 (en) | 2008-11-13 | 2014-08-26 | Tivo Inc. | Shared DVR programming via a web page |
US8869204B2 (en) | 1996-05-03 | 2014-10-21 | Starsight Telecast, Inc. | Method and system for displaying advertisements in an electronic program guide |
US8875196B2 (en) | 2005-08-13 | 2014-10-28 | Webtuner Corp. | System for network and local content access |
US8904445B2 (en) | 2011-01-24 | 2014-12-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods and apparatus to manage bandwidth allocations in media delivery networks |
US8914301B2 (en) | 2005-10-28 | 2014-12-16 | Joyce A. Book | Method and apparatus for dynamic ad creation |
US8918807B2 (en) | 1997-07-21 | 2014-12-23 | Gemstar Development Corporation | System and method for modifying advertisement responsive to EPG information |
US20150007211A1 (en) * | 2011-09-27 | 2015-01-01 | Thomson Licensing | User interfaces for content distribution systems |
US8958779B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-02-17 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Mobile dynamic advertisement creation and placement |
US8978079B2 (en) | 2012-03-23 | 2015-03-10 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for managing delivery of content in a network with limited bandwidth using pre-caching |
US8989718B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-03-24 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Idle screen advertising |
US8995973B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-03-31 | Millennial Media, Inc. | System for targeting advertising content to a plurality of mobile communication facilities |
US8997138B2 (en) | 2010-10-15 | 2015-03-31 | Intent IQ, LLC | Correlating online behavior with presumed viewing of television advertisements |
US9021543B2 (en) | 2011-05-26 | 2015-04-28 | Webtuner Corporation | Highly scalable audience measurement system with client event pre-processing |
US9031986B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-05-12 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Presenting sponsored content on a mobile communication facility |
US9058406B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-06-16 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Management of multiple advertising inventories using a monetization platform |
US9060195B2 (en) | 2013-10-01 | 2015-06-16 | Mastercard International Incorporated | Television advertising message targeting according to subscriber purchasing behavior |
US9065979B2 (en) * | 2005-07-01 | 2015-06-23 | The Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Promotional placement in media works |
US9071886B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2015-06-30 | Almondnet, Inc. | Targeted television advertising based on a profile linked to an online device associated with a content-selecting device |
US9075861B2 (en) | 2006-03-06 | 2015-07-07 | Veveo, Inc. | Methods and systems for segmenting relative user preferences into fine-grain and coarse-grain collections |
US9076175B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-07-07 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Mobile comparison shopping |
US9092928B2 (en) | 2005-07-01 | 2015-07-28 | The Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Implementing group content substitution in media works |
US20150227950A1 (en) * | 2014-02-13 | 2015-08-13 | Rentrak Corporation | Systems and methods for ascertaining network market subscription coverage |
US9113195B1 (en) | 2008-12-31 | 2015-08-18 | Tivo Inc. | Real-time DVR programming |
US9131283B2 (en) | 2012-12-14 | 2015-09-08 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for multimedia coordination |
US9131282B2 (en) | 2010-10-15 | 2015-09-08 | Intent IQ, LLC | Systems and methods for selecting television advertisements for a set-top box requesting an advertisement without knowing what program or channel is being watched |
US9141632B1 (en) * | 2012-12-19 | 2015-09-22 | Teradata Us, Inc. | Selecting a compression technique |
US9166714B2 (en) | 2009-09-11 | 2015-10-20 | Veveo, Inc. | Method of and system for presenting enriched video viewing analytics |
US9178634B2 (en) | 2009-07-15 | 2015-11-03 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for evaluating an audience in a content-based network |
US9195993B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-11-24 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Mobile advertisement syndication |
US9201979B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-12-01 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Syndication of a behavioral profile associated with an availability condition using a monetization platform |
US9215512B2 (en) | 2007-04-27 | 2015-12-15 | Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Implementation of media content alteration |
US9215510B2 (en) | 2013-12-06 | 2015-12-15 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for automatically tagging a media asset based on verbal input and playback adjustments |
US9230601B2 (en) | 2005-07-01 | 2016-01-05 | Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Media markup system for content alteration in derivative works |
US9247288B2 (en) | 2003-08-12 | 2016-01-26 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Technique for effectively delivering targeted advertisements through a communications network having limited bandwidth |
US9256884B2 (en) | 2011-05-24 | 2016-02-09 | Webtuner Corp | System and method to increase efficiency and speed of analytics report generation in audience measurement systems |
US9271023B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2016-02-23 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Presentation of search results to mobile devices based on television viewing history |
US9319735B2 (en) | 1995-06-07 | 2016-04-19 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Electronic television program guide schedule system and method with data feed access |
US9326025B2 (en) | 2007-03-09 | 2016-04-26 | Rovi Technologies Corporation | Media content search results ranked by popularity |
US9355366B1 (en) | 2011-12-19 | 2016-05-31 | Hello-Hello, Inc. | Automated systems for improving communication at the human-machine interface |
US9363557B2 (en) | 2012-10-15 | 2016-06-07 | Simulmedia, Inc. | Methods and systems for forecasting and measurement of media viewership using a combination of data sets |
US9374624B2 (en) | 2012-11-28 | 2016-06-21 | Thomson Licensing | Method and apparatus for auto-tuning program guides |
US9386150B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2016-07-05 | Millennia Media, Inc. | Presentation of sponsored content on mobile device based on transaction event |
US9386356B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2016-07-05 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Targeting with television audience data across multiple screens |
US9426509B2 (en) | 1998-08-21 | 2016-08-23 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Client-server electronic program guide |
US9454772B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2016-09-27 | Millennial Media Inc. | Interaction analysis and prioritization of mobile content |
US9471925B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2016-10-18 | Millennial Media Llc | Increasing mobile interactivity |
US9503691B2 (en) | 2008-02-19 | 2016-11-22 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for enhanced advertising and promotional delivery in a network |
US9519772B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2016-12-13 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Relevancy improvement through targeting of information based on data gathered from a networked device associated with a security sandbox of a client device |
US9560423B1 (en) * | 2010-06-07 | 2017-01-31 | Purplecomm Inc. | Method for monitoring and controlling viewing preferences of a user |
US9560425B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2017-01-31 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Remotely control devices over a network without authentication or registration |
US9578355B2 (en) | 2004-06-29 | 2017-02-21 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Method and apparatus for network bandwidth allocation |
US9583141B2 (en) | 2005-07-01 | 2017-02-28 | Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Implementing audio substitution options in media works |
US9584839B2 (en) | 2007-10-15 | 2017-02-28 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for revenue-optimized delivery of content in a network |
US9621939B2 (en) | 2012-04-12 | 2017-04-11 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for enabling media options in a content delivery network |
US9703892B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2017-07-11 | Millennial Media Llc | Predictive text completion for a mobile communication facility |
US9716736B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2017-07-25 | Free Stream Media Corp. | System and method of discovery and launch associated with a networked media device |
US9736524B2 (en) | 2011-01-06 | 2017-08-15 | Veveo, Inc. | Methods of and systems for content search based on environment sampling |
US9749693B2 (en) | 2006-03-24 | 2017-08-29 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Interactive media guidance application with intelligent navigation and display features |
US9832246B2 (en) | 2006-05-24 | 2017-11-28 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Personal content server apparatus and methods |
US9830949B2 (en) | 2013-05-15 | 2017-11-28 | Cj 4Dplex Co., Ltd. | Method and system for providing 4D content production service and content production apparatus therefor |
US9854280B2 (en) | 2012-07-10 | 2017-12-26 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for selective enforcement of secondary content viewing |
US9883233B1 (en) | 2008-10-23 | 2018-01-30 | Tivo Solutions Inc. | Real-time audience measurement system |
US9930387B2 (en) | 2005-02-01 | 2018-03-27 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Method and apparatus for network bandwidth conservation |
US9961388B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2018-05-01 | David Harrison | Exposure of public internet protocol addresses in an advertising exchange server to improve relevancy of advertisements |
US9961383B2 (en) | 2008-02-26 | 2018-05-01 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for business-based network resource allocation |
US9973794B2 (en) | 2014-04-22 | 2018-05-15 | clypd, inc. | Demand target detection |
US9986279B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2018-05-29 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Discovery, access control, and communication with networked services |
US10003837B2 (en) * | 2016-08-24 | 2018-06-19 | Dish Network L.L.C. | Television programming distribution network with integrated data gathering, modeling, forecasting, delivery, and measurement |
US10009652B2 (en) | 2006-02-27 | 2018-06-26 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for selecting digital access technology for programming and data delivery |
US10028025B2 (en) | 2014-09-29 | 2018-07-17 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for enabling presence-based and use-based services |
US10038756B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2018-07-31 | Millenial Media LLC | Managing sponsored content based on device characteristics |
US10051302B2 (en) | 2006-02-27 | 2018-08-14 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for device capabilities discovery and utilization within a content distribution network |
US10051304B2 (en) | 2009-07-15 | 2018-08-14 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for targeted secondary content insertion |
WO2018148749A1 (en) * | 2017-02-13 | 2018-08-16 | Google Llc | Predicting break durations in content streams |
US10085047B2 (en) | 2007-09-26 | 2018-09-25 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for content caching in a video network |
US10129576B2 (en) | 2006-06-13 | 2018-11-13 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for providing virtual content over a network |
US10225592B2 (en) | 2007-03-20 | 2019-03-05 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for content delivery and replacement in a network |
US10257572B2 (en) * | 2017-01-03 | 2019-04-09 | Bliss Point Media, Inc. | Optimization of broadcast event effectiveness |
US10278008B2 (en) | 2012-08-30 | 2019-04-30 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for enabling location-based services within a premises |
US10334324B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2019-06-25 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Relevant advertisement generation based on a user operating a client device communicatively coupled with a networked media device |
US10419541B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2019-09-17 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Remotely control devices over a network without authentication or registration |
US10567823B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2020-02-18 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Relevant advertisement generation based on a user operating a client device communicatively coupled with a networked media device |
US10586023B2 (en) | 2016-04-21 | 2020-03-10 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for secondary content management and fraud prevention |
US10592930B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2020-03-17 | Millenial Media, LLC | Syndication of a behavioral profile using a monetization platform |
US10631068B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2020-04-21 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Content exposure attribution based on renderings of related content across multiple devices |
US10687115B2 (en) | 2016-06-01 | 2020-06-16 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Cloud-based digital content recorder apparatus and methods |
US10708654B1 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2020-07-07 | CSC Holdings, LLC | Optimizing inventory based on predicted viewership |
WO2020149802A1 (en) * | 2019-01-15 | 2020-07-23 | Tasdan Kamuran | System and method for embedding the regional broadcasts of the different locations into the general broadcast stream |
US10785681B1 (en) * | 2019-05-31 | 2020-09-22 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Methods and apparatuses for feature-driven machine-to-machine communications |
US10803482B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2020-10-13 | Verizon Media Inc. | Exclusivity bidding for mobile sponsored content |
US10863238B2 (en) | 2010-04-23 | 2020-12-08 | Time Warner Cable Enterprise LLC | Zone control methods and apparatus |
US10880340B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2020-12-29 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Relevancy improvement through targeting of information based on data gathered from a networked device associated with a security sandbox of a client device |
US10911794B2 (en) | 2016-11-09 | 2021-02-02 | Charter Communications Operating, Llc | Apparatus and methods for selective secondary content insertion in a digital network |
US10911894B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2021-02-02 | Verizon Media Inc. | Use of dynamic content generation parameters based on previous performance of those parameters |
US10939142B2 (en) | 2018-02-27 | 2021-03-02 | Charter Communications Operating, Llc | Apparatus and methods for content storage, distribution and security within a content distribution network |
US10945011B2 (en) | 2010-12-29 | 2021-03-09 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Measuring video viewing |
US10965727B2 (en) | 2009-06-08 | 2021-03-30 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for premises content distribution |
US10977693B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2021-04-13 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Association of content identifier of audio-visual data with additional data through capture infrastructure |
US11012726B2 (en) | 2013-08-29 | 2021-05-18 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Measuring video-content viewing |
US11076203B2 (en) | 2013-03-12 | 2021-07-27 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for providing and uploading content to personalized network storage |
US11082723B2 (en) | 2006-05-24 | 2021-08-03 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Secondary content insertion apparatus and methods |
US11212593B2 (en) | 2016-09-27 | 2021-12-28 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for automated secondary content management in a digital network |
US11265602B2 (en) * | 2018-04-12 | 2022-03-01 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for evaluating a promotional campaign |
US11363331B2 (en) | 2013-01-13 | 2022-06-14 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Measuring video-program-viewing activity |
US20220188941A1 (en) * | 2020-12-16 | 2022-06-16 | Symphony MediaAI | Assessment and performance system for content distribution across multiple channels |
US11368752B2 (en) * | 2017-01-03 | 2022-06-21 | Bliss Point Media, Inc. | Optimization of broadcast event effectiveness |
US11537971B2 (en) | 2010-12-29 | 2022-12-27 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Measuring video-asset viewing |
US11627356B2 (en) | 2012-01-28 | 2023-04-11 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Data translation for video-viewing activity |
USRE50079E1 (en) * | 2010-12-29 | 2024-08-13 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | System and method for analyzing human interaction with electronic devices that access a computer system through a network |
Families Citing this family (621)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8352400B2 (en) | 1991-12-23 | 2013-01-08 | Hoffberg Steven M | Adaptive pattern recognition based controller apparatus and method and human-factored interface therefore |
US9286294B2 (en) | 1992-12-09 | 2016-03-15 | Comcast Ip Holdings I, Llc | Video and digital multimedia aggregator content suggestion engine |
US20020104083A1 (en) * | 1992-12-09 | 2002-08-01 | Hendricks John S. | Internally targeted advertisements using television delivery systems |
US7721307B2 (en) | 1992-12-09 | 2010-05-18 | Comcast Ip Holdings I, Llc | Method and apparatus for targeting of interactive virtual objects |
US7168084B1 (en) * | 1992-12-09 | 2007-01-23 | Sedna Patent Services, Llc | Method and apparatus for targeting virtual objects |
US7207053B1 (en) | 1992-12-09 | 2007-04-17 | Sedna Patent Services, Llc | Method and apparatus for locally targeting virtual objects within a terminal |
EP0822718B1 (en) | 1992-12-09 | 2002-06-19 | Discovery Communications, Inc. | Network controller for cable television delivery systems |
US8073695B1 (en) | 1992-12-09 | 2011-12-06 | Adrea, LLC | Electronic book with voice emulation features |
EP0688488A1 (en) | 1993-03-05 | 1995-12-27 | MANKOVITZ, Roy J. | Apparatus and method using compressed codes for television program record scheduling |
US6239794B1 (en) | 1994-08-31 | 2001-05-29 | E Guide, Inc. | Method and system for simultaneously displaying a television program and information about the program |
US6119099A (en) * | 1997-03-21 | 2000-09-12 | Walker Asset Management Limited Partnership | Method and system for processing supplementary product sales at a point-of-sale terminal |
US9053640B1 (en) | 1993-12-02 | 2015-06-09 | Adrea, LLC | Interactive electronic book |
US8793738B2 (en) | 1994-05-04 | 2014-07-29 | Starsight Telecast Incorporated | Television system with downloadable features |
US6732369B1 (en) | 1995-10-02 | 2004-05-04 | Starsight Telecast, Inc. | Systems and methods for contextually linking television program information |
US8850477B2 (en) | 1995-10-02 | 2014-09-30 | Starsight Telecast, Inc. | Systems and methods for linking television viewers with advertisers and broadcasters |
US6388714B1 (en) * | 1995-10-02 | 2002-05-14 | Starsight Telecast Inc | Interactive computer system for providing television schedule information |
US6323911B1 (en) | 1995-10-02 | 2001-11-27 | Starsight Telecast, Inc. | System and method for using television schedule information |
CA2185053C (en) * | 1996-06-24 | 2002-04-16 | Frank B. Norman | Interactive reverse channel for direct broadcast satellite system |
US20030066085A1 (en) | 1996-12-10 | 2003-04-03 | United Video Properties, Inc., A Corporation Of Delaware | Internet television program guide system |
US8635649B2 (en) | 1996-12-19 | 2014-01-21 | Gemstar Development Corporation | System and method for modifying advertisement responsive to EPG information |
US6687906B1 (en) | 1996-12-19 | 2004-02-03 | Index Systems, Inc. | EPG with advertising inserts |
US7587323B2 (en) | 2001-12-14 | 2009-09-08 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for developing tailored content |
US7617508B2 (en) | 2003-12-12 | 2009-11-10 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods and systems for collaborative capture of television viewer generated clickstreams |
US7020652B2 (en) * | 2001-12-21 | 2006-03-28 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corp. | System and method for customizing content-access lists |
US8640160B2 (en) | 1997-01-06 | 2014-01-28 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and system for providing targeted advertisements |
US8677384B2 (en) | 2003-12-12 | 2014-03-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods and systems for network based capture of television viewer generated clickstreams |
US20060075456A1 (en) * | 1997-01-06 | 2006-04-06 | Gray James Harold | Methods and systems for collaborative capture of television viewer generated clickstreams |
US7802276B2 (en) | 1997-01-06 | 2010-09-21 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Systems, methods and products for assessing subscriber content access |
EP0965192B1 (en) | 1997-01-06 | 2007-02-28 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation | Method and system for tracking network use |
US20060253884A1 (en) * | 1997-01-06 | 2006-11-09 | Gray James H | Methods and systems for network based capture of television viewer generated clickstreams |
US6983478B1 (en) | 2000-02-01 | 2006-01-03 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation | Method and system for tracking network use |
US7272569B1 (en) | 1997-03-21 | 2007-09-18 | Walker Digital, Llc | Method and apparatus for controlling the performance of a supplementary process at a point-of-sale terminal |
US7184990B2 (en) | 1997-03-21 | 2007-02-27 | Walker Digital, Llc | Method and apparatus for selling an aging food product |
US7542919B1 (en) * | 1997-03-21 | 2009-06-02 | Walker Digital, Llc | Method and apparatus for selecting a supplemental product to offer for sale during a transaction |
US8065701B2 (en) * | 1997-04-30 | 2011-11-22 | Sony Corporation | Information broadcasting method, information broadcasting system, and receiving apparatus for transmitting data other than program through digital broadcasting |
US6836296B1 (en) * | 1997-07-18 | 2004-12-28 | Sony Corporation | Control device, control method, electric apparatus, control method of an electric apparatus, electric apparatus system, control method of an electric apparatus system, and transmission medium |
DE69805420T2 (en) | 1997-09-18 | 2003-01-30 | United Video Properties Inc | REMINDER FOR INTERNET TELEVISION GUIDE BY ELECTRONIC MAIL |
US6604240B2 (en) | 1997-10-06 | 2003-08-05 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Interactive television program guide system with operator showcase |
US6209130B1 (en) * | 1997-10-10 | 2001-03-27 | United Video Properties, Inc. | System for collecting television program data |
US7185355B1 (en) | 1998-03-04 | 2007-02-27 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Program guide system with preference profiles |
WO1999045700A1 (en) * | 1998-03-04 | 1999-09-10 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Program guide system with monitoring of advertisement usage and user activities |
US6286005B1 (en) * | 1998-03-11 | 2001-09-04 | Cannon Holdings, L.L.C. | Method and apparatus for analyzing data and advertising optimization |
US6564379B1 (en) | 1998-04-30 | 2003-05-13 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Program guide system with flip and browse advertisements |
US20040194138A1 (en) * | 1998-04-30 | 2004-09-30 | Prevue Networks, Inc. | Program guide system with targeted advertisements based on function buttons and non-programming options |
US6742183B1 (en) | 1998-05-15 | 2004-05-25 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for advertising television networks, channels, and programs |
US20020095676A1 (en) | 1998-05-15 | 2002-07-18 | Robert A. Knee | Interactive television program guide system for determining user values for demographic categories |
US6339842B1 (en) | 1998-06-10 | 2002-01-15 | Dennis Sunga Fernandez | Digital television with subscriber conference overlay |
US7355621B1 (en) * | 1998-06-10 | 2008-04-08 | Fernandez Dennis S | Digital television with subscriber conference overlay |
US6536041B1 (en) * | 1998-06-16 | 2003-03-18 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Program guide system with real-time data sources |
TW416224B (en) * | 1998-07-07 | 2000-12-21 | United Video Properties Inc | Interactive television program guide system with local advertisements |
US6442755B1 (en) | 1998-07-07 | 2002-08-27 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Electronic program guide using markup language |
CN1867068A (en) | 1998-07-14 | 2006-11-22 | 联合视频制品公司 | Client-server based interactive television program guide system with remote server recording |
CN101383946A (en) | 1998-07-17 | 2009-03-11 | 联合视频制品公司 | System for demanding programme and related method thereof |
AR020608A1 (en) | 1998-07-17 | 2002-05-22 | United Video Properties Inc | A METHOD AND A PROVISION TO SUPPLY A USER REMOTE ACCESS TO AN INTERACTIVE PROGRAMMING GUIDE BY A REMOTE ACCESS LINK |
US6505348B1 (en) | 1998-07-29 | 2003-01-07 | Starsight Telecast, Inc. | Multiple interactive electronic program guide system and methods |
US6588013B1 (en) * | 1998-08-18 | 2003-07-01 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Promotional material distribution system with automatic updating of promotional material selection algorithms |
TW463503B (en) | 1998-08-26 | 2001-11-11 | United Video Properties Inc | Television chat system |
TW447221B (en) | 1998-08-26 | 2001-07-21 | United Video Properties Inc | Television message system |
PT1003313E (en) * | 1998-09-11 | 2005-04-29 | Two Way Media Ltd | SUPPLY OF INTERACTIVE APPLICATIONS |
FR2784474A1 (en) * | 1998-10-08 | 2000-04-14 | Thomson Multimedia Sa | Data processing system has applications manager which is able to carry out range of instructions which influence the operation and execution systems during or between applications |
US7694319B1 (en) | 1998-11-02 | 2010-04-06 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Interactive program guide with continuous data stream and client-server data supplementation |
US20100257553A1 (en) * | 1998-11-18 | 2010-10-07 | Gemstar Development Corporation | Systems and methods for advertising traffic control and billing |
US7051360B1 (en) | 1998-11-30 | 2006-05-23 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Interactive television program guide with selectable languages |
US8151295B1 (en) | 2000-08-31 | 2012-04-03 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Queue based advertisement scheduling and sales |
US8290351B2 (en) | 2001-04-03 | 2012-10-16 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Alternative advertising in prerecorded media |
US7150030B1 (en) | 1998-12-03 | 2006-12-12 | Prime Research Alliance, Inc. | Subscriber characterization system |
US8180675B2 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2012-05-15 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | System and method for automatically managing avail inventory data and avail pricing |
US7039932B2 (en) | 2000-08-31 | 2006-05-02 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Queue-based head-end advertisement scheduling method and apparatus |
US6684194B1 (en) * | 1998-12-03 | 2004-01-27 | Expanse Network, Inc. | Subscriber identification system |
US7328448B2 (en) | 2000-08-31 | 2008-02-05 | Prime Research Alliance E, Inc. | Advertisement distribution system for distributing targeted advertisements in television systems |
US20020083445A1 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2002-06-27 | Flickinger Gregory C. | Delivering targeted advertisements to the set-top-box |
US6704930B1 (en) | 1999-04-20 | 2004-03-09 | Expanse Networks, Inc. | Advertisement insertion techniques for digital video streams |
US20020123928A1 (en) * | 2001-01-11 | 2002-09-05 | Eldering Charles A. | Targeting ads to subscribers based on privacy-protected subscriber profiles |
US20020144263A1 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2002-10-03 | Eldering Charles A. | Grouping of advertisements on an advertising channel in a targeted advertisement system |
US7949565B1 (en) * | 1998-12-03 | 2011-05-24 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Privacy-protected advertising system |
US6865746B1 (en) | 1998-12-03 | 2005-03-08 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Electronic program guide with related-program search feature |
AU761730B2 (en) * | 1998-12-03 | 2003-06-05 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Subscriber identification system |
US7240355B1 (en) * | 1998-12-03 | 2007-07-03 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Subscriber characterization system with filters |
WO2000033160A2 (en) | 1998-12-03 | 2000-06-08 | Expanse Networks, Inc. | Subscriber characterization and advertisement monitoring system |
US7228555B2 (en) | 2000-08-31 | 2007-06-05 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | System and method for delivering targeted advertisements using multiple presentation streams |
US7185353B2 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2007-02-27 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | System and method for delivering statistically scheduled advertisements |
US20010049620A1 (en) * | 2000-02-29 | 2001-12-06 | Blasko John P. | Privacy-protected targeting system |
US7260823B2 (en) | 2001-01-11 | 2007-08-21 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Profiling and identification of television viewers |
US6820277B1 (en) * | 1999-04-20 | 2004-11-16 | Expanse Networks, Inc. | Advertising management system for digital video streams |
US7068724B1 (en) * | 1999-10-20 | 2006-06-27 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Method and apparatus for inserting digital media advertisements into statistical multiplexed streams |
US20020083439A1 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2002-06-27 | Eldering Charles A. | System for rescheduling and inserting advertisements |
US6448979B1 (en) * | 1999-01-25 | 2002-09-10 | Airclic, Inc. | Printed medium activated interactive communication of multimedia information, including advertising |
US6993580B2 (en) | 1999-01-25 | 2006-01-31 | Airclic Inc. | Method and system for sharing end user information on network |
US20030069966A1 (en) * | 2001-10-10 | 2003-04-10 | Ritz Peter B. | Method and system for directing users to information specific to network applications |
US7904187B2 (en) | 1999-02-01 | 2011-03-08 | Hoffberg Steven M | Internet appliance system and method |
US7992172B1 (en) * | 1999-04-15 | 2011-08-02 | Cox Communications, Inc. | Method and systems for multicast using multiple transport streams |
EP1172000B1 (en) * | 1999-04-20 | 2008-08-13 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Advertising management system for digital video streams |
JP2001169268A (en) * | 1999-12-14 | 2001-06-22 | Sony Corp | Information service system, transmission server, information terminal, authoring device and information service method |
US6314457B1 (en) * | 1999-04-21 | 2001-11-06 | Airclic, Inc. | Method for managing printed medium activated revenue sharing domain name system schemas |
WO2000065509A2 (en) * | 1999-04-22 | 2000-11-02 | Qode.Com, Inc. | System and method for providing electronic information upon receipt of a scanned bar code |
US6424998B2 (en) * | 1999-04-28 | 2002-07-23 | World Theatre, Inc. | System permitting the display of video or still image content on selected displays of an electronic display network according to customer dictates |
EP1177674A4 (en) | 1999-05-10 | 2004-12-08 | Samsung Electronics Co Ltd | Advertisement subgroups for digital streams |
JP4378576B2 (en) * | 1999-05-18 | 2009-12-09 | ソニー株式会社 | Reception device and method, supply device and method, bidirectional communication system and method, and recording medium |
US7992163B1 (en) | 1999-06-11 | 2011-08-02 | Jerding Dean F | Video-on-demand navigational system |
US7010801B1 (en) | 1999-06-11 | 2006-03-07 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Video on demand system with parameter-controlled bandwidth deallocation |
US6817028B1 (en) | 1999-06-11 | 2004-11-09 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Reduced screen control system for interactive program guide |
WO2001001678A1 (en) | 1999-06-28 | 2001-01-04 | Index Systems, Inc. | System and method for utilizing epg database for modifying advertisements |
EP1197075A1 (en) * | 1999-06-28 | 2002-04-17 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Interactive television program guide system and method with niche hubs |
AU5775900A (en) | 1999-06-29 | 2001-01-31 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Method and system for a video-on-demand-related interactive display within an interactive television application |
US7158959B1 (en) * | 1999-07-03 | 2007-01-02 | Microsoft Corporation | Automated web-based targeted advertising with quotas |
US7472102B1 (en) | 1999-10-29 | 2008-12-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Cluster-based and rule-based approach for automated web-based targeted advertising with quotas |
US6665653B1 (en) * | 1999-07-03 | 2003-12-16 | Microsoft Corporation | Noise reduction for a cluster-based approach for targeted item delivery with inventory management |
JP4280949B2 (en) * | 1999-07-30 | 2009-06-17 | ソニー株式会社 | Information receiving apparatus, remote operation system, program guide information providing method for information receiving apparatus, and remote operation method for remote operation system |
US7996878B1 (en) * | 1999-08-31 | 2011-08-09 | At&T Intellectual Property Ii, L.P. | System and method for generating coded video sequences from still media |
US7137136B1 (en) * | 1999-09-10 | 2006-11-14 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Signal processing apparatus and method, signal processing system, and printer |
JP2001092744A (en) * | 1999-09-17 | 2001-04-06 | Sony Corp | Device for processing broadcast program information |
US9451310B2 (en) | 1999-09-21 | 2016-09-20 | Quantum Stream Inc. | Content distribution system and method |
US6977691B1 (en) * | 1999-09-21 | 2005-12-20 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | System for nonlinear viewing of television show segments |
US7949722B1 (en) | 1999-09-29 | 2011-05-24 | Actv Inc. | Enhanced video programming system and method utilizing user-profile information |
US6973662B1 (en) * | 1999-10-13 | 2005-12-06 | Starz Entertainment Group Llc | Method for providing programming distribution |
US6983480B1 (en) * | 1999-10-13 | 2006-01-03 | Starz Entertainment Group Llc | Method for authorizing limited programming distribution |
US9066113B1 (en) | 1999-10-19 | 2015-06-23 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method for ensuring reliable playout in a DMD system |
US6647411B2 (en) * | 1999-10-29 | 2003-11-11 | Intel Corporation | Secure cached subscription service |
JP3619427B2 (en) * | 1999-11-05 | 2005-02-09 | 株式会社ビューポイントコミュニケーションズ | Information display device |
WO2001035557A2 (en) * | 1999-11-09 | 2001-05-17 | Highcast Network | System and method for creating virtual media channel |
US6993245B1 (en) | 1999-11-18 | 2006-01-31 | Vulcan Patents Llc | Iterative, maximally probable, batch-mode commercial detection for audiovisual content |
CN1173568C (en) | 1999-11-23 | 2004-10-27 | 联合视频制品公司 | Interactive television targeted message system |
EP1564995B1 (en) | 1999-11-23 | 2017-07-19 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Interactive television targeted message system |
JP4881500B2 (en) * | 1999-12-09 | 2012-02-22 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus and information processing method, content providing apparatus and content providing method, reproducing apparatus and reproducing method, and recording medium |
US20020124255A1 (en) | 1999-12-10 | 2002-09-05 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for coordinating interactive and passive advertisement and merchandising opportunities |
US7340457B1 (en) * | 1999-12-16 | 2008-03-04 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | Apparatus and method to facilitate the customization of television content with supplemental data |
KR100396651B1 (en) * | 1999-12-20 | 2003-09-02 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Local broadcasting Service method using Digital TV translator |
WO2001047156A2 (en) * | 1999-12-21 | 2001-06-28 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation | Method and system for providing targeted advertisements |
US6587851B1 (en) | 1999-12-22 | 2003-07-01 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation | Notification system and method |
US7610597B1 (en) | 2000-01-08 | 2009-10-27 | Lightningcast, Inc. | Process for providing targeted user content blended with a media stream |
US7146329B2 (en) * | 2000-01-13 | 2006-12-05 | Erinmedia, Llc | Privacy compliant multiple dataset correlation and content delivery system and methods |
EP1257962A4 (en) * | 2000-01-13 | 2003-05-07 | Erinmedia Inc | Privacy compliant multiple dataset correlation system |
AU2544501A (en) * | 2000-01-14 | 2001-07-24 | Nds Limited | Advertisements in an end-user controlled playback environment |
US8813123B2 (en) | 2000-01-19 | 2014-08-19 | Interad Technologies, Llc | Content with customized advertisement |
US6434747B1 (en) * | 2000-01-19 | 2002-08-13 | Individual Network, Inc. | Method and system for providing a customized media list |
JP4517480B2 (en) * | 2000-01-31 | 2010-08-04 | ソニー株式会社 | Information providing system, information terminal device, information server device, and information providing method |
DK1252767T3 (en) | 2000-02-01 | 2010-09-27 | United Video Properties Inc | Forced advertising practices and systems |
EP1130920A3 (en) * | 2000-02-03 | 2002-10-30 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Method, apparatus and system for motion picture signal distribution |
US7006980B1 (en) | 2000-02-04 | 2006-02-28 | Callvision, Inc. | Method and system for selecting optimal commodities based upon business profile and preferences |
US7430531B1 (en) * | 2000-02-04 | 2008-09-30 | Verisign, Inc. | System and method for assisting customers in choosing a bundled set of commodities using customer preferences |
KR100479173B1 (en) * | 2000-02-08 | 2005-03-25 | 최추환 | The advertisement technical method and system using file structure or file to hold in check delete and edit in internet, computer and computer application device |
US6519773B1 (en) | 2000-02-08 | 2003-02-11 | Sherjil Ahmed | Method and apparatus for a digitized CATV network for bundled services |
US20050283796A1 (en) * | 2000-02-18 | 2005-12-22 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Method and system for addressable and program independent advertising during recorded programs |
US6912571B1 (en) * | 2000-02-22 | 2005-06-28 | Frank David Serena | Method of replacing content |
US6968565B1 (en) | 2000-02-25 | 2005-11-22 | Vulcan Patents Llc | Detection of content display observers with prevention of unauthorized access to identification signal |
US7330824B1 (en) | 2000-02-25 | 2008-02-12 | Navic Systems, Inc. | Method and system for content profiling and activation |
US7392281B1 (en) * | 2000-02-25 | 2008-06-24 | Navic Systems, Inc. | System and method for providing guaranteed delivery of messages to embedded devices over a data network |
US6845396B1 (en) | 2000-02-25 | 2005-01-18 | Navic Systems, Inc. | Method and system for content deployment and activation |
AU2001249994A1 (en) | 2000-02-25 | 2001-09-03 | Interval Research Corporation | Method and system for selecting advertisements |
JP3348067B2 (en) | 2000-02-29 | 2002-11-20 | 株式会社電通 | Method and apparatus for controlling advertisement playback |
US7209943B1 (en) * | 2000-03-13 | 2007-04-24 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for efficient file transfer to/from a local traffic system with a DMD system |
AU2001249313A1 (en) | 2000-03-21 | 2001-10-03 | Walker Digital, Llc | Method and apparatus for selecting a supplemental product to offer for sale during a transaction |
US7284064B1 (en) | 2000-03-21 | 2007-10-16 | Intel Corporation | Method and apparatus to determine broadcast content and scheduling in a broadcast system |
US6728715B1 (en) * | 2000-03-30 | 2004-04-27 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for matching consumers to events employing content-based multicast routing using approximate groups |
WO2001076248A2 (en) | 2000-03-31 | 2001-10-11 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for improved audience measuring |
CA2403662A1 (en) | 2000-03-31 | 2001-10-11 | Intellocity Usa, Inc. | System and method for local meta data insertion |
AU8928901A (en) | 2000-03-31 | 2001-10-15 | United Video Properties Inc | System and method for meta-data-linked advertisements |
US7200857B1 (en) | 2000-06-09 | 2007-04-03 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Synchronized video-on-demand supplemental commentary |
US7975277B1 (en) | 2000-04-03 | 2011-07-05 | Jerding Dean F | System for providing alternative services |
US8516525B1 (en) | 2000-06-09 | 2013-08-20 | Dean F. Jerding | Integrated searching system for interactive media guide |
JP3498789B2 (en) * | 2000-04-06 | 2004-02-16 | 日本電気株式会社 | Broadcast service system and delay broadcast method in broadcast service using the same |
US7904922B1 (en) | 2000-04-07 | 2011-03-08 | Visible World, Inc. | Template creation and editing for a message campaign |
US8006261B1 (en) * | 2000-04-07 | 2011-08-23 | Visible World, Inc. | System and method for personalized message creation and delivery |
US7870577B2 (en) | 2000-04-07 | 2011-01-11 | Visible World, Inc. | Systems and methods for semantic editorial control and video/audio editing |
US8572646B2 (en) | 2000-04-07 | 2013-10-29 | Visible World Inc. | System and method for simultaneous broadcast for personalized messages |
US7895620B2 (en) | 2000-04-07 | 2011-02-22 | Visible World, Inc. | Systems and methods for managing and distributing media content |
US7900227B2 (en) | 2000-04-07 | 2011-03-01 | Visible World, Inc. | Systems and methods for managing and distributing media content |
US7870579B2 (en) | 2000-04-07 | 2011-01-11 | Visible Worl, Inc. | Systems and methods for managing and distributing media content |
US7917924B2 (en) | 2000-04-07 | 2011-03-29 | Visible World, Inc. | Systems and methods for semantic editorial control and video/audio editing |
US7861261B2 (en) | 2000-04-07 | 2010-12-28 | Visible World, Inc. | Systems and methods for managing and distributing media content |
US7870578B2 (en) | 2000-04-07 | 2011-01-11 | Visible World, Inc. | Systems and methods for managing and distributing media content |
US7890971B2 (en) | 2000-04-07 | 2011-02-15 | Visible World, Inc. | Systems and methods for managing and distributing media content |
CN1231063C (en) * | 2000-04-13 | 2005-12-07 | Qvc有限公司 | System and method for digital broadcast audio content targeting |
US9602862B2 (en) | 2000-04-16 | 2017-03-21 | The Directv Group, Inc. | Accessing programs using networked digital video recording devices |
US7917008B1 (en) | 2001-08-19 | 2011-03-29 | The Directv Group, Inc. | Interface for resolving recording conflicts with network devices |
US8875198B1 (en) | 2001-08-19 | 2014-10-28 | The Directv Group, Inc. | Network video unit |
US8214422B1 (en) | 2001-08-19 | 2012-07-03 | The Directv Group, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for sending content between client devices |
US20020054087A1 (en) * | 2000-04-17 | 2002-05-09 | Roland Noll | Channel dancer |
US20040148625A1 (en) * | 2000-04-20 | 2004-07-29 | Eldering Charles A | Advertisement management system for digital video streams |
US8819723B1 (en) * | 2000-04-27 | 2014-08-26 | The Directv Group, Inc. | System and method for brokering auxiliary data broadcasting services |
US7877766B1 (en) | 2000-05-04 | 2011-01-25 | Enreach Technology, Inc. | Method and system of providing a non-skippable sub-advertisement stream |
US7934232B1 (en) | 2000-05-04 | 2011-04-26 | Jerding Dean F | Navigation paradigm for access to television services |
JP4953496B2 (en) * | 2000-05-15 | 2012-06-13 | ソニー株式会社 | Content search / presentation system and method, and software storage medium |
AU2000246135B2 (en) | 2000-05-15 | 2005-12-22 | Dentsu, Inc. | Method and apparatus for controlling transmission of advertisement |
GB0012211D0 (en) * | 2000-05-19 | 2000-07-12 | Gemstar Dev Limited | A targeted advertising system |
US8069259B2 (en) | 2000-06-09 | 2011-11-29 | Rodriguez Arturo A | Managing removal of media titles from a list |
CA2349914C (en) * | 2000-06-09 | 2013-07-30 | Invidi Technologies Corp. | Advertising delivery method |
US7046956B1 (en) * | 2000-06-09 | 2006-05-16 | 67 Khz, Inc. | Messaging and promotion for digital audio media players |
US6869028B2 (en) * | 2000-06-14 | 2005-03-22 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Spraying device |
US7743330B1 (en) | 2000-06-19 | 2010-06-22 | Comcast Ip Holdings I, Llc | Method and apparatus for placing virtual objects |
US20020013851A1 (en) * | 2000-06-20 | 2002-01-31 | Crandall Evan Stephen | Simultaneous recording of multiple information streams |
WO2001099424A2 (en) * | 2000-06-20 | 2001-12-27 | Fraunhofer-Gesellschaft zur Förderung der angewandten Forschung e. V. | Addressing of subscribers in a system for providing services |
DE10108919A1 (en) * | 2000-06-20 | 2002-03-14 | Fraunhofer Ges Forschung | Coding of parameter values |
US8090791B1 (en) | 2000-06-20 | 2012-01-03 | At&T Intellectual Property Ii, L.P. | Active requesting of information for pseudo-live performance |
US8037152B2 (en) * | 2000-06-20 | 2011-10-11 | At&T Intellectual Property Ii, L.P. | Active requesting of information for psuedo-live performance |
US7774715B1 (en) * | 2000-06-23 | 2010-08-10 | Ecomsystems, Inc. | System and method for computer-created advertisements |
US20030163832A1 (en) * | 2000-06-26 | 2003-08-28 | Yossi Tsuria | Time shifted interactive television |
FR2810834A1 (en) * | 2000-06-27 | 2001-12-28 | Thomson Multimedia Sa | Audio visual receiver can insert advertising in program matches user interests |
US7962370B2 (en) | 2000-06-29 | 2011-06-14 | Rodriguez Arturo A | Methods in a media service system for transaction processing |
US7996310B1 (en) | 2000-07-19 | 2011-08-09 | Globys, Inc. | Electronic financial management and analysis system and related methods |
US7313802B1 (en) * | 2000-07-25 | 2007-12-25 | Digeo, Inc. | Method and system to provide deals and promotions via an interactive video casting system |
US20020013947A1 (en) * | 2000-07-26 | 2002-01-31 | Russell Stephen Grant | Provision of broadcast network services |
US7937725B1 (en) * | 2000-07-27 | 2011-05-03 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Three-way media recommendation method and system |
CA2417658A1 (en) * | 2000-07-28 | 2002-02-07 | Discovery Communications, Inc. | Method and apparatus for locally targeting virtual objects within a terminal |
US7509267B1 (en) | 2000-08-29 | 2009-03-24 | Paul M. Yarmolich | Method for combining data signals and video signals for transmission to video display units |
WO2002021839A2 (en) * | 2000-09-06 | 2002-03-14 | Cachestream Corporation | Multiple advertising |
WO2002023435A1 (en) * | 2000-09-12 | 2002-03-21 | Syndicast Corporation | System for transmitting syndicated programs over the internet |
US7490344B2 (en) | 2000-09-29 | 2009-02-10 | Visible World, Inc. | System and method for seamless switching |
JP4534333B2 (en) * | 2000-10-10 | 2010-09-01 | ソニー株式会社 | How to collect server operating costs |
EP2262262A1 (en) | 2000-10-11 | 2010-12-15 | United Video Properties, Inc. | System and methods for providing storage of data on servers in an on-demand media delivery system |
US8078493B2 (en) | 2000-10-15 | 2011-12-13 | The Directv Group, Inc. | Method and system for pause ads |
US20020174425A1 (en) * | 2000-10-26 | 2002-11-21 | Markel Steven O. | Collection of affinity data from television, video, or similar transmissions |
US7340759B1 (en) | 2000-11-10 | 2008-03-04 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Systems and methods for adaptive pricing in a digital broadband delivery system |
US20020100046A1 (en) * | 2000-11-16 | 2002-07-25 | Dudkiewicz Gil Gavriel | System and method for determining the desirability of video programming events |
AU2002239297A1 (en) * | 2000-11-16 | 2002-06-03 | Mydtv, Inc. | System and methods for determining the desirability of video programming events |
JP2002157516A (en) * | 2000-11-17 | 2002-05-31 | Hitachi Ltd | Method and device for providing advertisement information |
CA2326368A1 (en) * | 2000-11-20 | 2002-05-20 | Adexact Corporation | Method and system for targeted content delivery, presentation, management, and reporting |
AU2002230501A1 (en) * | 2000-11-27 | 2002-06-03 | Intellocity Usa, Inc. | System and method for providing an omnimedia package |
US6871780B2 (en) | 2000-11-27 | 2005-03-29 | Airclic, Inc. | Scalable distributed database system and method for linking codes to internet information |
US8046799B2 (en) * | 2000-11-27 | 2011-10-25 | The Directv Group, Inc. | Daypart based navigation paradigm |
US7047273B2 (en) | 2000-11-28 | 2006-05-16 | Navic Systems, Inc. | Load balancing in set top cable box environment |
US7328231B2 (en) | 2000-11-28 | 2008-02-05 | Navic Systems | Generating schedules for synchronizing bulk data transfers to end node devices in a multimedia network |
US7653743B2 (en) | 2000-11-28 | 2010-01-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Protocol for throttling high volume messages |
US20020112238A1 (en) * | 2000-11-28 | 2002-08-15 | Navic Systems, Incorporated | Promotions on viewing devices |
US7370073B2 (en) | 2000-11-28 | 2008-05-06 | Navic Systems, Inc. | Using viewership profiles for targeted promotion deployment |
US7237250B2 (en) | 2000-11-28 | 2007-06-26 | Navic Systems, Inc. | Promotion server using video on demand channel |
US20020078444A1 (en) * | 2000-12-15 | 2002-06-20 | William Krewin | System and method for the scaleable delivery of targeted commercials |
EP1346570A4 (en) | 2000-12-27 | 2007-12-05 | Digital Networks North America | Advertisements in a television recordation system |
US7331057B2 (en) * | 2000-12-28 | 2008-02-12 | Prime Research Alliance E, Inc. | Grouping advertisement subavails |
KR100672296B1 (en) * | 2000-12-29 | 2007-01-23 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for calculating program rating using both direction TV |
US20020124249A1 (en) * | 2001-01-02 | 2002-09-05 | Shintani Peter Rae | Targeted advertising during playback of stored content |
US20020087402A1 (en) * | 2001-01-02 | 2002-07-04 | Zustak Fred J. | User selective advertising |
JP2002320246A (en) * | 2001-01-15 | 2002-10-31 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Viewing and listening history utilization system, and apparatus relating to the same |
JP4186620B2 (en) | 2001-01-23 | 2008-11-26 | ソニー株式会社 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD, ELECTRONIC DEVICE, ITS CONTROL METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM |
US7174305B2 (en) * | 2001-01-23 | 2007-02-06 | Opentv, Inc. | Method and system for scheduling online targeted content delivery |
US7260785B2 (en) | 2001-01-29 | 2007-08-21 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for object retransmission without a continuous network connection in a digital media distribution system |
EP1356680B1 (en) | 2001-02-02 | 2013-05-22 | Opentv, Inc. | A method and apparatus for reformatting of content for display on interactive television |
US7305697B2 (en) | 2001-02-02 | 2007-12-04 | Opentv, Inc. | Service gateway for interactive television |
US6622007B2 (en) * | 2001-02-05 | 2003-09-16 | Command Audio Corporation | Datacast bandwidth in wireless broadcast system |
US20040204985A1 (en) * | 2001-02-09 | 2004-10-14 | Gibson Donald P. | Digital image service and revenue generation |
US7689598B2 (en) * | 2001-02-15 | 2010-03-30 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for file system synchronization between a central site and a plurality of remote sites |
US20020120929A1 (en) * | 2001-02-28 | 2002-08-29 | Schwalb Eddie M. | Method and system for mass customization of digital television broadcasts |
US20020124253A1 (en) * | 2001-03-02 | 2002-09-05 | Eyer Mark Kenneth | Personal information database with privacy for targeted advertising |
US7039598B2 (en) * | 2001-03-02 | 2006-05-02 | Verizon Laboratories Inc. | Method of estimating expected revenues from business directory books |
US20020124250A1 (en) * | 2001-03-02 | 2002-09-05 | Proehl Andrew M. | Hybrid advertising broadcast method |
US7237017B1 (en) | 2001-03-13 | 2007-06-26 | Panamsat Corporation | Micronode in a satellite based content delivery system |
US7154898B1 (en) | 2001-03-13 | 2006-12-26 | Intelsat, Ltd. | Scalable edge node |
US7174373B1 (en) | 2001-03-13 | 2007-02-06 | Panamsat Corporation | Self-contained demonstration node in a satellite based content delivery system |
US7130908B1 (en) | 2001-03-13 | 2006-10-31 | Intelsat Ltd. | Forward cache management between edge nodes in a satellite based content delivery system |
GB2373678A (en) * | 2001-03-21 | 2002-09-25 | Ncr Int Inc | Advertising terminal |
US20020184047A1 (en) * | 2001-04-03 | 2002-12-05 | Plotnick Michael A. | Universal ad queue |
US20020178447A1 (en) * | 2001-04-03 | 2002-11-28 | Plotnick Michael A. | Behavioral targeted advertising |
US20020147985A1 (en) * | 2001-04-05 | 2002-10-10 | Koji Miyajima | Video distribution system and video distribution method |
US20020165770A1 (en) * | 2001-05-04 | 2002-11-07 | Individual Network, Inc. | Method and system for providing content with an option |
JP2002334092A (en) * | 2001-05-11 | 2002-11-22 | Hitachi Ltd | Method for relating information, information reading device, information register information retrieving device, charging method, and program |
US20030005465A1 (en) * | 2001-06-15 | 2003-01-02 | Connelly Jay H. | Method and apparatus to send feedback from clients to a server in a content distribution broadcast system |
US7500104B2 (en) * | 2001-06-15 | 2009-03-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Networked device branding for secure interaction in trust webs on open networks |
US20060117350A1 (en) * | 2001-06-20 | 2006-06-01 | Stallworth F D | System and method for delivering geographically-related media content |
US7328455B2 (en) | 2001-06-28 | 2008-02-05 | Intel Corporation | Apparatus and method for enabling secure content decryption within a set-top box |
US7076492B2 (en) * | 2001-06-29 | 2006-07-11 | International Business Machines Corporation | General business report generation |
US8006262B2 (en) | 2001-06-29 | 2011-08-23 | Rodriguez Arturo A | Graphic user interfaces for purchasable and recordable media (PRM) downloads |
US7512964B2 (en) | 2001-06-29 | 2009-03-31 | Cisco Technology | System and method for archiving multiple downloaded recordable media content |
US7526788B2 (en) | 2001-06-29 | 2009-04-28 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Graphic user interface alternate download options for unavailable PRM content |
US7496945B2 (en) | 2001-06-29 | 2009-02-24 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Interactive program guide for bidirectional services |
US7088352B2 (en) * | 2002-06-19 | 2006-08-08 | Novus Partners Llc | Dynamic device and method for dispensing machines |
EP1449365A2 (en) | 2001-07-09 | 2004-08-25 | Visible World, Inc. | System and method for seamless switching of compressed audio streams |
US7908628B2 (en) | 2001-08-03 | 2011-03-15 | Comcast Ip Holdings I, Llc | Video and digital multimedia aggregator content coding and formatting |
US7793326B2 (en) | 2001-08-03 | 2010-09-07 | Comcast Ip Holdings I, Llc | Video and digital multimedia aggregator |
US20030025720A1 (en) * | 2001-08-03 | 2003-02-06 | Clement Lau | System and method for common interest analysis among multiple users |
JP2003069977A (en) * | 2001-08-28 | 2003-03-07 | Sony Corp | Data transmission method by network distribution, reception method of network distribution, data transmission system by network distribution and reception system for network distribution |
US7082200B2 (en) * | 2001-09-06 | 2006-07-25 | Microsoft Corporation | Establishing secure peer networking in trust webs on open networks using shared secret device key |
US8943540B2 (en) | 2001-09-28 | 2015-01-27 | Intel Corporation | Method and apparatus to provide a personalized channel |
US20030070179A1 (en) * | 2001-10-04 | 2003-04-10 | Ritz Peter B. | System and method for connecting end user with application based on broadcast code |
WO2003034736A1 (en) * | 2001-10-15 | 2003-04-24 | Venice System.Co., Ltd | System using multi-channel broadcasting control function |
US8079045B2 (en) | 2001-10-17 | 2011-12-13 | Keen Personal Media, Inc. | Personal video recorder and method for inserting a stored advertisement into a displayed broadcast stream |
JP4145623B2 (en) * | 2001-10-23 | 2008-09-03 | 松下電器産業株式会社 | Television receiver and method of counting access from receiver |
US20030110078A1 (en) * | 2001-10-29 | 2003-06-12 | Sony Corporation | System and method for broadcast advertising |
US7426393B2 (en) * | 2001-11-19 | 2008-09-16 | Nokia Corporation | Method and system of identifying network services |
US7739707B2 (en) * | 2001-11-20 | 2010-06-15 | Starz Entertainment, Llc | Parental controls using view limits |
US7464392B2 (en) * | 2001-11-20 | 2008-12-09 | Starz Encore Group Llc | Viewing limit controls |
US9967633B1 (en) | 2001-12-14 | 2018-05-08 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for utilizing television viewing patterns |
US20110178877A1 (en) * | 2001-12-14 | 2011-07-21 | Swix Scott R | Advertising and content management systems and methods |
US7212979B1 (en) | 2001-12-14 | 2007-05-01 | Bellsouth Intellectuall Property Corporation | System and method for identifying desirable subscribers |
US7444658B1 (en) * | 2001-12-14 | 2008-10-28 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and system to perform content targeting |
US7086075B2 (en) * | 2001-12-21 | 2006-08-01 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation | Method and system for managing timed responses to A/V events in television programming |
US6978470B2 (en) * | 2001-12-26 | 2005-12-20 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation | System and method for inserting advertising content in broadcast programming |
US8086491B1 (en) | 2001-12-31 | 2011-12-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L. P. | Method and system for targeted content distribution using tagged data streams |
US20030135857A1 (en) * | 2002-01-11 | 2003-07-17 | Ramesh Pendakur | Content discovery in a digital broadcast data service |
US8782691B1 (en) * | 2002-01-15 | 2014-07-15 | The Directv Group, Inc. | Time shifted targeted advertisements based upon user profiles |
US7334251B2 (en) * | 2002-02-11 | 2008-02-19 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Management of television advertising |
AU2003215292A1 (en) * | 2002-02-15 | 2004-03-11 | Visible World, Inc. | System and method for seamless switching through buffering |
US7228207B2 (en) * | 2002-02-28 | 2007-06-05 | Sabre Inc. | Methods and systems for routing mobile vehicles |
US6782294B2 (en) * | 2002-03-22 | 2004-08-24 | Arecont Intellectual Property Holdings, Llc | Internet based distributed control system |
US8843990B1 (en) | 2002-04-25 | 2014-09-23 | Visible World, Inc. | System and method for optimized channel switching in digital television broadcasting |
US20030204844A1 (en) * | 2002-04-26 | 2003-10-30 | Brant Steven B. | Video messaging system |
US7251413B2 (en) | 2002-04-26 | 2007-07-31 | Digital Networks North America, Inc. | System and method for improved blackfield detection |
US8155498B2 (en) | 2002-04-26 | 2012-04-10 | The Directv Group, Inc. | System and method for indexing commercials in a video presentation |
US20030202124A1 (en) * | 2002-04-26 | 2003-10-30 | Alden Ray M. | Ingrained field video advertising process |
US20030212994A1 (en) * | 2002-05-09 | 2003-11-13 | Radiant Communications Corporation | Remote monitoring system |
WO2003102728A2 (en) * | 2002-05-31 | 2003-12-11 | Predictive Media Corporation | Method and system for the storage, viewing management, and delivery of targeted advertising |
FR2840493A1 (en) * | 2002-05-31 | 2003-12-05 | I F I Istrade Finance And Inve | DIGITAL UPGRADE MODULE FOR ANALOG TELEVISION SET |
KR20030094771A (en) * | 2002-06-07 | 2003-12-18 | 주식회사 무선정보기술 | Advertising method using program code and private video recorder |
US20050086114A1 (en) * | 2002-06-07 | 2005-04-21 | Fujitsu Limited | Computer product and apparatus for supporting activities of sales promotion and advertisement |
JP2004030327A (en) * | 2002-06-26 | 2004-01-29 | Sony Corp | Device and method for providing contents-related information, electronic bulletin board system and computer program |
AUPS328502A0 (en) * | 2002-07-01 | 2002-07-18 | Right Hemisphere Pty Limited | Interactive television voice response system |
US7627872B2 (en) * | 2002-07-26 | 2009-12-01 | Arbitron Inc. | Media data usage measurement and reporting systems and methods |
US20040044569A1 (en) * | 2002-08-30 | 2004-03-04 | Roberts William Anthony | Systems and method for providing targeted message in a media player |
US20040049785A1 (en) * | 2002-09-06 | 2004-03-11 | General Instrument Corporation | Method and apparatus for delivering personalized alerts to set top box users without user intervention |
JP4340837B2 (en) * | 2002-09-10 | 2009-10-07 | ソニー株式会社 | Image forming apparatus and image forming method |
EP1566058A4 (en) * | 2002-10-18 | 2007-05-02 | Intellocity Usa Inc | Ichoose video advertising |
AU2008201189B2 (en) * | 2002-10-18 | 2011-05-12 | Opentv, Inc. | Triggered video system |
US20040210942A1 (en) * | 2002-10-18 | 2004-10-21 | Thomas Lemmons | Demographic/preference sniffer |
EP1427208A1 (en) * | 2002-12-02 | 2004-06-09 | Canal + Technologies | Messaging over mobile phone network for digital multimedia network |
AU2003296114A1 (en) * | 2002-12-25 | 2004-07-22 | Mekiki Creates Co., Ltd. | Content information processing system and method |
US7930716B2 (en) * | 2002-12-31 | 2011-04-19 | Actv Inc. | Techniques for reinsertion of local market advertising in digital video from a bypass source |
US7493646B2 (en) | 2003-01-30 | 2009-02-17 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Interactive television systems with digital video recording and adjustable reminders |
NO318845B1 (en) * | 2003-02-04 | 2005-05-09 | Ip Vision Ab | Method and apparatus for distributing video information |
US7694318B2 (en) * | 2003-03-07 | 2010-04-06 | Technology, Patents & Licensing, Inc. | Video detection and insertion |
US7809154B2 (en) * | 2003-03-07 | 2010-10-05 | Technology, Patents & Licensing, Inc. | Video entity recognition in compressed digital video streams |
US20040194130A1 (en) * | 2003-03-07 | 2004-09-30 | Richard Konig | Method and system for advertisement detection and subsitution |
US20050149968A1 (en) * | 2003-03-07 | 2005-07-07 | Richard Konig | Ending advertisement insertion |
US20050177847A1 (en) * | 2003-03-07 | 2005-08-11 | Richard Konig | Determining channel associated with video stream |
US7738704B2 (en) * | 2003-03-07 | 2010-06-15 | Technology, Patents And Licensing, Inc. | Detecting known video entities utilizing fingerprints |
US9143248B2 (en) * | 2003-08-29 | 2015-09-22 | Opentv, Inc. | Targeted content streaming and reception system |
US9380269B2 (en) | 2003-09-23 | 2016-06-28 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Scheduling trigger apparatus and method |
US8046814B1 (en) | 2003-10-22 | 2011-10-25 | The Weather Channel, Inc. | Systems and methods for formulating and delivering video having perishable information |
US7310807B2 (en) | 2003-10-29 | 2007-12-18 | Sbc Knowledge Ventures, L.P. | System and method for local video distribution |
US7984468B2 (en) | 2003-11-06 | 2011-07-19 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for providing program suggestions in an interactive television program guide |
US8170096B1 (en) | 2003-11-18 | 2012-05-01 | Visible World, Inc. | System and method for optimized encoding and transmission of a plurality of substantially similar video fragments |
US7426578B2 (en) * | 2003-12-12 | 2008-09-16 | Intercall, Inc. | Systems and methods for synchronizing data between communication devices in a networked environment |
US20050137940A1 (en) * | 2003-12-22 | 2005-06-23 | Lindsay Jeffrey D. | Method to provide a product to a consumer to protect consumer privacy |
IL159530A0 (en) * | 2003-12-23 | 2004-06-01 | Affinient Ltd | Display of video signals to subscribers |
US8161388B2 (en) | 2004-01-21 | 2012-04-17 | Rodriguez Arturo A | Interactive discovery of display device characteristics |
US20050216934A1 (en) * | 2004-03-26 | 2005-09-29 | Comcast Cable Holdings, Llc | Central management of localized programming |
US20050216941A1 (en) * | 2004-03-26 | 2005-09-29 | Primedia Workplace Learning, Lp | System and method for controlling video-on-demand content |
US9087126B2 (en) | 2004-04-07 | 2015-07-21 | Visible World, Inc. | System and method for enhanced video selection using an on-screen remote |
US8132204B2 (en) | 2004-04-07 | 2012-03-06 | Visible World, Inc. | System and method for enhanced video selection and categorization using metadata |
US9396212B2 (en) | 2004-04-07 | 2016-07-19 | Visible World, Inc. | System and method for enhanced video selection |
GB0408550D0 (en) * | 2004-04-16 | 2004-05-19 | Papaya Ltd | Programme content delivery |
GB0410014D0 (en) * | 2004-05-05 | 2004-06-09 | Nokia Corp | Multimedia message delivery optimisation |
US8943537B2 (en) * | 2004-07-21 | 2015-01-27 | Cox Communications, Inc. | Method and system for presenting personalized television program recommendation to viewers |
US8904458B2 (en) | 2004-07-29 | 2014-12-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for pre-caching a first portion of a video file on a set-top box |
US8584257B2 (en) | 2004-08-10 | 2013-11-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and interface for video content acquisition security on a set-top box |
US9060200B1 (en) * | 2004-08-11 | 2015-06-16 | Visible World, Inc. | System and method for digital program insertion in cable systems |
US8103546B1 (en) * | 2004-08-16 | 2012-01-24 | Lightningcast Llc | Advertising content delivery |
US9047624B1 (en) * | 2004-08-16 | 2015-06-02 | Advertising.Com Llc | Auditing of content related events |
US8086261B2 (en) | 2004-10-07 | 2011-12-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for providing digital network access and digital broadcast services using combined channels on a single physical medium to the customer premises |
US8806533B1 (en) | 2004-10-08 | 2014-08-12 | United Video Properties, Inc. | System and method for using television information codes |
US8930358B2 (en) | 2004-10-26 | 2015-01-06 | Yahoo! Inc. | System and method for presenting search results |
US7716714B2 (en) | 2004-12-01 | 2010-05-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for recording television content at a set top box |
US8434116B2 (en) | 2004-12-01 | 2013-04-30 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Device, system, and method for managing television tuners |
US20060123454A1 (en) * | 2004-12-03 | 2006-06-08 | Popa Ovidiu O | Methods and apparatus for transmitting user selections to a host location in an interactive communication system |
US7474359B2 (en) | 2004-12-06 | 2009-01-06 | At&T Intellectual Properties I, L.P. | System and method of displaying a video stream |
US7865917B2 (en) * | 2004-12-17 | 2011-01-04 | Martin E Hellman | Security enhanced tiered subscription broadcast system |
US8270901B2 (en) | 2004-12-17 | 2012-09-18 | Martin E. Hellman | Dropout-resistant media broadcasting system |
US8627354B2 (en) | 2004-12-17 | 2014-01-07 | Martin E. Hellman | Tiered subscription broadcast system |
ES2796626T3 (en) | 2005-01-12 | 2020-11-27 | Invidi Tech Corp | Targeted Impression Model for Broadcast Network Resource Delivery |
US7436346B2 (en) | 2005-01-20 | 2008-10-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System, method and interface for controlling multiple electronic devices of a home entertainment system via a single control device |
US7307574B2 (en) | 2005-02-02 | 2007-12-11 | Sbc Knowledge Ventures, Lp | Remote control, apparatus, system and methods of using the same |
JP2006217343A (en) * | 2005-02-04 | 2006-08-17 | Toshiba Corp | Signal processor and videotape recording method |
US20060195860A1 (en) * | 2005-02-25 | 2006-08-31 | Eldering Charles A | Acting on known video entities detected utilizing fingerprinting |
US20060195859A1 (en) * | 2005-02-25 | 2006-08-31 | Richard Konig | Detecting known video entities taking into account regions of disinterest |
US8306975B1 (en) | 2005-03-08 | 2012-11-06 | Worldwide Creative Techniques, Inc. | Expanded interest recommendation engine and variable personalization |
US7791561B2 (en) | 2005-04-01 | 2010-09-07 | Prysm, Inc. | Display systems having screens with optical fluorescent materials |
US7474286B2 (en) | 2005-04-01 | 2009-01-06 | Spudnik, Inc. | Laser displays using UV-excitable phosphors emitting visible colored light |
US7733310B2 (en) | 2005-04-01 | 2010-06-08 | Prysm, Inc. | Display screens having optical fluorescent materials |
US7917389B2 (en) * | 2005-04-15 | 2011-03-29 | The Go Daddy Group, Inc. | Relevant email ads for domain name advertiser |
US7921035B2 (en) * | 2005-04-15 | 2011-04-05 | The Go Daddy Group, Inc. | Parked webpage domain name suggestions |
US7890369B2 (en) * | 2005-04-15 | 2011-02-15 | The Go Daddy Group, Inc. | Relevant online ads for domain name advertiser |
US20090076907A1 (en) * | 2005-04-21 | 2009-03-19 | Louis Robert Litwin | Method and system for providing media content |
US7994702B2 (en) | 2005-04-27 | 2011-08-09 | Prysm, Inc. | Scanning beams displays based on light-emitting screens having phosphors |
US8000005B2 (en) | 2006-03-31 | 2011-08-16 | Prysm, Inc. | Multilayered fluorescent screens for scanning beam display systems |
US8089425B2 (en) | 2006-03-03 | 2012-01-03 | Prysm, Inc. | Optical designs for scanning beam display systems using fluorescent screens |
KR100701003B1 (en) * | 2005-04-29 | 2007-03-29 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Method for Decision of Broadcast Scheduling by Considering The Request of Clients |
US7690011B2 (en) * | 2005-05-02 | 2010-03-30 | Technology, Patents & Licensing, Inc. | Video stream modification to defeat detection |
US20060271552A1 (en) * | 2005-05-26 | 2006-11-30 | Venture Capital & Consulting Group, Llc. | Targeted delivery of content |
US8054849B2 (en) | 2005-05-27 | 2011-11-08 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method of managing video content streams |
US7647302B2 (en) * | 2005-05-31 | 2010-01-12 | Sap, Ag | Method for searching layered data |
US7912861B2 (en) * | 2005-05-31 | 2011-03-22 | Sap Ag | Method for testing layered data for the existence of at least one value |
US8893199B2 (en) | 2005-06-22 | 2014-11-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method of managing video content delivery |
US7908627B2 (en) | 2005-06-22 | 2011-03-15 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method to provide a unified video signal for diverse receiving platforms |
US8365218B2 (en) | 2005-06-24 | 2013-01-29 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Networked television and method thereof |
US8282476B2 (en) | 2005-06-24 | 2012-10-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Multimedia-based video game distribution |
US8635659B2 (en) | 2005-06-24 | 2014-01-21 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Audio receiver modular card and method thereof |
US8190688B2 (en) | 2005-07-11 | 2012-05-29 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | System and method of transmitting photographs from a set top box |
US7840178B2 (en) * | 2005-07-12 | 2010-11-23 | Martin E. Hellman | FM broadcast system competitive with satellite radio |
US20070022459A1 (en) * | 2005-07-20 | 2007-01-25 | Gaebel Thomas M Jr | Method and apparatus for boundary-based network operation |
US7873102B2 (en) | 2005-07-27 | 2011-01-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Video quality testing by encoding aggregated clips |
US7788266B2 (en) | 2005-08-26 | 2010-08-31 | Veveo, Inc. | Method and system for processing ambiguous, multi-term search queries |
US8189472B2 (en) | 2005-09-07 | 2012-05-29 | Mcdonald James F | Optimizing bandwidth utilization to a subscriber premises |
US8893179B2 (en) * | 2005-09-12 | 2014-11-18 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Apparatus and methods for providing and presenting customized channel information |
US8528029B2 (en) | 2005-09-12 | 2013-09-03 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Apparatus and methods of open and closed package subscription |
US20070100690A1 (en) * | 2005-11-02 | 2007-05-03 | Daniel Hopkins | System and method for providing targeted advertisements in user requested multimedia content |
US9113107B2 (en) | 2005-11-08 | 2015-08-18 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Interactive advertising and program promotion in an interactive television system |
US8571570B2 (en) | 2005-11-08 | 2013-10-29 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for delivering regional parameters |
US8533358B2 (en) | 2005-11-08 | 2013-09-10 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for fragmenting system information messages in wireless networks |
US8600836B2 (en) | 2005-11-08 | 2013-12-03 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System for distributing packages and channels to a device |
US20070115498A1 (en) * | 2005-11-18 | 2007-05-24 | The Go Daddy Group, Inc. | Relevant messages associated with incoming fax documents |
US20070115512A1 (en) * | 2005-11-18 | 2007-05-24 | The Go Daddy Group, Inc. | Relevant messages associated with outgoing fax documents |
US8613024B2 (en) * | 2005-12-13 | 2013-12-17 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Cross-platform predictive popularity ratings for use in interactive television applications |
US7681219B2 (en) * | 2005-12-16 | 2010-03-16 | Microsoft Corporation | Interactive job channel |
US20070150338A1 (en) * | 2005-12-22 | 2007-06-28 | Dale Malik | Systems, methods and computer programs for enabling interactive viewer control of advertising content |
US20070157230A1 (en) * | 2005-12-29 | 2007-07-05 | Technology Patents Llc | Selective television advertising |
US20070156521A1 (en) | 2005-12-29 | 2007-07-05 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for commerce in media program related merchandise |
US20070174125A1 (en) * | 2006-01-25 | 2007-07-26 | Broadband Royalty Corporation | Targeted ad insertion |
US7884816B2 (en) | 2006-02-15 | 2011-02-08 | Prysm, Inc. | Correcting pyramidal error of polygon scanner in scanning beam display systems |
US8451195B2 (en) | 2006-02-15 | 2013-05-28 | Prysm, Inc. | Servo-assisted scanning beam display systems using fluorescent screens |
AR059552A1 (en) * | 2006-02-17 | 2008-04-09 | Directv Group Inc | GROUPING OF USER DATA IN RELATION TO GEOGRAPHICAL DATA |
US20070198660A1 (en) * | 2006-02-21 | 2007-08-23 | Cohen Marc S | Advertising Supported Recorded and Downloaded Music System |
CN101438256B (en) * | 2006-03-07 | 2011-12-21 | 索尼株式会社 | Information processing device, information communication system, information processing method |
US9037482B2 (en) * | 2006-03-16 | 2015-05-19 | Opentv, Inc. | Method and system for optimizing the viewing of advertising |
US20070240602A1 (en) * | 2006-04-12 | 2007-10-18 | Alcatel | Customer premises equipment based advertisement insertion mechanism for internet protocol based networks |
US8209729B2 (en) * | 2006-04-20 | 2012-06-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Rules-based content management |
CN101473646A (en) | 2006-04-24 | 2009-07-01 | 视觉世界公司 | Systems and methods for generating media content using microtrends |
JP2009536413A (en) * | 2006-05-02 | 2009-10-08 | インビディ テクノロジーズ コーポレイション | Fuzzy logic based viewer identification for targeted asset delivery system |
US20130254787A1 (en) | 2006-05-02 | 2013-09-26 | Invidi Technologies Corporation | Method and apparatus to perform real-time audience estimation and commercial selection suitable for targeted advertising |
US20070277205A1 (en) * | 2006-05-26 | 2007-11-29 | Sbc Knowledge Ventures L.P. | System and method for distributing video data |
CA2654869C (en) | 2006-06-12 | 2016-08-30 | Invidi Technologies Corporation | System and method for inserting media based on keyword search |
US20070296723A1 (en) * | 2006-06-26 | 2007-12-27 | Electronic Arts Inc. | Electronic simulation of events via computer-based gaming technologies |
WO2008016634A2 (en) * | 2006-08-02 | 2008-02-07 | Tellytopia, Inc. | System, device, and method for delivering multimedia |
US8832742B2 (en) | 2006-10-06 | 2014-09-09 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for acquiring, categorizing and delivering media in interactive media guidance applications |
US20080120646A1 (en) * | 2006-11-20 | 2008-05-22 | Stern Benjamin J | Automatically associating relevant advertising with video content |
US8013506B2 (en) | 2006-12-12 | 2011-09-06 | Prysm, Inc. | Organic compounds for adjusting phosphor chromaticity |
US8412578B2 (en) * | 2006-12-15 | 2013-04-02 | Opportunity Notification Technology, LLC | System for delivering advertisements to wireless communication devices |
US8209424B2 (en) | 2006-12-20 | 2012-06-26 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for providing remote access to interactive media guidance applications |
US20080155600A1 (en) * | 2006-12-20 | 2008-06-26 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for providing remote access to interactive media guidance applications |
CA2672418C (en) * | 2006-12-20 | 2018-06-12 | Thomson Licensing | Embedded audio routing switcher |
TW200832319A (en) * | 2007-01-26 | 2008-08-01 | Tpo Displays Corp | Display device and luminance control method |
WO2008094960A2 (en) | 2007-01-30 | 2008-08-07 | Invidi Technologies Corporation | Asset targeting system for limited resource environments |
JP2010517468A (en) | 2007-01-31 | 2010-05-20 | トムソン ライセンシング | Dynamic grouping and content delivery method, apparatus and system |
US8146126B2 (en) * | 2007-02-01 | 2012-03-27 | Invidi Technologies Corporation | Request for information related to broadcast network content |
KR100892768B1 (en) * | 2007-02-21 | 2009-04-15 | 김덕중 | System for bidirectional databroadcasting search and search advertisement and method thereof |
US8181206B2 (en) | 2007-02-28 | 2012-05-15 | Time Warner Cable Inc. | Personal content server apparatus and methods |
US8041643B2 (en) | 2007-03-09 | 2011-10-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method of providing media content |
US9098868B1 (en) | 2007-03-20 | 2015-08-04 | Qurio Holdings, Inc. | Coordinating advertisements at multiple playback devices |
GB2460802B (en) * | 2007-03-20 | 2012-09-05 | Prysm Inc | Delivering and displaying advertisment or other application data to display systems |
US8418206B2 (en) | 2007-03-22 | 2013-04-09 | United Video Properties, Inc. | User defined rules for assigning destinations of content |
US7743394B2 (en) | 2007-04-03 | 2010-06-22 | Google Inc. | Log processing of channel tunes and channel tune times generated from a television processing device |
US8516515B2 (en) | 2007-04-03 | 2013-08-20 | Google Inc. | Impression based television advertising |
WO2008124537A1 (en) * | 2007-04-03 | 2008-10-16 | Google Inc. | Reconciling forecast data with measured data |
US8169454B1 (en) | 2007-04-06 | 2012-05-01 | Prysm, Inc. | Patterning a surface using pre-objective and post-objective raster scanning systems |
US7697183B2 (en) | 2007-04-06 | 2010-04-13 | Prysm, Inc. | Post-objective scanning beam systems |
US8175094B2 (en) * | 2007-04-06 | 2012-05-08 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for personalizing a multimedia program broadcasted through IP network |
KR100903070B1 (en) * | 2007-04-16 | 2009-06-18 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method for displaying data |
US8874468B2 (en) | 2007-04-20 | 2014-10-28 | Google Inc. | Media advertising |
US8087047B2 (en) | 2007-04-20 | 2011-12-27 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for providing remote access to interactive media guidance applications |
US20080271082A1 (en) * | 2007-04-27 | 2008-10-30 | Rebecca Carter | User controlled multimedia television broadcast on single channel |
JP2010527464A (en) | 2007-05-17 | 2010-08-12 | プリズム インコーポレイテッド | Multilayer screen with light-emitting stripes for beam display system scanning |
US7878657B2 (en) | 2007-06-27 | 2011-02-01 | Prysm, Inc. | Servo feedback control based on invisible scanning servo beam in scanning beam display systems with light-emitting screens |
US8556430B2 (en) | 2007-06-27 | 2013-10-15 | Prysm, Inc. | Servo feedback control based on designated scanning servo beam in scanning beam display systems with light-emitting screens |
US7996482B1 (en) | 2007-07-31 | 2011-08-09 | Qurio Holdings, Inc. | RDMA based real-time video client playback architecture |
US7805373B1 (en) | 2007-07-31 | 2010-09-28 | Qurio Holdings, Inc. | Synchronizing multiple playback device timing utilizing DRM encoding |
US8327403B1 (en) | 2007-09-07 | 2012-12-04 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for providing remote program ordering on a user device via a web server |
US8107977B2 (en) | 2007-09-07 | 2012-01-31 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Cross-platform messaging |
US8214273B2 (en) * | 2007-09-25 | 2012-07-03 | Goldspot Media | Apparatus and methods for enabling targeted insertion of advertisements using metadata as in-content descriptors |
US8160923B2 (en) * | 2007-11-05 | 2012-04-17 | Google Inc. | Video advertisements |
KR101158082B1 (en) | 2007-12-07 | 2012-06-22 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Method and apparatus of providing personalized advertisement in IPTV system |
US20090165049A1 (en) | 2007-12-19 | 2009-06-25 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Methods and devices for presenting and interactive media guidance application |
US8402025B2 (en) | 2007-12-19 | 2013-03-19 | Google Inc. | Video quality measures |
US8762476B1 (en) | 2007-12-20 | 2014-06-24 | Qurio Holdings, Inc. | RDMA to streaming protocol driver |
US20090170586A1 (en) * | 2007-12-26 | 2009-07-02 | Springtime Productions, Llc | Springtime productions special charity fund raising process |
KR100843303B1 (en) | 2007-12-26 | 2008-07-03 | 주식회사 셀런 | System and method for providing advertisement selected by user in video on demand system |
WO2009088418A2 (en) * | 2007-12-31 | 2009-07-16 | Digital Keystone, Inc. | Distributed tv access system |
US8656424B2 (en) * | 2007-12-31 | 2014-02-18 | Digital Keystone, Inc. | Distributed TV access system |
US8490127B2 (en) | 2007-12-31 | 2013-07-16 | Digital Keystone, Inc. | Distributed TV access system |
EP2247107A1 (en) * | 2007-12-31 | 2010-11-03 | Digital Keystone, Inc. | Distributed TV access system. |
US20090177537A1 (en) * | 2008-01-07 | 2009-07-09 | Google Inc. | Video advertisement pricing |
FR2926154A1 (en) * | 2008-01-08 | 2009-07-10 | Alcatel Lucent Sas | METHOD FOR PROVIDING PERSONALIZED ADVERTISEMENTS. |
EP2081351B1 (en) * | 2008-01-18 | 2011-08-31 | Deutsche Telekom AG | Method and system for synchronised receiver-side preparation of trigger information for interactive TV applications |
US8756101B2 (en) * | 2008-01-25 | 2014-06-17 | Tunein, Inc. | User and stream demographics metadata guide based content services |
US8595373B2 (en) | 2008-01-25 | 2013-11-26 | Tuneln, Inc. | Guide based content services |
US8248940B2 (en) * | 2008-01-30 | 2012-08-21 | Alcatel Lucent | Method and apparatus for targeted content delivery based on internet video traffic analysis |
US9094140B2 (en) * | 2008-04-28 | 2015-07-28 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for audience research in a content-based network |
CN102017478A (en) * | 2008-04-28 | 2011-04-13 | 三菱电机株式会社 | In-vehicle information providing device and method for providing video data of in-vehicle information providing device |
US8359614B2 (en) * | 2008-05-16 | 2013-01-22 | Sony Computer Entertainment America Llc | Channel hopping scheme for update of data for multiple services across multiple digital broadcast channels |
US8601526B2 (en) | 2008-06-13 | 2013-12-03 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for displaying media content and media guidance information |
US8209713B1 (en) | 2008-07-11 | 2012-06-26 | The Directv Group, Inc. | Television advertisement monitoring system |
US8327402B1 (en) | 2008-07-15 | 2012-12-04 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Methods and devices for presenting an interactive media guidance application |
KR100985015B1 (en) * | 2008-07-22 | 2010-10-04 | 주식회사 알티캐스트 | Method, system, and computer-readable recording medium for determining fee for advertisement provided via tv receiver |
KR101065540B1 (en) * | 2008-07-24 | 2011-09-19 | 아주대학교산학협력단 | Broadcasting method of advertisement |
US7869112B2 (en) | 2008-07-25 | 2011-01-11 | Prysm, Inc. | Beam scanning based on two-dimensional polygon scanner for display and other applications |
US8171511B2 (en) * | 2008-07-30 | 2012-05-01 | Visible World, Inc. | Dynamic bandwidth allocation for addressable content |
WO2010017315A2 (en) | 2008-08-05 | 2010-02-11 | Invidi Technologies Corporation | National insertion of targeted advertisment |
WO2010017379A2 (en) | 2008-08-06 | 2010-02-11 | Invidi Technologies Corporation | Third party data matching for targeted advertising |
US20100049567A1 (en) * | 2008-08-20 | 2010-02-25 | Gulrukh Ahanger | System and method for integrated advertisement management |
US20100057548A1 (en) * | 2008-08-27 | 2010-03-04 | Globy's,Inc. | Targeted customer offers based on predictive analytics |
EP2164247A3 (en) * | 2008-09-12 | 2011-08-24 | Axel Springer Digital TV Guide GmbH | Method for distributing second multi-media content items in a list of first multi-media content items |
US20100083304A1 (en) * | 2008-09-26 | 2010-04-01 | Yang Pan | System and method of rendering advertisements by employing paused screen of television |
US20100085483A1 (en) * | 2008-10-02 | 2010-04-08 | Yang Pan | Dedicated button of remote control for advertisement delivery using interactive television |
US20100121667A1 (en) * | 2008-11-12 | 2010-05-13 | Gulrukh Ahanger | System and method for integrated advertisement management |
US8209715B2 (en) * | 2008-11-14 | 2012-06-26 | Google Inc. | Video play through rates |
US10063934B2 (en) | 2008-11-25 | 2018-08-28 | Rovi Technologies Corporation | Reducing unicast session duration with restart TV |
US9026668B2 (en) | 2012-05-26 | 2015-05-05 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Real-time and retargeted advertising on multiple screens of a user watching television |
US8255949B1 (en) | 2009-01-07 | 2012-08-28 | Google Inc. | Television program targeting for advertising |
WO2010087588A2 (en) * | 2009-01-29 | 2010-08-05 | (주)세컨커머셜 | System for providing rating points for iga and method thereof |
WO2010088605A2 (en) * | 2009-01-30 | 2010-08-05 | Invidi Technologies Corporation | System and method for auctioning avails |
US8341550B2 (en) * | 2009-02-10 | 2012-12-25 | Microsoft Corporation | User generated targeted advertisements |
US8856908B2 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2014-10-07 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Management and delivery of profile data |
US20100223278A1 (en) * | 2009-02-27 | 2010-09-02 | The Go Daddy Group, Inc. | Generating online advertisments based upon available dynamic content relevant domain names |
US20100223132A1 (en) * | 2009-02-27 | 2010-09-02 | The Go Daddy Group, Inc. | Embedding advertisements offering available, dynamic-content-relevant domain names in online video |
US20100223113A1 (en) * | 2009-02-27 | 2010-09-02 | The Go Daddy Group, Inc. | Systems for embedding advertisements offering available, dynamic-content-relevant domain names in online video |
US20100223143A1 (en) * | 2009-02-27 | 2010-09-02 | The Go Daddy Group, Inc. | Dynamic content relevant domain name suggestion in online advertising |
US20100262931A1 (en) | 2009-04-10 | 2010-10-14 | Rovi Technologies Corporation | Systems and methods for searching a media guidance application with multiple perspective views |
CN101572715B (en) * | 2009-04-15 | 2014-03-19 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Multimedia service creating method and system |
US8959540B1 (en) | 2009-05-27 | 2015-02-17 | Google Inc. | Predicting engagement in video content |
US9094714B2 (en) * | 2009-05-29 | 2015-07-28 | Cognitive Networks, Inc. | Systems and methods for on-screen graphics detection |
US10116972B2 (en) | 2009-05-29 | 2018-10-30 | Inscape Data, Inc. | Methods for identifying video segments and displaying option to view from an alternative source and/or on an alternative device |
US10949458B2 (en) | 2009-05-29 | 2021-03-16 | Inscape Data, Inc. | System and method for improving work load management in ACR television monitoring system |
US8595781B2 (en) | 2009-05-29 | 2013-11-26 | Cognitive Media Networks, Inc. | Methods for identifying video segments and displaying contextual targeted content on a connected television |
US9449090B2 (en) | 2009-05-29 | 2016-09-20 | Vizio Inscape Technologies, Llc | Systems and methods for addressing a media database using distance associative hashing |
US10375451B2 (en) | 2009-05-29 | 2019-08-06 | Inscape Data, Inc. | Detection of common media segments |
CA2764442A1 (en) | 2009-06-03 | 2010-12-09 | Visible World Inc. | Targeting television advertisements based on automatic optimization of demographic information |
EP2449773A1 (en) * | 2009-06-30 | 2012-05-09 | France Telecom | Method and system for distributing personalized digital content |
US8935721B2 (en) * | 2009-07-15 | 2015-01-13 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for classifying an audience in a content distribution network |
US20110022470A1 (en) * | 2009-07-21 | 2011-01-27 | Sridhar Varadarajan | System and Method for Real-Time Ad Selection and Scheduling |
US9237381B2 (en) | 2009-08-06 | 2016-01-12 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for local channel insertion in an all-digital content distribution network |
US20110044582A1 (en) | 2009-08-21 | 2011-02-24 | Microsoft Corporation | Efficient collimation of light with optical wedge |
US8354806B2 (en) * | 2009-08-21 | 2013-01-15 | Microsoft Corporation | Scanning collimation of light via flat panel lamp |
US8312364B2 (en) * | 2009-09-17 | 2012-11-13 | Go Daddy Operating Company, LLC | Social website domain registration announcement and search engine feed |
US8276057B2 (en) * | 2009-09-17 | 2012-09-25 | Go Daddy Operating Company, LLC | Announcing a domain name registration on a social website |
US9014546B2 (en) | 2009-09-23 | 2015-04-21 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for automatically detecting users within detection regions of media devices |
US8359616B2 (en) | 2009-09-30 | 2013-01-22 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for automatically generating advertisements using a media guidance application |
WO2011041746A2 (en) * | 2009-10-01 | 2011-04-07 | Michael Robert Beatty | Multi-channel digital targeted video advertising system and method |
US20110107363A1 (en) * | 2009-11-03 | 2011-05-05 | Yahoo! Inc. | Sequenced video overlay advertisements |
US9635421B2 (en) | 2009-11-11 | 2017-04-25 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for audience data collection and analysis in a content delivery network |
EP2352292A1 (en) * | 2009-12-07 | 2011-08-03 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (PUBL) | System for managing television channels |
CN106095389B (en) * | 2009-12-23 | 2020-03-17 | 英特尔公司 | Method and apparatus for automatically obtaining and synchronizing contextual content and applications |
KR101526652B1 (en) * | 2009-12-23 | 2015-06-08 | 인텔 코포레이션 | Methods and apparatus for automatically obtaining and synchronizing contextual content and applications |
US9201627B2 (en) | 2010-01-05 | 2015-12-01 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for transferring content between user equipment and a wireless communications device |
US20110197220A1 (en) | 2010-02-09 | 2011-08-11 | Google Inc. | Customized television advertising |
US9858593B2 (en) | 2010-04-09 | 2018-01-02 | Go Daddy Operating Company, LLC | URL shortening based online advertising |
US9122701B2 (en) | 2010-05-13 | 2015-09-01 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for providing media content listings according to points of interest |
US9204193B2 (en) | 2010-05-14 | 2015-12-01 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for media detection and filtering using a parental control logging application |
US9167196B2 (en) | 2010-05-19 | 2015-10-20 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for trimming recorded content using a media guidance application |
US9838753B2 (en) | 2013-12-23 | 2017-12-05 | Inscape Data, Inc. | Monitoring individual viewing of television events using tracking pixels and cookies |
US10192138B2 (en) | 2010-05-27 | 2019-01-29 | Inscape Data, Inc. | Systems and methods for reducing data density in large datasets |
WO2011149558A2 (en) | 2010-05-28 | 2011-12-01 | Abelow Daniel H | Reality alternate |
US9258175B1 (en) | 2010-05-28 | 2016-02-09 | The Directv Group, Inc. | Method and system for sharing playlists for content stored within a network |
EP2580906A1 (en) * | 2010-06-08 | 2013-04-17 | Arçelik Anonim Sirketi | A digital broadcast receiving device having an on-screen display menu |
US9986277B2 (en) | 2010-06-17 | 2018-05-29 | The Nielsen Company (Us), Llc | Systems and methods to select targeted advertising |
SG177783A1 (en) * | 2010-07-09 | 2012-02-28 | Smart Communications Inc | Content provision system and method |
US9699503B2 (en) | 2010-09-07 | 2017-07-04 | Opentv, Inc. | Smart playlist |
US10210160B2 (en) | 2010-09-07 | 2019-02-19 | Opentv, Inc. | Collecting data from different sources |
US8949871B2 (en) | 2010-09-08 | 2015-02-03 | Opentv, Inc. | Smart media selection based on viewer user presence |
US8930979B2 (en) | 2010-11-11 | 2015-01-06 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for identifying and characterizing latency in a content delivery network |
US10148623B2 (en) | 2010-11-12 | 2018-12-04 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods ensuring data privacy in a content distribution network |
US9990651B2 (en) | 2010-11-17 | 2018-06-05 | Amobee, Inc. | Method and apparatus for selective delivery of ads based on factors including site clustering |
US8478662B1 (en) * | 2010-11-24 | 2013-07-02 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Customized electronic books with supplemental content |
US9201185B2 (en) | 2011-02-04 | 2015-12-01 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Directional backlighting for display panels |
CA2768080A1 (en) * | 2011-03-21 | 2012-09-21 | Vecima Networks Inc. | Apparatus for insertion of local signals into a catv output |
US9420320B2 (en) | 2011-04-01 | 2016-08-16 | The Nielsen Company (Us), Llc | Methods, apparatus and articles of manufacture to estimate local market audiences of media content |
US8949901B2 (en) | 2011-06-29 | 2015-02-03 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Methods and systems for customizing viewing environment preferences in a viewing environment control application |
US20130027772A1 (en) | 2011-07-27 | 2013-01-31 | Microsoft Corporation | Variable-depth stereoscopic display |
KR101979176B1 (en) | 2011-08-03 | 2019-05-15 | 인텐트 아이큐, 엘엘씨 | Targeted television advertising based on profiles linked to multiple online devices |
US8805418B2 (en) | 2011-12-23 | 2014-08-12 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Methods and systems for performing actions based on location-based rules |
US9218122B2 (en) | 2011-12-29 | 2015-12-22 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for transferring settings across devices based on user gestures |
US9354748B2 (en) | 2012-02-13 | 2016-05-31 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Optical stylus interaction |
EP2629546B1 (en) | 2012-02-16 | 2015-10-14 | Alcatel Lucent | Program switch display control on an audio-video rendering device |
US8873227B2 (en) | 2012-03-02 | 2014-10-28 | Microsoft Corporation | Flexible hinge support layer |
US9460029B2 (en) | 2012-03-02 | 2016-10-04 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Pressure sensitive keys |
US9075566B2 (en) | 2012-03-02 | 2015-07-07 | Microsoft Technoogy Licensing, LLC | Flexible hinge spine |
US9870066B2 (en) | 2012-03-02 | 2018-01-16 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Method of manufacturing an input device |
US20130300590A1 (en) | 2012-05-14 | 2013-11-14 | Paul Henry Dietz | Audio Feedback |
US8947353B2 (en) | 2012-06-12 | 2015-02-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Photosensor array gesture detection |
US9256089B2 (en) | 2012-06-15 | 2016-02-09 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Object-detecting backlight unit |
US8964379B2 (en) | 2012-08-20 | 2015-02-24 | Microsoft Corporation | Switchable magnetic lock |
US20140196062A1 (en) | 2013-01-10 | 2014-07-10 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for setting prices in data driven media placement |
US9253262B2 (en) | 2013-01-24 | 2016-02-02 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for connecting media devices through web sockets |
US9848276B2 (en) | 2013-03-11 | 2017-12-19 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for auto-configuring a user equipment device with content consumption material |
US10368255B2 (en) | 2017-07-25 | 2019-07-30 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for client-based dynamic control of connections to co-existing radio access networks |
US9066153B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2015-06-23 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for multicast delivery of content in a content delivery network |
WO2014150399A1 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2014-09-25 | Brandstetter Jeffrey D | Systems and methods for defining ad spaces in video |
US9552777B2 (en) | 2013-05-10 | 2017-01-24 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Phase control backlight |
US9313568B2 (en) | 2013-07-23 | 2016-04-12 | Chicago Custom Acoustics, Inc. | Custom earphone with dome in the canal |
US9674563B2 (en) | 2013-11-04 | 2017-06-06 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for recommending content |
CN104683852B (en) | 2013-11-29 | 2018-04-06 | 国际商业机器公司 | The method and apparatus for handling broadcast message |
US9955192B2 (en) | 2013-12-23 | 2018-04-24 | Inscape Data, Inc. | Monitoring individual viewing of television events using tracking pixels and cookies |
US10120420B2 (en) | 2014-03-21 | 2018-11-06 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Lockable display and techniques enabling use of lockable displays |
CN113271480A (en) * | 2014-03-26 | 2021-08-17 | 马克·W·帕布利科弗 | Computer processing method and system for providing customized entertainment content |
US9547867B2 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2017-01-17 | International Business Machines Corporation | Targeted advertising and customized display of advertisements in satellite broadcasting |
US9288521B2 (en) | 2014-05-28 | 2016-03-15 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for updating media asset data based on pause point in the media asset |
FI20145493A (en) | 2014-05-28 | 2015-11-29 | Exaget Oy | Adding content to your media stream |
US11540148B2 (en) | 2014-06-11 | 2022-12-27 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for access point location |
CN105187857B (en) * | 2014-06-13 | 2019-02-05 | 东森信息科技股份有限公司 | Program Intelligent drainage broadcasts system and its implementation method |
US10324733B2 (en) | 2014-07-30 | 2019-06-18 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Shutdown notifications |
US10652127B2 (en) | 2014-10-03 | 2020-05-12 | The Nielsen Company (Us), Llc | Fusing online media monitoring data with secondary online data feeds to generate ratings data for online media exposure |
US9935833B2 (en) | 2014-11-05 | 2018-04-03 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for determining an optimized wireless interface installation configuration |
CN104410907B (en) * | 2014-11-25 | 2018-02-23 | 北京国双科技有限公司 | The monitoring method and monitoring device of video ads |
CN104410908B (en) * | 2014-11-26 | 2017-11-14 | 北京国双科技有限公司 | The monitoring method and device of video ads |
WO2016123495A1 (en) | 2015-01-30 | 2016-08-04 | Vizio Inscape Technologies, Llc | Methods for identifying video segments and displaying option to view from an alternative source and/or on an alternative device |
MX2017013128A (en) | 2015-04-17 | 2018-01-26 | Inscape Data Inc | Systems and methods for reducing data density in large datasets. |
CA2992519C (en) | 2015-07-16 | 2024-04-02 | Inscape Data, Inc. | Systems and methods for partitioning search indexes for improved efficiency in identifying media segments |
BR112018000716B1 (en) | 2015-07-16 | 2023-03-28 | Inscape Data, Inc | COMPUTING METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETECTING COMMON MEDIA SEGMENTS |
JP6891170B2 (en) | 2015-07-16 | 2021-06-18 | インスケイプ データ インコーポレイテッド | Future viewing forecasts for video segments to optimize stem resource utilization |
US10080062B2 (en) | 2015-07-16 | 2018-09-18 | Inscape Data, Inc. | Optimizing media fingerprint retention to improve system resource utilization |
US9986578B2 (en) | 2015-12-04 | 2018-05-29 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for selective data network access |
US11019385B2 (en) | 2016-01-20 | 2021-05-25 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Content selection for networked media devices |
US9918345B2 (en) | 2016-01-20 | 2018-03-13 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and method for wireless network services in moving vehicles |
US10492034B2 (en) | 2016-03-07 | 2019-11-26 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for dynamic open-access networks |
US10164858B2 (en) | 2016-06-15 | 2018-12-25 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for monitoring and diagnosing a wireless network |
US11455549B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2022-09-27 | Disney Enterprises, Inc. | Modeling characters that interact with users as part of a character-as-a-service implementation |
US10091549B1 (en) | 2017-03-30 | 2018-10-02 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Methods and systems for recommending media assets based on the geographic location at which the media assets are frequently consumed |
CA3058975A1 (en) | 2017-04-06 | 2018-10-11 | Inscape Data, Inc. | Systems and methods for improving accuracy of device maps using media viewing data |
CN108810578A (en) * | 2017-05-05 | 2018-11-13 | 赵阳 | Advertisement cut-in method and system applied to user terminal |
US10645547B2 (en) | 2017-06-02 | 2020-05-05 | Charter Communications Operating, Llc | Apparatus and methods for providing wireless service in a venue |
US10638361B2 (en) | 2017-06-06 | 2020-04-28 | Charter Communications Operating, Llc | Methods and apparatus for dynamic control of connections to co-existing radio access networks |
US11109290B2 (en) | 2017-08-04 | 2021-08-31 | Charter Communications Operating, Llc | Switching connections over frequency bands of a wireless network |
US11164105B2 (en) | 2017-11-13 | 2021-11-02 | International Business Machines Corporation | Intelligent recommendations implemented by modelling user profile through deep learning of multimodal user data |
CN108596687B (en) * | 2018-05-09 | 2021-07-09 | 南京大学 | Advertisement targeted delivery method based on Hash learning |
US11113884B2 (en) | 2018-07-30 | 2021-09-07 | Disney Enterprises, Inc. | Techniques for immersive virtual reality experiences |
US10248527B1 (en) | 2018-09-19 | 2019-04-02 | Amplero, Inc | Automated device-specific dynamic operation modifications |
KR102112068B1 (en) * | 2018-11-01 | 2020-05-18 | 에스케이플래닛 주식회사 | Method for providing personalized advertise based on channel switching using spare channel and apparatus therefor |
WO2020125783A1 (en) * | 2018-12-20 | 2020-06-25 | 青岛海信电器股份有限公司 | Broadcast signal receiving device and broadcast signal receiving method |
US11064255B2 (en) * | 2019-01-30 | 2021-07-13 | Oohms Ny Llc | System and method of tablet-based distribution of digital media content |
US11546647B2 (en) * | 2019-06-07 | 2023-01-03 | Roku, Inc. | Content-modification system with probability-based selection feature |
CN113132806B (en) * | 2019-12-31 | 2023-03-24 | 北京邦天信息技术有限公司 | Playing terminal and program playing method thereof |
US11575963B2 (en) | 2020-04-08 | 2023-02-07 | Roku, Inc. | Content-modification system with feature for detecting and responding to a content modification by a tuner device |
US12003821B2 (en) * | 2020-04-20 | 2024-06-04 | Disney Enterprises, Inc. | Techniques for enhanced media experience |
US11533543B1 (en) * | 2021-03-18 | 2022-12-20 | Twitch Interactive, Inc. | Community boosting of stream visibility |
CN113490021B (en) * | 2021-07-21 | 2023-07-18 | Vidaa(荷兰)国际控股有限公司 | User interface display method and display device |
US11843824B2 (en) | 2021-10-18 | 2023-12-12 | Synamedia Limited | Digital processing systems and methods for managing presentation of stream portions |
Citations (32)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4331974A (en) * | 1980-10-21 | 1982-05-25 | Iri, Inc. | Cable television with controlled signal substitution |
US4533948A (en) * | 1982-04-30 | 1985-08-06 | General Instrument Corporation | CATV Communication system |
US4546382A (en) * | 1983-06-09 | 1985-10-08 | Ctba Associates | Television and market research data collection system and method |
US4602279A (en) * | 1984-03-21 | 1986-07-22 | Actv, Inc. | Method for providing targeted profile interactive CATV displays |
US4630108A (en) * | 1984-03-26 | 1986-12-16 | A. C. Nielsen Company | Preprogrammed over-the-air marketing research system |
US4665559A (en) * | 1985-07-23 | 1987-05-12 | Andrew Benun | FM-TV audio adapter |
US4706121A (en) * | 1985-07-12 | 1987-11-10 | Patrick Young | TV schedule system and process |
US4775935A (en) * | 1986-09-22 | 1988-10-04 | Westinghouse Electric Corp. | Video merchandising system with variable and adoptive product sequence presentation order |
US4890321A (en) * | 1986-07-08 | 1989-12-26 | Scientific Atlanta, Inc. | Communications format for a subscription television system permitting transmission of individual text messages to subscribers |
US4945412A (en) * | 1988-06-14 | 1990-07-31 | Kramer Robert A | Method of and system for identification and verification of broadcasting television and radio program segments |
US5027400A (en) * | 1988-08-19 | 1991-06-25 | Hitachi Ltd. | Multimedia bidirectional broadcast system |
US5029014A (en) * | 1989-10-26 | 1991-07-02 | James E. Lindstrom | Ad insertion system and method for broadcasting spot messages out of recorded sequence |
US5155591A (en) * | 1989-10-23 | 1992-10-13 | General Instrument Corporation | Method and apparatus for providing demographically targeted television commercials |
US5192999A (en) * | 1991-04-25 | 1993-03-09 | Compuadd Corporation | Multipurpose computerized television |
US5270809A (en) * | 1991-03-29 | 1993-12-14 | Scientific-Atlanta | Data return for a television transmission system |
US5282028A (en) * | 1990-11-27 | 1994-01-25 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Remote control for digital music terminal with synchronized communications |
US5293633A (en) * | 1988-12-06 | 1994-03-08 | General Instrument Corporation | Apparatus and method for providing digital audio in the cable television band |
US5317391A (en) * | 1991-11-29 | 1994-05-31 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Method and apparatus for providing message information to subscribers in a cable television system |
US5374951A (en) * | 1990-06-01 | 1994-12-20 | Peach Media Research, Inc. | Method and system for monitoring television viewing |
US5381477A (en) * | 1993-02-16 | 1995-01-10 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Method of selecting cable television converter groups |
US5410326A (en) * | 1992-12-04 | 1995-04-25 | Goldstein; Steven W. | Programmable remote control device for interacting with a plurality of remotely controlled devices |
US5467402A (en) * | 1988-09-20 | 1995-11-14 | Hitachi, Ltd. | Distributed image recognizing system and traffic flow instrumentation system and crime/disaster preventing system using such image recognizing system |
US5477262A (en) * | 1991-11-29 | 1995-12-19 | Scientific-Altanta, Inc. | Method and apparatus for providing an on-screen user interface for a subscription television terminal |
US5515098A (en) * | 1994-09-08 | 1996-05-07 | Carles; John B. | System and method for selectively distributing commercial messages over a communications network |
US5539871A (en) * | 1992-11-02 | 1996-07-23 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for accessing associated data sets in a multimedia environment in a data processing system |
US5550863A (en) * | 1991-01-07 | 1996-08-27 | H. Lee Browne | Audio and video transmission and receiving system |
US5635989A (en) * | 1996-02-13 | 1997-06-03 | Hughes Electronics | Method and apparatus for sorting and searching a television program guide |
US5715315A (en) * | 1993-08-19 | 1998-02-03 | News Datacom Ltd | CATV systems |
US5826165A (en) * | 1997-01-21 | 1998-10-20 | Hughes Electronics Corporation | Advertisement reconciliation system |
US6201536B1 (en) * | 1992-12-09 | 2001-03-13 | Discovery Communications, Inc. | Network manager for cable television system headends |
US6270809B1 (en) * | 1998-11-06 | 2001-08-07 | Phytotech Inc., | Nutritional supplements |
US6286140B1 (en) * | 1997-11-20 | 2001-09-04 | Thomas P. Ivanyi | System and method for measuring and storing information pertaining to television viewer or user behavior |
Family Cites Families (158)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
GB1204190A (en) | 1966-12-26 | 1970-09-03 | Mainichi Broadcasting System | Multiplex communication system |
US3891792A (en) | 1974-06-25 | 1975-06-24 | Asahi Broadcasting | Television character crawl display method and apparatus |
FR2363949A1 (en) | 1976-09-06 | 1978-03-31 | Telediffusion Fse | DIGITAL TRANSMISSION AND TEXT DISPLAY SYSTEM ON A TELEVISION SCREEN |
WO1980000209A1 (en) * | 1978-06-30 | 1980-02-07 | Telease Inc | Method and system for subscription television billing and access |
US4860379A (en) | 1979-05-18 | 1989-08-22 | General Instrument Corporation | Data communications system |
US4398216A (en) | 1980-09-19 | 1983-08-09 | Telease, Inc. | Multiple signal transmission method and system, particularly for television |
DE3036552C2 (en) | 1980-09-27 | 1985-04-25 | Blaupunkt-Werke Gmbh, 3200 Hildesheim | Television reception system |
US4381522A (en) | 1980-12-01 | 1983-04-26 | Adams-Russell Co., Inc. | Selective viewing |
US4688218A (en) | 1981-07-15 | 1987-08-18 | Etablissement Public De Diffusion Dit "Telediffusion De France" | Multiplex channels for continuous flow for numerical signal |
US4965825A (en) | 1981-11-03 | 1990-10-23 | The Personalized Mass Media Corporation | Signal processing apparatus and methods |
US4694490A (en) | 1981-11-03 | 1987-09-15 | Harvey John C | Signal processing apparatus and methods |
JPS58502179A (en) | 1981-12-19 | 1983-12-15 | シヤ−ド フレデリツク ウイリアム | Method and device for editing the output of a television set |
US4484217A (en) | 1982-05-11 | 1984-11-20 | Telease, Inc. | Method and system for remote reporting, particularly for pay television billing |
JPS59188A (en) | 1982-06-24 | 1984-01-05 | シャープ株式会社 | Portable general-purpose electronic apparatus |
US4517598A (en) | 1982-10-22 | 1985-05-14 | George Van Valkenburg | Method and apparatus for electronic publishing |
US4528643A (en) | 1983-01-10 | 1985-07-09 | Fpdc, Inc. | System for reproducing information in material objects at a point of sale location |
US4587520A (en) | 1983-04-07 | 1986-05-06 | Rca Corporation | Cursor controlled page selection in a video display |
US4816904A (en) * | 1983-06-09 | 1989-03-28 | Control Data Corporation | Television and market research data collection system and method |
US4633462A (en) | 1983-07-18 | 1986-12-30 | The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois | Multiple access communication on a CATV reverse channel |
AU576787B2 (en) | 1983-11-07 | 1988-09-08 | Sony Corporation | Satellite to cable television interface |
GB8410671D0 (en) | 1984-04-26 | 1984-05-31 | British Telecomm | Transmitting stereo audio programmes |
US4697209A (en) | 1984-04-26 | 1987-09-29 | A. C. Nielsen Company | Methods and apparatus for automatically identifying programs viewed or recorded |
DE3423846A1 (en) | 1984-06-28 | 1986-01-09 | Telefunken Fernseh Und Rundfunk Gmbh, 3000 Hannover | Television receiver with a teletext decoder |
US4724491A (en) | 1984-08-28 | 1988-02-09 | Adams-Russell Co., Inc. | Inserting television advertising spots automatically |
US4829569A (en) | 1984-09-21 | 1989-05-09 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Communication of individual messages to subscribers in a subscription television system |
US5036537A (en) | 1984-11-19 | 1991-07-30 | General Instrument Corp. | Geographic black-out method for direct broadcast satellite system |
GB8429488D0 (en) | 1984-11-22 | 1985-01-03 | Communications Patents Ltd | Interactive television distribution system |
NL8500690A (en) | 1985-03-12 | 1986-10-01 | Philips Nv | REMOTE CONTROL UNIT FOR OPERATING VARIOUS MODULES. |
US4674085A (en) * | 1985-03-21 | 1987-06-16 | American Telephone And Telegraph Co. | Local area network |
GB2177873B (en) | 1985-07-19 | 1989-11-22 | Marconi Electronic Devices | Communications system |
US4688246A (en) | 1985-12-20 | 1987-08-18 | Zenith Electronics Corporation | CATV scrambling system with compressed digital audio in synchronizing signal intervals |
JPS62185485A (en) | 1986-02-10 | 1987-08-13 | Pioneer Electronic Corp | Setting system for limit capable of viewing/listing charged program in bidirectional catv system |
ES2169054T3 (en) | 1986-04-18 | 2002-07-01 | Nagra Plus Sa | PAYMENT TELEVISION SYSTEM. |
USD301037S (en) | 1986-04-28 | 1989-05-09 | Multivision Products, Inc. | Hand-held remote control |
US5202817A (en) | 1989-06-07 | 1993-04-13 | Norand Corporation | Hand-held data capture system with interchangeable modules |
US4792972A (en) | 1986-08-19 | 1988-12-20 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Remote programming of CATV channel authorization unit |
US4712130A (en) | 1986-08-29 | 1987-12-08 | Rca Corporation | Chrominance signal frequency converter as for a pix-in-pix television receiver |
USD314383S (en) | 1986-09-23 | 1991-02-05 | RUF GmbH & Co. KG Elektrotechnische Spezialfabrik | Remote-control transmitter |
US5152011A (en) | 1987-07-27 | 1992-09-29 | Schwob Pierre R | Broadcast receiver capable of automatic station identification and format-scanning based on an internal database updatable via data reception over the airwaves |
JPS6450688A (en) | 1987-08-21 | 1989-02-27 | Hashimoto Corp | Method and device for generating individual television program |
US4930160A (en) * | 1987-09-02 | 1990-05-29 | Vogel Peter S | Automatic censorship of video programs |
US4876736A (en) | 1987-09-23 | 1989-10-24 | A. C. Nielsen Company | Method and apparatus for determining channel reception of a receiver |
US4959810A (en) | 1987-10-14 | 1990-09-25 | Universal Electronics, Inc. | Universal remote control device |
US5414426A (en) | 1987-10-14 | 1995-05-09 | Universal Electronics Inc. | Favorite key macro command and chained macro command in a remote control |
US4947429A (en) | 1987-11-30 | 1990-08-07 | Zenith Electronics Corporation | Pay per view television signaling method |
US5132789A (en) | 1988-01-15 | 1992-07-21 | Tiltrac Corporation | Tilt rack video tape library and VCP to multiple subscriber system |
US4829558A (en) | 1988-01-19 | 1989-05-09 | Peac Media Research, Inc. | System and device for data transmission, and related method |
US4816901A (en) | 1988-04-27 | 1989-03-28 | Universal Video Communications Corp. | Method and system for compressing color video data |
US4995078A (en) | 1988-06-09 | 1991-02-19 | Monslow H Vincent | Television broadcast system for selective transmission of viewer-chosen programs at viewer-requested times |
US4977455B1 (en) | 1988-07-15 | 1993-04-13 | System and process for vcr scheduling | |
JPH0695759B2 (en) | 1988-08-08 | 1994-11-24 | パイオニア株式会社 | Billing display system for CCTV device |
US4975951A (en) | 1988-10-07 | 1990-12-04 | General Instrument Corporation | IPPV programming distribution control system |
USD325581S (en) | 1988-10-07 | 1992-04-21 | Cable Electric Products, Inc. | Remote control |
US5105268A (en) | 1988-11-08 | 1992-04-14 | Fujitsu Limited | Community antenna broadcast system having an improved channel selecting system permitting purchase of a selected channel from a plurality of non-purchased channels |
JPH02152382A (en) | 1988-12-02 | 1990-06-12 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Teletext receiver |
US4949187A (en) | 1988-12-16 | 1990-08-14 | Cohen Jason M | Video communications system having a remotely controlled central source of video and audio data |
US5077607A (en) | 1988-12-23 | 1991-12-31 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Cable television transaction terminal |
US5001554A (en) | 1988-12-23 | 1991-03-19 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Terminal authorization method |
DE3901790A1 (en) * | 1989-01-21 | 1990-07-26 | Gfk Gmbh | METHOD FOR THE REMOTE CONTROLLED REPLACEMENT OF A PARTICULAR PROGRAM PART OF A TELEVISION PROGRAM BY A SEPARATELY SENT PROGRAM PART FOR SPECIFIC SELECTED RECEIVER, HOUSEHOLD TERMINAL DEVICE AND THROUGH THE DRIVE DRIVE |
US4996597A (en) | 1989-04-20 | 1991-02-26 | Rca Licensing Corporation | User programmable switching arrangement |
US5015829A (en) | 1989-04-28 | 1991-05-14 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Key pad and front panel assembly for an electronic instrument |
US5014125A (en) | 1989-05-05 | 1991-05-07 | Cableshare, Inc. | Television system for the interactive distribution of selectable video presentations |
US5150118A (en) | 1989-05-08 | 1992-09-22 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Interchangeable coded key pad assemblies alternately attachable to a user definable keyboard to enable programmable keyboard functions |
US5151782A (en) | 1989-05-17 | 1992-09-29 | Reiss Media Enterprises | Control system for satellite delivered pay-per-view television system |
JPH0620187Y2 (en) | 1989-05-26 | 1994-05-25 | アルプス電気株式会社 | Trackball |
US5253066C1 (en) | 1989-06-01 | 2001-05-22 | United Video Properties Inc | Tv recording and viewing control system |
US5047867A (en) | 1989-06-08 | 1991-09-10 | North American Philips Corporation | Interface for a TV-VCR system |
US5663757A (en) | 1989-07-14 | 1997-09-02 | Morales; Fernando | Software controlled multi-mode interactive TV systems |
JP2830111B2 (en) | 1989-07-21 | 1998-12-02 | ソニー株式会社 | High efficiency coding device |
US5166886A (en) | 1989-07-31 | 1992-11-24 | Molnar Charles E | System to demonstrate and sell computer programs |
US5046093A (en) | 1989-09-05 | 1991-09-03 | General Instrument Corporation | CATV subscriber apparatus with intelligent remote control |
US5056138A (en) | 1989-09-11 | 1991-10-08 | Nuphase Electronics, Inc. | Television selection system |
US5343516A (en) | 1989-09-29 | 1994-08-30 | Digital Systems Group, Inc. | Computer telecommunications signalling interface |
US5073930A (en) | 1989-10-19 | 1991-12-17 | Green James A | Method and system for receiving and distributing satellite transmitted television signals |
US5099319A (en) | 1989-10-23 | 1992-03-24 | Esch Arthur G | Video information delivery method and apparatus |
DE3935294A1 (en) | 1989-10-24 | 1991-04-25 | Grundig Emv | VIDEORECORDER WITH A DEVICE FOR STORING THE CONTENTS OF A TAPE MAGAZINE CONTAINING A VARIETY OF MAGNETIC TAPE CASSETTES |
US5353121A (en) | 1989-10-30 | 1994-10-04 | Starsight Telecast, Inc. | Television schedule system |
DE69033905T2 (en) | 1989-10-30 | 2003-02-06 | Starsight Telecast Inc | INTERFACE BETWEEN CABLE TELEVISION CODES AND TV ACCESSORIES |
US5130792A (en) | 1990-02-01 | 1992-07-14 | Usa Video Inc. | Store and forward video system |
US5237610A (en) | 1990-02-01 | 1993-08-17 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Independent external security module for a digitally upgradeable television signal decoder |
US5446919A (en) | 1990-02-20 | 1995-08-29 | Wilkins; Jeff K. | Communication system and method with demographically or psychographically defined audiences |
US5351075A (en) | 1990-03-20 | 1994-09-27 | Frederick Herz | Home video club television broadcasting system |
US5091782A (en) | 1990-04-09 | 1992-02-25 | General Instrument Corporation | Apparatus and method for adaptively compressing successive blocks of digital video |
US5020129A (en) | 1990-04-16 | 1991-05-28 | General Instrument Corporation | Addressable control system for CATV program distribution |
USD331760S (en) | 1990-05-29 | 1992-12-15 | Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. | Remote control |
IL94729A0 (en) | 1990-06-13 | 1991-04-15 | Yossef Yomdin | Compressed image production,storage transmission and processing |
US5057917A (en) | 1990-06-20 | 1991-10-15 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration | Real-time data compression of broadcast video signals |
US5260778A (en) | 1990-06-26 | 1993-11-09 | General Instrument Corporation | Apparatus for selective distribution of messages over a communications network |
CA2022302C (en) | 1990-07-30 | 1995-02-28 | Douglas J. Ballantyne | Method and apparatus for distribution of movies |
CA2499761C (en) | 1990-09-10 | 2005-11-29 | Starsight Telecast, Inc. | User interface for television schedule system |
US5103314A (en) | 1990-09-24 | 1992-04-07 | Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. | Color-coded system for selection of rf input terminals and associated scan lists |
JP2552030B2 (en) | 1990-09-27 | 1996-11-06 | マスプロ電工株式会社 | Satellite signal receiver |
US5319455A (en) | 1990-09-28 | 1994-06-07 | Ictv Inc. | System for distributing customized commercials to television viewers |
US5093718A (en) | 1990-09-28 | 1992-03-03 | Inteletext Systems, Inc. | Interactive home information system |
US5327554A (en) | 1990-11-29 | 1994-07-05 | Palazzi Iii Michael A | Interactive terminal for the access of remote database information |
US5172413A (en) | 1990-12-20 | 1992-12-15 | Sasktel | Secure hierarchial video delivery system and method |
USD329238S (en) | 1990-12-21 | 1992-09-08 | Tandy Corporation | Universal remote controller |
US5206722A (en) | 1990-12-28 | 1993-04-27 | At&T Bell Laboratories | Remote channel switching for video on demand service |
US5132992A (en) | 1991-01-07 | 1992-07-21 | Paul Yurt | Audio and video transmission and receiving system |
JPH04245818A (en) | 1991-01-31 | 1992-09-02 | Pioneer Electron Corp | Information transmission system |
JP3198119B2 (en) | 1991-02-18 | 2001-08-13 | 株式会社ブリヂストン | Rubber Crawler Structure |
US5285272A (en) | 1991-02-26 | 1994-02-08 | Sasktel | Video store and forward on demand apparatus and method |
US5253341A (en) | 1991-03-04 | 1993-10-12 | Rozmanith Anthony I | Remote query communication system |
WO1992017027A1 (en) * | 1991-03-19 | 1992-10-01 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Apparatus for generating and collecting viewing statistics |
US5216515A (en) | 1991-05-23 | 1993-06-01 | Adexpress Company | Addressable video feed system |
JP2622049B2 (en) | 1991-05-24 | 1997-06-18 | 松下電器産業株式会社 | Cable broadcasting system |
CA2044574A1 (en) | 1991-06-13 | 1992-12-14 | Frederick James Anderson | Information distribution through a communication subscription system utilizing an interactive storage and retrieval device |
JP3308562B2 (en) | 1991-07-15 | 2002-07-29 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Video conference terminal |
US5293540A (en) | 1991-07-29 | 1994-03-08 | Nview Corporation | Method and apparatus for merging independently generated internal video with external video |
US5237311A (en) | 1991-08-01 | 1993-08-17 | Picker International, Inc. | Hingedly supported integrated trackball and selection device |
US5289271A (en) | 1991-09-09 | 1994-02-22 | Watson John C | Cable television-usage system |
US5247347A (en) | 1991-09-27 | 1993-09-21 | Bell Atlantic Network Services, Inc. | Pstn architecture for video-on-demand services |
US5396546A (en) | 1991-10-03 | 1995-03-07 | Viscorp | Apparatus and method for automatic and user configurable information appliance |
US5404393A (en) | 1991-10-03 | 1995-04-04 | Viscorp | Method and apparatus for interactive television through use of menu windows |
US5416508A (en) | 1991-10-22 | 1995-05-16 | Pioneer Electronic Corporation | CATV system with transmission of program schedules, linked program broadcasts, and permissive ordering periods |
US5182639A (en) | 1991-10-30 | 1993-01-26 | Suganda Jutamulia | Real-time analytic pseudocolor encoder system |
US5404505A (en) | 1991-11-01 | 1995-04-04 | Finisar Corporation | System for scheduling transmission of indexed and requested database tiers on demand at varying repetition rates |
US5343239A (en) | 1991-11-20 | 1994-08-30 | Zing Systems, L.P. | Transaction based interactive television system |
US5724091A (en) | 1991-11-25 | 1998-03-03 | Actv, Inc. | Compressed digital data interactive program system |
JP3328951B2 (en) | 1992-02-07 | 2002-09-30 | ソニー株式会社 | TV receiver and tuning method |
US5390348A (en) | 1992-02-12 | 1995-02-14 | Creative Digital Inc. | System for tracking and correcting drift and dispersion in satellite transmission signals |
US5341166A (en) | 1992-02-27 | 1994-08-23 | Video Control Technology, Inc. | System for controlling selected devices having unique sets of control codes |
US5341474A (en) | 1992-05-15 | 1994-08-23 | Bell Communications Research, Inc. | Communications architecture and buffer for distributing information services |
US5469206A (en) | 1992-05-27 | 1995-11-21 | Philips Electronics North America Corporation | System and method for automatically correlating user preferences with electronic shopping information |
US5223924A (en) | 1992-05-27 | 1993-06-29 | North American Philips Corporation | System and method for automatically correlating user preferences with a T.V. program information database |
US5375068A (en) | 1992-06-03 | 1994-12-20 | Digital Equipment Corporation | Video teleconferencing for networked workstations |
JP3114375B2 (en) | 1992-07-24 | 2000-12-04 | 松下電器産業株式会社 | Liquid fuel supply device |
US5412416A (en) | 1992-08-07 | 1995-05-02 | Nbl Communications, Inc. | Video media distribution network apparatus and method |
US5432542A (en) | 1992-08-31 | 1995-07-11 | Television Computer, Inc. | Television receiver location identification |
US5644354A (en) | 1992-10-09 | 1997-07-01 | Prevue Interactive, Inc. | Interactive video system |
US5400401A (en) | 1992-10-30 | 1995-03-21 | Scientific Atlanta, Inc. | System and method for transmitting a plurality of digital services |
US5319707A (en) | 1992-11-02 | 1994-06-07 | Scientific Atlanta | System and method for multiplexing a plurality of digital program services for transmission to remote locations |
US5357276A (en) | 1992-12-01 | 1994-10-18 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Method of providing video on demand with VCR like functions |
US5367571A (en) | 1992-12-02 | 1994-11-22 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Subscriber terminal with plug in expansion card |
US5440632A (en) | 1992-12-02 | 1995-08-08 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Reprogrammable subscriber terminal |
US5389964A (en) * | 1992-12-30 | 1995-02-14 | Information Resources, Inc. | Broadcast channel substitution method and apparatus |
TW234223B (en) | 1993-01-05 | 1994-11-11 | Yuen Henry C | |
US5349638A (en) | 1993-01-25 | 1994-09-20 | Micro-Technology Inc.-Wisconsin | Universal calling/originating number identification |
CA2121151A1 (en) * | 1993-04-16 | 1994-10-17 | Trevor Lambert | Method and apparatus for automatic insertion of a television signal from a remote source |
TW318315B (en) | 1993-05-03 | 1997-10-21 | At & T Corp | |
JP3343990B2 (en) | 1993-05-19 | 2002-11-11 | ソニー株式会社 | Magnetic disk drive |
TW235358B (en) | 1993-06-11 | 1994-12-01 | Philips Electronics Nv | CD-I pointer device with 8 directions, 1 pixel/update |
US5355162A (en) | 1993-07-13 | 1994-10-11 | Pacific Ray Video Limited | Multi-standard cable television system |
US5481296A (en) | 1993-08-06 | 1996-01-02 | International Business Machines Corporation | Apparatus and method for selectively viewing video information |
US5442626A (en) | 1993-08-24 | 1995-08-15 | At&T Corp. | Digital communications system with symbol multiplexers |
US5410344A (en) | 1993-09-22 | 1995-04-25 | Arrowsmith Technologies, Inc. | Apparatus and method of selecting video programs based on viewers' preferences |
US5481294A (en) | 1993-10-27 | 1996-01-02 | A. C. Nielsen Company | Audience measurement system utilizing ancillary codes and passive signatures |
US5481542A (en) | 1993-11-10 | 1996-01-02 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Interactive information services control system |
US5473362A (en) | 1993-11-30 | 1995-12-05 | Microsoft Corporation | Video on demand system comprising stripped data across plural storable devices with time multiplex scheduling |
TW236744B (en) | 1994-03-23 | 1994-12-21 | Thomson Consumer Electronics | |
US5500794A (en) | 1994-03-31 | 1996-03-19 | Panasonic Technologies, Inc. | Distribution system and method for menu-driven user interface |
US5477263A (en) | 1994-05-26 | 1995-12-19 | Bell Atlantic Network Services, Inc. | Method and apparatus for video on demand with fast forward, reverse and channel pause |
US5774170A (en) * | 1994-12-13 | 1998-06-30 | Hite; Kenneth C. | System and method for delivering targeted advertisements to consumers |
US5512934A (en) * | 1994-12-29 | 1996-04-30 | At&T Corp. | System and method for transmission of programming on demand |
US5696906A (en) | 1995-03-09 | 1997-12-09 | Continental Cablevision, Inc. | Telecommunicaion user account management system and method |
US6006257A (en) * | 1995-09-29 | 1999-12-21 | Comverse Networks Systems, Inc. | Multimedia architecture for interactive advertising in which secondary programming is varied based upon viewer demographics and content of primary programming |
US5815671A (en) * | 1996-06-11 | 1998-09-29 | Command Audio Corporation | Method and apparatus for encoding and storing audio/video information for subsequent predetermined retrieval |
US6029045A (en) * | 1997-12-09 | 2000-02-22 | Cogent Technology, Inc. | System and method for inserting local content into programming content |
-
1998
- 1998-04-03 US US09/054,419 patent/US6463585B1/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
1999
- 1999-04-01 DE DE69913571T patent/DE69913571T2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-04-01 NZ NZ507649A patent/NZ507649A/en unknown
- 1999-04-01 AT AT01129434T patent/ATE256365T1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1999-04-01 ES ES99915198T patent/ES2181410T3/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-04-01 JP JP2000542919A patent/JP4849718B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1999-04-01 RU RU2000127757/09A patent/RU2252494C2/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1999-04-01 CA CA002326397A patent/CA2326397C/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-04-01 AT AT99915198T patent/ATE220840T1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1999-04-01 CN CNB998066710A patent/CN1156161C/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1999-04-01 EP EP99915198A patent/EP1068729B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-04-01 DE DE69911817T patent/DE69911817T2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-04-01 KR KR1020007011046A patent/KR100616036B1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1999-04-01 AT AT01129426T patent/ATE251370T1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1999-04-01 DE DE69902158T patent/DE69902158T2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-04-01 EP EP01129434A patent/EP1207697B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-04-01 IL IL13880599A patent/IL138805A/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1999-04-01 MX MXPA00009649A patent/MXPA00009649A/en active IP Right Grant
- 1999-04-01 BR BR9909391-0A patent/BR9909391A/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1999-04-01 WO PCT/US1999/007206 patent/WO1999052285A1/en active IP Right Grant
- 1999-04-01 EP EP01129426A patent/EP1207696B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-04-01 AU AU33776/99A patent/AU754241B2/en not_active Ceased
- 1999-04-01 CA CA2590528A patent/CA2590528C/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
2002
- 2002-10-04 US US10/263,806 patent/US7844985B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2002-10-28 HK HK02107794A patent/HK1048037A1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2002-10-28 HK HK02107795A patent/HK1048038A1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
Patent Citations (33)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4331974A (en) * | 1980-10-21 | 1982-05-25 | Iri, Inc. | Cable television with controlled signal substitution |
US4533948A (en) * | 1982-04-30 | 1985-08-06 | General Instrument Corporation | CATV Communication system |
US4546382A (en) * | 1983-06-09 | 1985-10-08 | Ctba Associates | Television and market research data collection system and method |
US4602279A (en) * | 1984-03-21 | 1986-07-22 | Actv, Inc. | Method for providing targeted profile interactive CATV displays |
US4630108A (en) * | 1984-03-26 | 1986-12-16 | A. C. Nielsen Company | Preprogrammed over-the-air marketing research system |
US4706121B1 (en) * | 1985-07-12 | 1993-12-14 | Insight Telecast, Inc. | Tv schedule system and process |
US4706121A (en) * | 1985-07-12 | 1987-11-10 | Patrick Young | TV schedule system and process |
US4665559A (en) * | 1985-07-23 | 1987-05-12 | Andrew Benun | FM-TV audio adapter |
US4890321A (en) * | 1986-07-08 | 1989-12-26 | Scientific Atlanta, Inc. | Communications format for a subscription television system permitting transmission of individual text messages to subscribers |
US4775935A (en) * | 1986-09-22 | 1988-10-04 | Westinghouse Electric Corp. | Video merchandising system with variable and adoptive product sequence presentation order |
US4945412A (en) * | 1988-06-14 | 1990-07-31 | Kramer Robert A | Method of and system for identification and verification of broadcasting television and radio program segments |
US5027400A (en) * | 1988-08-19 | 1991-06-25 | Hitachi Ltd. | Multimedia bidirectional broadcast system |
US5467402A (en) * | 1988-09-20 | 1995-11-14 | Hitachi, Ltd. | Distributed image recognizing system and traffic flow instrumentation system and crime/disaster preventing system using such image recognizing system |
US5293633A (en) * | 1988-12-06 | 1994-03-08 | General Instrument Corporation | Apparatus and method for providing digital audio in the cable television band |
US5155591A (en) * | 1989-10-23 | 1992-10-13 | General Instrument Corporation | Method and apparatus for providing demographically targeted television commercials |
US5029014A (en) * | 1989-10-26 | 1991-07-02 | James E. Lindstrom | Ad insertion system and method for broadcasting spot messages out of recorded sequence |
US5374951A (en) * | 1990-06-01 | 1994-12-20 | Peach Media Research, Inc. | Method and system for monitoring television viewing |
US5282028A (en) * | 1990-11-27 | 1994-01-25 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Remote control for digital music terminal with synchronized communications |
US5550863A (en) * | 1991-01-07 | 1996-08-27 | H. Lee Browne | Audio and video transmission and receiving system |
US5270809A (en) * | 1991-03-29 | 1993-12-14 | Scientific-Atlanta | Data return for a television transmission system |
US5192999A (en) * | 1991-04-25 | 1993-03-09 | Compuadd Corporation | Multipurpose computerized television |
US5477262A (en) * | 1991-11-29 | 1995-12-19 | Scientific-Altanta, Inc. | Method and apparatus for providing an on-screen user interface for a subscription television terminal |
US5317391A (en) * | 1991-11-29 | 1994-05-31 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Method and apparatus for providing message information to subscribers in a cable television system |
US5539871A (en) * | 1992-11-02 | 1996-07-23 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for accessing associated data sets in a multimedia environment in a data processing system |
US5410326A (en) * | 1992-12-04 | 1995-04-25 | Goldstein; Steven W. | Programmable remote control device for interacting with a plurality of remotely controlled devices |
US6201536B1 (en) * | 1992-12-09 | 2001-03-13 | Discovery Communications, Inc. | Network manager for cable television system headends |
US5381477A (en) * | 1993-02-16 | 1995-01-10 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Method of selecting cable television converter groups |
US5715315A (en) * | 1993-08-19 | 1998-02-03 | News Datacom Ltd | CATV systems |
US5515098A (en) * | 1994-09-08 | 1996-05-07 | Carles; John B. | System and method for selectively distributing commercial messages over a communications network |
US5635989A (en) * | 1996-02-13 | 1997-06-03 | Hughes Electronics | Method and apparatus for sorting and searching a television program guide |
US5826165A (en) * | 1997-01-21 | 1998-10-20 | Hughes Electronics Corporation | Advertisement reconciliation system |
US6286140B1 (en) * | 1997-11-20 | 2001-09-04 | Thomas P. Ivanyi | System and method for measuring and storing information pertaining to television viewer or user behavior |
US6270809B1 (en) * | 1998-11-06 | 2001-08-07 | Phytotech Inc., | Nutritional supplements |
Cited By (477)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8966542B2 (en) | 1995-04-25 | 2015-02-24 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for providing media content and interactive content |
US8490145B2 (en) | 1995-04-25 | 2013-07-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for providing television services |
US8914839B2 (en) | 1995-04-25 | 2014-12-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for providing television services |
US8819758B2 (en) | 1995-04-25 | 2014-08-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for providing television services |
US9319735B2 (en) | 1995-06-07 | 2016-04-19 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Electronic television program guide schedule system and method with data feed access |
US8869204B2 (en) | 1996-05-03 | 2014-10-21 | Starsight Telecast, Inc. | Method and system for displaying advertisements in an electronic program guide |
US9015749B2 (en) | 1997-07-21 | 2015-04-21 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | System and method for modifying advertisement responsive to EPG information |
US9191722B2 (en) * | 1997-07-21 | 2015-11-17 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | System and method for modifying advertisement responsive to EPG information |
US8918807B2 (en) | 1997-07-21 | 2014-12-23 | Gemstar Development Corporation | System and method for modifying advertisement responsive to EPG information |
US20030118323A1 (en) * | 1998-06-12 | 2003-06-26 | Ismail Labeeb K. | Television program recording with user preference determination |
US8351763B2 (en) | 1998-06-12 | 2013-01-08 | Thomson Licensing | Television program recording with user preference determination |
US20050204386A1 (en) * | 1998-06-12 | 2005-09-15 | Ismail Labeeb K. | Television program recording with user preference determination |
US8351765B2 (en) | 1998-06-12 | 2013-01-08 | Thomson Licensing | Television program recording with user preference determination |
US8352984B2 (en) | 1998-06-12 | 2013-01-08 | Thomson Licensing | System and method for generating and managing user preference information for scheduled and stored television programs |
US9426509B2 (en) | 1998-08-21 | 2016-08-23 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Client-server electronic program guide |
US7984466B2 (en) * | 1999-04-20 | 2011-07-19 | Prime Research Alliance E, Inc. | Advertising management system for digital video streams |
US20070157231A1 (en) * | 1999-04-20 | 2007-07-05 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Advertising Management System for Digital Video Streams |
US20010032333A1 (en) * | 2000-02-18 | 2001-10-18 | Gregory Flickinger | Scheduling and presenting IPG ads in conjunction with programming ads in a television environment |
US8042131B2 (en) | 2000-02-18 | 2011-10-18 | Prime Research Alliance E, Inc. | Scheduling and presenting IPG ads in conjunction with programming ads in a television environment of application |
US10587932B1 (en) | 2000-02-18 | 2020-03-10 | Prime Research Alliance E, Llc | Scheduling and presenting IPG ads in conjunction with programming ads in a television environment |
US10034062B1 (en) | 2000-02-18 | 2018-07-24 | Prime Research Alliance E, Inc. | Scheduling and presenting IPG ads in conjunction with programming ads in a television environment |
US8671426B2 (en) | 2000-02-18 | 2014-03-11 | Prime Research Alliance E, Inc. | Scheduling and presenting IPG ads in conjunction with programming ads in a television environment |
US7653923B2 (en) | 2000-02-18 | 2010-01-26 | Prime Research Alliance E, Inc. | Scheduling and presenting IPG ads in conjunction with programming ads in a television environment |
US20090210902A1 (en) * | 2000-02-25 | 2009-08-20 | Malcolm Slaney | Targeted television content display |
US8910199B2 (en) * | 2000-02-25 | 2014-12-09 | Interval Licensing Llc | Targeted television content display |
US10080063B2 (en) | 2000-03-02 | 2018-09-18 | Tivo Solutions Inc. | Method of sharing personal media using a digital recorder |
US20050216942A1 (en) * | 2000-03-02 | 2005-09-29 | Tivo Inc. | Multicasting multimedia content distribution system |
US20110093892A1 (en) * | 2000-03-02 | 2011-04-21 | Tivo Inc. | Method of Sharing Personal Media Using a Digital Recorder |
US8812850B2 (en) | 2000-03-02 | 2014-08-19 | Tivo Inc. | Secure multimedia transfer system |
US20100169939A1 (en) * | 2000-03-02 | 2010-07-01 | Matt Arnold | Method of Sharing Personal Media Using a Digital Recorder |
US10206010B2 (en) | 2000-03-02 | 2019-02-12 | Tivo Solutions Inc. | Method of sharing personal media using a digital recorder |
US20050108769A1 (en) * | 2000-03-02 | 2005-05-19 | Tivo Inc. | Method of sharing personal media using a digital recorder |
US8171520B2 (en) | 2000-03-02 | 2012-05-01 | Tivo Inc. | Method of sharing personal media using a digital recorder |
US8261315B2 (en) | 2000-03-02 | 2012-09-04 | Tivo Inc. | Multicasting multimedia content distribution system |
US20080281601A1 (en) * | 2000-03-31 | 2008-11-13 | United Video Properties, Inc. | User speech interfaces for interactive media guidance applications |
US7783490B2 (en) * | 2000-03-31 | 2010-08-24 | United Video Properties, Inc. | User speech interfaces for interactive media guidance applications |
US20080162145A1 (en) * | 2000-03-31 | 2008-07-03 | Reichardt M Scott | User speech interfaces for interactive media guidance applications |
US7783491B2 (en) | 2000-03-31 | 2010-08-24 | United Video Properties, Inc. | User speech interfaces for interactive media guidance applications |
US10713009B2 (en) | 2000-03-31 | 2020-07-14 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | User speech interfaces for interactive media guidance applications |
US8660846B2 (en) | 2000-03-31 | 2014-02-25 | United Video Properties, Inc. | User speech interfaces for interactive media guidance applications |
US20070016847A1 (en) * | 2000-03-31 | 2007-01-18 | United Video Properties, Inc. | User speech interfaces for interactive media guidance applications |
US8121846B2 (en) * | 2000-03-31 | 2012-02-21 | United Video Properties, Inc. | User speech interfaces for interactive media guidance applications |
US8433571B2 (en) | 2000-03-31 | 2013-04-30 | United Video Properties, Inc. | User speech interfaces for interactive media guidance applications |
US10521190B2 (en) | 2000-03-31 | 2019-12-31 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | User speech interfaces for interactive media guidance applications |
US9349369B2 (en) | 2000-03-31 | 2016-05-24 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | User speech interfaces for interactive media guidance applications |
US7228341B2 (en) * | 2000-04-07 | 2007-06-05 | Giacalone Jr Louis D | Method and system for electronically distributing, displaying and controlling advertising and other communicative media |
US20020023274A1 (en) * | 2000-04-07 | 2002-02-21 | Giacalone, Louis D. | Method and system for electronically distributing, displaying and controlling advertising and other communicative media |
US20070118590A1 (en) * | 2000-04-07 | 2007-05-24 | Giacalone Louis Jr | Method and system for electronic scheduling for playback of media contents |
US9015237B2 (en) | 2000-04-07 | 2015-04-21 | Bally Gaming, Inc. | Method for scheduling distribution of content to a plurality of media devices |
US20090240721A1 (en) * | 2000-04-07 | 2009-09-24 | Bally Gaming, Inc. | Method and system for electronically scheduling playback of media contents |
US7523156B2 (en) | 2000-04-07 | 2009-04-21 | Bally Gaming, Inc. | Method and system for electronic scheduling for playback of media contents |
US8719328B2 (en) | 2000-04-07 | 2014-05-06 | Bally Gaming, Inc. | Method for scheduling distribution of content to a plurality of media devices |
US7552460B2 (en) | 2000-05-08 | 2009-06-23 | Microsoft Corporation | Modifying an electronic program guide based on viewer statistics |
US7478414B1 (en) * | 2000-05-08 | 2009-01-13 | Microsoft Corporation | Method and apparatus for alerting a television viewers to the programs other viewers are watching |
US7624408B2 (en) * | 2000-06-13 | 2009-11-24 | Sony Corporation | Apparatus, method, and system for information processing, and recording medium |
US20020053085A1 (en) * | 2000-06-13 | 2002-05-02 | Yasuhiro Toguri | Apparatus, method, and system for information processing, and recording meduim |
US8087051B2 (en) | 2000-06-30 | 2011-12-27 | Thomson Licensing | Database management system and method for electronic program guide and television channel lineup organization |
US20020186296A1 (en) * | 2000-06-30 | 2002-12-12 | Metabyte Networks, Inc. | Database management system and method for electronic program guide and television channel lineup organization |
US8495679B2 (en) | 2000-06-30 | 2013-07-23 | Thomson Licensing | Method and apparatus for delivery of television programs and targeted de-coupled advertising |
US10104414B1 (en) | 2000-08-31 | 2018-10-16 | Prime Research Alliance E, Inc. | Method and system for targeted advertisement filtering and storage |
US8813126B1 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2014-08-19 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Method and system for targeted advertisement filtering and storage |
US20060248555A1 (en) * | 2000-09-08 | 2006-11-02 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Targeted advertising through electronic program guide |
US7870576B2 (en) | 2000-09-08 | 2011-01-11 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Targeted advertising through electronic program guide |
US20030097657A1 (en) * | 2000-09-14 | 2003-05-22 | Yiming Zhou | Method and system for delivery of targeted programming |
US20060206912A1 (en) * | 2000-09-25 | 2006-09-14 | Klarfeld Kenneth A | System and method for personalized TV |
US8938758B2 (en) | 2000-09-25 | 2015-01-20 | Thomson Licensing | System and method for personalized TV |
US9781478B2 (en) | 2000-09-25 | 2017-10-03 | Thomson Licensing | System and method for personalized TV |
US8302127B2 (en) | 2000-09-25 | 2012-10-30 | Thomson Licensing | System and method for personalized TV |
US20030067554A1 (en) * | 2000-09-25 | 2003-04-10 | Klarfeld Kenneth A. | System and method for personalized TV |
US20060212904A1 (en) * | 2000-09-25 | 2006-09-21 | Klarfeld Kenneth A | System and method for personalized TV |
US20020042914A1 (en) * | 2000-10-11 | 2002-04-11 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Systems and methods for providing targeted advertisements based on current activity |
US7707608B2 (en) * | 2000-11-08 | 2010-04-27 | Cox Communications, Inc. | Messaging protocol for interactive delivery system |
US20070089141A1 (en) * | 2000-11-08 | 2007-04-19 | Sedna Patent Services, Llc | Messaging protocol for interactive delivery system |
US7822639B2 (en) | 2000-11-28 | 2010-10-26 | Almondnet, Inc. | Added-revenue off-site targeted internet advertising |
US20110040607A1 (en) * | 2000-11-28 | 2011-02-17 | Roy Shkedi | Added-Revenue off-site targeted internet advertising |
US10628857B2 (en) | 2000-11-28 | 2020-04-21 | Almondnet, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for facilitated off-site targeted internet advertising |
US10026100B2 (en) | 2000-11-28 | 2018-07-17 | Almondnet, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for facilitated off-site targeted internet advertising |
US8600815B2 (en) | 2000-11-28 | 2013-12-03 | Almondnet, Inc. | Methods and systems for facilitating off-site internet advertising and dividing compensation pursuant to contract |
US8244586B2 (en) | 2000-11-28 | 2012-08-14 | Almondnet, Inc. | Computerized systems for added-revenue off-site targeted internet advertising |
US20050086113A1 (en) * | 2000-11-28 | 2005-04-21 | Roy Shkedi | Super-saturation method for information-media |
US20020087978A1 (en) * | 2000-12-30 | 2002-07-04 | Nicholson Robert D. | System and method of selective advertising on a TV channel |
US7856644B2 (en) * | 2000-12-30 | 2010-12-21 | Road Runner Holdco Llc | System and method of selective advertising on a TV channel |
US8495680B2 (en) | 2001-01-09 | 2013-07-23 | Thomson Licensing | System and method for behavioral model clustering in television usage, targeted advertising via model clustering, and preference programming based on behavioral model clusters |
US8046797B2 (en) | 2001-01-09 | 2011-10-25 | Thomson Licensing | System, method, and software application for targeted advertising via behavioral model clustering, and preference programming based on behavioral model clusters |
US8850465B2 (en) | 2001-01-09 | 2014-09-30 | Thomson Licensing | System, method, and software application for targeted advertising via behavioral model clustering, and preference programming based on behavioral model clusters |
US9277264B2 (en) | 2001-01-09 | 2016-03-01 | Thomson Licensing | System, method, and software application for targeted advertising via behavioral model clustering, and preference programming based on behavioral model clusters |
US20030101451A1 (en) * | 2001-01-09 | 2003-05-29 | Isaac Bentolila | System, method, and software application for targeted advertising via behavioral model clustering, and preference programming based on behavioral model clusters |
US7395544B2 (en) | 2001-03-29 | 2008-07-01 | Microsoft Corporation | Regulating the quality of a broadcast based on monitored viewing behavior information |
US7730509B2 (en) * | 2001-06-08 | 2010-06-01 | Invidi Technologies Corporation | Asset delivery reporting in a broadcast network |
US20070261072A1 (en) * | 2001-06-08 | 2007-11-08 | Boulet Daniel A | Asset delivery reporting in a broadcast network |
US8538892B2 (en) | 2001-06-21 | 2013-09-17 | Thomson Licenging | Method and system for electronic purchases using an intelligent data carrier medium, electronic coupon system, and interactive TV infrastructure |
US20030236756A1 (en) * | 2001-06-21 | 2003-12-25 | Metabyte Networks, Inc. | Method and system for electronic purchases using an intelligent data carrier medium, electronic coupon system, and interactive TV infrastructure |
US8818871B2 (en) | 2001-06-21 | 2014-08-26 | Thomson Licensing | Method and system for electronic purchases using an intelligent data carrier medium, electronic coupon system, and interactive TV infrastructure |
US20050066361A1 (en) * | 2002-05-15 | 2005-03-24 | Dentsu Inc. | Advertising-marketing system and method |
US20030233655A1 (en) * | 2002-06-18 | 2003-12-18 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and apparatus for an adaptive stereotypical profile for recommending items representing a user's interests |
US11398171B2 (en) | 2002-09-06 | 2022-07-26 | Freewheel Media, Inc. | System for authoring and editing personalized message campaigns |
US20040117257A1 (en) * | 2002-09-06 | 2004-06-17 | Seth Haberman | System for authoring and editing personalized message campaigns |
US10134313B2 (en) * | 2002-09-06 | 2018-11-20 | Visible World, Inc. | System for authoring and editing personalized message campaigns |
WO2004043063A1 (en) * | 2002-11-02 | 2004-05-21 | Alticast, Corporation | System for surveying information of viewers on digital broadcasting |
US7227583B2 (en) * | 2002-12-11 | 2007-06-05 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Digital TV method for switching channel automatically |
US20040114052A1 (en) * | 2002-12-11 | 2004-06-17 | Sin Su Hyun | Digital TV and method for switching channel automatically |
US7930721B1 (en) * | 2003-04-02 | 2011-04-19 | Lodgenet Interactive Corporation | Method and system for offering interactive controls in a lodging entertainment system |
US20040216041A1 (en) * | 2003-04-24 | 2004-10-28 | Amir Ajizadeh | System and methods in interactive television and radio ratings through the internet and the telephone |
US8453175B2 (en) * | 2003-05-29 | 2013-05-28 | Eat.Tv, Llc | System for presentation of multimedia content |
US20040268413A1 (en) * | 2003-05-29 | 2004-12-30 | Reid Duane M. | System for presentation of multimedia content |
US8635643B2 (en) | 2003-06-30 | 2014-01-21 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for providing interactive media content over a network |
US20050021396A1 (en) * | 2003-07-24 | 2005-01-27 | Bcmg Limited | Method of assessing the cost effectiveness of advertising |
US9906827B2 (en) | 2003-08-12 | 2018-02-27 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Technique for effectively delivering targeted advertisements through a communications network having limited bandwidth |
US9247288B2 (en) | 2003-08-12 | 2016-01-26 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Technique for effectively delivering targeted advertisements through a communications network having limited bandwidth |
US20070089129A1 (en) * | 2003-11-10 | 2007-04-19 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Two-step commercial recommendation |
JP2007515865A (en) * | 2003-11-10 | 2007-06-14 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ | 2-stage commercial recommended |
KR101110755B1 (en) | 2003-11-10 | 2012-03-08 | 코닌클리케 필립스 일렉트로닉스 엔.브이. | Two-step commercial recommendation |
US8286203B2 (en) | 2003-12-19 | 2012-10-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for enhanced hot key delivery |
US9544646B2 (en) | 2003-12-19 | 2017-01-10 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for enhanced hot key delivery |
US8413200B2 (en) * | 2004-02-12 | 2013-04-02 | Sony Corporation | Cable television viewing statistics |
US20110099570A1 (en) * | 2004-02-12 | 2011-04-28 | Aran London Sadja | Cable Diagnostic and Monitoring System |
US20080097808A1 (en) * | 2004-03-15 | 2008-04-24 | Godwin John P | Device and method for efficient delivery of redundant national television signals |
US9578355B2 (en) | 2004-06-29 | 2017-02-21 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Method and apparatus for network bandwidth allocation |
US10440342B2 (en) | 2004-11-19 | 2019-10-08 | Tivo Solutions Inc. | Secure transfer of previously broadcasted content |
US9258592B2 (en) * | 2004-11-19 | 2016-02-09 | Tivo Inc. | Method and apparatus for secure transfer of previously broadcasted content |
US20060127039A1 (en) * | 2004-11-19 | 2006-06-15 | Tivo Inc. | Method and apparatus for secure transfer of previously broadcasted content |
US20090249383A1 (en) * | 2004-12-15 | 2009-10-01 | Packet Vision Limited | Broadcast data network system |
US20110225612A1 (en) * | 2005-01-27 | 2011-09-15 | Arthur Vaysman | User-interactive displays including video-on-demand availability reminders |
US20110209179A1 (en) * | 2005-01-27 | 2011-08-25 | Arthur Vaysman | Method and apparatus for generating multiple dynamic user-interactive displays |
US10904624B2 (en) | 2005-01-27 | 2021-01-26 | Webtuner Corporation | Method and apparatus for generating multiple dynamic user-interactive displays |
US20110209173A1 (en) * | 2005-01-27 | 2011-08-25 | Arthur Vaysman | Controlling access to user-interactive displays including dynamic video mosaic elements |
US20070011702A1 (en) * | 2005-01-27 | 2007-01-11 | Arthur Vaysman | Dynamic mosaic extended electronic programming guide for television program selection and display |
US9930387B2 (en) | 2005-02-01 | 2018-03-27 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Method and apparatus for network bandwidth conservation |
US9065979B2 (en) * | 2005-07-01 | 2015-06-23 | The Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Promotional placement in media works |
US20070002360A1 (en) * | 2005-07-01 | 2007-01-04 | Searete Llc, A Limited Liability Corporation Of The State Of Delaware | Modifying restricted images |
US9092928B2 (en) | 2005-07-01 | 2015-07-28 | The Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Implementing group content substitution in media works |
US8910033B2 (en) | 2005-07-01 | 2014-12-09 | The Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Implementing group content substitution in media works |
US8126938B2 (en) * | 2005-07-01 | 2012-02-28 | The Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Group content substitution in media works |
US8792673B2 (en) | 2005-07-01 | 2014-07-29 | The Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Modifying restricted images |
US9230601B2 (en) | 2005-07-01 | 2016-01-05 | Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Media markup system for content alteration in derivative works |
US7860342B2 (en) | 2005-07-01 | 2010-12-28 | The Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Modifying restricted images |
US9426387B2 (en) | 2005-07-01 | 2016-08-23 | Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Image anonymization |
US8732087B2 (en) | 2005-07-01 | 2014-05-20 | The Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Authorization for media content alteration |
US9583141B2 (en) | 2005-07-01 | 2017-02-28 | Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Implementing audio substitution options in media works |
US8875196B2 (en) | 2005-08-13 | 2014-10-28 | Webtuner Corp. | System for network and local content access |
US8995973B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-03-31 | Millennial Media, Inc. | System for targeting advertising content to a plurality of mobile communication facilities |
US9703892B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2017-07-11 | Millennial Media Llc | Predictive text completion for a mobile communication facility |
US9201979B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-12-01 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Syndication of a behavioral profile associated with an availability condition using a monetization platform |
US9195993B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-11-24 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Mobile advertisement syndication |
US9271023B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2016-02-23 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Presentation of search results to mobile devices based on television viewing history |
US9110996B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-08-18 | Millennial Media, Inc. | System for targeting advertising content to a plurality of mobile communication facilities |
US9076175B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-07-07 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Mobile comparison shopping |
US9384500B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2016-07-05 | Millennial Media, Inc. | System for targeting advertising content to a plurality of mobile communication facilities |
US9386150B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2016-07-05 | Millennia Media, Inc. | Presentation of sponsored content on mobile device based on transaction event |
US9058406B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-06-16 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Management of multiple advertising inventories using a monetization platform |
US9390436B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2016-07-12 | Millennial Media, Inc. | System for targeting advertising content to a plurality of mobile communication facilities |
US9031986B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-05-12 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Presenting sponsored content on a mobile communication facility |
US9223878B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-12-29 | Millenial Media, Inc. | User characteristic influenced search results |
US20100057801A1 (en) * | 2005-09-14 | 2010-03-04 | Jorey Ramer | User Characteristic Influenced Search Results |
US8995968B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-03-31 | Millennial Media, Inc. | System for targeting advertising content to a plurality of mobile communication facilities |
US8989718B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-03-24 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Idle screen advertising |
US9454772B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2016-09-27 | Millennial Media Inc. | Interaction analysis and prioritization of mobile content |
US9471925B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2016-10-18 | Millennial Media Llc | Increasing mobile interactivity |
US8958779B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-02-17 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Mobile dynamic advertisement creation and placement |
US20100169179A1 (en) * | 2005-09-14 | 2010-07-01 | Jorey Ramer | Dynamic Bidding and Expected Value |
US10803482B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2020-10-13 | Verizon Media Inc. | Exclusivity bidding for mobile sponsored content |
US9754287B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2017-09-05 | Millenial Media LLC | System for targeting advertising content to a plurality of mobile communication facilities |
US9785975B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2017-10-10 | Millennial Media Llc | Dynamic bidding and expected value |
US9811589B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2017-11-07 | Millennial Media Llc | Presentation of search results to mobile devices based on television viewing history |
US8843395B2 (en) * | 2005-09-14 | 2014-09-23 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Dynamic bidding and expected value |
US10038756B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2018-07-31 | Millenial Media LLC | Managing sponsored content based on device characteristics |
US10911894B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2021-02-02 | Verizon Media Inc. | Use of dynamic content generation parameters based on previous performance of those parameters |
US10592930B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2020-03-17 | Millenial Media, LLC | Syndication of a behavioral profile using a monetization platform |
US8582584B2 (en) * | 2005-10-04 | 2013-11-12 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Self-monitoring and optimizing network apparatus and methods |
US20070076728A1 (en) * | 2005-10-04 | 2007-04-05 | Remi Rieger | Self-monitoring and optimizing network apparatus and methods |
US8156531B2 (en) | 2005-10-07 | 2012-04-10 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Receiving device, server, television receiver, mobile terminal, system, receiving method, information processing program, and storage medium |
US20100138873A1 (en) * | 2005-10-07 | 2010-06-03 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Receiving device, server, television receiver, mobile terminal, system, receiving method, information processing program, and storage medium |
US8914301B2 (en) | 2005-10-28 | 2014-12-16 | Joyce A. Book | Method and apparatus for dynamic ad creation |
WO2007064446A1 (en) * | 2005-11-30 | 2007-06-07 | Microsoft Corporation | Selective advertisement display for multimedia content |
US8651960B2 (en) | 2005-12-15 | 2014-02-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System, method and computer program for enabling an interactive game |
US8317618B2 (en) | 2005-12-15 | 2012-11-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | System, method and computer program for enabling an interactive game |
WO2007073078A1 (en) * | 2005-12-19 | 2007-06-28 | Alticast Corp. | Interactive advertisement system and method for the provision of interactive advertisement using the same |
US20100262485A1 (en) * | 2006-01-05 | 2010-10-14 | Hong-Goo Cho | Advertisement providing system and an advertisement providing method |
US8321266B2 (en) * | 2006-01-05 | 2012-11-27 | Hong-Goo Cho | Advertisement providing system and an advertisement providing method |
US20090006210A1 (en) * | 2006-01-05 | 2009-01-01 | Hyundai Gangbyeon Hometown 106-801 | Advertisement Providing System and an Advertisement Providing Method |
WO2007078168A1 (en) * | 2006-01-05 | 2007-07-12 | Lee, Myoung | An advertisement providing system and an advertisement providing method |
US8161412B2 (en) | 2006-01-13 | 2012-04-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Systems, methods, and computer program products for providing interactive content |
US8402503B2 (en) | 2006-02-08 | 2013-03-19 | At& T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Interactive program manager and methods for presenting program content |
US10735812B2 (en) | 2006-02-08 | 2020-08-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Interactive program manager and methods for presenting program content |
US9544648B2 (en) | 2006-02-08 | 2017-01-10 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Interactive program manager and methods for presenting program content |
US9218106B2 (en) | 2006-02-08 | 2015-12-22 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Interactive program manager and methods for presenting program content |
US10009652B2 (en) | 2006-02-27 | 2018-06-26 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for selecting digital access technology for programming and data delivery |
US10051302B2 (en) | 2006-02-27 | 2018-08-14 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for device capabilities discovery and utilization within a content distribution network |
US10743066B2 (en) | 2006-02-27 | 2020-08-11 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for selecting digital access technology for programming and data delivery |
US8065710B2 (en) | 2006-03-02 | 2011-11-22 | At& T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatuses and methods for interactive communication concerning multimedia content |
US8037506B2 (en) | 2006-03-03 | 2011-10-11 | Verimatrix, Inc. | Movie studio-based network distribution system and method |
US20070220575A1 (en) * | 2006-03-03 | 2007-09-20 | Verimatrix, Inc. | Movie studio-based network distribution system and method |
US10984037B2 (en) | 2006-03-06 | 2021-04-20 | Veveo, Inc. | Methods and systems for selecting and presenting content on a first system based on user preferences learned on a second system |
US9128987B2 (en) | 2006-03-06 | 2015-09-08 | Veveo, Inc. | Methods and systems for selecting and presenting content based on a comparison of preference signatures from multiple users |
US9092503B2 (en) | 2006-03-06 | 2015-07-28 | Veveo, Inc. | Methods and systems for selecting and presenting content based on dynamically identifying microgenres associated with the content |
US9075861B2 (en) | 2006-03-06 | 2015-07-07 | Veveo, Inc. | Methods and systems for segmenting relative user preferences into fine-grain and coarse-grain collections |
US9749693B2 (en) | 2006-03-24 | 2017-08-29 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Interactive media guidance application with intelligent navigation and display features |
US10623462B2 (en) | 2006-05-24 | 2020-04-14 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Personal content server apparatus and methods |
US9832246B2 (en) | 2006-05-24 | 2017-11-28 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Personal content server apparatus and methods |
US11082723B2 (en) | 2006-05-24 | 2021-08-03 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Secondary content insertion apparatus and methods |
US11388461B2 (en) | 2006-06-13 | 2022-07-12 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for providing virtual content over a network |
US10129576B2 (en) | 2006-06-13 | 2018-11-13 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for providing virtual content over a network |
US20080010584A1 (en) * | 2006-07-05 | 2008-01-10 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and apparatus for presentation of a presentation content stream |
US20080040742A1 (en) * | 2006-08-11 | 2008-02-14 | Sbc Knowledge Ventures L.P. | Method and system for inserting advertisement data into an internet protocol television network |
US20080059308A1 (en) * | 2006-09-02 | 2008-03-06 | David Gerken | Methods and apparatus for using poll results to target and/or select advertisements |
US20080097854A1 (en) * | 2006-10-24 | 2008-04-24 | Hello-Hello, Inc. | Method for Creating and Analyzing Advertisements |
EP3471407A1 (en) * | 2006-10-30 | 2019-04-17 | TiVo Solutions Inc. | Method and apparatus for downloading ancillary program data to a dvr |
US20080107401A1 (en) * | 2006-10-31 | 2008-05-08 | Eric Vannier | Performing Trick Play Functions in a Digital Video Recorder with Efficient Use of Resources |
US8270819B2 (en) | 2006-10-31 | 2012-09-18 | Tivo Inc. | Performing trick play functions in a digital video recorder with efficient use of resources |
US8401366B2 (en) | 2006-10-31 | 2013-03-19 | Tivo Inc. | Method and apparatus for downloading ancillary program data to a DVR |
EP3349438A1 (en) * | 2006-10-31 | 2018-07-18 | TiVo Solutions Inc. | Method and apparatus for downloading ancillary program data to a dvr |
US20080145034A1 (en) * | 2006-10-31 | 2008-06-19 | Tivo Inc. | Method and apparatus for downloading ancillary program data to a DVR |
US20080109298A1 (en) * | 2006-10-31 | 2008-05-08 | Tivo Inc. | Method for enhancing television advertising viewership |
CN101523911B (en) * | 2006-10-31 | 2013-08-28 | Tivo有限公司 | Method and apparatus for downloading ancillary program data to dvr |
WO2008055180A3 (en) * | 2006-10-31 | 2008-06-26 | Tivo Inc | Method and apparatus for downloading ancillary program data to a dvr |
US9374605B2 (en) | 2006-10-31 | 2016-06-21 | Tivo Inc. | Method for enhancing television advertising viewership |
US20080143887A1 (en) * | 2006-12-14 | 2008-06-19 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Broadcast receiving apparatus and method for distinguishing, displaying and automatically tuning to specific broadcast channel |
US20080155589A1 (en) * | 2006-12-22 | 2008-06-26 | Nortel Networks Limited | Method and system to control advertising |
US8209721B2 (en) * | 2007-01-09 | 2012-06-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method of providing program recommendations |
US20080168502A1 (en) * | 2007-01-09 | 2008-07-10 | At&T Knowledge Ventures, Lp | System and method of providing program recommendations |
US8203609B2 (en) | 2007-01-31 | 2012-06-19 | The Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Anonymization pursuant to a broadcasted policy |
US8126190B2 (en) | 2007-01-31 | 2012-02-28 | The Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Targeted obstrufication of an image |
US20080181533A1 (en) * | 2007-01-31 | 2008-07-31 | Searete Llc, A Limited Liability Corporation Of The State Of Delaware | Targeted obstrufication of an image |
US11930235B2 (en) | 2007-02-01 | 2024-03-12 | Invidi Technologies Corporation | Targeting content based on location |
US11540000B2 (en) | 2007-02-01 | 2022-12-27 | Invidi Technologies Corporation | Targeting content based on location |
US20090044246A1 (en) * | 2007-02-01 | 2009-02-12 | Patrick Sheehan | Targeting content based on location |
US8850473B2 (en) * | 2007-02-01 | 2014-09-30 | Invidi Technologies Corporation | Targeting content based on location |
US20100122162A1 (en) * | 2007-02-16 | 2010-05-13 | Satoshi Terada | Content display device, television receiver, content display method, content display control program, and recording medium |
US8479096B2 (en) | 2007-02-16 | 2013-07-02 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Content display device, television receiver, content display method, content display control program, and recording medium |
US10694256B2 (en) | 2007-03-09 | 2020-06-23 | Rovi Technologies Corporation | Media content search results ranked by popularity |
US9326025B2 (en) | 2007-03-09 | 2016-04-26 | Rovi Technologies Corporation | Media content search results ranked by popularity |
US10863220B2 (en) | 2007-03-20 | 2020-12-08 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for content delivery and replacement in a network |
US10225592B2 (en) | 2007-03-20 | 2019-03-05 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for content delivery and replacement in a network |
WO2008116305A1 (en) * | 2007-03-26 | 2008-10-02 | Technologies Ezoom Exponentiel Inc. | Method and system for targeted advertising in a distributed network |
US10178442B2 (en) | 2007-04-17 | 2019-01-08 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted television advertisements based on online behavior |
US20090049468A1 (en) * | 2007-04-17 | 2009-02-19 | Almondnet, Inc. | Targeted television advertisements based on online behavior |
US11303973B2 (en) | 2007-04-17 | 2022-04-12 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted television advertisements based on online behavior |
US10715878B2 (en) | 2007-04-17 | 2020-07-14 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted television advertisements based on online behavior |
US9369779B2 (en) | 2007-04-17 | 2016-06-14 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted television advertisements based on online behavior |
US20100325659A1 (en) * | 2007-04-17 | 2010-12-23 | Almondnet, Inc. | Targeted television advertisements based on online behavior |
US11974025B2 (en) | 2007-04-17 | 2024-04-30 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted television advertisements based on online behavior |
US8695032B2 (en) | 2007-04-17 | 2014-04-08 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted television advertisements based on online behavior |
US7861260B2 (en) | 2007-04-17 | 2010-12-28 | Almondnet, Inc. | Targeted television advertisements based on online behavior |
US11805300B2 (en) | 2007-04-17 | 2023-10-31 | Intent IQ, LLC | System for taking action using cross-device profile information |
US20080259906A1 (en) * | 2007-04-17 | 2008-10-23 | Almondnet, Inc. | Targeted television advertisements based on online behavior |
US9813778B2 (en) | 2007-04-17 | 2017-11-07 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted television advertisements based on online behavior |
US11564015B2 (en) | 2007-04-17 | 2023-01-24 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted television advertisements based on online behavior |
US11589136B2 (en) | 2007-04-17 | 2023-02-21 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted television advertisements based on online behavior |
US8281336B2 (en) | 2007-04-17 | 2012-10-02 | Intenti IQ, LLC | Targeted television advertisements based on online behavior |
US8677398B2 (en) | 2007-04-17 | 2014-03-18 | Intent IQ, LLC | Systems and methods for taking action with respect to one network-connected device based on activity on another device connected to the same network |
US9215512B2 (en) | 2007-04-27 | 2015-12-15 | Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Implementation of media content alteration |
US10911313B2 (en) | 2007-05-04 | 2021-02-02 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for predictive capacity allocation |
US9398346B2 (en) | 2007-05-04 | 2016-07-19 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for predictive capacity allocation |
US20080273591A1 (en) * | 2007-05-04 | 2008-11-06 | Brooks Paul D | Methods and apparatus for predictive capacity allocation |
US8887195B2 (en) * | 2007-06-04 | 2014-11-11 | Visible World, Inc. | Systems and methods for dynamic bit/bandwidth allocation |
US10440412B2 (en) | 2007-06-04 | 2019-10-08 | Visible World, Llc | Systems and methods for dynamic bit/bandwidth allocation |
WO2008150540A1 (en) * | 2007-06-04 | 2008-12-11 | Visible World, Inc. | Systems and methods for dynamic bit/bandwidth allocation |
US20080307453A1 (en) * | 2007-06-04 | 2008-12-11 | Visible World, Inc. | Systems and methods for dynamic bit/bandwidth allocation |
JP2010530665A (en) * | 2007-06-04 | 2010-09-09 | ヴィジブル ワールド インコーポレイテッド | System and method for dynamic bit / bandwidth allocation |
US8224897B2 (en) * | 2007-06-13 | 2012-07-17 | Microsoft Corporation | Automatically sharing a user's personal message |
US20080313256A1 (en) * | 2007-06-13 | 2008-12-18 | Microsoft Corporation | Automatically Sharing a User's Personal Message |
US20090024546A1 (en) * | 2007-06-23 | 2009-01-22 | Motivepath, Inc. | System, method and apparatus for predictive modeling of spatially distributed data for location based commercial services |
US20090018915A1 (en) * | 2007-07-09 | 2009-01-15 | Jon Fisse | Systems and Methods Related to Delivering Targeted Advertising to Consumers |
WO2009009578A2 (en) * | 2007-07-09 | 2009-01-15 | Jon Fisse | Improved systems and methods related to delivering targeted advertising to consumers |
WO2009009578A3 (en) * | 2007-07-09 | 2009-04-09 | Jon Fisse | Improved systems and methods related to delivering targeted advertising to consumers |
US8924253B2 (en) | 2007-07-09 | 2014-12-30 | Jon Fisse | Systems and methods related to delivering targeted advertising to consumers |
US20090030778A1 (en) * | 2007-07-23 | 2009-01-29 | Motivepath, Inc. | System, method and apparatus for secure multiparty location based services |
WO2009014735A2 (en) * | 2007-07-23 | 2009-01-29 | Motivepath, Inc. | System, method and apparatus for secure multiparty located based services |
WO2009014735A3 (en) * | 2007-07-23 | 2009-04-09 | Motivepath Inc | System, method and apparatus for secure multiparty located based services |
US20090031339A1 (en) * | 2007-07-27 | 2009-01-29 | John Pickens | Architecture for Scaling Just-in-Time Placement of Advertising Content |
US8069464B2 (en) * | 2007-07-27 | 2011-11-29 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Architecture for scaling just-in-time placement of advertising content |
WO2009040673A2 (en) * | 2007-08-20 | 2009-04-02 | Ads-Vantage, Ltd. | System and method for providing real time targeted rating to enable content placement for video audiences |
US20090055860A1 (en) * | 2007-08-20 | 2009-02-26 | Ads-Vantage, Ltd. | System and method for providing targeted rating of profiles in video audiences |
WO2009040673A3 (en) * | 2007-08-20 | 2009-12-30 | Ads-Vantage, Ltd. | System and method for providing real time targeted rating to enable content placement for video audiences |
US20090055268A1 (en) * | 2007-08-20 | 2009-02-26 | Ads-Vantage, Ltd. | System and method for auctioning targeted advertisement placement for video audiences |
US20090055861A1 (en) * | 2007-08-20 | 2009-02-26 | Ads-Vantage, Ltd. | System and method for associating content to at least one viewer profile in video audiences |
US20090055862A1 (en) * | 2007-08-20 | 2009-02-26 | Ads-Vantage, Ltd. | System and method for providing real time targeted rating to enable content placement for video audiences |
US8930989B2 (en) | 2007-08-20 | 2015-01-06 | AdsVantage | System and method for providing supervised learning to associate profiles in video audiences |
US20090055859A1 (en) * | 2007-08-20 | 2009-02-26 | Ads-Vantage | System and method for providing unsupervised learning to associate profiles in video audiences |
US20090055858A1 (en) * | 2007-08-20 | 2009-02-26 | Ads-Vantage | System and method for providing supervised learning to associate profiles in video audiences |
US20090094113A1 (en) * | 2007-09-07 | 2009-04-09 | Digitalsmiths Corporation | Systems and Methods For Using Video Metadata to Associate Advertisements Therewith |
US10223713B2 (en) | 2007-09-26 | 2019-03-05 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for user-based targeted content delivery |
US20090187939A1 (en) * | 2007-09-26 | 2009-07-23 | Lajoie Michael L | Methods and apparatus for user-based targeted content delivery |
US10085047B2 (en) | 2007-09-26 | 2018-09-25 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for content caching in a video network |
US10810628B2 (en) | 2007-09-26 | 2020-10-20 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for user-based targeted content delivery |
US9071859B2 (en) | 2007-09-26 | 2015-06-30 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for user-based targeted content delivery |
US9584839B2 (en) | 2007-10-15 | 2017-02-28 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for revenue-optimized delivery of content in a network |
US11223860B2 (en) | 2007-10-15 | 2022-01-11 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for revenue-optimized delivery of content in a network |
US20090132368A1 (en) * | 2007-10-19 | 2009-05-21 | Paul Cotter | Systems and Methods for Providing Personalized Advertisement |
US11831964B2 (en) | 2007-12-31 | 2023-11-28 | Intent IQ, LLC | Avoiding directing online advertisements based on user interaction with television advertisements |
US20090172728A1 (en) * | 2007-12-31 | 2009-07-02 | Almondnet, Inc. | Targeted online advertisements based on viewing or interacting with television advertisements |
US8566164B2 (en) | 2007-12-31 | 2013-10-22 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted online advertisements based on viewing or interacting with television advertisements |
US10321198B2 (en) | 2007-12-31 | 2019-06-11 | Intent IQ, LLC | Systems and methods for dealing with online activity based on delivery of a television advertisement |
US8595069B2 (en) | 2007-12-31 | 2013-11-26 | Intent IQ, LLC | Systems and methods for dealing with online activity based on delivery of a television advertisement |
US11095952B2 (en) | 2007-12-31 | 2021-08-17 | Intent IQ, LLC | Linking recorded online activity from an online device associated with a set-top box with a television advertisement delivered via the set-top box |
US20110099576A1 (en) * | 2007-12-31 | 2011-04-28 | Roy Shkedi | Systems and methods for dealing with online activity based on delivery of a television advertisement |
US12063421B1 (en) | 2007-12-31 | 2024-08-13 | Intent IQ, LLC | Directing online advertisements based on software observation of presentation of television advertisements |
US10057609B2 (en) | 2008-01-30 | 2018-08-21 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for predictive delivery of content over a network |
US11039185B2 (en) | 2008-01-30 | 2021-06-15 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for predictive delivery of content over a network |
US8341660B2 (en) | 2008-01-30 | 2012-12-25 | Microsoft Corporation | Program promotion feedback |
US8544035B2 (en) | 2008-01-30 | 2013-09-24 | Microsoft Corporation | Program promotion feedback |
US20090193460A1 (en) * | 2008-01-30 | 2009-07-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Program promotion feedback |
US9060208B2 (en) | 2008-01-30 | 2015-06-16 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for predictive delivery of content over a network |
US20090193485A1 (en) * | 2008-01-30 | 2009-07-30 | Remi Rieger | Methods and apparatus for predictive delivery of content over a network |
US9503691B2 (en) | 2008-02-19 | 2016-11-22 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for enhanced advertising and promotional delivery in a network |
US9549212B2 (en) | 2008-02-25 | 2017-01-17 | Qurio Holdings, Inc. | Dynamic load based ad insertion |
US8060904B1 (en) | 2008-02-25 | 2011-11-15 | Qurio Holdings, Inc. | Dynamic load based ad insertion |
US8739204B1 (en) | 2008-02-25 | 2014-05-27 | Qurio Holdings, Inc. | Dynamic load based ad insertion |
US9961383B2 (en) | 2008-02-26 | 2018-05-01 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for business-based network resource allocation |
US20090248507A1 (en) * | 2008-03-31 | 2009-10-01 | Go Surfboard Technologies, Inc. | Computer system and method for presenting advertisement based upon time and/or location |
US8060398B2 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2011-11-15 | Tra, Inc. | Using consumer purchase behavior for television targeting |
US20090259518A1 (en) * | 2008-04-14 | 2009-10-15 | Tra, Inc. | Analyzing return on investment of advertising campaigns using cross-correlation of multiple data sources |
US8000993B2 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2011-08-16 | Tra, Inc. | Using consumer purchase behavior for television targeting |
US20100161492A1 (en) * | 2008-04-14 | 2010-06-24 | Tra, Inc. | Analyzing return on investment of advertising campaigns using cross-correlation of multiple data sources |
US7729940B2 (en) * | 2008-04-14 | 2010-06-01 | Tra, Inc. | Analyzing return on investment of advertising campaigns by matching multiple data sources |
US8607267B2 (en) | 2008-06-02 | 2013-12-10 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted television advertisements selected on the basis of an online user profile and presented with television programs or channels related to that profile |
US10645438B2 (en) | 2008-06-02 | 2020-05-05 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted television advertisements associated with online users' preferred television programs or channels |
US9083853B2 (en) | 2008-06-02 | 2015-07-14 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted television advertisements associated with online users' preferred television programs or channels |
US9226019B2 (en) | 2008-06-02 | 2015-12-29 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted television advertisements selected on the basis of an online user profile and presented with television programs or channels related to that profile |
US10306282B2 (en) | 2008-06-02 | 2019-05-28 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted video advertisements selected on the basis of an online user profile and presented with video programs related to that profile |
US9756372B2 (en) | 2008-06-02 | 2017-09-05 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted advertisements selected on the basis of an online user profile and presented with media presentations related to that profile |
US20090299843A1 (en) * | 2008-06-02 | 2009-12-03 | Roy Shkedi | Targeted television advertisements selected on the basis of an online user profile and presented with television programs or channels related to that profile |
US9800917B2 (en) | 2008-06-02 | 2017-10-24 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted television advertisements associated with online users' preferred television programs or channels |
US8051444B2 (en) | 2008-06-02 | 2011-11-01 | Intent IQ, LLC | Targeted television advertisements selected on the basis of an online user profile and presented with television programs or channels related to that profile |
US20090300675A1 (en) * | 2008-06-02 | 2009-12-03 | Roy Shkedi | Targeted television advertisements associated with online users' preferred television programs or channels |
US9565459B2 (en) | 2008-08-12 | 2017-02-07 | Tivo Inc. | Real-time DVR polling system |
US8634703B1 (en) | 2008-08-12 | 2014-01-21 | Tivo Inc. | Real-time DVR usage and reporting system |
US9271040B2 (en) | 2008-08-12 | 2016-02-23 | Tivo Inc. | Real-time DVR polling system |
US8108901B2 (en) * | 2008-08-29 | 2012-01-31 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Managing access to high definition content |
US20100058400A1 (en) * | 2008-08-29 | 2010-03-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Managing Access to High Definition Content |
US20100083305A1 (en) * | 2008-09-30 | 2010-04-01 | Swarup Acharya | Interface Device Having Multiple Software Clients to Facilitate Display of Targeted Information |
US9883233B1 (en) | 2008-10-23 | 2018-01-30 | Tivo Solutions Inc. | Real-time audience measurement system |
US9549219B1 (en) | 2008-11-13 | 2017-01-17 | Tivo Inc. | Shared DVR programming via a web page |
US8818179B1 (en) | 2008-11-13 | 2014-08-26 | Tivo Inc. | Shared DVR programming via a web page |
US9591381B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2017-03-07 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Automated discovery and launch of an application on a network enabled device |
US9386356B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2016-07-05 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Targeting with television audience data across multiple screens |
US10425675B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2019-09-24 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Discovery, access control, and communication with networked services |
US9866925B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2018-01-09 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Relevancy improvement through targeting of information based on data gathered from a networked device associated with a security sandbox of a client device |
US9706265B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2017-07-11 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Automatic communications between networked devices such as televisions and mobile devices |
US9848250B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2017-12-19 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Relevancy improvement through targeting of information based on data gathered from a networked device associated with a security sandbox of a client device |
US10880340B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2020-12-29 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Relevancy improvement through targeting of information based on data gathered from a networked device associated with a security sandbox of a client device |
US9686596B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2017-06-20 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Advertisement targeting through embedded scripts in supply-side and demand-side platforms |
US9838758B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2017-12-05 | David Harrison | Relevancy improvement through targeting of information based on data gathered from a networked device associated with a security sandbox of a client device |
US10142377B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2018-11-27 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Relevancy improvement through targeting of information based on data gathered from a networked device associated with a security sandbox of a client device |
US9961388B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2018-05-01 | David Harrison | Exposure of public internet protocol addresses in an advertising exchange server to improve relevancy of advertisements |
US9854330B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2017-12-26 | David Harrison | Relevancy improvement through targeting of information based on data gathered from a networked device associated with a security sandbox of a client device |
US9967295B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2018-05-08 | David Harrison | Automated discovery and launch of an application on a network enabled device |
US10977693B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2021-04-13 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Association of content identifier of audio-visual data with additional data through capture infrastructure |
US9986279B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2018-05-29 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Discovery, access control, and communication with networked services |
US9703947B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2017-07-11 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Relevancy improvement through targeting of information based on data gathered from a networked device associated with a security sandbox of a client device |
US9589456B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2017-03-07 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Exposure of public internet protocol addresses in an advertising exchange server to improve relevancy of advertisements |
US9576473B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2017-02-21 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Annotation of metadata through capture infrastructure |
US10986141B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2021-04-20 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Relevancy improvement through targeting of information based on data gathered from a networked device associated with a security sandbox of a client device |
US10419541B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2019-09-17 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Remotely control devices over a network without authentication or registration |
US10631068B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2020-04-21 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Content exposure attribution based on renderings of related content across multiple devices |
US10032191B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2018-07-24 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Advertisement targeting through embedded scripts in supply-side and demand-side platforms |
US9716736B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2017-07-25 | Free Stream Media Corp. | System and method of discovery and launch associated with a networked media device |
US10791152B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2020-09-29 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Automatic communications between networked devices such as televisions and mobile devices |
US10567823B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2020-02-18 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Relevant advertisement generation based on a user operating a client device communicatively coupled with a networked media device |
US9560425B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2017-01-31 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Remotely control devices over a network without authentication or registration |
US10334324B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2019-06-25 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Relevant advertisement generation based on a user operating a client device communicatively coupled with a networked media device |
US10771525B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2020-09-08 | Free Stream Media Corp. | System and method of discovery and launch associated with a networked media device |
US9519772B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2016-12-13 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Relevancy improvement through targeting of information based on data gathered from a networked device associated with a security sandbox of a client device |
US10074108B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2018-09-11 | Free Stream Media Corp. | Annotation of metadata through capture infrastructure |
US9113195B1 (en) | 2008-12-31 | 2015-08-18 | Tivo Inc. | Real-time DVR programming |
US9961400B2 (en) | 2008-12-31 | 2018-05-01 | Tivo Solutions, Inc. | Real-time DVR programming |
US8312487B1 (en) * | 2008-12-31 | 2012-11-13 | Qurio Holdings, Inc. | Method and system for arranging an advertising schedule |
US8204965B2 (en) | 2009-01-15 | 2012-06-19 | Almondnet, Inc. | Requesting offline profile data for online use in a privacy-sensitive manner |
US7890609B2 (en) | 2009-01-15 | 2011-02-15 | Almondnet, Inc. | Requesting offline profile data for online use in a privacy-sensitive manner |
US20100180013A1 (en) * | 2009-01-15 | 2010-07-15 | Roy Shkedi | Requesting offline profile data for online use in a privacy-sensitive manner |
US20110131294A1 (en) * | 2009-01-15 | 2011-06-02 | Almondnet, Inc. | Requesting offline profile data for online use in a privacy-sensitive manner |
US8341247B2 (en) | 2009-01-15 | 2012-12-25 | Almondnet, Inc. | Requesting offline profile data for online use in a privacy-sensitive manner |
US8627356B2 (en) | 2009-03-13 | 2014-01-07 | Simulmedia, Inc. | Method and apparatus for television program promotion |
US20100269134A1 (en) * | 2009-03-13 | 2010-10-21 | Jeffrey Storan | Method and apparatus for television program promotion |
US10965727B2 (en) | 2009-06-08 | 2021-03-30 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for premises content distribution |
US11122316B2 (en) | 2009-07-15 | 2021-09-14 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for targeted secondary content insertion |
US10051304B2 (en) | 2009-07-15 | 2018-08-14 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for targeted secondary content insertion |
US9178634B2 (en) | 2009-07-15 | 2015-11-03 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for evaluating an audience in a content-based network |
US20110119278A1 (en) * | 2009-08-28 | 2011-05-19 | Resonate Networks, Inc. | Method and apparatus for delivering targeted content to website visitors to promote products and brands |
US9166714B2 (en) | 2009-09-11 | 2015-10-20 | Veveo, Inc. | Method of and system for presenting enriched video viewing analytics |
US10863238B2 (en) | 2010-04-23 | 2020-12-08 | Time Warner Cable Enterprise LLC | Zone control methods and apparatus |
US20120089429A1 (en) * | 2010-05-13 | 2012-04-12 | Accenture Global Services Limited. | Systems and methods for gathering and analyzing social media data |
US20110296453A1 (en) * | 2010-05-31 | 2011-12-01 | Thirunarayanan Srinivasan | Pay-Per-Website Visit ad system |
US9560423B1 (en) * | 2010-06-07 | 2017-01-31 | Purplecomm Inc. | Method for monitoring and controlling viewing preferences of a user |
US9131282B2 (en) | 2010-10-15 | 2015-09-08 | Intent IQ, LLC | Systems and methods for selecting television advertisements for a set-top box requesting an advertisement without knowing what program or channel is being watched |
US8997138B2 (en) | 2010-10-15 | 2015-03-31 | Intent IQ, LLC | Correlating online behavior with presumed viewing of television advertisements |
US11218755B2 (en) | 2010-12-29 | 2022-01-04 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Measuring video viewing |
USRE50079E1 (en) * | 2010-12-29 | 2024-08-13 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | System and method for analyzing human interaction with electronic devices that access a computer system through a network |
US11671638B2 (en) | 2010-12-29 | 2023-06-06 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Measuring video viewing |
US10945011B2 (en) | 2010-12-29 | 2021-03-09 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Measuring video viewing |
US12075103B2 (en) | 2010-12-29 | 2024-08-27 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Measuring video viewing |
US11537971B2 (en) | 2010-12-29 | 2022-12-27 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Measuring video-asset viewing |
US9736524B2 (en) | 2011-01-06 | 2017-08-15 | Veveo, Inc. | Methods of and systems for content search based on environment sampling |
US8904445B2 (en) | 2011-01-24 | 2014-12-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods and apparatus to manage bandwidth allocations in media delivery networks |
US8949890B2 (en) * | 2011-05-03 | 2015-02-03 | Collective, Inc. | System and method for targeting advertisements |
US20120284746A1 (en) * | 2011-05-03 | 2012-11-08 | Collective Media, Inc. | System and Method for Targeting Advertisements |
EP2710752A1 (en) * | 2011-05-17 | 2014-03-26 | Webtuner Corporation | System and method for scalable, high accuracy, sensor and id based audience measurement system |
US9635405B2 (en) | 2011-05-17 | 2017-04-25 | Webtuner Corp. | System and method for scalable, high accuracy, sensor and ID based audience measurement system based on distributed computing architecture |
EP2710752A4 (en) * | 2011-05-17 | 2014-10-22 | Webtuner Corp | System and method for scalable, high accuracy, sensor and id based audience measurement system |
WO2012158904A1 (en) * | 2011-05-17 | 2012-11-22 | Webtuner Corporation | System and method for scalable, high accuracy, sensor and id based audience measurement system |
US9256884B2 (en) | 2011-05-24 | 2016-02-09 | Webtuner Corp | System and method to increase efficiency and speed of analytics report generation in audience measurement systems |
US9021543B2 (en) | 2011-05-26 | 2015-04-28 | Webtuner Corporation | Highly scalable audience measurement system with client event pre-processing |
US11270341B2 (en) | 2011-09-14 | 2022-03-08 | Zeta Global Corp. | System and method for targeting advertisements |
WO2013039594A1 (en) * | 2011-09-14 | 2013-03-21 | Collective, Inc. | System and method for targeting advertisements |
US11887158B2 (en) | 2011-09-14 | 2024-01-30 | Zeta Global Corp. | System and method for targeting advertisements |
US20150007211A1 (en) * | 2011-09-27 | 2015-01-01 | Thomson Licensing | User interfaces for content distribution systems |
US9374625B2 (en) * | 2011-09-27 | 2016-06-21 | Thomson Licensing | User interfaces for content distribution systems |
US9355366B1 (en) | 2011-12-19 | 2016-05-31 | Hello-Hello, Inc. | Automated systems for improving communication at the human-machine interface |
US11627356B2 (en) | 2012-01-28 | 2023-04-11 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Data translation for video-viewing activity |
US8978079B2 (en) | 2012-03-23 | 2015-03-10 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for managing delivery of content in a network with limited bandwidth using pre-caching |
US10667019B2 (en) | 2012-03-23 | 2020-05-26 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for managing delivery of content in a network with limited bandwidth using pre-caching |
US10171885B2 (en) | 2012-03-23 | 2019-01-01 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for managing delivery of content in a network with limited bandwidth using pre-caching |
US8533755B1 (en) * | 2012-04-09 | 2013-09-10 | This Technology, Inc. | Method for advertising decision resolution acceleration based on lookahead opportunity triggering |
US9621939B2 (en) | 2012-04-12 | 2017-04-11 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for enabling media options in a content delivery network |
US10051305B2 (en) | 2012-04-12 | 2018-08-14 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for enabling media options in a content delivery network |
US9071886B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2015-06-30 | Almondnet, Inc. | Targeted television advertising based on a profile linked to an online device associated with a content-selecting device |
US9351053B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2016-05-24 | Almondnet, Inc. | Targeted television advertising based on a profile linked to an online device associated with a content-selecting device |
US10721504B2 (en) | 2012-07-10 | 2020-07-21 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for selective enforcement of digital content viewing |
US11496782B2 (en) | 2012-07-10 | 2022-11-08 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for selective enforcement of secondary content viewing |
US9854280B2 (en) | 2012-07-10 | 2017-12-26 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for selective enforcement of secondary content viewing |
US10278008B2 (en) | 2012-08-30 | 2019-04-30 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for enabling location-based services within a premises |
US10715961B2 (en) | 2012-08-30 | 2020-07-14 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for enabling location-based services within a premises |
US9363557B2 (en) | 2012-10-15 | 2016-06-07 | Simulmedia, Inc. | Methods and systems for forecasting and measurement of media viewership using a combination of data sets |
US9374624B2 (en) | 2012-11-28 | 2016-06-21 | Thomson Licensing | Method and apparatus for auto-tuning program guides |
US20140150003A1 (en) * | 2012-11-28 | 2014-05-29 | Peter Doe | Methods and apparatus to calculate a probability of index consistency |
US9883223B2 (en) | 2012-12-14 | 2018-01-30 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for multimedia coordination |
US9131283B2 (en) | 2012-12-14 | 2015-09-08 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for multimedia coordination |
US9141632B1 (en) * | 2012-12-19 | 2015-09-22 | Teradata Us, Inc. | Selecting a compression technique |
US11968421B2 (en) | 2013-01-13 | 2024-04-23 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Measuring video-program-viewing activity |
US11363331B2 (en) | 2013-01-13 | 2022-06-14 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Measuring video-program-viewing activity |
US8713600B2 (en) | 2013-01-30 | 2014-04-29 | Almondnet, Inc. | User control of replacement television advertisements inserted by a smart television |
US10009636B2 (en) | 2013-01-30 | 2018-06-26 | Almondnet, Inc. | User control of replacement television advertisements inserted by a smart television |
US9571865B2 (en) | 2013-01-30 | 2017-02-14 | Almondnet, Inc. | User control of replacement television advertisements inserted by a smart television |
US11778249B2 (en) | 2013-01-30 | 2023-10-03 | Almondnet, Inc. | Rewinding replacement television advertisements inserted by a smart television |
US11503348B2 (en) | 2013-01-30 | 2022-11-15 | Almondnet, Inc. | Smart TV detection of STB user-control actions related to STB- originated content presentation speed |
US10834438B2 (en) | 2013-01-30 | 2020-11-10 | Almondnet, Inc. | User control of replacement television advertisements inserted by a smart television |
US12063395B2 (en) | 2013-01-30 | 2024-08-13 | Almondnet, Inc. | Smart TV detection of STB user-control screen-area actions related to STB-originated content presentation |
US11076203B2 (en) | 2013-03-12 | 2021-07-27 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for providing and uploading content to personalized network storage |
US11917243B1 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2024-02-27 | CSC Holdings, LLC | Optimizing inventory based on predicted viewership |
US10708654B1 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2020-07-07 | CSC Holdings, LLC | Optimizing inventory based on predicted viewership |
US9830949B2 (en) | 2013-05-15 | 2017-11-28 | Cj 4Dplex Co., Ltd. | Method and system for providing 4D content production service and content production apparatus therefor |
RU2641236C2 (en) * | 2013-05-15 | 2018-01-16 | СиДжей 4ДиПЛЕКС КО., ЛТД. | Method and system for providing service of 4d content production and device for production of content for it |
US11212565B2 (en) | 2013-08-29 | 2021-12-28 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Measuring video-content viewing |
US11677998B2 (en) | 2013-08-29 | 2023-06-13 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Measuring video-content viewing |
US11012726B2 (en) | 2013-08-29 | 2021-05-18 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Measuring video-content viewing |
US9060195B2 (en) | 2013-10-01 | 2015-06-16 | Mastercard International Incorporated | Television advertising message targeting according to subscriber purchasing behavior |
US9215510B2 (en) | 2013-12-06 | 2015-12-15 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for automatically tagging a media asset based on verbal input and playback adjustments |
US20150227950A1 (en) * | 2014-02-13 | 2015-08-13 | Rentrak Corporation | Systems and methods for ascertaining network market subscription coverage |
US9973794B2 (en) | 2014-04-22 | 2018-05-15 | clypd, inc. | Demand target detection |
US11082743B2 (en) | 2014-09-29 | 2021-08-03 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for enabling presence-based and use-based services |
US10028025B2 (en) | 2014-09-29 | 2018-07-17 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for enabling presence-based and use-based services |
US11669595B2 (en) | 2016-04-21 | 2023-06-06 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for secondary content management and fraud prevention |
US10586023B2 (en) | 2016-04-21 | 2020-03-10 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Methods and apparatus for secondary content management and fraud prevention |
US10687115B2 (en) | 2016-06-01 | 2020-06-16 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Cloud-based digital content recorder apparatus and methods |
US10003837B2 (en) * | 2016-08-24 | 2018-06-19 | Dish Network L.L.C. | Television programming distribution network with integrated data gathering, modeling, forecasting, delivery, and measurement |
US11212593B2 (en) | 2016-09-27 | 2021-12-28 | Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc | Apparatus and methods for automated secondary content management in a digital network |
US10911794B2 (en) | 2016-11-09 | 2021-02-02 | Charter Communications Operating, Llc | Apparatus and methods for selective secondary content insertion in a digital network |
US11973992B2 (en) | 2016-11-09 | 2024-04-30 | Charter Communications Operating, Llc | Apparatus and methods for selective secondary content insertion in a digital network |
US10257572B2 (en) * | 2017-01-03 | 2019-04-09 | Bliss Point Media, Inc. | Optimization of broadcast event effectiveness |
US11368752B2 (en) * | 2017-01-03 | 2022-06-21 | Bliss Point Media, Inc. | Optimization of broadcast event effectiveness |
US10939166B2 (en) | 2017-01-03 | 2021-03-02 | Bliss Point Media, Inc. | Optimization of broadcast event effectiveness |
US11695990B2 (en) | 2017-01-03 | 2023-07-04 | Bliss Point Media, Inc. | Optimization of broadcast event effectiveness |
US10491951B2 (en) | 2017-01-03 | 2019-11-26 | Bliss Point Media, Inc. | Optimization of broadcast event effectiveness |
KR20190045932A (en) * | 2017-02-13 | 2019-05-03 | 구글 엘엘씨 | Predicting the break duration of a content stream |
WO2018148749A1 (en) * | 2017-02-13 | 2018-08-16 | Google Llc | Predicting break durations in content streams |
US11102533B2 (en) | 2017-02-13 | 2021-08-24 | Google Llc | Predicting break durations in content streams |
CN109891898A (en) * | 2017-02-13 | 2019-06-14 | 谷歌有限责任公司 | Duration of interruption in predictive content stream |
KR102152995B1 (en) * | 2017-02-13 | 2020-09-07 | 구글 엘엘씨 | Predicting the break duration of the content stream |
US11553217B2 (en) | 2018-02-27 | 2023-01-10 | Charter Communications Operating, Llc | Apparatus and methods for content storage, distribution and security within a content distribution network |
US10939142B2 (en) | 2018-02-27 | 2021-03-02 | Charter Communications Operating, Llc | Apparatus and methods for content storage, distribution and security within a content distribution network |
US12081808B2 (en) | 2018-02-27 | 2024-09-03 | Charter Communications Operating, Llc | Apparatus and methods for content storage, distribution and security within a content distribution network |
US11265602B2 (en) * | 2018-04-12 | 2022-03-01 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for evaluating a promotional campaign |
WO2020149802A1 (en) * | 2019-01-15 | 2020-07-23 | Tasdan Kamuran | System and method for embedding the regional broadcasts of the different locations into the general broadcast stream |
US10785681B1 (en) * | 2019-05-31 | 2020-09-22 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Methods and apparatuses for feature-driven machine-to-machine communications |
US20220188941A1 (en) * | 2020-12-16 | 2022-06-16 | Symphony MediaAI | Assessment and performance system for content distribution across multiple channels |
WO2022133156A1 (en) * | 2020-12-16 | 2022-06-23 | Kindsvatter Ashley | Assessment and performance system for content distribution across multiple channels |
US12112389B2 (en) * | 2020-12-16 | 2024-10-08 | Cable Audit Associates, Llc | Assessment and performance system for content distribution across multiple channels |
Also Published As
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US7844985B2 (en) | Targeted advertisement using television viewer information | |
US20020104083A1 (en) | Internally targeted advertisements using television delivery systems | |
EP0862328B1 (en) | An operations center to be used in television program delivery | |
US7207055B1 (en) | Bandwidth allocation for a television program delivery system | |
US7930715B2 (en) | Operations center for a television program packaging and delivery system | |
US7590993B1 (en) | Method and apparatus for gathering programs watched data |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
FEPP | Fee payment procedure |
Free format text: PAYOR NUMBER ASSIGNED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: ASPN); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: SEDNA PATENT SERVICES, LLC, PENNSYLVANIA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:DISCOVERY COMMUNICATIONS, INC.;REEL/FRAME:015239/0350 Effective date: 20040914 Owner name: SEDNA PATENT SERVICES, LLC,PENNSYLVANIA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:DISCOVERY COMMUNICATIONS, INC.;REEL/FRAME:015239/0350 Effective date: 20040914 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: COMCAST IP HOLDINGS I, LLC, DELAWARE Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:SEDNA PATENT SERVICES, LLC (F/K/A TVGATEWAY, LLC);REEL/FRAME:021570/0353 Effective date: 20080913 Owner name: COMCAST IP HOLDINGS I, LLC,DELAWARE Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:SEDNA PATENT SERVICES, LLC (F/K/A TVGATEWAY, LLC);REEL/FRAME:021570/0353 Effective date: 20080913 |
|
STCF | Information on status: patent grant |
Free format text: PATENTED CASE |
|
FEPP | Fee payment procedure |
Free format text: PAYOR NUMBER ASSIGNED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: ASPN); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY Free format text: PAYER NUMBER DE-ASSIGNED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: RMPN); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY |
|
CC | Certificate of correction | ||
FPAY | Fee payment |
Year of fee payment: 4 |
|
MAFP | Maintenance fee payment |
Free format text: PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 8TH YEAR, LARGE ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M1552) Year of fee payment: 8 |
|
FEPP | Fee payment procedure |
Free format text: MAINTENANCE FEE REMINDER MAILED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: REM.); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY |
|
LAPS | Lapse for failure to pay maintenance fees |
Free format text: PATENT EXPIRED FOR FAILURE TO PAY MAINTENANCE FEES (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: EXP.); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY |
|
STCH | Information on status: patent discontinuation |
Free format text: PATENT EXPIRED DUE TO NONPAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEES UNDER 37 CFR 1.362 |
|
FP | Lapsed due to failure to pay maintenance fee |
Effective date: 20221130 |